7.1: Purpose of Human Resource Management
7.1.1: The Mission of Human Resource Management
Human resource management’s mission is to coordinate people within an organization to achieve the organization’s goals.
Learning Objective
Demonstrate the mission of human resource management, in both the broader organizational perspective and the narrower individual one
Key Points
- Human resource management (HRM) views people as organizational assets and internal customers and works to create job satisfaction and employee efficiency and effectiveness.
- HRM concentrates on internal sources of competitive advantage. It regards people as an organization’s most important asset.
- The department of human resources (HR) communicates with employees and adapts the organization’s culture and structure to their needs—for example, in negotiating with unions or re-engineering processes.
- HR leads the employment life cycle, from attracting and hiring the right employees to facilitating performance reviews and eventually processing terminations.
Key Terms
- human capital
-
The stock of competencies, knowledge, and social and personality attributes, including creativity, embodied in the ability to perform labor so as to produce economic value.
- asset
-
Any component, model, process, or framework of value that can be leveraged or reused.
Human resource management (HRM) is the coordination of an organization’s people to achieve specific business objectives, fulfill staffing needs, and maintain employee satisfaction. HRM accomplishes this through the use of people, processes, and technology that focus on the internal parts of the organization rather than on the external environment. HRM draws from many diverse fields—such as psychology, business management, process management, information technology, statistical analysis, sociology, and anthropology—to achieve these objectives.
Human resources
People are assets for an organization.
People as a Resource
HRM concentrates on internal sources of competitive advantage. It regards people as the most important single asset of the organization. HRM is proactive in its relationship with people and seeks to enhance organizational performance in its relationship with them. HR professionals emphasize the quantitative, calculative, and strategic aspects of managing the human resource in a systematic way. It also manages communication, motivation, and leadership between people in the organization.
General HRM Functions
- Aligning human resources and business goals
- Re-engineering organization processes
- Listening and responding to employees to maintain high job-satisfaction levels
- Managing transformation and change
- Staffing (i.e., hiring and firing) and training
- Understanding and integrating labor laws and ethics
Organizational Level
At the macro level, HR is in charge of overseeing organizational leadership and culture. It also ensures compliance with employment and labor laws, which differ by geography, and often oversees health, safety, and security.
In circumstances where employees desire, and/or are legally authorized to hold, a collective bargaining agreement, the human resources department will typically also serve as the company’s primary liaison with the employees’ representatives (usually a labor union).
HR professionals engage in lobbying efforts, usually through industry representatives, with governmental agencies such as the United States Department of Labor and the National Labor Relations Board to further their priorities.
Employee Level
On an individual level, HR’s mission is to manage the employee experience during the employment life cycle. It is first charged with attracting the right employees. It then must select the best employees through the recruitment process. HR then onboards new hires and oversees their training and development during their tenure with the organization.
HR assesses talent through the use of performance appraisals and then rewards them accordingly. HR may sometimes administer payroll and employee benefits, although such activities are now often outsourced, with HR playing a more strategic role.
Finally, HR is involved in employee terminations—including resignations, performance-related dismissals, and layoffs.
7.1.2: Human Resource Planning
Human resource planning identifies the competencies an organization needs to fulfill its goals and acquires the appropriate people.
Learning Objective
Express the way in which planning, evaluation and improvement can create competency relative to developing human resources
Key Points
- The human resource planning process identifies organizational goals and matches them with the competencies employees need to achieve those goals.
- Human resource planning serves as a link between human resource management and the overall strategic plan of an organization.
- A plan is made to either develop necessary competencies from within the organization or hire new people who already have them.
- The plans and strategies for fulfilling human resource needs are continually evaluated and improved, and the acquired resources are continuously developed.
Key Term
- competency
-
The ability to perform some task.
Human resource planning is the process of systematically forecasting both the future demand for and supply of employees and the deployment of their skills with respect to the strategic objectives of the organization. Human resource planning is a process that identifies current and future human resource needs for an organization, based on the goals and objectives set by upper management. It responds to the importance of business strategy and planning in order to ensure the availability and supply of people—in both number and quality. Human resource planning serves as a link between human resource management and the overall strategic plan of an organization.
Planning
Organizations gain an advantage by planning the implementation of their people.
Planning Process
The planning processes is loosely about determining what will be accomplished within a given time frame, along with the numbers and types of human resources that will be needed to achieve the defined business goals. This is typically accomplished by defining competencies that are required by workers to achieve business goals, matching people with these competencies to the right tasks, and assessing the overall process for progress and improvement.
In this way, human resources professionals need to understand each and every task within the organization, as well as the skills and competencies required of the individuals who carry out those tasks. When appropriate, human resource managers may note experience and/or competency gaps or the need to create new roles or hire new individuals to ensure proper functioning.
Planning to Develop Competencies
Competency-based management supports the integration of human resource planning with business planning by allowing organizations to assess the current human resource capacity based on employees’ current skills and abilities. These skills and abilities are measured against those needed to achieve the vision, mission, and business goals of the organization. If the available people lack necessary competencies, the organization plans how it will develop them.
Targeted human resource strategies, plans, and programs work to address these gaps in the organization’s workforce through:
- Targeted hiring/staffing
- Employee learning and education
- Career development
- Succession management
Evaluation and Improvement
These strategies and programs are monitored and evaluated on a regular basis to ensure that they are moving the organization in the desired direction, including closing employee-competency gaps. Corrections are then made as needed to the broader human resource planning process. It is a constantly evolving planning process for human resource professionals.
7.2: Legal Structure
7.2.1: Legislation Protecting against Discrimination
Discrimination—treating specific groups of people unequally—is unethical behavior and is prohibited by several pieces of U.S. legislation.
Learning Objective
Outline the legislative framework in the United States that actively protects employees against discrimination in the workplace
Key Points
- The Civil Rights Act of 1964, in Titles VII and VIII, protects people from discrimination in regard to employment and housing, respectively.
- The Violence Against Women Act strengthened both the ability to prosecute crimes committed against women and the degree of punishment for those crimes.
- The Equal Pay Act attempts to abolish the practice of paying employees of one sex less than employees of the opposite sex.
Key Term
- discrimination
-
Distinct treatment of an individual or group to their disadvantage; treatment or consideration based on class or category rather than individual merit; partiality; prejudice; bigotry.
Discrimination is the prejudicial treatment of an individual based on his or her membership—or perceived membership—in a certain group or category. It can involve someone acting or behaving in a certain way toward a certain group of people, or it can involve a person or institution restricting members of one group from opportunities or privileges that are available to another group. Several pieces of legislation protect groups and individuals from discrimination in the United States.
Human resource professionals are actively tasked with ensuring adherence to these laws and with upholding ethical standards in the workplace. Human resources departments collaborate substantially with legal departments in larger organizations, as the contractual and legal components of the hiring and firing process are inherently complex.
Protesting discrimination
Various laws protect people from discrimination.
The Civil Rights Act
The Civil Rights Act of 1964 is a piece of legislation in the United States that outlawed major forms of discrimination against women, as well as racial, ethnic, national, and religious minorities. It ended unequal application of voter-registration requirements and racial segregation in schools, at the workplace, and in facilities that served the general public.
Title VII
Title VII of the Civil Rights Act of 1964 prohibits discrimination by covered employers on the basis of race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. Title VII applies to and covers an employer “who has fifteen or more employees for each working day in each of twenty or more calendar weeks in the current or preceding calendar year.” Title VII does not apply to employers with fewer than 14 employees. Title VII also prohibits discrimination against an individual because of his or her association with another individual of a particular race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. An employer cannot discriminate against a person because of his interracial association with another, such as by an interracial marriage.
The Violence Against Women Act
The Violence Against Women Act of 1994 (VAWA) is a United States federal law that initially provided 1.6 billion dollars toward investigation and prosecution of violent crimes against women, imposed automatic and mandatory restitution on those convicted, and allowed civil redress in cases prosecutors chose to leave unprosecuted. VAWA also established the Office on Violence Against Women within the Department of Justice.
The Equal Pay Act
The Equal Pay Act of 1963 is a United States federal law amending the Fair Labor Standards Act; it is aimed at abolishing wage disparity based on sex. The law provides that no employer may discriminate between employees on the basis of sex by paying wages to employees of one sex lower than employees of the opposite sex for equal work, the performance of which requires equal skill, effort, and responsibility, and which is performed under similar working conditions. Exceptions are made where payment is aligned to:
- A seniority system
- A merit system
- A system that measures earnings by quantity or quality of production
- A differential based on any other factor other than sex
7.2.2: Labor Laws
Labor laws encompass various types of government mandates that define the relationship between an employee and employer.
Learning Objective
Apply the complex legal requirements of labor laws to the employment contract and negotiation process.
Key Points
- Labor laws are divided into those that concern unions (collective labor) and those that concern the contract between employee and employer (individual labor).
- Labor laws define minimum acceptable employment standards and the function of the employment contract.
- Labor laws arose from workers’ demands for better working conditions and the simultaneous demands of employers to restrict the powers of workers’ organizations and to keep labor costs low.
- The basic feature of labor law is that the rights and obligations between the worker and the employer are mediated through the employment contract.
Key Terms
- Fair Labor Standards Act
-
A federal statute of the United States that sets standards for wages and hours worked by employees.
- mediate
-
To resolve differences, or to bring about a settlement, between conflicting parties.
Context of Labor Laws
Labor law is the body of laws, administrative rulings, and precedents that address the legal rights and restrictions pertaining to workers and employers. It mediates many aspects of the relationship between trade unions, employers, and employees. Labor laws will differ substantially from country to country (and from state to state domestically), so human-resources professionals must be region-specific in their consideration of specific cases.
Categories of Labor Law
There are two broad categories of labor law:
- Collective labor law concerns the relationship between employee, employer, and union.
- Individual labor law concerns the relationship between employee and employer, as defined through the contract for work.
Employment Standards
Both types of labor law define employment standards. Employment standards are social norms (and in some cases also technical standards) for the minimum socially acceptable conditions under which employees or contractors will work. Government agencies enforce employment standards codified by labor law. These standards include concepts like minimum wage, health and safety regulations, equality, and other protections against abuse.
Federal minimum wage in the U.S.
Though there is a minimum hourly wage in the U.S., the value of that minimum wage has decreased over time as the wage fails to adjust with inflation. In the 1960s and 1970s the federal minimum wage was equivalent to about 9 dollars in 2013, while the 2013 federal minimum wage was 7 dollars.
Laws Shaped by Different Interests
Labor laws arose from workers’ demands for better working conditions and the right to organize (or, alternatively, the right to work without joining a labor union) and the simultaneous demands of employers to restrict the powers of workers’ organizations and to keep labor costs low. Employers’ costs can increase due to workers organizing to achieve higher wages, or as a result of laws imposing costly requirements (such as health and safety) or restrictions on their free choice of whom to hire. Workers’ organizations, such as labor unions, can also transcend purely industrial disputes and gain political power.
The state of labor law at any one time is therefore both a product and a component of struggles between different interests in society. As both parties (i.e., employees and employers) are motivated by their own best interests (in a capitalistic view), labor laws are there to define the rules of engagement.
The Employment Contract
The basic feature of labor law is that the rights and obligations between the worker and the employer are mediated through the employment contract. This has been the case since the collapse of feudalism and is the core reality of modern economic relations. Many terms and conditions of the contract are implied by legislation or common law to protect employees and facilitate a fluid labor market.
For instance, in the U.S. a majority of state laws allow for employment to be “at will,” meaning the employer can terminate an employee from a position for any reason, barring one that violates the law, such as discrimination. This provision allows fluidity in the labor market, because it allows firms to hire an employee without the concern that they may then be unable to terminate the employment if it later becomes apparent that the employee is not a good fit.
Key Pieces of Legislation
- The Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938 set the maximum standard work week to 44 hours. In 1950, this was reduced to 40 hours.
- The National Labor Relations Act, enacted in 1935 as part of the New Deal legislation, guarantees workers the right to form unions and engage in collective bargaining.
- The Age Discrimination in Employment Act of 1967 prohibits employment discrimination based on age with respect to employees 40 years of age or older.
- Title VII of the Civil Rights Act is the principal federal statute with regard to employment discrimination. It prohibits employment discrimination on the basis of race or color, religion, sex, and national origin, by public and private employers, labor organizations, training programs, and employment agencies. Title VII also prohibits retaliation against any person for opposing any practice forbidden by the law, or for making a charge, testifying, assisting, or participating in a proceeding under the law.
- The Civil Rights Act of 1991 expanded the damages available to Title VII cases and granted Title VII plaintiffs the right to jury trial.
7.2.3: Unions
Unionization is the process of workers forming a union, which is an organization to further the workers’ shared interests.
Learning Objective
Describe the function of a labor union in the larger legal perspective of human resource management
Key Points
- Workers form a union by getting 30% of employees to sign petition cards, then submitting the request to the National Labor Relations Board.
- The labor union acts as the employees’ representative in collective bargaining with the employer.
- Unions undertake other activities as well, such as political lobbying, providing benefits to members, and organizing industrial action.
- Unions may organize a particular section of skilled workers, a cross-section of workers from various trades, or all workers within a particular industry.
Key Term
- negotiate
-
To arrange or settle something by mutual agreement.
Human resource professionals deal with the employees of an organization and, therefore, the unions as well. Unions, as groups of employees interested in bargaining for specific rights and/or contractual benefits, are the responsibility of human resource professionals. Just as individual employees negotiate with human resources, so too do groups of employees.
Forming a Union
A labor union is an organization of workers who have banded together to achieve common goals. The current method for workers to form a union in a particular workplace in the United States is a sign-up followed by an election process. At least 30% of employees must sign petition cards requesting a union. The petition cards must then be submitted to the National Labor Relations Board (NLRB), which verifies them and orders a secret-ballot election to elect union representatives.
Unionization
Unions mobilize workers to achieve shared goals.
Two exceptions exist. If over 50% of the employees sign an authorization card requesting a union, the employer can voluntarily choose to waive the secret-ballot election process and just recognize the union. The other exception is a last resort—it allows the NLRB to order an employer to recognize a union if over 50% have signed cards and the employer has engaged in unfair labor practices, making a fair election unlikely.
The Function of a Union
The labor union, through its leadership, bargains with the employer on behalf of union members and negotiates labor contracts (collective bargaining) with employers. The most common purpose of unions is to defend conditions of employment that benefit their members or negotiate for better conditions. This may include negotiating the terms of the following:
- Wages
- Work rules
- Complaint procedures
- Rules governing hiring
- Firing and promotion of workers
- Benefits
- Workplace safety and policies
The agreements negotiated by the union leaders are binding on the union members and the employer, as well as, in some cases, non-member workers.
Union Activities
Aside from collective bargaining, union activities vary, but may include the following:
- Provision of benefits to members—the provision of professional training, legal advice, and representation for members is a benefit of union membership.
- Industrial action—unions may enforce strikes or resistance to lockouts to further members’ goals.
- Political activity—unions may promote legislation favorable to their members or to workers as a whole. To this end they may pursue campaigns, undertake lobbying, and financially support individual candidates or parties for public office.
Organizational Structures of Unions
Unions may organize a particular section of skilled workers, a cross-section of workers from various trades, or all workers within a particular industry. These unions are often divided into locals and united in national federations. These federations themselves sometimes affiliate with internationals, such as the International Trade Union Confederation.
7.2.4: Collective Bargaining
Collective bargaining is negotiation between unions and employers to come to an agreement on the conditions of employment.
Learning Objective
Outline the conditions and negotiation process between groups of employees (unions) and employers in the human resource frame
Key Points
- Collective bargaining is used to win terms of pay, benefits, and hours beneficial to employees.
- The negotiations result in a collective agreement, which must be approved by the employees. If it is, the agreement becomes the union contract.
- Workers’ ability to collectively bargain is established by the National Labor Relations Act of 1953.
Key Term
- arbitration
-
A process in which two or more parties use an adjudicator in order to resolve a dispute.
In collective bargaining, the process of negotiation between employees and employers, employees attempt to achieve employment conditions that serve their shared interests. Employees are commonly represented by the union to which they belong. The collective agreements reached by these negotiations attempt to establish:
- Wages
- Working hours
- Training
- Health and safety
- Overtime
- Grievance mechanisms
- Rights to participate in workplace or company affairs
Reaching agreement through negotiation
Unions negotiate on behalf of employees.
Process of Negotiation
- At a workplace where a majority of workers have voted for union representation, a committee of employees and union representatives negotiate a contract with the management regarding wages, hours, benefits, and other terms and conditions of employment, such as protection from termination of employment without just cause. Individual negotiation is prohibited.
- Once the workers’ committee and management have agreed on a contract, it is then voted on by all workers at the workplace. If approved, the contract is usually in force for a fixed term of years, and when that term is up, it is renegotiated between employees and management.
- Sometimes there are disputes over the union contract; this often occurs in cases of workers being fired without just cause in a union workplace. These disputes then go to arbitration, which is similar to an informal court hearing. A neutral arbitrator makes a ruling as to whether the termination was unjust and whether other contract breaches occurred. If so, the arbitrator will order that the breach be corrected or remedied in some way.
Collective Agreement
The union may negotiate a specific agreement with a single employer, or it may negotiate with a group of businesses to reach an industry-wide agreement. A collective agreement functions as a labor contract between an employer and one or more unions. Collective bargaining consists of the process of negotiation between representatives of a union and employers (generally represented by management) in respect to the terms and conditions of employment, such as wages, hours of work, working conditions, grievance procedures, and the rights and responsibilities of trade unions. The parties often refer to the result of the negotiation as a collective bargaining agreement (CBA) or as a collective employment agreement (CEA).
Legislation Regulating Collective Bargaining
In the United States, the National Labor Relations Act of 1953 covers most collective agreements in the private sector. This act makes it illegal for employers to discriminate, spy on, harass, or terminate the employment of workers because of their union membership. It also makes it illegal for employers to retaliate against employees who engage in organizing campaigns or form company unions or to refuse to engage in collective bargaining with the union that represents their employees. It is also illegal to require any employee to join a union as a condition of employment. Unions are also exempt from antitrust law, in the hope that members may collectively fix a higher price for their labor.
7.2.5: Employee Compensation and Benefits
Compensation and benefits is the subdiscipline of human resources that deals with employees’ remuneration.
Learning Objective
Outline the strategies employed by human resources to compensate employees with pay and benefits
Key Points
- Compensation and benefits (C&B) encompass the rewards an organization gives to employees in exchange for the work they do.
- There are four types of C&B: guaranteed pay, variable pay, benefits, and equity-based compensation.
- Many factors external to the organization affect employees’ remuneration. These include union influence, the state of the economy, and business competition.
Key Term
- remuneration
-
Something given in exchange for goods or services rendered.
Compensation and benefits (C&B) is a subdiscipline of human resources that is focused on policy making for employee compensation and benefits. As part of any employment agreement, employees are compensated for services rendered in a predetermined and equitable fashion.
Compensation and Benefit Types
Employee compensation and benefits can be divided into four general categories:
Cash reward
The ability to reward employees with cash and other incentives is a source of organizational power.
- Guaranteed pay—Monetary compensation paid by an employer to an employee based on employee/employer agreements. The most common form of guaranteed pay is the basic salary.
- Variable pay—Monetary compensation paid by an employer to an employee on a discretionary basis. It is often contingent on performance or results achieved. The most common forms are bonuses and sales incentives.
- Benefits—Programs an employer uses to supplement employees’ compensation, such as paid time off, medical insurance, and a company car.
- Equity-based compensation—A plan that uses the company’s shares as compensation. The most common example is stock options.
Guaranteed Pay
The basic element of guaranteed pay is the base salary, paid based on an hourly, daily, weekly, biweekly, or monthly rate. The base salary is typically used by employees for ongoing consumption.
Many countries dictate the minimum base salary by stipulating a minimum wage. Individual skills and the level of experience of employees give rise to differentiation in income levels within the job-based pay structure. In addition to base salary, there are other pay elements that are paid based solely on employee/employer relations.
Variable Pay
Variable pay is contingent on discretion, employee performance, or results achieved. There are different types of variable-pay plans, such as bonus schemes, sales incentives (commission), and overtime pay.
For example, a variable-pay plan might be that a salesperson receives 50% of every dollar they bring in up to a certain amount of revenue. Beyond this amount, they then bump up to a higher percentage for every dollar they bring. Typically, this type of plan is based on an annual period of time requiring a “resetting” each year back to the starting point of 50%. Sometimes this type of plan is administered so that the sales person never resets and never falls down to a lower level.
Benefits
There is a wide variety of employee benefits, such as paid time off, different types of insurance (life insurance, medical/dental insurance, and work disability insurance), pension plans, and a company car. A benefit plan is designed to address a specific need and is often not offered in the form of cash. Many countries dictate different minimum benefits, such as minimum paid time off, employer’s pension contribution, and sick pay.
Equity-Based Compensation
Equity-based compensation is a compensation plan that uses the employer’s shares as employee compensation. The most common form is stock options. Employers use additional vehicles such as restricted stock, restricted-stock units, employee stock-purchase plan, and stock-appreciation rights. The classic objectives of equity-based compensation plans are retention, attraction of new hires, and aligning employees’ and shareholders’ interests. Simply put, ownership of the company drives better performance through personal value creation.
Affecting Factors
Many internal and external factors affect C&B, including:
- Business objectives
- Labor unions
- Internal equity (the idea of compensating employees in similar jobs, and for similar performance, in a similar way)
- Organizational culture and organizational structure
- State of the economy
- The relevant labor market and/or industry
- Labor and tax laws
7.2.6: Occupational Health and Safety
Occupational safety and health (OSH) is used to protect people in the workplace and create human resource policies that adhere to the law.
Learning Objective
Apply the concepts of occupational health and safety (OSH) to the legal structure within human resource management
Key Points
- Occupational safety and health is an interdisciplinary practice that is justified on moral, legal, and financial grounds.
- Its main objectives include keeping workers safe, making workplaces safe, and cultivating corporate cultures that value health, safety, and employee well-being.
- The government agencies that study and regulate health and safety are the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) and the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).
Key Term
- interdisciplinary
-
Relating to one or more fields of study; of a field that crosses traditional boundaries between academic disciplines or schools of thought as new needs and professions emerge.
Occupational safety and health (OSH) is an interdisciplinary area concerned with protecting the safety, health, and welfare of people engaged in work. The goal of occupational safety and health programs is to foster a safe and healthy work environment. OSH may also protect coworkers, family members, employers, customers, and any other individuals who might be affected by the workplace environment. While OSH is generally inward looking, there are also significant concerns regarding the safety of, and/or environmental impact on, surrounding communities as well.
Health and safety warnings
Workers should be aware of workplace hazards. Image from: www.complianceandsafety.com.
Importance and Objectives
Occupational safety and health can be important for moral, legal, and financial reasons. Moral obligations involve the protection of an employee’s life and health. There is also a legal aspect in that there are laws that protect workers’ safety and health and that can help them be compensated for violations. In financial terms, OSH can reduce employee injury- and illness-related costs, including medical care, sick leave, and disability-benefit costs. High levels of corporate responsibility also lead to employees, customers, and other stakeholders trusting the company more, improving job satisfaction, brand image, and community relationships.
The main focus of OSH is on three different objectives:
- Maintenance and promotion of workers’ health and working capacity
- Improvement of the working environment to make it safer and healthier
- Development of work organizations and cultures that support health and safety at the workplace
Interdisciplinary Connections
OSH may involve interactions among many subject areas, including:
- Occupational medicine
- Occupational hygiene
- Public health
- Safety engineering
- Industrial engineering
- Chemistry
- Health physics
- Ergonomics
- Occupational health psychology
The basic premise behind these interactions is ensuring the health and safety of all employees. While physical health is usually the focus here, it is important to note that mental, emotional, and environmental health are relevant to this field as well.
Government Agencies
In the United States, the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 created both the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) and the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). OSHA, part of the U.S. Department of Labor, is responsible for developing and enforcing workplace safety and health regulations. NIOSH, part of the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, is focused on research, information, education, and training in occupational safety and health.
7.3: Core Functions of Human Resource Management
7.3.1: Employee Recruitment
Recruitment is the process of identifying an organizational gap and attracting, evaluating, and hiring employees to fill that role.
Learning Objective
Recognize the four phases in the recruitment process and the various strategies for executing them
Key Points
- Recruitment is the process of attracting, evaluating, and hiring employees for an organization.
- The recruitment process includes four steps: job analysis, sourcing, screening and selection, and onboarding.
- There are various recruitment approaches, such as relying on in-house personnel, outsourcing, employment agencies, executive search firms, social media, and recruitment services on the Internet.
- With a global marketplace for prospective employees, and the enormity of data and applications supplied via the Internet, HR professionals are challenged with filtering vast streams of data to find the best fit.
Key Term
- recruitment
-
The process of recruiting employees.
Recruitment is the process of attracting, screening, and selecting employees for an organization. The different stages of recruitment are: job analysis, sourcing, screening and selection, and onboarding.
The Four Stages
- Job analysis involves determining the different aspects of a job through, for example, job description and job specification. The former describes the tasks that are required for the job, while the latter describes the requirements that a person needs to do that job.
- Sourcing involves using several strategies to attract or identify candidates. Sourcing can be done by internal or external advertisement. Advertisement can be done via local or national newspapers, specialist recruitment media, professional publications, window advertisements, job centers, or the Internet.
- Screening and selection is the process of assessing the employees who apply for the job. The assessment is conducted to understand the relevant skills, knowledge, aptitude, qualifications, and educational or job-related experience of potential employees. Methods of screening include evaluating resumes and job applications, interviewing, and job-related or behavioral testing.
- After screening and selection, the best candidate is selected. Onboarding is the process of helping new employees become productive members of an organization. A well-planned introduction helps new employees quickly become fully operational.
Recruitment Approaches
There are many recruitment approaches as well. Approaches, in this context, refers to strategies or methods of executing the recruitment process. As recruitment is a complex and data-heavy process, particularly considering the global economy and Internet job boards, the supply of applications and interest can be quite overwhelming. These strategies assist in simplifying the process for HR professionals:
- In-house personnel may manage the recruitment process. At larger companies, human resources professionals may be in charge of the task. In the smallest organizations, recruitment may be left to line managers.
- Outsourcing of recruitment to an external provider may be the solution for some businesses. Employment agencies are also used to recruit talent. They maintain a pool of potential employees and place them based on the requirements of the employer.
- Executive search firms are used for executive and professional positions. These firms use advertising and networking as a method to find the best fit.
- Internet job boards and job search engines are commonly used to communicate job postings. Social media is also playing a vital role in recruitment in this century.
- Social networking, whereby websites such as LinkedIn enable employers and prospective employees to interact and share information, is perhaps the most recent trend in recruitment.
Online Recruiting
Monster.com is a popular job board for people seeking employment.
7.3.2: Employee Selection
Selection is the process—based on filtering techniques that ensure added value—of choosing a qualified candidate for a position.
Learning Objective
Break down the human resource selection process as organizations pursue new employee talent
Key Points
- Selection is the process of selecting a qualified person who can successfully do a job and deliver valuable contributions to the organization.
- A selection system should depend on job analysis. This ensures that the selection criteria are job related and will provide meaningful organizational value.
- The requirements for a selection system are knowledge, skills, abilities, and other characteristics (KSAOs).
- Personnel-selection systems employ evidence-based practices to determine the most qualified candidates, which can include both new candidates and individuals within the organization.
- Two major factors determine the quality of job candidates: predictor validity and selection ratio.
Key Terms
- Selection Ratio
-
A value that indicates the selectivity of a organization on a scale of 0 to 1.
- validity
-
A quality that indicates the degree to which a measurement reflects the underlying construct—that is, how well it measures what it purports to measure.
- Predictor Cutoff
-
A limit distinguishing between passing and failing scores on a selection test—people with scores above it are hired or further considered while those with scores below it are not.
Selection is the process of choosing a qualified person for specific role who can successfully deliver valuable contributions to the organization. The term selection can be applied to many aspects of the process, such as recruitment, hiring, and acculturation. However, it most commonly refers to the selection of workers. A selection system should depend on job analysis. This ensures that the selection criteria are job related and propose value additions for the organization.
Selection Requirements
The requirements for a selection system are knowledge, skills, abilities, and other characteristics, collectively known as KSAOs. Personnel-selection systems employ evidence-based practices to determine the most qualified candidates, which can include both new candidates and individuals within the organization.
Common selection tools include ability tests (cognitive, physical, or psychomotor), knowledge tests, personality tests, structured interviews, the systematic collection of biographical data, and work samples. Development and implementation of such screening methods is sometimes done by human resources departments. Some organizations may hire consultants or firms that specialize in developing personnel-selection systems rather than developing them internally.
Metrics
Two major factors determining the quality of a newly hired employee are predictor validity and selection ratio. The predictor cutoff is a limit distinguishing between passing and failing scores on a selection test—people with scores above it are hired or further considered while those with scores below it are not. This cutoff can be a very useful hiring tool, but it is only valuable if it is actually predictive of the type of performance the hiring managers are seeking.
The selection ratio (SR) is the number of job openings (n) divided by the number of job applicants (N). When the SR is equal to 1, the use of any selection device has little meaning, but this is not often the case as there are usually more applicants than job openings. As N increases, the quality of hires is likely to also increase: if you have 500 applicants for 3 job openings, you will likely find people with higher-quality work among those 500 than if you had only 5 applicants for the same 3 job openings.
SAT score averages
SAT scores used as university admissions criteria are a good example of the use of predictor cutoff. Some universities will not admit students below a certain SAT (or ACT, GMAT, etc.) score. Employers use a similar method with different metrics to filter high volume applications.
7.3.3: Employee Orientation
Orientation tactics exist to provide new employees enough information to adjust, resulting in satisfaction and effectiveness in their role.
Learning Objective
Define orientation and onboarding from a human resources perspective, with a focus on the socialization model
Key Points
- Employee orientation, also commonly referred to as onboarding or organizational socialization, is the process by which an employee acquires the necessary skills, knowledge, behaviors, and contacts to effectively transition into a new organization (or role within the organization).
- A good way to envision this process is through understanding the organizational socialization model.
- Employee characteristics, new employee tactics, and organizational tactics are the three inputs that begin the orientation process.
- With a combination of the above three inputs, employees should move through the adjustment phase as they acclimate to the new professional environment, making important contacts and further understanding their role.
- The goal of effectively orienting the employee for success is twofold: minimize turnover while maximizing satisfaction.
- Some critics of orientation processes stipulate that sometimes the extensive onboarding process can confuse the employees relative to their role, though in most environments onboarding is considered a strong investment.
Key Terms
- onboarding
-
The process of bringing a new employee into the organization, incorporating training and orientation.
- extroversion
-
Concern with, or an orientation toward, others, or what is outside oneself; behavior expressing such an orientation; the definitive characteristic of an extrovert.
Employee orientation, also commonly referred to as onboarding or organizational socialization, is the process by which an employee acquires the necessary skills, knowledge, behaviors, and contacts to effectively transition into a new organization (or role within the organization).
Orientation is a reasonably broad process, generally carried out by the human resources department, that may incorporate lectures, videos, meetings, computer-based programs, team-building exercises, and mentoring. The underlying goal of incorporating these varying onboarding tactics is to provide the employee enough information to adjust, ultimately resulting in satisfaction and effectiveness as a new employee (or an existing employee in a new role).
Organizational Socialization Model
A good way to envision this process is through understanding the organizational socialization model. This chart highlights the process of moving the employee through the adjustment stage to the desired outcome:
Organizational socialization model
A model of onboarding (adapted from Bauer & Erdogan, 2011).
- New Employee Characteristics—Though this segment of the model overlaps with other human resource initiatives (such as recruitment and talent management), the characteristics of a new employee are central to the strategies used as the employee moves through the orientation process. Characteristics that are particularly useful in this process are extroversion, curiosity, experience, proactiveness, and openness.
- New Employee Tactics—The goal for the employee is to acquire knowledge and build relationships. Relationships in particular are central to understanding company culture.
- Organizational Tactics—The organization should similarly seek to emphasize relationship building and the communication of knowledge, particularly organizational knowledge that will be useful for the employee when navigating the company. The company should also use many of the resources mentioned above (videos, lectures, team-building exercises) to complement the process.
- Adjustment—With a combination of the above three inputs, employees should move through the adjustment phase as they acclimate to the new professional environment. This should focus primarily on knowledge of the company culture and co-workers, along with increased clarity as to how they fit within the organizational framework (i.e., their role).
- Outcomes—The goal of effectively orienting the employee for success is twofold: minimize turnover while maximizing satisfaction. The cost of bringing new employees into the mix is substantial, and as a result, high turnover rates are a significant threat to most companies. Ensuring that the onboarding process is effective significantly reduces this risk. Additionally, achieving high levels of employee satisfaction is a substantial competitive advantage, as satisfied employees are motivated and efficient.
Criticisms
The desired outcome of an onboarding process is fairly straightforward—ensuring that new employees are well-equipped to succeed in their new professional environment. However, some critics of orientation processes claim that sometimes extensive onboarding can confuse new employees with regard to their role, as most of their time is spent in company-wide learning, as opposed to role-centric learning. While this criticism may be true in some contexts, it can be offset through a more role-specific onboarding process. It is generally acknowledged that orientation strategies generate positive outcomes and returns on investment.
7.3.4: Employee Development
A core function of human resource management is development—training efforts to improve personal, group, or organizational effectiveness.
Learning Objective
Describe the basic premises behind the development process, as conducted by human resource management professionals
Key Points
- For overall organizational success, it is crucial to develop employees through training, education, and development.
- Employee development focuses on providing and honing skills relevant to employees’ current and future jobs as well as future activities of the organization.
- Talent development refers to an organization’s ability to align strategic training and career opportunities for employees.
Key Terms
- stakeholder
-
A person or organization with a legitimate interest in a given situation, action, or enterprise.
- human resource development
-
Training, organization, and career-development efforts to improve individual, group, and organizational effectiveness.
- training
-
Organizational activity aimed at bettering the performance of individuals and groups in organizational settings.
Employee development helps organizations succeed through helping employees grow. Human resource development consists of training, organization, and career-development efforts to improve individual, group, and organizational effectiveness.
Development Stakeholders
There are several categories of stakeholders that are helpful in understanding employee development: sponsors, managers and supervisors, participants, and facilitators. The sponsors of employee development are senior managers. Senior management invests in employees in a top-down manner, hoping to develop talent internally to reduce turnover, increase efficiency, and acquire human resource value. Line managers or direct supervisors are responsible for coaching employees and for employee performance and are therefore much more directly involved in the actual process. The participants are the people who actually go through the employee development, and also benefit significantly from effective development. The facilitators are human resource management staff, who usually hire specialists in a given field to provide hands-on instruction.
Each of these stakeholder groups has its own agendas and motivations, which can cause conflict with the agendas and motivations of other stakeholder groups. Human resource professionals should focus on aligning the interests of every stakeholder in the development process to capture mutual value.
An astronaut in training.
An Example of Training
Talent Development
Talent development refers to an organization’s ability to align strategic training and career opportunities for employees. Talent development, part of human resource development, is the process of changing an organization, its employees, and its stakeholders, using planned and unplanned learning, in order to achieve and maintain a competitive advantage for the organization.
What this essentially means is that human resources departments, in addition to their other responsibilities of job design, hiring, training, and employee interaction, are also tasked with helping others improve their career opportunities. This process requires investment in growing talent. It is often more economical in the long run to improve on existing employee skill sets, as opposed to investing in new employees. Therefore, talent development is a trade-off by which human resources departments can effectively save money through avoiding the opportunity costs of new employees.
7.3.5: Employee Career-Path Management
Career-path management requires human resource management to actively manage employee skills in pursuit of successful professional careers.
Learning Objective
Examine the dimensions and considerations involved in outlining an employee’s professional development
Key Points
- Career-path development includes structured planning and active management of an employee’s professional career.
- There is a classification system, with minor variations, in the managerial process of career-path management.
- Human resource development underlines the importance of human resources in empowering employees to advance their careers through training and development initiatives.
- Human resource development requires human resource managers to identify employee potential and expand upon it, and to ensure that the company utilizes these talented employees to capture value.
- The first step of career management is setting goals, which requires employees to be aware of career opportunities along with their own talents and abilities.
Key Terms
- empower
-
To give someone more confidence and/or strength to do something, often by enabling them to increase control over their own life or situation.
- Career Management
-
The structured planning and development of a employee’s professional career.
Career-path management refers to the structured planning and active management of an employee’s professional career. The results of successful career planning are personal fulfillment, a work and life balance, goal achievement, and financial security. A career encompasses the changes or modifications in employment through advancement during the foreseeable future. There are many definitions by management scholars of the stages in the managerial process. The following classification system (with minor variations) is widely used:
- Development of overall goals and objectives
- Development of a strategy
- Development of the specific means (policies, rules, procedures, and activities) to implement the strategy
- Systematic evaluation of the progress toward achievement of the selected goals and objectives to modify the strategy, if necessary
Human Resource Development
Human resource development (HRD) is the central framework for the way in which a company leverages an effective human resources department to empower employees with the skills for current and future success. The responsibility of the human resources department in regard to employee development primarily pertains to varying forms of training, educational initiatives, performance evaluation, and management development. Through employing these practices, human resource managers can significantly improve the potential of each employee, opening new career-path venues by expanding upon an employee’s skill set.
This is achieved through two specific human resource objectives: training and development (TD) and organizational development (OD). Training and development, as stated above, is primarily individualistic in nature and focused on ensuring that employees develop throughout their careers to capture more opportunity.
Organizational development must be balanced during this process, ensuring that the company itself is leveraging these evolving human resources to maximum efficiency. Depending too heavily upon TD may result in an organization incapable of capitalizing on employee skills, while focusing too much on OD will generate a company culture adverse to professional development. Therefore, human resources departments are central to empowering employees to take successful career paths while maintaining an organizational balance.
Some Dimensions of Career Management
The first step of career management is setting goals. Before doing so the person must be aware of career opportunities and should also know his or her own talents and abilities. The time horizon for the achievement of the selected goals or objectives—short-term, intermediate, or long-term—will have a major influence on their formulation.
- Short-term goals (one or two years) are usually specific and limited in scope. Short-term goals are easier to formulate. They must be achievable and relate to long-term career goals.
- Intermediate goals (three to 20 years) tend to be less specific and more open-ended than short-term goals. Both intermediate and long-term goals are more difficult to formulate than short-term goals because there are so many unknowns about the future.
- Long-term goals (over 20 years) are the most fluid of all. Lack of both life experience and knowledge about potential opportunities and pitfalls makes the formulation of long-term goals and objectives very difficult. Long-term goals and objectives may, however, be easily modified as additional information is received without a great loss of career efforts, because experience and knowledge transfer from one career to another.
Other Focuses of Career Management
The modern nature of work means that individuals may now (more than in the past) have to revisit the process of making career choices and decisions more frequently. Managing “boundless” careers refers to skills needed by workers whose employment is beyond the boundaries of a single organization, a work style common among, for example, artists and designers. As employers take less responsibility, employees need to take control of their own development to maintain and enhance their employability.
Promotion
A promotion often comes through effective career-path management.
7.4: Employee Evaluation and Management, in Detail
7.4.1: Evaluating Employee Performance
Performance evaluation is the process of assessing an employee’s job performance and productivity over a specified period of time.
Learning Objective
Explain the human resource responsibility of evaluating employee performance, focusing specifically on the various available methods
Key Points
- Evaluating performance is the process of assessing an employee’s job performance and productivity.
- Performance assessments can create benefits for management and employees through improving performance, but can also be a stressful, so they must be carefully implemented.
- The assessment is conducted utilizing previously established criteria that align with the goals of the organization and the specific responsibilities of the employee being evaluated.
- There are many methods of performance evaluation, such as objective production, personnel, and judgmental evaluation.
- Effective use of performance-evaluation systems includes the selection of the best evaluation method(s) and effective delivery. The outcomes of performance evaluation can include employee raises or promotions, as well as employee improvement through identifying weaknesses.
Key Term
- Performance evaluation
-
The process of assessing an employee’s job performance and productivity.
Performance evaluation, or performance appraisal (PA), is the process of assessing an employee’s job performance and productivity. The assessment is conducted based on previously established criteria that align with the goals of the organization.
Various employee attributes can be assessed during this process, including organizational-citizenship behavior, accomplishments, strengths and weaknesses, and potential for future improvement. The management of performance plays a vital role in the success or failure of the organization, as human resources are a significant investment that must provide meaningful returns. An ineffective performance-evaluation system can create high turnover and reduce employee productivity.
Pros and Cons of Performance Appraisals
Benefits of the PA system include increased employee effectiveness, higher likelihood of improved employee performance, the prompting of feedback, enhanced communication between employers and employees, fostering of trust, promotion of goal setting, and assessment of educational and other training needs. Detriments of the PA system include the possible hindrance of quality control, stress for both employees and management, errors in judgment, legal issues arising from improper evaluations, and the implementation of inappropriate performance goals.
Performance appraisal is situated at both the individual employee level and the organizational level because human resources (HR) conducts evaluations of individuals in light of organizational goals with the object of improving achievement of these goals. HR relies on a strong performance-management policy; a proper PA should be able to educate employees on the organization, its goals, and its expectations in legal ways. This means that antidiscrimination laws and other employment laws need to shape the PA policy.
Methods of Performance Evaluation
There are various ways human resource professionals can approach assessing performance, though integrating various perspectives (i.e., collecting the most differentiated data) will paint the clearest picture. Some examples include:
Objective production: Under this method, direct data is used to evaluate the performance of an employee. This often relates to simple and quantifiable data points, such as sales figures, production numbers, etc. However, one drawback of this process is that the variability in performance can be due to factors outside employees’ control. Also, the quantity of production does not necessarily indicate the quality of the products. Still, this data reflects performance to some extent.
Personnel: This is the method of recording the withdrawal behavior of employees, such as absences. This personnel data usually is not a comprehensive reflection of an employee’s performance and is best complemented with other metrics.
Judgmental evaluation:One of the primary drawbacks of employee performance evaluation is the tendency for positive feedback despite negative behavior. That is, often people are nice enough to provide good evaluations for work that isn’t up to par. Judgmental evaluations focus on benchmarks to more accurately promote constructive criticism (through relative scales). A few examples include:
- Graphic rating scale: Graphic rating scales are the most commonly used performance-evaluation system. Typically, the raters use a 5 to 7 point scale to rate employees’ productivity.
- Employee-comparison methods: Rather than subordinates being judged against pre-established criteria, they are compared with one another. This method eliminates central-tendency and leniency errors but still allows for halo-effect errors to occur.
- Behavioral checklists and scales: Behaviors are more definite than traits. Supervisors record behaviors that they judge to be job-performance relevant, and they keep a running tally of good and bad behaviors and evaluate the performance of employees based on their judgement.
Peer and Self Assessments
Often, peer assessments and self-assessments are used to paint a clearer image of performance. Managers are often less aware of employee efficacy than team members or other peers. In self-assessments employees have the right to underline what they think their performance is, and why certain metrics may be misleading. Peer assessments and self-assessments are useful in capturing this data:
- Peer assessments: members of a group evaluate and appraise the performance of their fellow group members.
- Self-assessments: in self-assessments, individuals assess and evaluate their own behavior and job performance.
- 360-degree feedback: 360-degree feedback includes multiple evaluations of employees; it often integrates assessments from superiors and peers, as well as self-assessments. This is the ideal situation.
A manager rating an employee.
Rating an Employee
7.4.2: Structuring Employee Feedback
Effective feedback is structured in a way that provides actionable conclusions to motivate employee growth through objective assessments.
Learning Objective
Explore the various formats and structures for providing feedback
Key Points
- Providing feedback involves a wide variety of biases and subjectivity, and as a result it benefits from structure and strategy.
- A common and traditional method for looking at performance via objective production involves using simple metrics that indicate efficiency (such as sales numbers).
- Another common practice is managerial evaluations using behavioral checklists, graphic rating scales, and comparison among employees.
- 360 degree feedback utilizes managers, subordinates, colleagues, and self- assessments to paint or more rounded picture of performance.
- Start-Stop-Continue is an actionable and simple model that emphasizes direct feedback on how a given colleague can improve performance via straight-forward observations and suggestions for growth.
Key Term
- subjectivity
-
Judgments based on opinions and intuitions, and therefore not necessarily predicated in logic or reason.
Why Structure Feedback?
Employee and manager feedback is one of the more sensitive issues in a workplace, and can be greatly enhanced by careful planning and critical thinking about how to objectively, equitably, and efficiently discuss employee outcomes and assessments.
As a result, structuring feedback strategically can be a great benefit to both managers and employees. There are a wide variety of models and structures for providing employee feedback. A few of the more useful structures for feedback are listed below.
Feedback Structures
Objective Production
The simplest of feedback mechanisms, this essentially looks at basic performance methods such as output, sales, volume, profitability, or other concrete and objective methods of overall productivity. As a structural option for feedback delivery, there are some pros and cons to this method. It works well in jobs where data is readily available and objective, but not so well in jobs relying on more ambiguous metrics. It is also quite impersonal, and can result in employees feeling like ‘just another gear in the machine’.
Judgment Evaluation
A much less objective approach would be various formats of judgment evaluation. All this really means is that an individual or group of individuals will assess the performance of a given employee, and provide this feedback directly (often in the form of a scale or model). As a result of the potential subjectivity, it is best to provide training to ensure consistency and informed assessment.
Some assessment formats include:
- Graphic Rating Scales: On some sort of relative scale (usually 1-5 or 1-7), employees are assessed on specific characteristics, accomplishments and behaviors. This is a useful method to observe improvements over time.
- Employee Comparison Models: Two of the main culprits of subjectivity are leniency error and central-tendency error (judging to favorably and judging everyone the same respectively). To avoid these, management could be asked to directly compare various employees. This does incur halo effect errors, however.
- Behavioral Checklists and Scales: Certain behaviors can have positive or negative implications, and monitoring specific key behaviors over a given time frame can be a useful feedback structure as well.
360 Degree Feedback
While managerial feedback is important, it is also important to balance this with the perspectives of colleagues, subordinates, and those of the individual being assessed (self assessment). In this model, all work groups and implications of a given individual’s work decisions can be assessed from various perspectives. Compared to a static top-down feedback structure, 360 degree feedback has significant advantages in accuracy, objectivity and equality.
Start-Stop-Continue
Often simplicity excels in implementing feedback, and the Start-Stop-Continue model is just about as simple as it gets. Agile teams and flat organizational structures focus on peer assessments that leverage models such as this (often coupled with some basic rating scales) to assess employees with the goal of personal growth. This is done using three points of commentary:
- Start: What tasks, habits, and/or behaviors should the employee begin doing to improve?
- Stop: What should a given employee discontinue doing to improve performance?
- Continue: What does the employee excel in doing, and should continue?
The key advantage of this structure is the simplicity of it. Employees have immediate feedback that they can actually act on right away.
Conclusion
While there are countless opinions and models to utilize in structuring feedback, managers should keep in mind that the purpose of feedback is growth and improvement. Any model selected should result in actionable conclusions the employee can use to improve.
7.4.3: Employee Pay Decisions
Making pay decisions can be a function of HR; payroll surveys and internal measures can help determine what is appropriate.
Learning Objective
Analyze the various methodologies used by HRM to measure, benchmark, and ultimately devise appropriate pay strategies
Key Points
- Techniques that assist payroll professionals in making their pay decisions include external measures such as benchmarking (salary surveys) and ongoing reporting that constitute a market survey approach.
- Internal measures such as projections, simulations, predictive modeling, or the use of pay grades look to the needs of the organization, and the relative value of tasks within it, to make pay decisions.
- Variable systems like pay for performance create a policy line that connects job pay and job evaluation points.
Key Terms
- benchmarking
-
A technique that allows a manager to compare metrics, such as quality, time, and cost, across an industry and against competitors.
- predictive modeling
-
Predictive modelling is the process by which a model is created or chosen to try to best predict the probability of an outcome.
Pay decisions refer to the methods used by human resources and payroll professionals to choose the pay scales of employees. Techniques that assist payroll professionals in making their pay decisions include:
- External measures such as benchmarking (salary surveys) and ongoing reporting that constitute a market survey approach.
- Internal measures such as projections, simulations, and predictive modeling or the use of pay grades use an organization’s needs to assess the relative value of tasks within it.
- Variable systems like pay-for-performance create a policy line that connects job pay and job evaluation points.
Benchmarking
Benchmarking is when an organization compares its own pay practices and job functions against those of its competitors. Obvious cautionary points in the use of these kinds of salary surveys include the inclusion of only appropriately similar peers in the comparison, the inclusion of only appropriately similar jobs in the comparison, and accurately weigh and combining rates of pay when multiple surveys are used.
Measuring up
Managers benchmark the metrics of their company against those of industry competitors.
There are two types of salary surveys that can be used in benchmarking: labor market comparisons and product market comparisons. Labor market comparisons are best when employee recruitment and retention is a major concern for the employer and when recruiting costs are a significant expense. Product market comparisons are more salient when labor expenses make up a major share of the employer’s total expenses, when product demand is very fluid, when the labor supply is relatively steady, and/or when employee skills are specific to the product market in question.
Within the benchmarking process, the job category and range of pay rates within it are important to the payroll professional. Certain key jobs are very common to organizations in a given field and have a relatively stable set of duties. As a result, key jobs are useful in benchmarking since they allow for more accurate comparison across many organizations. Non-key jobs are unique to their organizations and are therefore not useful in benchmarking. Job content is far more important than job title in this context, although it is easy to confuse content for title. Range of pay rates refers to the variety in pay rates that workers in one job area might receive.
Salary Surveys
The use of salary surveys demands credible survey sources with multiple participating organizations. Organizations responding to a given survey must be similar to the organization using that survey. Close attention to job function is also crucial; it is inappropriate to match and compare salaries based on job title alone.
Internal Measures
Benchmarking uses external measures to make internal pay decisions. Internal measures are also available in most cases, and include the use of analytic techniques such as projections, simulations, and predictive modeling in the pay decision-making process. External and internal measures have very different focuses. External measures ask the market what any given individual should be paid. Internal measures correlate pay decisions to potential organizational benefits.
Pay Grade System
A pay grade system is simply tiered levels of pay based on position, experience, and seniority. Using a pay grade system has its own risks that should be backed by strongly predictive internal measures because 0nce pay grades are in place, the cost of changing and updating them is significant. This can lead to stagnation in an organization’s pay scale system.
Connected to this problem is the fact that an existing pay scale can reward skill sets that were highly useful to the organization in the past more than skill sets that are currently needed. Projections, simulations, and predictive modeling assist in counteracting these issues, as they make use of an organization’s own internal data to ensure that assessments of value and need are accurate.
Pay for Performance Systems
Variable pay decision systems like pay-for-performance are designed to motivate employees and ensure intra-organizational cooperation. When designing this kind of system, the first thing to assess is the personnel goals of the organization (as this kind of system can be tailored significantly). Interacting with managers across departments can help payroll professionals understand what is most important to the various areas of the organization at any given time.
Merit and incentive pay programs are common forms of pay-for-performance systems. Promotions based on performance rather than set time periods are also critical to pay-for-performance schemes.
7.4.4: Incentive Systems for Employees
Human resources professionals assess organizational and employee needs to identify the ideal incentive systems for collaborative success.
Learning Objective
Describe the purpose of an incentive system and learn how human resources professionals can assess organizational needs to select the best one
Key Points
- Human resources (HR) professionals are tasked with using employee and organizational objectives to identify and implement the best employee incentive programs.
- To be effective, incentive systems must address employee skills and motivation, acknowledgement of employee successes, a clearly-defined set of goals, and a means for assessing progress. Employee effort increases as workers perceive that they are achieving set goals.
- Recognizing which incentive systems are most appropriate for an organization is a primary challenge for HR professionals.
An incentive system is a business management tool that introduces a structured motivation system to promote desired employee behaviors. Human resources (HR) professionals are tasked with using employee and organizational objectives to identify and implement the best employee incentive programs.
How Incentives Improve Performance
To be effective, incentive systems must address employee skills and motivation, acknowledgement of employee successes, a clearly-defined set of goals, and a means for assessing progress. These systems must also be tailored to the needs of the organization. Incentive systems are often implemented to prevent and overcome poor performance, failure to meet organizational goals, poor morale, increased turnover, and the stress of increased demands on employees.
Carrot and stick
Incentive systems should use the carrot (reward) as opposed to the stick (punishment) to motivate employees.
Incentive systems are grounded in the idea that employee effort increases as workers perceive that they are making progress towards reaching set goals. A successful system promotes full employee participation by offering a wide array of rewards and keeping employees motivated to participate.
The Role of Human Resources
Incentive systems only work when they are closely tailored to the goals of the organization. The system’s goals must be challenging but attainable, or employees will not be motivated to participate. It’s counter-intuitive, but research has shown that monetary rewards are ineffective incentives. One incumbent risk of incentive systems is the moral hazard of encouraging individuals to achieve their own goals and specific targets rather than improving upon organizational performance as a whole.
Human resources departments must identify the core culture of the organization and create incentives that match it. For example, a company built on innovation must inspire risk-taking without any guarantees of success. This means performance incentives and metrics may be relatively useless (and most likely damaging) to executing the core organizational goals. Instead, HR could provide incentives like telecommuting or the freedom to devote a percentage of each work day to independent projects (Google does this).
At the other end of the spectrum, Walmart promotes rigidly controlled operational efficiency. To reduce employee errors, an incentives system could reward efficiency. The most consistent truck drivers, for example, could receive a reward for their clockwork performance.
7.4.5: Employee Benefits Management
Employee benefits are non-wage compensations designed to provide employees with extra economic security.
Learning Objective
Break down employee reimbursement to describe a variety of direct and indirect benefits captured by the employee from human resource management
Key Points
- These critical benefits ensure that employees have access to health insurance, retirement capital, disability compensation, sick leave and vacation time, profit sharing, educational funding, day care, and other forms of specialized benefits.
- The human resources department is the area of an organization responsible for organizing, implementing, and managing employee benefits across the company.
- Benefits and compensation are at the center of HR operations and play a central role in both the financial capacity and talent management of any institution.
- In most developed nations there are laws that govern benefits and agencies that enforce them. HR is also tasked with understanding the benefits that employees have a legal right to and implementing them properly.
Key Terms
- Compensation
-
What is expected in return for providing a product or service.
- profit sharing
-
A system in which some of the profit of an enterprise are divided among the workers, giving them an incentive for profits without an equity interest.
Employee benefits are non-wage compensations designed to provide employees with extra economic security. These benefits ensure that employees have access to health insurance, retirement capital, disability compensation, sick leave and vacation time, profit sharing, educational funding, day care, and other forms of specialized benefits. Receiving these benefits along with one’s salary is fairly standard in full-time professional employment.
Human Resource Responsibilities
The human resources department is the area of an organization responsible for organizing, implementing, and managing employee benefits across the company. Human resources (HR) has a wide range of responsibilities, including hiring, training, assessment, and compensation across the company. Benefits and compensation, however, lay at the center of HR operations and play a central role in both the financial capacity and talent management of any institution.
HR responsibilities
Human resources departments carry out many services, including data management, service efficiency, and employee services.
Human resources contribute to the overall employee experience across the span of an employee’s time with the company. Benefits play an important role in maintaining high levels of satisfaction. Employee satisfaction is often overlooked in favor of customer satisfaction, but is just as critical to a healthy business. As a result, HR has a critical task in maintaining high levels of employee satisfaction to ensure maximum operational efficiency.
Benefits provided by the company, particularly retirement investing and health insurance, ensure that employees feel taken care of and secure in return for their investment of time and effort. The safety net provided and maintained by the company is a strong motivator of employee loyalty and satisfaction.
Legal Concerns
In most developed nations there are laws that govern benefits and agencies to enforce them. HR is also tasked with understanding the benefits that employees have a legal right to and implementing them properly. The Employee Benefits Security Administration (EBSA) is the agency in the United States responsible for administering, regulating, and enforcing many of these benefits. HR also works closely with the legal department to understand and provide the benefits required by each country they operate in.
HR is a central element of any successful business because it maintains the most valuable investment of any business: its people. Employee satisfaction and compensation help companies achieve high efficiency and strong performance from their employees by administering the appropriate level of compensation and benefits.
7.4.6: Employee Promotions
A promotion is the advancement of an employee’s rank, salary, duties, and/or designation within an organization.
Learning Objective
Evaluate human resources’ role in creating promotion opportunities to motivate employees and develop upwards mobility within an organization
Key Points
- A promotion is the advancement of an employee’s rank, salary, duties, and/or designation within an organization.
- Promotions can also carry increases in benefits, privileges, and prestige, although in some cases the promotion changes designation only.
- The number of safeguards in place against unfair practices in promotion depends on the public or private nature of the organization.
Key Term
- Designation
-
A distinguishing name or title.
A promotion is the advancement of an employee’s rank, salary, duties and/or designation within an organization. Promotions are often a result of good employee performance and/or loyalty (usually via seniority). The opposite of a promotion is a demotion.
The Role of Human Resources
Prior to promoting someone, the human resources department of an organization must ascertain whether the employee in question can manage the increase in responsibilities that accompanies the new role. If not, additional training may be required to prepare the individual for their new organizational role.
Incentives of Being Promoted
Internal promotions carry incentives that motivate employee efficacy and ambition. Human resources can manage internal promotional opportunities and benefits to increase employee engagement. A promotion might involve a higher designation. This means that the more senior position has a different title. An example would be a promotion from office manager to regional manager. A promotion can (and often does) mean an increase in salary. The amount of the raise varies widely from industry to industry and from organization to organization within a given industry.
Promotions can also carry increases in benefits, privileges, and prestige, although in some cases only the title changes. In very hierarchical organizations, like the military, the change in rank alone is significant and brings with it new responsibilities. In the nonprofit sector pay increases are modest, so the prestige of a promotion is one of its main benefits. In the private sector, promotion can include substantial salary increases, benefit increases, stock options, and various “perks,” such as a bigger office or executive parking.
Safeguards and Systematic Equity
Generally speaking, there are more procedural safeguards against preferential treatment in the public sector as compared with the private sector, where senior managers enjoy broad discretion in making promotions. Review of promotion decisions and mandates to document such decisions in personnel files protect against discrimination, bias, and preferential treatment. It is critical for human resources professionals to understand and describe why a given promotion is occurring, justifying it both quantitatively and qualitatively.
7.4.7: Employee Transfers
Transfers take place in response to goals, needs, talent, or employee requests; HR evaluates and executes transfers.
Learning Objective
Identify when it is appropriate to consider strategic or unexpected interdepartmental transfers within a human resources frame
Key Points
- Transfers can occur for a number of different reasons and can be initiated by employees or managers. Types of employee transfers include: strategic transfers, necessity transfers, and talent/management transfers.
- A strategic transfer takes place when an organization is trying to grow a specific segment of its operations, and needs experienced and trusted individuals to pioneer this process.
- A necessity transfer takes place when there is a demand for employees in a different department of the organization, where a specific skill set is scarce.
- A talent transfer usually moves an employee from their original department after it becomes clear that their skill set is more suited to another department.
Key Terms
- strategic
-
Of or pertaining to strategy.
- Scarcity
-
An inadequate amount of something; a shortage.
- necessity
-
The quality or state of being required or unavoidable.
Evaluating and executing employee transfers is an essential function of human resources management. Transfers can be horizontal, between departments within an organization, or vertical, from one level in the organization to another, either up or down. It is useful to view promotions and demotions as vertical and transfers as horizontal (though they can be vertical as well, to a certain extent). Transfers can occur for many different reasons; they can be driven by employees or managers. Types of employee transfers include: strategic transfers, necessity transfers, and talent/management transfers.
Strategic Transfers
A strategic transfer may take place when an organization is trying to grow a specific segment of its business. For example, if a car maker wants to strategically grow its quality department to meet the goal of building safer cars, it may want to train additional staff for a transfer to the quality department. It is also highly useful to have a few experienced employees who understand the company better than new employees guide the trajectory of the new project.
Necessity Transfers
A necessity transfer may take place when there is a demand for employees in a department of the organization where a specific skill set is scarce. This may happen because of layoffs, a change in company strategy, or a scarcity of a certain type of employee. A necessity transfer usually includes an incentive, like a raise, to give employees an incentive to put in the training the transfer will require.
A manager rating an employee.
Rating an Employee
Talent Transfers
A talent transfer usually moves employees from their original department after it becomes clear that their skill set is more suited to another department. It is predicated on the original department’s ability to absorb the loss of that employee as well as the level of need in the new department. Talent transfers are more likely to be initiated by employees who perceive that they can contribute more to a new department.
Finally, employees may also request transfers in an organization for a number of different reasons (i.e., family or personal requirement, location requirements, change in interest, and working with different people). The important component from a human resources perspective is making sure that the employee’s concerns are legitimate and insuring that the transfer will be beneficial for the organization by assessing the employee’s fit in the proposed transfer location. Making sure that employees are working where they have the best fit promotes higher efficiency and synergy.
7.4.8: Employee Discipline
Organizations must create strong, clear disciplinary policies; all disciplinary actions should be well documented and fairly applied.
Learning Objective
Assess the advantages and disadvantages of the methods outlined to discipline employees in the workplace
Key Points
- Corrective discipline and progressive discipline are the two most common disciplinary systems.
- Progressive discipline provides a general series of steps to complete. Corrective discipline allows managers to tailor disciplinary action to fit different situations.
- Documentation is crucial in employee discipline to protect employee rights and prevent legal action.
- There are four main kinds of discipline in the workplace for employee failures and poor conduct: verbal counseling, written warning, suspension, and termination. Other less common forms of discipline include demotion, transfer, and withholding of bonuses.
Key Terms
- Progressive discipline
-
Provides general steps that must be completed for all infractions.
- Corrective discipline
-
A corrective discipline system allows managers to tailor disciplinary action to fit different situations.
Employee discipline problems can be minimized by ensuring that organizational policies are clearly communicated to employees. Consequences for violating organizational policies must be clearly communicated so that employees know and understand them. Organizations must create strong, clear disciplinary policies and enforce them when needed. In addition, organizations must prohibit discrimination and harassment by creating clear and detailed written policies.
Types of Discipline
Corrective discipline and progressive discipline are the two most common disciplinary systems in the workplace:
- First, progressive discipline sets forth clear but general steps that must be completed for all infractions. This limits the disciplinary actions that can be taken against an employee by referencing the employee’s prior disciplinary history. This system has the advantage of eliminating most disparate treatment claims, since everyone receives the same disciplinary steps regardless of other factors.
- Second, corrective discipline allows managers more flexibility and permits the manager to tailor disciplinary action to fit different situations. This flexibility does not remove the onus on the manager and the organization at large to ensure that similar cases are treated equally. Review of disciplinary actions falls to the HR department to ensure that employees experience no disparate treatment. This is key to avoiding legal charges of inequitable treatment: HR has a very important organizational role in preventing long-term issues and potentially high costs.
Documentation of Discipline
Documentation is crucial in cases of employee discipline. If an employee is penalized or fired for an infraction that the organization cannot document, s/h might file–and win—a wrongful termination suit. This is particularly true when performance appraisals are not detailed enough.
A lack of consistency in disciplinary procedures is equally dangerous for organizations. If employees receive different disciplinary responses to the same infraction, the organization can be found liable for discrimination even when none was intended. Aggravating and mitigating factors should be considered and documented in each situation. This means that all disciplinary procedures must be well-documented and fairly applied.
Methods of Discipline
There are four main methods of discipline for employee failures and poor conduct: verbal counseling, written warning, suspension, and termination. Other less common forms of discipline include demotion, transfer, and withholding of bonuses.
Termination
This cartoon shows a professor being terminated from university employment. Termination is the last of disciplinary options.
- Verbal counseling is typically the first response to an infraction. A verbal warning must be administered to the employee in private and as objectively as possible. The presence of one management-level witness, preferably an HR professional, is recommende. Any verbal counseling must be documented in writing in the employee’s personnel file.
- A written warning is usually the next level of discipline and typically follows a verbal warning. After the employee has received a written warning and has had time to review it, there should be a private meeting between the manager and the employee and a witness (and the employee’s representative if s/he has one). Disciplined employees should sign the written warning to show that they received it, and should be informed that signing the warning does not indicate that they agree with it. Should the employee refuse to sign, the witness can sign to acknowledge that they observed the meeting and the employee’s refusal to sign.
- The next form of discipline is typically suspension. This is usually unpaid and varies in length. Paid suspensions can function in practice as inadvertent rewards for disciplinary infractions and should be avoided. Whether the suspension leads automatically to termination upon the next infraction is up to the employer. Generally if there are multiple suspensions they should increase in length and ultimately result in termination. Whatever procedure an organization adopts, it should be clear about the next step, whether suspension or termination. All of this must be documented in writing.
- Termination is the last disciplinary step. Before taking this step a manager should review employee files to ensure that this is an appropriate step and that similar action has been taken in similar circumstances before. Some behavior should automatically give rise to termination regardless of context. Violence and threatened violence, drug or alcohol use in the workplace, bringing weapons onto organization property, ignoring safety regulations, stealing, falsifying documents, and abandoning a job (no call, no show for three consecutive days) are all grounds for immediate termination. Any other course of action puts the organization and other employees at risk.
7.4.9: Employee Dismissal
Dismissal is the involuntary termination of an employee due to incompetence, poor job performance, or violation of policy.
Learning Objective
Discuss the common reasons and justifications for employee dismissal from the human resources management perspective
Key Points
- Common reasons for dismissal include absenteeism, “time theft” offenses (i.e., improper use of breaks), incompetence, and poor job performance.
- Gross misconduct offenses, such as violence, serious negligence, repeated insubordination, fraud in the job application process (whenever it is discovered), harassment of co-workers, or drug use at work are grounds for immediate dismissal.
- At times, even off-the-clock behavior can impact employment and result in a dismissal.
- Under typical circumstances, dismissal is the last step in a chain of disciplinary actions.
- Human resources are mediators, who must maintain objective perspectives in assessing the validity of reasoning behind any and all employee terminations.
Key Term
- gross misconduct
-
Violence, serious negligence, repeated insubordination, fraud in the job application process, harassment of co-workers or drug use in the workplace.
Dismissal is the involuntary termination of an employee. It is colloquially referred to as being “fired.” Dismissal implies employee fault, although this is not always the case. In most states, an employee can be fired for any reason or no reason at all, as long as they are not fired for a prohibited reason. Indeed, most dismissals are a by-product of economic conditions or organizational failure beyond the individual employee’s control (i.e., layoffs).
U.S. unemployment, 1995-2012
Layoffs, particularly during recessions, are a common reason for employee dismissal. The recessions of 2001 and 2008 were both followed with drops in U.S. employment.
Reasons for Dismissal
Common reasons for dismissal include absenteeism, “time theft” offenses (i.e., improper use of breaks), incompetence, or poor job performance. Gross misconduct offenses, such as violence, serious negligence, repeated insubordination, fraud in the job application process (whenever it is discovered), harassment of co-workers, or drug use at work are grounds for immediate dismissal.
At times, even off-the-clock behavior can impact employment and result in a dismissal. For example, if an employee is convicted of driving while under the influence, s/he will not be able to keep a job that requires driving. Other offenses, even if unrelated to job performance, can be seen as a sign of unreliability on the part of the employee and can result in dismissal. Similarly, employees often represent organizations outside of work. It is bad PR for an organization’s employees to be in trouble outside of work.
The Role of Human Resources
Dismissal is almost always the last step in a chain of disciplinary actions. Most workplaces recognize some sequence of disciplinary consequences, starting with verbal counseling, moving to written warnings and suspension, usually without pay.
In extreme circumstances, however, employees can be summarily dismissed. Regardless of the circumstances of the dismissal, organizations must document all infractions carefully and be consistent in their application of disciplinary measures including dismissal. Organizations that dismiss some employees for a particular infraction but not others leave themselves open to legal liability, even in right-to-work states.
Human resources departments are tasked with managing this process, and must ensure complete coordination of company policy with state or federal law. If the dismissal is seen as harassment-based or founded in discrimination, the organization’s unethical acts will have significant legal ramifications and costs. Human resources professionals are mediators who must remain objective when assessing possible employee termination.
7.5: Current Topics in Human Resource Management
7.5.1: The Importance of Work-Life Balance
Managers are increasingly aware of the importance of promoting a healthy work-life balance for employees, which increases job satisfaction.
Learning Objective
Illustrate the way in which technological advances and competitive economies are eroding the work-life balance and how human resource professionals can offset the 24-7 demands of the workplace
Key Points
- The advancements in the way people access information, communicate with one another, and complete tasks have allowed for flexibility in the workplace, but they have also diminished the distinction between work and family.
- If people don’t have time to relax and recharge, their ability to do their job decreases and their performance level suffers.
- In addition to hiring, training, employment contracts, and regulatory considerations, ensuring that employees are both healthy and satisfied at work is well within the purview of human resources departments.
- Human resources can alter organizational culture, enforce vacation time, offer flextime, and advise overworked employees to avoid the pitfalls of imbalanced work-life dynamics.
Key Terms
- burnout
-
The experience of long-term exhaustion and diminished interest, especially in one’s career.
- balance
-
Mental equilibrium; mental health; calmness; a state of remaining clear-headed and unperturbed.
The Price of a 24-7 World
Technology has improved people’s lives in many different ways. People can live longer, healthier lives because of technological advancements. A student can access vast resources of information to complete assignments and a mother can see and talk to a daughter who is thousands of miles away. The advancements in the way people access information, communicate with one another, and complete tasks have allowed for flexibility in the workplace. Global markets have opened up and communication has allowed instant access to local expertise, enabling income streams and relationship building anywhere in the world.
With email, texting, instant messaging, and fax, people can communicate instantaneously. With the advancement in smart phones, laptops, and tablets, employees are able to leave the office but still do their work. This has allowed more employees to bring their work home with them. While such access does allow them to spend more time at home, it has blurred the lines between work and life. If the boss sends a text at eleven at night, does the employee have to answer it? When should a person shut down the laptop and spend time with friends and family or pursue their own interests?
Technology also allows some employees to work from home offices full time, and they never have to visit their place of business. While telecommuting eliminates the need to drive to the office, the ability to work from home can make work consume a person’s life. What was once a forty-hour-a-week job can easily become a sixty-hour-a-week job. The person in this scenario will be both stressed and less effective professionally.
The Importance of Work-Life Balance
As with most things in life, moderation is the key. People who are constantly tied to their jobs deal with the symptoms of stress and burnout. Overworked employees are more likely to suffer health problems, more like to be absent and/or sick, less efficient, less sociable, and overall more difficult to work with. It is in the best interest of both the employee and employer to avoid these pitfalls through smart human resource management.
The Role of Management in Promoting Work-Life Balance
Human resource (HR) management is a particularly versatile element of the organization, and its responsibilities are often much less clear than a textbook might imply. While hiring, training, employment contracts and regulatory considerations are well within the HR framework, so too is ensuring that employees are both healthy and satisfied at work. This requires taking stands on behalf of the employees, and putting organizational and managerial expectations and policies in place to ensure that employees are treated properly.
One example of what HR and/or upper management can do in this regard is override the culture to encourage employees to take time for themselves. Upper management must communicate to lower managers, through words and by example, that work communication past a certain time of night (or on the weekends) is only acceptable in highly time-sensitive situations (or never at all). HR can suggest to employees that they turn off their work phones in the evenings and leave their work computers in the office unless absolutely necessary.
Another useful tool for management is flextime. This is particularly useful for individuals in global markets, since they are often on the phone early in the morning or late at night with clients or suppliers on the other side of the globe. Employees might also work only four days a week, but work 10 to 12 hours each of those days (from, say, 6:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m.). Businesses focused on quarterly results could offer long weekends at a company-wide level at the beginning of each new quarter (when workload is the smallest). HR professionals should be observant and creative, identifying when employees are pushing themselves too hard and offering solutions.
The importance of balance
Balance helps to create harmony and peace of mind.
7.5.2: Increased Reliance on Contractors and Part-Time Employees
Management must both define and carefully consider the common tradeoffs in employing a part-time or contract-based workforce.
Learning Objective
Analyze the value captured through employing contractors and part-time employees as a human resource strategy
Key Points
- Part-time employees work 35 or fewer hours a week and generally don’t receive benefits from their employers.
- Contractors are independent organizations/individuals that companies hire on a short-term basis, removing the burden of paying for their training, benefits, or employment taxes.
- While there are clear benefits to employing a part-time or contract-based workforce (limited benefits and training costs, lower commitment and risk exposure, etc.), there are opportunity costs as well (employee buy-in, long-term employment development, etc.).
- Both departmental managers and human resource managers must discuss and weigh the benefits and drawbacks of offering a job part-time, full-time, or on a contractual basis. It is a strategic decision with high cost exposure.
Key Term
- contractor
-
A natural person, business, or corporation that provides goods or services to another entity under terms specified in a contract or a verbal agreement.
As companies try to streamline operations and increase profits, human resource professionals are now looking at employees in a different light. In addition to finding the right candidate for the job, they are looking at how to cut costs per employee while still maintaining quality services for clients. The amount of money spent searching for, hiring, compensating and training an employee is examined and used to help determine profits and loss for a company.
As businesses look at new avenues to reduce overall costs, human resources management has evolved to include different types of employment, including more part-time employees and contractors. Particularly in light of the recent banking disaster (2008/2009), trends towards lower cost employment have grown increasingly common. HR professionals and departmental managers must be aware of the tradeoffs and opportunity costs of the models they chose to employ.
Part-time employment trend
In red, we can see that U.S. part-time employment has been on the rise consistently, with a particularly large jump in 2009 as a result of the banks failing to manage risk and the subsequent recession.
Part-Time Employees
While there is no standard definition of an employee in the U.S., most companies define part-time employees as those who work 35 or fewer hours per week. In addition to working fewer hours, part-time employees don’t usually qualify for benefits such as health insurance, 401K, or paid vacation time.
Pros
The benefit of using part-time employees is mainly that the cost per employee for hiring, orientation, and training is less than for full-time workers. Another benefit of employees that work fewer hours is that employers can be more flexible with scheduling. If a position requires long hours to fill, hiring two part-time people can make scheduling easier than with one full-time employee. It also helps avoid overtime or time and a half, thereby reducing overhead for an employer.
Hiring a greater volume of individuals, but for fewer hours each, also provides more diversity in perspective and skills, which potentially drives higher value (though with more managerial time investment required). This can be particularly useful if a manager is looking to ultimately hire one full-timer and first wants to test a few people to assess skills and organizational fit.
Cons
There are downsides to hiring part-time employees as well. Full-time employees often consider their job a career, and will utilize long-term goals such as promotions and overall organizational success as motivators. Full-timers can also be invested in (e.g., through training and education) with more potential for a return on investment. Part-time employees are more transient, and since they’re more likely to come and go, long-term motivational strategies are less effective with part-timers.
Contractors
Unlike full-time and part-time workers, contractors aren’t official employees of the company. They are hired for a specific position or task and consider the organization a client. Contractors often have more than one client to which they offer similar services, and are therefore specialists. As contractors aren’t employees, companies don’t have to offer benefits or pay taxes such as payroll or social security. Contractors invoice the companies they work for, often on a weekly or monthly basis, and pay their own insurance and taxes.
The pros and cons for part-timers are generally the same as for contractors, where specialists are being hired for short-term contracts (and thus are motivated by the completion of a given task as opposed to by the long-term success of their clients).
Positions that are often filled by contractors include:
- Accounting
- Sales
- Construction
- IT (programming, web development, etc.)
- Design (creating ads, logos, etc.)
- Logistics (e.g., Fedex, UPS)
Human Resource Decisions
As always, trade-offs are inherent when making these hiring decisions. HR professionals must discuss with other management to determine what skills are needed over what period of time, and what resources are available annually to fulfill these needs. If it is a long-term project likely to evolve, with complex political and social interactions and relationship building, a full-timer is probably required. If it is a specialized, short-term task, a contractor or part-timer could be more appropriate. Of course, the limitations of resources impact this decision enormously, as the financial collapse underlines via increasing trends in part-time hiring.
7.5.3: Compensation and Competition
Good compensation helps organizations stay competitive in their industry by retaining high-quality employees.
Learning Objective
Assess the intrinsic value of strong compensation packages relative to deriving competitive advantage
Key Points
- It has become standard in today’s market to pay employees wages and benefits through a compensation package.
- Candidates will often pass on a high-wage position for one that combines wages and benefits.
- Companies need to balance compensation packages, which help acquire and keep quality employees without incurring unsustainable costs.
Key Terms
- Compensation
-
The total wages and benefits paid to an employee or contractor for a given job or contract.
- benefits
-
Non-wage compensation that is offered to at least 80 percent of the staff.
Employees are invaluable resources for an organization. Ensuring the welfare and happiness of employees can make them more productive and less likely to leave the company. This is not only an internal consideration but also a competitive one. Securing and retaining top talent is not unlike securing and retaining customers, where effectively identifying the appropriate target and sustaining that relationship lowers long-term costs and increases brand value.
One of the key instruments in attracting and keeping employees is creating an effective compensation package. Compensation must therefore be both competitive and well-designed to meet the needs of the customer (in this case, the employee). Human resources (HR), in conjunction with the hiring manager, is tasked with this process.
Components of Compensation
Compensation is what employees receive for the work they perform at a company. Compensation can come in the form of cash as well as benefits (e.g., health insurance).
Compensation and health insurance
Employers think about the total compensation cost of employees and that calculation considers what they pay in health insurance premiums, in addition to salaries and wages. Since insurance premiums continue to grow rapidly, this cost is increasingly replacing other forms of compensation. The Council of Economic Advisors predicts that eventually wages will actually be reduced in real (inflation-adjusted) terms as the increase in insurance premiums will require reductions in non-insurance compensation. Health insurance premiums are thus a cause of salary and wage growth stagnation for much of the population in the U.S.
The current trend for organizations is to compensate employees with a combination of wages and benefits. Candidates often require a compensation package that includes benefits as a perk for employment, and may pass on a position with a higher salary if a competitor is offering a lower salary and a benefits package. These benefits generally revolve around healthcare and dental coverage, employee discounts, retirement planning, educational benefits, stock options, and other forms of additional compensation.
Compensation and Competitiveness
Compensation can be a two-edged sword if it is not managed properly. On one hand, a high base salary and a lucrative benefits package can help an organization keep and retain high-quality employees. On the other hand, high levels of compensation create high overhead for the company. In addition, attracting employees purely through offering high levels of compensation has disadvantages; these employees may have little attachment to the intrinsics of the job and may leave as soon as they find a better offer elsewhere.
Companies need to find a balance when creating a compensation package to attract quality employees and keep overhead low. To identify this balance, companies must look at the structure of the wages within the organization, the compensation common in their industry, as well as their strengths and those of their competitors. By looking at these factors an organization can attract the employees it needs to maintain a competitive advantage and keep employee turnover low.
7.5.4: The Importance of Fringe Benefits
Hiring and retaining employee talent is a critical factor in success, and providing fringe benefits can be an effective tool in this process.
Learning Objective
Identify the critical importance of providing strong benefits packages, particularly in light of current external factors (e.g., health care costs)
Key Points
- Most employees expect some form of nonmonetary benefits in addition to wages.
- In order to be competitive in their industry, companies can offer various fringe benefits to attract and retain employees. Benefits, if well managed, can be a source of competitive hiring practices.
- With the increase in healthcare costs, employees are trending more towards jobs with benefits that will assist them with covering these costs. Companies also capture scale economies when negotiating with insurance companies, lowering cost per employee.
Key Term
- fringe benefits
-
Various forms of nonwage compensation provided to employees in addition to their normal wages or salaries.
A combination of wages and benefits such as health insurance, vacation time, and retirement plans have become an expected form of compensation for today’s employees. As the search for high-quality workers becomes more difficult and health care costs increase, it has become important to offer fringe benefits to gain a competitive advantage. Common benefits include the following:
- Relocation assistance
- Sick leave
- Company cars
- Medical and dental insurance plans
- Vacation/paid leave
- Profit sharing
- Retirement plans
- Leisure activities on work time, such as in-office exercise facilities
- Long-term and life insurance
- Education funding
- Legal-assistance plans
- Child-care plans
- Miscellaneous employee discounts
- Free lunches at work
Rising Healthcare Costs
Healthcare costs have risen at a rate that makes it difficult for governments, businesses, and individuals to keep up. Without health insurance, individuals can easily be forced into poverty by trying to obtain medical care on their own.
International health care cost comparison
The above chart underlines the struggle in the United States to pay for health care: U.S. healthcare costs exceed those of other countries relative to the size of the economy (GDP). Health care, due to poor management of the industry, is a leading cause of poverty in the U.S. and is a crucial benefit companies can offer employees.
While the cost negatively impacts businesses, it also offers an opportunity through competitive advantage. This is to say, organizations can capture lower health insurance costs per employee due to scale economies, allowing organizations an important bargaining chip in the hiring process.
Stock Options
Another key benefit for top talent is the offering of stock options. While stock as compensation has unique taxation rules, which can make it more or less attractive for specific people, it also has the added benefit of motivating the employee (particularly top management) to work to achieve broader organizational success. Stock options essentially mean ownership of the company, and this company ownership (i.e., equity) drives positive employee behavior.
7.5.5: The Evolution of Labor Relations
Human resource management must carefully monitor the labor relations and regulations in all of the geographic regions where they hire.
Learning Objective
Explain the way in which labor relations and labor unions evolve and change over time, alongside the implications of the negotiation process between employers and employees.
Key Points
- A trade union or labor union is an organization dedicated to promoting employee rights and improving employee welfare in a given organization or industry; this is the fulcrum of labor relations.
- The prevalence of unions, both from a geographic and industry standpoint, often significantly impacts the welfare and wage propositions of a substantial number of employees.
- Human resource professionals need to closely monitor changes in labor relations, both to understand the most recent hiring practices and to ensure compliance (if applicable) with union rules and regulations.
- In 2010, union membership in the U.S. hovered around 11%. This is down substantially from historic numbers, and is the lowest in 70 years in the U.S.
Key Term
- labor relations
-
The study and practice of managing unionized employment situations.
The prevalence of unions, both from a geographic and industry standpoint, often significantly impacts the welfare and wage propositions of a substantial number of employees. Unionization is hotly debated, as unions employ collective bargaining on behalf of employees independently from company human resource (HR) policies. The legislative backing and legal framework is complex and ever evolving, both domestically and abroad. HR professionals need to closely monitor this evolution, both to understand the most recent hiring practices and to ensure compliance (if applicable) with union rules and regulations.
The Definition of Labor Relations
While the term is used broadly and in many contexts, labor relations, for our purposes, is the study and practice of managing unionized employment situations. This definition can be expanded to include history, law, sociology, management, and political science, as the existence, evolution, and implications of union development have substantial political, economic, and legal implications.
The Declining Unions
an academic field and in business application. Laissez-faire attitudes and the promotion of free market dynamics are, in many ways, contrary to the legal creation of employee rights. Whether this loss of interest in collective bargaining is a good thing or a bad thing is up for debate, and the power of trade unions is integral to this discussion. Labor relations is a subarea of industrial relations, which is the field of employee/employer relationships. Industrial relations was a more prevalent field of study historically, however, and has seen substantial decline both as an academic field and as a business application. Laissez-faire attitudes and the promotion of free-market dynamics are, in many ways, contrary to the legal creation of employee rights. Whether this loss of interest in collective bargaining is a good thing or a bad thing is up for debate, and the power of trade unions is integral to this discussion.
A trade union or labor union is an organization dedicated to promoting employee rights and improving employee welfare in a given organization or industry. This is the fulcrum of labor relations, and thus central to the discussion of how it is evolving today (compared to how it evolved in the past).
U.S. union membership over time
The above chart is extremely useful in understanding labor-relations trends over the past century or so in the United States. As you can see, the 1930s, during the Great Depression, is when unions began to grow in prominence and power. This held strong for many years, and the decline of unions is a very recent trend in labor relations. Many correlate this decline in unions with the economic struggles of 2008–2009, noting that the rise and fall is between the two worst economic collapses in history.
In 2010, union membership in the U.S. hovered around 11%. This is down substantially from historic numbers, and is the lowest in 70 years in the U.S. Finland, on the other hand, has union participation of 70% (2010) and Canada has 27.5% (2010). Union workers in the United States make anywhere between 10% and 30% more than nonunion workers in the same job, underlining why businesses often oppose unionization and workers often support it.
Chapter 6: Groups, Teams, and Teamwork
6.1: Defining Teams and Teamwork
6.1.1: Defining a Team
A team is a group of people who collaborate on related tasks toward a common goal.
Learning Objective
Define teams, particularly as they pertain to the business environment or organizational workplace
Key Points
- In a business setting most work is accomplished by teams of individuals. Because of this, it is important for employees to have the skills necessary to work effectively with others.
- Organizations use many kinds of teams, some of which are permanent and some of which are temporary.
- Teams are used to accomplish tasks that are too large or complex to be done by an individual or that require a diverse set of skills and expertise.
Key Term
- team
-
A group of people working toward a common purpose.
A team is a group of people who work together toward a common goal. Teams have defined membership (which can be either large or small) and a set of activities to take part in. People on a team collaborate on sets of related tasks that are required to achieve an objective. Each member is responsible for contributing to the team, but the group as a whole is responsible for the team’s success.
Teams in the Workplace
Sports teams are a good example of how teams work. For instance, a basketball team has individual players who each contribute toward the goal of winning a game. Similarly, in business settings most work is accomplished by teams of individuals who collaborate on activities with defined outcomes. Because teams are so prevalent in business organizations, it is important for employees to have the skills necessary to work effectively with others.
Organizations typically have many teams, and an individual is frequently a member of more than one team. Some teams are permanent and are responsible for ongoing activities. For instance, a team of nurses in a maternity ward provides medical services to new mothers. While patients come and go, the tasks involved in providing care remain stable. In other cases a team is formed for a temporary purpose: these are called project teams and have a defined beginning and end point linked to achieving a particular one-time goal.
The Purpose of Teams
Organizations form teams to accomplish tasks that are too large or complex for an individual to complete. Teams are also effective for work that requires different types of skills and expertise. For example, the development of new products involves understanding customer needs as well as how to design and build a product that will meet these needs. Accordingly, a new product-development team would include people with customer knowledge as well as designers and engineers.
6.1.2: Defining Teamwork
Teamwork involves a set of interdependent activities performed by individuals who collaborate toward a common goal.
Learning Objective
Identify the processes and activities by which team work gets done
Key Points
- Teamwork involves shared responsibility and collaboration toward a common outcome.
- Teamwork processes can be divided into three categories: the transition process, action processes, and interpersonal processes.
- Five characteristics of effective teamwork are shared values, mutual trust, inspiring vision, skills, and rewards.
Key Terms
- teamwork
-
The cooperative effort of a group of people seeking a common end.
- conflict resolution
-
Working to resolve different opinions in a team environment.
- conflict
-
Friction, disagreement, or discord arising between individuals or groups.
Teamwork involves a set of tasks and activities performed by individuals who collaborate with each other to achieve a common objective. That objective can be creating a product, delivering a service, writing a report, or making a decision. Teamwork differs from individual work in that it involves shared responsibility for a final outcome.
Teamwork
Human skill involves the ability to work effectively as a member of a group and to build cooperative effort in a team.
Teamwork Processes
While the substance of the tasks involved in teamwork may vary from team to team, there are three processes that are common to how teamwork gets done: the transition process, action processes, and interpersonal processes. During each of these processes, specific sets of activities occur.
1. The transition process is the phase during which a team is formed. Activities include:
- Mission analysis: establishing an understanding of the overall objective
- Goal specification: identifying and prioritizing the tasks and activities needed to achieve the mission
- Strategy formulation: developing a course of action to reach the goals and achieve the mission
2. Action processes comprise the phase during which a team performs its work. Activities include:
- Monitoring milestones and goals: tracking progress toward completion of tasks and activities
- Monitoring systems: tracking the use of resources such as people, technology, and information
- Coordination: organizing and managing the flow of team activities and tasks
- Team monitoring and support: assisting individuals with their tasks by, for example, providing feedback and coaching
3. Interpersonal processes include activities that occur during both the transition and action processes. These include:
- Conflict management: establishing conditions to avoid disagreement and resolving conflict when it occurs
- Motivation and confidence building: generating the willingness and ability of individuals to work together to achieve the mission
- Affect management: helping team members to regulate their emotions as they work together
Characteristics of Effective Teamwork
An effective team accomplishes its goals in a way that meets the standards set by those who evaluate its performance. For instance, a team may have a goal of delivering a new product within six months on a budget of $100,000. Even if the team finishes the project on time, it can be considered effective only if it stayed within its expected budget.
Effective teamwork requires certain conditions to be in place that will increase the likelihood that each member’s contributions—and the effort of the group as a whole—will lead to success. Effective teams share five characteristics:
- Shared values:a common set of beliefs and principles about how and why the team members will work together
- Mutual trust: confidence between team members that each puts the best interest of the team ahead of individual priorities
- Inspiring vision:a clear direction that motivates commitment to a collective effort
- Skill/talent:the combined abilities and expertise to accomplish the required tasks and work productively with others
- Rewards:recognition of achievement toward objectives and reinforcement of behavior that supports the team’s work
Effective teamwork requires that people work as a cohesive unit. These five characteristics can help individuals collaborate with others by focusing their efforts in a common direction and achieving an outcome that can only be reached by working together.
6.1.3: The Role of Teams in Organizations
By combining various employees into strategic groups, a team-based organization can create synergies through team processes.
Learning Objective
Recognize the role of a team in an organization, and illustrate the team process.
Key Points
- Due to global and technological factors, the importance of combining competencies and building strong teams is increasing.
- By combining resources (both across management levels and functional disciplines), organizations can create unique synergies and core competencies.
- Cross-functional teams utilize a wide variety of unique skill sets to build teams capable of achieving complex objectives.
- When carrying out a process in a team, it’s important to set objectives and strategy, carry out objectives, and build strong interpersonal efficiency.
Key Terms
- cross-functional teams
-
Teams with members that have diverse skill sets, enabling synergy across core competencies.
- synergy
-
The ability for a group to accomplish more together than they could accomplish individually.
The Modern Organization
Teams are increasingly common and relevant from an organizational perspective, as globalization and technology continue to expand organizational scope and strategy. In organizations, teams can be constructed both vertically (varying levels of management) and horizontally (across functional disciplines). In order to maintain synergy between employees and organize resources, teams are increasingly common across industries and organizational types.
The Role of Teams
The primary role of a team is to combine resources, competencies, skills, and bandwidth to achieve organizational objectives. The underlying assumption of a well-functioning team is one of synergy, which is to say that the output of a team will be greater than the sum of each individual’s contribution without a team architecture in place. As a result, teams are usually highly focused groups of employees, with the role of achieving specific tasks to support organizational success.
Cross-Functional Teams
Some organizations have a need for strong cross-functional teams that enable various functional competencies to align on shared objectives. This is particularly common at technology companies, where a number of specific disciplines are combined to produce complex products and/or services.
Team Processes
When considering the role of a team, it’s important to understand the various processes that teams will carry out over time. At the beginning of a team set up (or when redirecting the efforts of a team), a transitional process is carried out. Once the team has set strategic goals, they can begin progressing towards the completion of those goals operationally. The final team process is one of interpersonal efficiency, or refining the team dynamic for efficiency and success.
More specifically, these processes can be described as follows:
Transitional Process
- Mission analysis
- Goal specification
- Strategy formulation
Action Process
- Monitoring progress toward goals
- Systems monitoring
- Team monitoring and backup behavior
- Coordination
Interpersonal Process
- Conflict management
- Motivation and confidence building
- Affect management
The Impact of Team Building
This chart allows you to visualize data from a study on team-building, and its impact on team performance. Building a strong organizational culture for successful teams requires commitment to team processes.
6.1.4: Types of Teams
Depending on its needs and goals, a company can use a project team, a virtual team, or a cross-functional team.
Learning Objective
Recognize the differences between types of teams and their uses
Key Points
- An organization may use different types of teams depending on the work that needs to be accomplished to meet its goals.
- Common teams include project teams, virtual teams, and cross-functional teams.
- Project teams are created for a defined period of time to achieve a specific goal.
- Virtual teams have members who work in separate locations that are often geographically dispersed.
- Cross-functional teams bring together people with diverse expertise and knowledge from different departments or specialties.
Key Term
- cross-functional team
-
A group of people from different departments in an organization working toward a common goal.
Depending on its needs and goals, a company may use different types of teams. Some efforts are limited in duration and have a well-defined outcome. Other work requires the participation of people from different locations. Still other projects depend on people with a broad and diverse range of knowledge and expertise.
Different Kinds of Teams
Teams may be permanent or temporary, and team members may come from the same department or different ones. Common types of teams found in organizations include project teams, virtual teams, and cross-functional teams.
- Project teams are created for a defined period of time to achieve a specific goal. Members of a project team often belong to different functional groups and are chosen to participate in the team based on specific skills they can contribute to the project. Software development is most commonly done by project teams.
- Virtual teams have members located in different places, often geographically dispersed, who come together to achieve a specific purpose. Academic researchers often work on virtual teams with colleagues at other institutions.
- Cross-functional teams combine people from different areas, such as marketing and engineering, to solve a problem or achieve a goal. Healthcare services are frequently delivered by interdisciplinary teams of nurses, doctors, and other medical specialists.
It is common for an organization to have many teams, including teams of several types. Effective teamwork depends on choosing the type of team best suited to the work that needs to be accomplished.
6.1.5: Advantages of Teamwork
The benefits of teamwork include increased efficiency, the ability to focus different minds on the same problem, and mutual support.
Learning Objective
Identify the sources of benefits teamwork creates
Key Points
- When a team works well together as a unit they are able to accomplish more than the individual members can do alone.
- Teamwork creates higher quality outcomes that are more efficient, thoughtful, and effective, as well as faster.
- Individuals benefit from teamwork through mutual support and a great sense of accomplishment.
Key Terms
- diverse
-
Consisting of many different elements; various.
- efficiency
-
The extent to which a resource, such as electricity, is used for the intended purpose; the ratio of useful work to energy expended.
The primary benefit of teamwork is that it allows an organization to achieve something that an individual working alone cannot. This advantage arises from several factors, each of which accounts for a different aspect of the overall benefit of teams.
Higher Quality Outcomes
Teamwork creates outcomes that make better use of resources and produce richer ideas.
- Higher efficiency: Since teams combine the efforts of individuals, they can accomplish more than an individual working alone.
- Faster speed: Because teams draw on the efforts of many contributors, they can often complete tasks and activities in less time.
- More thoughtful ideas: Each person who works on a problem or set of tasks may bring different information and knowledge to bear, which can result in solutions and approaches an individual would not have identified.
- Greater effectiveness: When people coordinate their efforts, they can divide up roles and tasks to more thoroughly address an issue. For example, in hospital settings teamwork has been found to increase patient safety more than when only individual efforts are made to avoid mishaps.
Better Context for Individuals
The social aspect of teamwork provides a superior work experience for team members, which can motivate higher performance.
- Mutual support: Because team members can rely on other people with shared goals, they can receive assistance and encouragement as they work on tasks. Such support can encourage people to achieve goals they may not have had the confidence to have reached on their own.
- Greater sense of accomplishment: When members of a team collaborate and take collective responsibility for outcomes, they can feel a greater sense of accomplishment when they achieve a goal they could not have achieved if they had worked by themselves.
The total value created by teamwork depends on the overall effectiveness of the team effort. While we might consider simply achieving a goal a benefit of teamwork, by taking advantage of what teamwork has to offer, an organization can gain a broader set of benefits.
6.1.6: Hazards of Teamwork
Teams face challenges to effective collaboration and achieving their goals.
Learning Objective
Identify the common pitfalls teams can encounter that limit their performance
Key Points
- The social aspect of collaborative work makes teams vulnerable to pitfalls that can hurt performance.
- Common pitfalls involve poor group dynamics such as weak norms, lack of trust, and interpersonal conflict.
- Poor team-design choices such as size, skill sets, and assignment of roles can negatively affect a team’s ability to complete tasks.
Key Term
- groupthink
-
A process of reasoning or decision making by a group, especially one characterized by uncritical acceptance of or conformity to a perceived majority view.
The collaborative nature of teams means they are subject to pitfalls that individuals working alone do not face. Team members may not always work well together, and focusing the efforts of individuals on shared goals presents challenges to completing tasks as efficiently and effectively as possible. The following pitfalls can lead to team dysfunction and failure to achieve important organizational objectives.
Individuals Shirking Their Duties
Since team members share responsibility for outcomes, some individuals may need to do additional work to make up for those not contributing their share of effort. This can breed resentment and foster other negative feelings that can make the team less effective. One cause of this is the failure of the team to establish clear norms of accountability for individual contributions to the group effort.
Skewed Influence over Decisions
Sometimes an individual or small number of team members can come to dominate the rest of the group. This could be due to strong personalities, greater abilities, or differences in status among members. When individuals either do not feel listened to or believe their ideas are not welcome, they may reduce their efforts.
Lack of Trust
Effective collaboration requires team members to have confidence that everyone shares a set of goals. When that belief is missing, some individuals may not feel comfortable sharing their ideas with the group. Lack of trust can also lead to miscommunication and misunderstandings, which can undermine the group’s efforts.
Conflicts Hamper Progress
While conflicts are a common aspect of working together and can even be beneficial to a team, they can also negatively affect team performance. For instance, conflict can delay progress on tasks or create other inefficiencies in getting work done.
Lack of Teaming Skills
When team members do not have the collaboration skills needed to work well with others, the overall ability of the team to function can be limited. As a result, conflicts may be more likely to arise and more difficult to resolve.
Missing Task Skills
A team that does not have the expertise and knowledge needed to complete all its tasks and activities will have trouble achieving its goals. Poor team composition can lead to delays, higher costs, and increased risk.
Stuck in Formation
Sometimes the group cannot move from defining goals and outlining tasks to executing its work plan. This may be due to poor specification of roles, tasks, and priorities.
Too Many Members
The size of the team can sometimes affect its ability to function effectively. Coordination and communication are more complex in a larger team than in a smaller one. This complexity can mean that decisions must take into account greater amounts of information, meetings are more challenging to schedule, and tasks can take longer to complete.
Groupthink
Outcomes can suffer if team members value conflict avoidance and consensus over making the best decisions. People can feel uncomfortable challenging the group’s direction or otherwise speaking up for fear of breaking a team norm. This phenomenon is known as “groupthink.” Groupthink can limit creativity, lead to poor choices, or result in mistakes that might otherwise have been avoidable.
While teams offer many benefits, their effectiveness rests on how well members can avoid common pitfalls or minimize their negative consequences when they occur.
6.1.7: Differences Between Groups and Teams
All teams are groups of individuals, but not all groups are teams.
Learning Objective
Differentiate between a group and a team
Key Points
- A group is two or more individuals who share common interests or characteristics and whose members identify with each other due to similar traits.
- Teams and groups differ in five key ways: task orientation, purpose, interdependence, formal structure, and familiarity among members.
Key Terms
- group
-
A number of things or persons that have some relationship to one another. A subset of a culture or of a society.
- team
-
Any group of people involved in the same activity, especially referring to sports and work.
While all teams are groups of individuals, not all groups are teams. Team members work together toward a common goal and share responsibility for the team’s success. A group is comprised of two or more individuals that share common interests or characteristics, and its members identify with each other due to similar traits. Groups can range greatly in size and scope. For example, members of the millennial generation are a group, but so is a small book club formed by neighbors who enjoy reading.
Groups differ from teams in several ways:
- Task orientation: Teams require coordination of tasks and activities to achieve a shared aim. Groups do not need to focus on specific outcomes or a common purpose.
- Degree of interdependence: Team members are interdependent since they bring to bear a set of resources to produce a common outcome. Individuals in a group can be entirely disconnected from one another and not rely on fellow members at all.
- Purpose: Teams are formed for a particular reason and can be short- or long-lived. Groups can exist as a matter of fact; for example, a group can be comprised of people of the same race or ethnic background.
- Degree of formal structure: Team members’ individual roles and duties are specified and their ways of working together are defined. Groups are generally much more informal; roles do not need to be assigned and norms of behavior do not need to develop.
- Familiarity among members: Team members are aware of the set of people they collaborate with, since they interact to complete tasks and activities. Members of a group may have personal relationships or they may have little knowledge of each other and no interactions whatsoever.
Sometimes it is difficult to draw a distinction between a team and a group. For instance, a set of coworkers might meet on occasion to discuss an issue or provide input on a decision. While such meetings typically have an agenda and thus a purpose and some structure, we would not necessarily think of those in attendance as a team. The activity scope and duration is just too small to involve the amount of coordination of resources and effort that teamwork requires.
6.2: Types of Teams
6.2.1: Task Forces
A task force is a temporary team created to address a single piece of work, a problem, or a goal.
Key Points
- The term “task force” originated in the United States Navy. A naval task force was designed to provide flexibility in operations since it could be formed without the reorganization or repurposing of the fleet.
- Today, many organizations use task forces to bring together experts to assess, make recommendations, or take other actions to address a single issue or topic.
Key Terms
- substitute
-
A replacement or stand-in for something that achieves a similar result or purpose.
- entrant
-
A participant.
“Task force” is a phrase that originated in the United States Navy during World War II. At the time, naval operations were performed by formal groupings such as fleets or squadrons, but the war created new challenges for the U.S. Navy that demanded flexibility in how resources were used. Formation of a task force allowed officers and equipment that formally belonged to different groups to come together for a single specific purpose, without reassigning responsibility for those assets or requiring the reorganization or repurposing of the fleet. Task forces were temporary and easily disbanded after their work was complete.
Today, in government, business, and other arenas, task forces are special ad-hoc committees created especially to deal with single problems or issues. For example, the U.S. Preventive Services Task Force (USPSTF) comprises independent national experts in prevention that use evidence-based and clinical preventative techniques to improve health outcomes for Americans. Examples of this kind of care would be routine screenings for disease, such as mammograms. As in the USPSTF, members of a task force are typically experts, and the group operates with a specific charge and within a specific time frame. The task force usually begins by assessing the factors that relate to its work. Next, the team typically identifies and analyzes possible solutions and develops recommendations and plans for implementing them.
Generally, a task force will not have responsibility for implementing its recommendations once they are made, although individual team members may have a role in doing so. Task forces do not have the power to compel others to accept their recommendations. Indeed, the results of their work may be accepted in part, rejected in part, or even ignored altogether.
A team created by political parties to deal with campaign finance reform is an example of a task force. The task force is expected to study the issue, assess possible actions to be taken, and then make its recommendations in the form of a report. The results of the task force’s efforts then might be used by legislators to draft laws that would redefine acceptable practices for funding political campaigns.
6.2.2: Cross-Functional Teams
A cross-functional team comprises people from different departments and with special areas of expertise working to achieve a common goal.
Learning Objective
Explain the purpose and benefit of cross-functional teams
Key Points
- Cross-functional teams combine people with different areas of expertise from separate departments such as finance, human resources, and marketing.
- The range of knowledge on cross-functional teams creates a broader perspective that can lead to new ideas and better solutions and also avert risks and poor outcomes.
- The diversity of cross-functional teams can create challenges to effective communication and collaboration.
Cross-functional teams include members who bring different types of knowledge and experience from areas such as finance, engineering, human resources, and marketing. These teams occasionally may draw on subject-matter expertise from outside the organization by inviting external consultants or customers to join a team. By combining people with diverse task-related backgrounds, cross-functional teams can take a broader approach to addressing a problem or completing a set of activities. This can lead to new ideas and more creative solutions. It can also make a team’s efforts more efficient and effective by including information that can help avert risks or poor outcomes.
Team
Cross-functional teams combine people with different knowledge and perspectives.
Example of a Cross-Functional Team
Many business activities require cross-functional collaboration to achieve successful outcomes. A common example is service improvement. To better meet customer expectations and achieve higher satisfaction rates, a company first needs to understand what customers are looking for. The marketing department is responsible for gathering that type of customer data. Operations staff members have expertise in how to design the process for delivering a service, so they would need to be involved in making any changes to that system. The human resources department oversees training, and employees may need new skills to succeed with the new process. If any information technology is involved in supporting the service improvement, then people from that department should be on the team. Finally, accountants may be needed to identify any new costs and additional savings. In this example, the team brings together people from five different functional areas.
Challenges of Cross-Functional Teams
Even though diversity of knowledge and perspective is the big advantage of cross-functional teams, it can also be a source of problems. People who work in the same discipline or area have a common understanding and a terminology for their work that is unknown to others. Shorthand expressions or common acronyms that are familiar to one person may be confusing to others. This can make communication between members of a cross-functional team difficult and subject to misunderstanding.
Cross-functional teams may be more likely than less complex teams to have members with divergent perspectives on how work gets done. For instance, engineers value precision and attention to detail, while those who come from more creative areas such as marketing may prefer a less rigid approach. These differences in styles may also be reflected in the personalities of team members. It can take extra effort to collaborate when you have to take into account the preferences and styles of widely dissimilar individuals.
In some organizations certain departments have more status than others. A common distinction is between those in areas that contribute directly to revenue, such as sales and manufacturing, and those that do not, including support departments like purchasing and IT. Perceived differences in relative importance or credibility can undermine the effectiveness of cross-functional collaboration.
6.2.3: Virtual Teams
A virtual team is a temporary group created to accomplish specific tasks by using technology to collaborate remotely.
Learning Objective
Differentiate among the six most common types of virtual teams and discuss the challenges they face
Key Points
- Virtual teams rely upon computing and communications technology, especially Internet access.
- Virtual teams are prevalent in today’s workforce, as they can be cost-effective and take advantage of technology and the availability of distributed employees.
- In order to function properly, virtual teams demand effective coordination in the form of project management.
- There are six common types of virtual teams: networked teams, parallel teams, project development teams, functional teams, service teams, and offshore information-systems development teams.
Key Term
- Task processes
-
The various ways that the virtual team accomplishes work: communication, coordination of work efforts, and a fit between the technology and the task at hand.
A virtual team is a group of individuals in different geographic locations who use technology to collaborate on work tasks and activities. The use of this kind of team has become prevalent in organizations due to the reduced costs of technology, the increased availability of collaborative technologies, the shift toward globalization in business, and greater use of outsourcing and temporary workers. Virtual teams require effective project management to facilitate communication and coordinate member activities.
Types of Virtual Teams
There are six common types of virtual teams.
- Networked teams are loosely organized; they are usually formed to address a short-term objective and are dissolved after they accomplish that objective. Similar to task forces and cross-functional teams, networked teams frequently bring together people with different expertise to bring broad perspectives to discussing an issue or problem.
- Parallel teams are highly task-focused and draw on individuals from different functional areas and locations. While they generally complete their work on a defined schedule, parallel teams may not be disbanded but may instead remain to take on a subsequent set of tasks.
- Project development teams work on complex sets of activities over a long time period. They may be formed to develop new products, deliver a new technology system, or redesign operational processes.
- Functional teams are comprised of people from the same department or area who collaborate on regular and ongoing activities, examples of which include providing training, executing marketing initiatives, and conducting research and development.
- Service teams work with customers to address their purchasing and post-purchase needs. These teams enable a company to provide consistent service, often 24/7, to support customers wherever they are.
- Finally, information systems development (ISD) teams make use of lower-cost labor, typically offshore, to develop software. They are typically created by dividing up the work of larger projects and assigning specific pieces to independent contractors or teams of developers.
Challenges of Virtual Teams
The geographic dispersion of team members and the lack of regular face-to-face meetings present three challenges to the success of virtual teams.
- Coordination of tasks: A virtual team needs a clear set of objectives and a plan for how to achieve them in order to focus and direct collaboration among team members. They need clear guidelines and norms for how individuals will accomplish their work. Even more than traditional teams where individuals work in the same location and time zone, virtual teams require effective project management to facilitate communication and coordination of tasks among members.
- Team-member skills: Beyond their functional expertise and experience, virtual team members need to be effective users of technologies such as video conferencing and other collaboration tools. They must learn to communicate well in writing to avoid misinterpretations that might be more easily avoided in a face-t0-face conversation. When virtual teams cross national boundaries, differences in language and culture require the ability to negotiate barriers to communication and collaboration.
- Relationships: Virtual team members need to build relationships with colleagues through the use of technology, which can often seem impersonal. Distance and lack of regular personal interaction can make it difficult for trust and group cohesion to develop. When these are missing, team members can lose focus and collaboration can suffer, leading to delays, conflict, and other performance issues.
6.2.4: Self-Managing Teams
A self-managing team is a group of employees working together who are accountable for all or most aspects of their task.
Learning Objective
Compare the advantages and disadvantages of self-managing teams.
Key Points
- Self-managing teams share work tasks and supportive or managerial tasks.
- Because they are both responsible for their outcomes and in control of their decision-making process, members of the self-managing team may be more motivated and productive than traditional teams.
- Self-managing teams are different from self-directed teams. Self-managing teams work toward goals that are set for them by outside leadership, whereas self-directed teams work toward a common goal that they define.
Key Term
- self-managing team
-
A group with a common purpose in which tasks and responsibilities are determined by the members.
A self-managing team is a group of employees working together who are accountable for most or all aspects of their task. A self-managing team has considerable discretion over how its work gets done. This means the majority of key decisions about activities are made by people with direct knowledge of, and who are most affected by, those choices. Self-managing teams are distinct from self-directed teams. While the latter define their own goals, the scope of a self-managing team’s authority is limited by goals that are established by others.
Self-management
This diagram illustrates the idea that virtual, management, and work teams can be empowered by being allowed to self-manage and monitor the quality of their own output.
Advantages of Self-Managing Teams
Organizations in various fields use self-managing teams to boost productivity and motivate employees. Members of self-managing teams plan, coordinate, direct, and control their activities. For example, they set the work schedule and assign tasks. In this way they share both the managerial and technical tasks. Team members also share responsibility for their output as a whole, which can inspire pride in their accomplishments. Because they eliminate a level of management, the use of self-managing teams can better allocate resources and even lower costs.
Disadvantages of Self-Managing Teams
There are also potential drawbacks to self-managing teams. The lack of hierarchical authority means that personal relationships can overwhelm good judgment. It can also lead to conformity, which can inhibit creativity or make it difficult for team members to be critical of each other. Self-management adds a layer of responsibility that can be time-consuming and require skills that some team members may not have. Members of a self-managing team often need training to assist them in succeeding at jobs that have a broad scope of duties.
6.3: Building Successful Teams
6.3.1: Setting Team Goals and Providing Team Feedback
Periodic performance assessments help a team identify areas for improvement so it can better achieve its goals.
Learning Objective
Apply effective performance management procedures to the process of goal setting and feedback
Key Points
- How a team functions is as important an indicator of its performance as the quality of what it produces.
- Periodic assessments help a team identify its strengths and weakness and create plans to improve how members work together.
- Methods of collecting assessment data include discussions, surveys, and personality diagnostic tests.
Key Terms
- implement
-
To bring about; to put into practice.
- feedback
-
Critical assessment of information produced.
- performance
-
The act of performing; carrying into execution or action; achievement; accomplishment.
Setting Goals and Providing Feedback
The way team members function as a group is as important to the team’s success as the quality of what it produces. Because how they work together is so important to achieving the team’s goals, members need to be attentive to how they interact and collaborate with each other. Periodic self-assessments that consider the team’s progress, how it has gotten there, and where it is headed allow the team to gauge its effectiveness and take steps to improve its performance.
To assess its performance, a team seeks feedback from group members to identify its strengths and its weaknesses. Feedback from the team assessment can be used to identify gaps between what it needs to do to perform effectively and where it is currently. Once they have identified the areas for improvement, members of the team and others (such as managers) can develop a plan to close the gaps.
A team can gather the necessary data by holding a meeting in which members discuss what has gone well and what they would like to change about how they work together. It can be beneficial to have a non–team member such as a supervisor or a member of the human resources department solicit opinions through a brief written survey. The team can then use the results as a starting point for its discussion.
Poor communication and conflict can disrupt a team’s performance, and sometimes these disruptions are caused by personality clashes between members. Another type of team assessment involves using diagnostic tests to identify the dominant personality traits of each member. Characteristics such as being an extrovert or an introvert can shape how people prefer to work and communicate. Having an understanding of personality differences among team members can prove useful for changing how they interact with each other.
6.3.2: Accountability in Teams
Accountability is the acknowledgment and assumption of responsibility for actions, products, decisions, and policies.
Learning Objective
Illustrate the concept of accountability in a team-based work environment
Key Points
- Accountability is the assignment of responsibility for outcomes to an individual or group to create an incentive for performance.
- Teams are accountable for achieving collective goals.
- Individual team members are accountable to each other for their effort and contributions to the team.
- Effective accountability for teams relies on making choices that support the team’s ability to succeed.
Key Term
- accountability
-
The acknowledgment and assumption of responsibility for actions, products, and decisions.
Accountability
Accountability is the acknowledgment and assumption of responsibility for actions, products, and decisions. In a management context, accountability explicitly identifies who is responsible for ensuring that outcomes meet goals and creates incentives for success.
For teams in particular, accountability means that all members share responsibility for their collective output and for their success in achieving their goals. Because teamwork is organized at the collective level rather than on a per-person basis, its results are the sum of each member’s efforts. Organizations often use team-based rewards to hold teams accountable for their work.
Accountability for team members also implies that individuals have a responsibility to each other to complete tasks and contribute to the group effort. One benefit of teamwork is the mutual support and assistance that team members can provide each other. A sense of accountability to the team creates an incentive for individuals to provide help when needed. Since team tasks are interdependent, the quality of one person’s work affects that of the others. Teams use norms and other forms of social pressure to hold one another accountable.
Conditions for Effective Accountability
For accountability to work, teams need to have the resources, skills, and authority to do what they are being held responsible for. If leaders expect teams to accept the blame for failing to achieve an assigned goal, they should ensure that success is within the team’s reach. For this reason, the choices made about goal-setting, team composition, and process design have a direct effect on the degree of responsibility a team can assume for its performance.
Government accountability
Governing authorities have the obligation to report, explain, and answer for resulting consequences of their actions.
6.3.3: Choosing Team Size and Team Members
Team size and composition affect team processes and outcomes.
Learning Objective
Justify the importance of drafting a team that reflects a manageable size and conducive skill sets
Key Points
- The optimal size and composition of teams will vary depending on the team’s purpose and goals.
- Team size should take into account the scope and complexity of required tasks and activities.
- As a whole, team members should bring all the necessary skills and knowledge to meet the team’s goals.
Key Term
- Composition
-
The proportion of different parts to make a whole.
Team size and composition affect team processes and outcomes. The optimal size and composition of teams depends on the scope of the team’s goals. With too few people, a team will not have the resources and skills it needs to complete its tasks. Too many members can make communication and coordination difficult and lead to poor team performance.
Research shows that teams perform best with between five and nine members. Dr. Meredith Belbin did extensive research on teams prior to 1990 in the UK that suggested that the optimum team size is eight roles plus a specialist as needed. Fewer than five members resulted in decreased perspectives and diminished creativity. Membership in excess of twelve resulted in increased conflict and greater potential of subgroups forming that can disrupt team cohesion.
The mix of knowledge and expertise on a team is also important. Individuals should be selected for teams so that as a whole the group has all the expertise needed to achieve its goals. For this reason, cross-functional teams may be larger than groups formed to work on less complex activities. Similarly, a task force charged with making recommendations in a short time frame would benefit from having fewer members.
Teams benefit from similarities in background among members, which can reduce conflict and miscommunication. Having fewer differences can also reduce the amount of time a team takes to become an effective working group since there is less need to adjust individual work styles. On the other hand, more diversity in skills and experience brings broader perspectives and different approaches to the team’s work. Having members with different skill sets also reduces redundancies and allows for the more efficient assignment of people to various teams.
6.3.4: Team Building
Team building is an approach to helping a team become an effective performing unit.
Learning Objective
Identify how to achieve team success and the underlying value of team building from a broader organizational perspective
Key Points
- Team building refers to a wide range of activities intended to help a team become an effective performing unit by increasing members’ awareness of how they interact with each other.
- Team building is important as a team is being formed and can also be valuable after a team has begun its work.
- Activities that facilitate team building include introductory meetings, collaborative games, simulations, and retreats.
Key Terms
- team
-
A group of people linked in a common purpose.
- retreat
-
An event during which people shift focus from their daily routines and responsibilities to personal or group development.
Team building refers to a wide range of activities intended to help a team become an effective performing unit. To achieve this, team building aims to increase team members’ awareness and understanding of their working relationships by focusing on their interactions with each other. The purpose is to create a cohesive group from a set of individuals and avoid common pitfalls that can undermine a team, such as conflict, miscommunication, and lack of trust.
Team-building activities require the participation of all team members. These often take place when a team is first created and can include activities such as the team working on a brief exercise to begin the process of collaboration or individuals simply introducing themselves. Sometimes organizations use more intensive and time-consuming activities such as off-site, day-long retreats with an agenda that can include interpersonal bonding exercises, simulations, personality and communication style assessments, and group-dynamics games. The human resources department may coordinate team building, though sometimes companies hire consultants or trainers skilled in facilitating those types of activities.
A team can also benefit from team building after its work has begun. Sometimes teams recognize that members are missing abilities that make collaboration easier, such as problem solving or conflict-resolution skills. Training sessions that address these deficiencies build the team’s ability to work together. After people have been working together for a while, social norms can develop that interfere with a team’s performance. Individuals might be afraid to challenge decisions if it has become unacceptable to question a team’s leader, or work habits such as tardiness to meetings may have become commonplace. A discussion among team members creates an opportunity to address factors that are standing in the way of their working together effectively.
6.3.5: Stages of Team Development
The Forming–Storming–Norming–Performing model of group development was first proposed by Bruce Tuckman in 1965.
Learning Objective
Evaluate each of the stages in team development for opportunities, threats and strategy
Key Points
- Teams move through a series of four phases—from when they are formed to when their work is complete.
- During the forming stage, a the team discusses it purpose, defines and assigns tasks, establishes timelines, and begins forming personal relationships.
- The often-contentious storming stage is the period when team members clarify their goals and the strategy for achieving them.
- The norming stage is when the team establishes its values for how individuals will interact and collaborate.
- Performing is the stage of team development when team members have productive relationships and are able to communicate and coordinate effectively and efficiently.
- While teams move through the four stages in sequence, the phases may overlap or be repeated.
Key Terms
- performing
-
The stage of group development when team members have productive relationships and are able to communicate and coordinate effectively and efficiently.
- forming
-
The stage of group development when the team discusses its purpose, defines and assigns tasks, establishes timelines, and begins forming personal relationships.
- storming
-
The stage of group development when the team clarifies its goals and its strategy for achieving them.
- norming
-
The stage of group development when the team establishes its values for how individuals will interact and collaborate.
Teams move through a series of stages, beginning when they are formed and ending when they are disbanded. Bruce Tuckman identified four distinct phases of team development: forming, storming, norming, and performing. Each has a primary purpose and a common set of interpersonal dynamics among team members. Tuckman proposed that all are inevitable and even necessary parts of a successful team’s evolution.
The Forming Stage
The first step in a team’s life is bringing together a group of individuals. Individuals focus on defining and assigning tasks, establishing a schedule, organizing the team’s work, and other start-up matters. In addition to focusing on the scope of the team’s purpose and how to approach it, individuals in the formation stage are also gathering information and impressions about each other. Since people generally want to be accepted by others, during this period they usually avoid conflict and disagreement. Team members may begin to work on their tasks independently, not yet focused on their relationships with fellow team members.
Jets in formation
All teams go through a life-cycle of stages, identified by Bruce Tuckman as: forming, storming, norming, and performing.
The Storming Stage
Once their efforts are under way, team members need clarity about their activities and goals, as well as explicit guidance about how they will work independently and collectively. This leads to a period known as storming—because it can involve brainstorming ideas and also because it usually causes disruption. During the storming stage members begin to share ideas about what to do and how to do it that compete for consideration. Team members start to open up to each other and confront one another’s ideas and perspectives.
Because storming can be contentious, members who are averse to conflict will find it unpleasant or even painful. This can decrease motivation and effort by drawing attention away from tasks. In some cases storming (i.e., disagreements) can be resolved quickly. Other times a team never leaves this stage and becomes stuck and unable to do its work. Patience and consideration toward team members and their views go a long way toward avoiding this.
The Norming Stage
Successfully moving through the storming stage means that a team has clarified its purpose and strategy for achieving its goals. It now transitions to a period focused on developing shared values about how team members will work together. These norms of collaboration can address issues ranging from when to use certain modes of communication, such as e-mail versus telephone, to how team meetings will be run and what to do when conflicts arise. Norms become a way of simplifying choices and facilitating collaboration, since members have shared expectations about how work will get done.
The Performing Stage
Once norms are established and the team is functioning as a unit, it enters the performing stage. By now team members work together easily on interdependent tasks and are able to communicate and coordinate effectively. There are fewer time-consuming distractions based on interpersonal and group dynamics. For this reason, motivation is usually high and team members have confidence in their ability to attain goals.
While these four stages—forming, storming, norming, and performing—are distinct and generally sequential, they often blend into one another and even overlap. A team may pass through one phase only to return to it. For example, if a new member joins the team there may be a second brief period of formation while that person is integrated. A team may also need to return to an earlier stage if its performance declines. Team-building exercises are often done to help a team through its development process.
6.4: Factors Influencing Team Performance
6.4.1: The Role of Social Norms in Teams
Social norms are shared beliefs about how people should behave that influence team performance.
Learning Objective
Examine the way teams develop and integrate norms, both social and performance based, in the evolution of the team dynamic
Key Points
- Social norms create expectations and standards for acceptable behavior by team members.
- Norms may develop through explicit conversation among team members or emerge implicitly through the way they interact.
- Norms are different from rules in that, while rules are imposed and required, norms are agreed upon and reinforced through interpersonal relationships.
- By creating accountability and reducing uncertainty, norms can help a team perform effectively.
Key Terms
- role
-
The expected behavior of an individual in a society.
- socialize
-
To instruct, usually subconsciously, in the etiquette of a society.
- dysfunctional
-
Counterproductive or disruptive to effective performance.
Social norms are sets of shared beliefs about how people should behave. Teams and other types of groups develop norms to indicate acceptable ways of interacting. Norms create expectations, set standards, and reflect the collective value of the team members. Once formed, norms are not easily changed.
How Norms Emerge
Teams can create norms through discussions among team members. Often, during the forming phase of team development, members will have conversations about standards of behavior for the group. By doing so, teams can identify and develop norms that support their collaboration and productivity.
Both establishing and maintaining norms are indicators of a team’s maturity, made possible only when members have developed working relationships. Effective norms can develop on their own, especially if team members have prior experience working on successful teams. However, without explicit direction dysfunctional norms such as aversion to new ideas or conflict avoidance may take hold.
Norms vs. Rules
Handshaking as a Norm
In some business cultures, it is a norm to shake someone’s hand upon meeting. Here, one businessman shakes another’s hand. In many situations, it would be normative for the businessman to also shake the nearby businesswoman’s hand.
Norms are different from rules. Rules require or prohibit behavior and are typically issued by someone with the authority to direct others to comply and to impose sanctions if they do not. People might agree or disagree with a rule, but they generally are not free to ignore them. In contrast, norms are sets of expectations, not edicts. Team members themselves agree upon and reinforce norms through how they behave with each other. The clearer and more explicit the norms, especially if they are written down, the more effective they are at influencing team members’ behavior.
Benefits of Norms
Through the process of developing shared norms of behavior, team members begin to hold each other accountable for how they contribute to the team. By pointing out when someone violates a norm, the team helps keep its performance on track.
To the extent that team members can rely on norms to shape behavior, the team may experience less uncertainty and more efficiency in how work gets done. For example, a norm about what constitutes timely completion of tasks may help focus individual efforts. Because people act in accordance with norms, their behavior can become predictable and provide stability to the team.
6.4.2: Team Cohesiveness
A group is in a state of cohesion when its members possess bonds linking them to one another and to the group as a whole.
Learning Objective
Explain how team cohesion contributes to team performance
Key Points
- Team cohesion is the degree to which individual members want to contribute to the group’s ability to continue as a functioning work unit.
- Cohesiveness develops over time out of interpersonal and group-level attraction, through collaboration, and as a result of a sense of belonging.
- Cohesive teams communicate more effectively, lead to higher member satisfaction, and can create efficiency in resource allocation.
- There can also be negative consequences to group cohesion. If the social pressures of the group intensify, it may lead to conformity and resistance to change.
Key Terms
- incentive
-
Something that motivates, rouses, or encourages.
- cohesion
-
The state of working together or being united.
Team cohesion is the degree to which individual members want to contribute to the group’s ability to continue as a functioning work unit. Members of cohesive teams have emotional and social bonds that link them to one another and to the group as a whole. These ties enable members to sustain their efforts on behalf of the team and make it more likely that the team will achieve its goals.
How Cohesion Develops
Team cohesion develops over time. Social scientists have explained the phenomenon of group cohesiveness in different ways. Some suggest that cohesiveness among group members develops from a heightened sense of belonging, as well as from collaboration and interdependence. Others note that cohesion comes from the interpersonal and group-level attraction common between people who share similar backgrounds and interests. Because teams have clear boundaries regarding membership, barriers to belonging also contribute to cohesion.
Consequences of Cohesion
Team cohesion is related to a range of positive and negative consequences. Cohesion creates a stronger sense of commitment to goals, which motivates higher individual effort and performance. Members of more cohesive groups tend to communicate with one another in a more positive fashion than those of less cohesive groups. As a result, members of cohesive groups often report higher levels of satisfaction and lower levels of anxiety and tension. This can improve decision making and encourage greater participation. Finally, by maintaining membership cohesive teams are able to continue to pursue new goals once they have fulfilled their original purpose. This makes allocation of resources more efficient, since an existing cohesive team can perform well and more quickly than a newly formed one.
Membership in a cohesive team can also have negative consequences. For example, cohesion can intensify social pressure to conform or limit individual expression. Cohesion can also make adaptation more difficult by making group processes inflexible or resistant to change.
6.4.3: Team Roles
Team roles define how each member of the group relates to the others and contributes to the team’s performance.
Learning Objective
Identify types of team roles and how they contribute to team performance
Key Points
- Team roles are sets of responsibilities and behaviors that establish expectations for how each member contributes to the team’s performance.
- Roles may be assigned formally or assumed by individuals voluntarily.
- Three types of roles are action-oriented, people-oriented, and idea-oriented.
Key Term
- interdependent
-
Mutually dependent; reliant on one another.
A role is a set of related duties and behaviors that exist independently from the person who acts in that role. Roles are part of a team’s structure, and having a role defines each team member’s position in the group relative to the others. Team roles establish expectations about who will do what to help the team succeed.
Roles may be assigned formally to team members or be assumed by individuals voluntarily. Each role is best suited to a person with the necessary skills and experience, since without them it is difficult to achieve credibility or influence on others. Team roles are not necessarily linked to specific work tasks and may even include responsibilities that do not directly contribute to the team’s output.
Common Team Roles
The consultant Meredith Belbin studied high-performing teams and devised a typology based on how members contributed to the group’s success. In his model there are three types of team roles: action-oriented, people-oriented, and idea-oriented.
- Action-oriented roles are pragmatic—they focus on getting things done by taking ideas and turning them in practical plans. We think of these as leadership roles, since what they do can stimulate others to achieve goals.
- People-oriented roles deal with coordinating tasks, supporting communication, and facilitating working relationships. These roles can require negotiation skills, keen perception about human behavior, and good listening abilities.
- Idea-oriented roles involve generating new approaches, analyzing information, and thinking critically about the team’s work. Often these roles are filled by specialists with deep knowledge in a functional area or another type of subject-matter expertise.
Together these roles address both a team’s tasks and how it accomplishes them. Each type of role brings something valuable to how a team functions. When a role is missing because there is no one available to fill it, team performance can suffer.
6.4.4: Team Communication
Effective communication is often a key to the successful performance of team tasks.
Learning Objective
Explain the function of effective communication in team performance
Key Points
- A significant part of teamwork involves oral and written communication.
- Teams establish norms for the modes, frequency, and timing of communication between members and among the group.
- Teams use a mix of centralized and decentralized patterns of communication.
- Barriers to effective team communication include lack of shared vocabulary, poor speaking and writing skills, time constraints, and insensitivity to individual differences.
Key Terms
- feedback
-
Critical assessment of information produced.
- communication
-
The exchange of information between entities.
A major part of teamwork is communication. Team members send and exchange information to convey ideas, generate discussion, prompt action, create understanding, and coordinate activities. Effective communication means transmitting a message so that the recipient understands its content and intention. When team members communicate well, they can avoid common pitfalls such as misunderstandings, lack of trust, and conflict that can undermine team performance.
Team members share information in a variety of ways, including face-t0-face meetings and other forms of verbal communication, as well as in writing—through e-mail, texts, and memos. Teams develop practices for how members will communicate with each other and with the group as a whole. Norms typically emerge about preferred modes, frequency, and timing of communication.
Team communication
The basketball team here communicates by forming a huddle.
Patterns of Communication
Communication patterns describe the flow of information within the group and can be described as centralized or decentralized. When centralized, communication tends to flow from one source to all group members. Centralized communication results in consistent, standardized information being conveyed, but often restricts its flow to one direction. In contrast, decentralized communication means team members share and exchange information directly with each other and with the group. This allows information to flow more freely, but often with less consistency in format or distribution. The results can be incomplete, untimely, or poorly distributed messages. Most teams use a mix of the two approaches, choosing centralized communication for messages that are more complex, urgent, or time sensitive, and decentralized communication when discussion and idea generation are needed.
Barriers to Effective Team Communication
There are several barriers to effective communication within teams. These include lack of shared vocabulary or understanding of key task-related concepts, divergent personal styles of expression, and insensitivity to differences in individual characteristics such as age or gender. Good writing and speaking skills are essential to making oneself well understood. Limited time is often another factor in poor communication; understanding requires attention and effort, and it is easy to be distracted from one message by another. Virtual teams, especially those whose members are widely dispersed, can face additional challenges such as differences in language, culture, and time zones.
6.5: Managing Conflict
6.5.1: Styles of Interpersonal Conflict
Team conflict is a state of discord between individuals that work together.
Learning Objective
Explain the distinction between substantive and affective conflicts and between intra- and inter-organizational conflict
Key Points
- Conflict is a state of discord between people, or groups of people working together, caused by an actual or perceived opposition of needs, values, and/or interests.
- Substantive conflicts deal with aspects of performance or tasks and often relate specifically to the project or goals of a team or organization.
- Affective conflicts, also known as personal conflicts, revolve around personal disagreements or dislikes between individuals in a team.
- Organizational conflict may be intra-organizational, meaning it takes place across departments or within teams, or it may be inter-organizational, meaning it arises from disagreements between two or more organizations.
Key Terms
- affective
-
Relating to, resulting from, or influenced by emotions.
- substantive
-
Of the core essence or essential element of a thing or topic.
Conflict is a feature common to social life. In organizations, conflict is a state of discord caused by the actual or perceived opposition of needs, values, and/or interests between people working together. Conflict on teams takes many forms and can be minor, causing only brief disruption, or major, threatening the team’s ability to function and attain its goals. We can distinguish between two type of conflict: substantive and affective.
Substantive and Affective Conflict
Substantive conflicts deal with aspects of a team’s work. For example, conflicts can arise over questions about an individual’s performance, differing views about the scope of a task or assignment, disparate definitions of acceptable quality, or the nature of a project goal. Other substantive conflicts involve how team members work together. These process conflicts often involve disagreements over the strategies, policies, and procedures the group should use in order to complete its tasks.
Affective conflict relates to trouble that develops in interpersonal relationships among team members. While these personal conflicts emerge as people work together, they may have their roots in factors separate from the team’s purpose and activities. Affective conflicts are often based on personality conflicts, differing communication styles, perceptions about level of effort, or personal dislikes based on negative past experiences.
Intra-Organizational and Inter-Organizational Conflict
Both substantive and affective conflicts can be separated into those that happen within an organization and those that happen between two or more different organizations. Intra-organizational conflicts occur across departments in an organization, within work teams and other groups, and between individuals. Inter-organizational conflicts are disagreements between people—business partners, for example, or other collaborators, vendors, and distributors—in two or more organizations.
Arguing wolves
These wolves are expressing disagreement over territory or having some other type of conflict.
6.5.2: The Impact of Interpersonal Conflict on Team Performance
Conflict can have damaging or productive effects on the performance of a team.
Learning Objective
Analyze the way in which conflict can both help and hurt a team’s performance
Key Points
- Conflict is common within teams, especially during the storming phase of team development.
- Team conflict provides benefits including resolving misunderstandings, improving processes, and changing behaviors.
- Team conflict can have negative consequences such as reduced group cohesion and lower productivity, and it can even threaten the team’s existence.
Key Terms
- interdependent
-
Mutually dependent; reliant on one another.
- affective
-
Relating to, resulting from, or influenced by emotions.
Conflict occurs often in teamwork, especially during the storming phase of team development. While at first we might think of all conflict between team members as undesirable and harmful, the process of resolving conflicts can actually provide benefits to team performance. Whether a conflict is productive or not can depend on how team members perceive it, as well as how it affects progress toward the team’s goals.
Benefits of Team Conflict
Substantive conflicts can affect performance for the better by removing barriers caused by different assumptions or misunderstandings about a team’s tasks, strategy, or goals. Conflict can be constructive when it creates broader awareness about how team members are experiencing their work and thus leads to changes that improve members’ productivity. Conflict can also lead to process improvements, such as when it reveals a deficiency in how the team communicates, which can then be corrected. Clashes of ideas can lead to more creative solutions or otherwise provide perspectives that persuade the team to take a different approach that is more likely to lead to success.
Addressing personal conflicts that arise between members can facilitate cooperation by helping individuals adapt their behavior to better suit the needs of others. Although most people find conflict uncomfortable while they are experiencing it, they can come to recognize its value as the team progresses in its development.
Negative Consequences of Team Conflict
While sometimes conflict can lead to a solution to a problem, conflicts can also create problems. Discord caused by enmity between individuals can reduce team cohesion and the ability of team members to work together. Conflicts can create distractions that require time and effort to resolve, which can delay completion of tasks and even put a team’s goals at risk.
Communication can suffer when people withdraw their attention or participation, leading to poor coordination of interdependent tasks. Tension and heightened emotions can lower team members’ satisfaction, increase frustration, and lead to bad judgments. They can even prompt individuals to withdraw from the team, requiring the assignment of a new member or creating a resource scarcity that makes it more difficult for the team to fulfill its purpose. In extreme cases, conflict among members, if left unaddressed, can lead to the complete inability of the team to function, and thus to its disbandment.
6.5.3: Common Causes of Team Conflict
Team conflict is caused by factors related to individual behavior as well as disagreements about the team’s work.
Learning Objective
Identify the causes of conflict within an organization as a conflict manager.
Key Points
- Team conflict arises from how people perceive the actions of others and from differing views of the team’s work and how it should be accomplished.
- Common causes of team conflict include conflicting interests, incompatible work styles, competition over resources, failure to follow norms, poor communication, and performance deficiencies.
Key Terms
- ambiguity
-
Something liable to more than one interpretation, explanation, or meaning.
- affective
-
Relating to, resulting from, or influenced by emotions.
Conflict between team members comes from several sources. Some conflicts have their basis in how people behave, while others come from disagreements about the nature of the team’s work and how it is being accomplished.
- Competing interests: Conflict can arise when people have mutually incompatible desires or needs. For example, two team members with similar skills may both want a certain assignment, leaving the one who doesn’t receive it resentful.
- Different behavioral styles or preferences: Individuals may clash over their respective work habits, attention to detail, communication practices, or tone of expression. While these can affect coordination of interdependent tasks, they can especially inhibit direct collaboration.
- Competition over resources: Members may fight over the limited resources available to accomplish the team’s tasks. For example, if two people both rely on the action of a third person to meet identical deadlines, disagreements might arise over whose work should receive that person’s attention first.
- Failure to follow team norms: A team member creates conflict when she displays attitudes or behaviors that go against the team’s agreement about how it will function. If a group norm calls for prompt arrival at meetings and prohibits the use of mobile devices during discussions, ignoring these practices can engender conflict.
- Performance deficiencies: When some team members are either not contributing their share of effort or not performing at the expected level of quality, the impositions that result can create friction, which may be heightened when critical or highly visible tasks are involved.
- Poor communication: When team members do not share relevant information with each other, people may make decisions or take actions that others consider inappropriate or even harmful. Blame and questions about motives can result, creating discord among the team.
- Ambiguity about means and ends: Lack of clarity about tasks, strategies, and/or goals can lead people to make assumptions that others do not share or agree with, which can result in conflict.
Card game argument
Behavioral differences and personality clashes can cause conflict even among friends.
6.5.4: Constructive Team Conflict
Teams can use conflict as a strategy for enhancing performance.
Learning Objective
Explain how conflict can be used as a strategy for improving team performance
Key Points
- Team performance can benefit by using conflict to foster learning and process improvement.
- Team members can establish guidelines and norms that encourage constructive conflict.
Key Terms
- innovation
-
A change in customs; something new and contrary to established patterns, manners, or rites.
- conflict
-
A clash or disagreement between two opposing groups or individuals.
Teams may use conflict as a strategy for continuous improvement and learning. Recognizing the benefits of conflict and using them as part of the team’s process can enhance team performance. Conflict can uncover barriers to collaboration that changes in behavior can remove. It can also foster better decisions because it makes team members consider the perspectives of others and even helps them see things in new and innovative ways.
Addressing conflict can increase team cohesion by engaging members in discussions about important issues. Team members may feel more valued when they know they are contributing to something vital to the team’s success. Conflict can reveal assumptions that may not apply in the current situation and thus allow the team to agree on a new course. It can also draw attention to norms that have developed without the explicit agreement of team members and create the opportunity to endorse or discard them.
Generating Constructive Conflict
Team members and others can follow a few guidelines for encouraging constructive conflict. First, they can start by explicitly calling for it as something that will help improve the team’s performance. This helps people view conflict as acceptable and can thus free them to speak up.
Teams can lower the emotional intensity of any conflict be establishing clear guidelines for how to express disagreements and challenge colleagues. One helpful norm is to focus on the task-related element of a conflict rather than criticizing the traits of particular individuals. Another is to emphasize common goals and shared commitments, which can keep conflict in perspective and prevent it from overwhelming the team’s efforts.
6.5.5: Team Conflict Resolution and Management
Some ways of dealing with conflict seek resolution; others aim to minimize negative effects on the team.
Learning Objective
Differentiate between conflict resolution and conflict management
Key Points
- Conflict resolution aims to eliminate disagreements and disputes among team members; in contrast, conflict management seeks to minimize the negative effects of conflict on team performance.
- There are three main approaches to conflict resolution: integrative, distributive, and mediating.
- There are three main conflict-management tactics: smoothing, yielding, and avoiding.
Key Terms
- dispute
-
An argument or disagreement.
- resolution
-
The moment in which a conflict ends and the outcome is clear.
- adversarial
-
Characteristic of an opponent; combative, hostile.
The way a team deals with conflicts that arise among members can influence whether and how those conflicts are resolved and, as a result, the team’s subsequent performance. There are several ways to approach managing and resolving team conflict—some leave the team and its members better able to continue their work, while others can undermine its effectiveness as a performing unit.
Conflict Resolution
Teams use one of three primary approaches to conflict resolution: integrative, distributive, and mediating.
- Integrative approaches focus on the issue to be solved and aim to find a resolution that meets everyone’s needs. Success with this tactic requires the exchange of information, openness to alternatives, and a willingness to consider what is best for the group as a whole rather than for any particular individual.
- Distributive approaches find ways to divide a fixed number of positive outcomes or resources in which one side comes out ahead of the other. Since team members have repeated interactions with each other and are committed to shared goals, the expectation of reciprocity can make this solution acceptable since those who don’t get their way today may end up “winning” tomorrow.
- Mediating approaches bring in a third party to facilitate a non-confrontational, non-adversarial discussion with the goal of helping the team reach a consensus about how to resolve the conflict. A mediator from outside the team brings no emotional ties or preconceived ideas to the conflict and therefore can help the team identify a broader set of solutions that would be satisfactory to all.
Although these three approaches all bring overt conflict to an end, team cohesion can suffer if members perceive the process itself as unfair, disrespectful, or overly contentious. The result can be resentment that festers and leads to subsequent additional conflict that a more conciliatory process might have avoided.
Conflict Management
The primary aim of conflict management is to promote the positive effects and reduce the negative effects that disputes can have on team performance without necessarily fully resolving the conflict itself. Teams use one of three main tactics to manage conflict: smoothing, yielding, and avoiding.
- The smoothing approach attempts to minimize the differences among the people who are in conflict with each other. This strategy often focuses on reducing the emotional charge and intensity of how the people speak to each other by emphasizing their shared goals and commitments.
- The yielding approach describes the choice some team members make to simply give in when others disagree with them rather than engage in conflict. This is more common when the stakes are perceived to be small or when the team member’s emotional ties to the issue at hand are not particularly strong.
- In the avoiding approach, teams members may choose to simply ignore all but the most contentious disagreements. While this can have short-term benefits and may be the best option when the team is under time pressure, it is the approach least likely to produce a sense of harmony among the team.
While conflict can increase the engagement of team members, it can also create distractions and draw attention away from important tasks. Because conflict management seeks to contain such disruptions and threats to team performance, conflicts do not disappear so much as exist alongside the teamwork.
Chapter 5: Organizational Behavior
5.1: Individual Perceptions and Behavior
5.1.1: The Perceptual Process
Perception is the organization, identification, and interpretation of sensory information to represent and understand the environment.
Learning Objective
Outline the internal and external factors that influence the perceptual selection process
Key Points
- The perceptual process consists of six steps: the presence of objects, observation, selection, organization, interpretation, and response.
- Perceptual selection is driven by internal (personality, motivation) and external (contrast, repetition) factors.
- Perceptual organization includes factors that influence how a person connects perceptions into wholes or patterns. These include proximity, similarity, and constancy, among others.
Key Terms
- Perception
-
That which is detected by the five senses; that which is detected within consciousness as a thought, intuition, or deduction.
- factor
-
An integral part.
Perceptual Process
The perceptual process is the sequence of psychological steps that a person uses to organize and interpret information from the outside world. The steps are:
- Objects are present in the world.
- A person observes.
- The person uses perception to select objects.
- The person organizes the perception of objects.
- The person interprets the perceptions.
- The person responds.
The selection, organization, and interpretation of perceptions can differ among different people . Therefore, when people react differently in a situation, part of their behavior can be explained by examining their perceptual process, and how their perceptions are leading to their responses.
Multistability
The Necker cube and Rubin vase can be perceived in more than one way. The vase can be seen as either a vase or two faces.
Perceptual Selection
Perceptual selection is driven by internal and external factors.
Internal factors include:
- Personality – Personality traits influence how a person selects perceptions. For instance, conscientious people tend to select details and external stimuli to a greater degree.
- Motivation – People will select perceptions according to what they need in the moment. They will favor selections that they think will help them with their current needs, and be more likely to ignore what is irrelevant to their needs.
- Experience – The patterns of occurrences or associations one has learned in the past affect current perceptions. The person will select perceptions in a way that fits with what they found in the past.
External factors include:
- Size – A larger size makes it more likely an object will be selected.
- Intensity – Greater intensity, in brightness, for example, also increases perceptual selection.
- Contrast – When a perception stands clearly out against a background, there is a greater likelihood of selection.
- Motion – A moving perception is more likely to be selected.
- Repetition – Repetition increases perceptual selection.
- Novelty and familiarity – Both of these increase selection. When a perception is new, it stands out in a person’s experience. When it is familiar, it is likely to be selected because of this familiarity.
Perceptual Organization
After certain perceptions are selected, they can be organized differently. The following factors are those that determine perceptual organization:
- Figure-ground – Once perceived, objects stand out against their background. This can mean, for instance, that perceptions of something as new can stand out against the background of everything of the same type that is old.
- Perceptual grouping – Grouping is when perceptions are brought together into a pattern.
- Closure – This is the tendency to try to create wholes out of perceived parts. Sometimes this can result in error, though, when the perceiver fills in unperceived information to complete the whole.
- Proximity – Perceptions that are physically close to each other are easier to organize into a pattern or whole.
- Similarity – Similarity between perceptions promotes a tendency to group them together.
- Perceptual Constancy – This means that if an object is perceived always to be or act a certain way, the person will tend to infer that it actually is always that way.
- Perceptual Context – People will tend to organize perceptions in relation to other pertinent perceptions, and create a context out of those connections.
Each of these factors influence how the person perceives their environment, so responses to their environment can be understood by taking the perceptual process into account.
5.1.2: Cognitive Biases
Perceptual distortions, such as cognitive bias, can result in poor judgement and irrational courses of action.
Learning Objective
Analyze the complex cognitive patterns that can complicate employee perception and behavior
Key Points
- Cognitive biases are instances of evolved mental behavior that can cause deviations in judgement that produce negative consequences for an organization.
- Understanding how perception can be distorted is particularly relevant for managers because they make many decisions, and deal with many people making assessments and judgments, on a daily basis.
- Bias arises from various processes that are sometimes difficult to distinguish. These include information-processing shortcuts (heuristics), mental noise and the mind’s limited information processing capacity, emotional and moral motivations, and social influence.
- A few examples of perceptual distortions include confirmation bias, self-serving bias, causality, framing, and belief bias.
Key Terms
- heuristic
-
Experience-based techniques for problem solving, learning, and discovery. An exhaustive search is impractical, so heuristic methods are used to speed up the process of finding a satisfactory solution.
- cognitive
-
The area of mental function that deals with logic, as opposed to affective functions which deal with emotion.
A cognitive bias is a pattern of deviation in judgment that occurs in particular situations and can lead to perceptual distortion, inaccurate judgment, illogical interpretation, or what is broadly called irrationality. Implicit in the concept of a pattern of deviation is a standard of comparison with what is normative or expected; this may be the judgment of people outside those particular situations, or a set of independently verifiable facts. Essentially, there must be an objective observer to identify cognitive bias in a subjective individual.
Optical illusion
In this optical illusion all lines are actually parallel. Perceptual distortion makes them seem crooked.
Bias arises from various processes that can be difficult to distinguish. Bias is not inherently good or bad–it is pointedly subjective or contrary to reactions or decisions that one might objectively expect. Ways in which biases are derived include:
- Information-processing shortcuts (heuristics)
- Mental noise
- The mind’s limited information processing capacity
- Emotional and moral motivations
- Social influence
The notion of cognitive biases was introduced by Amos Tversky and Daniel Kahneman in 1972 and grew out of their experience of people’s innumeracy, or inability to reason intuitively with greater orders of magnitude. They and their colleagues demonstrated several replicable ways in which human judgments and decisions differ from rational choice theory. They explained these differences in terms of heuristics, rules which are simple for the brain to compute but which introduce systematic errors.
Perceptual Distortions and Management
The ways in which we distort our perception are particularly relevant for managers because they make many decisions, and deal with many people making assessments an judgments, on a daily basis. Managers must be aware of their own logical and perceptive fallacies and the biases of others. This requires a great deal of organizational behavior knowledge. A few useful perceptual distortions managers should be aware of include:
- Confirmation bias – Simply put, humans have a strong tendency to manipulate new information and facts until they match their own preconceived notions. This inappropriate confirmation allows for poor decision-making that ignores the true implications of new data.
- Self-serving bias – Another common bias is the tendency to take credit for success while passing the buck on failure. Managers must monitor this in employees and realize when they are guilty themselves. Being objective about success and failure enables growth and ensures proper accountability.
- Belief bias – Individuals often make a decision before they have all the facts. In this situation, they believe that their confidence in their decision is founded on a rational and logical assessment of the facts when it is not.
- Framing – It is quite easy to be right about everything if you carefully select the context and perspective on a given issue. Framing enables people to ignore relevant facts by narrowing down what is considered applicable to a given decision.
- Causality – Humans are pattern-matching organisms. People analyze past events to predict future outcomes. Sometimes their analysis is accurate, but sometimes it is not. It is easy to see the cause-effect relationship in completely random situations. Statistical confidence intervals are useful in mitigating this perceptive distortion.
5.1.3: Impression Management
Impression management is a goal-directed conscious or unconscious process in which people attempt to influence the perceptions of others.
Learning Objective
Outline the way in which impressions and impressions management affect management, organizations, and branding
Key Points
- Influencing others and gaining rewards, along with other motives, govern impression management from a general perspective.
- Impression management theory states that an individual or organization must establish and maintain impressions that are congruent with the perceptions they want to convey to their stakeholder groups.
- Organizations use branding and other impressions management strategies to convey a consistent and repeatable image to external and internal audiences.
- Management must also consider the impressions they make on others, both subordinates and business partners. Every organization has an image to maintain—and so does its management.
Key Term
- impression
-
The overall effect of something, e.g., on a person.
In sociology and social psychology, impression management is a goal-directed conscious or unconscious process in which people attempt to influence the perceptions of others about a person, object, or event. Impression management is performed by controlling or shaping information in social interactions. It is usually synonymous with self-presentation, in which a person tries to influence how others perceive their image. Impression management is used by communications and public relations professionals to shape an organization’s public image.
While impression management and self-presentation are often used interchangeably, some argue that they are not the same. In particular, Schlenker believed that self-presentation should be used to describe attempts to control “self-relevant” images projected in “real or imagined social interactions.” This was because people manage impressions of entities other than themselves, such as businesses, cities, and other individuals.
Application to Management
From the managerial and/or organizational frame, the basic premise is the same. Organizations put forward a self-proclaimed (and strategized and refined) organizational perception. This is most commonly referred to as brand image or brand perception. Management must ensure that all aspects of the organization conform to and fulfill the desired brand image, and communicate it to the public.
Managers must also consider the impressions they make on others, both subordinates and business partners. Managers have to ensure that they too are promoting the company brand image. Maintaining a consistent and reliable impression in a professional context that is conducive to the organizational impression is a central communicative skill managers must practice to be successful.
Impression Management Theory
Impression management theory states that any individual or organization must establish and maintain impressions that are congruent with the perceptions they want to convey to their stakeholder groups. From both a communications and public relations viewpoint, impression management encompasses ways of communicating congruence between personal or organizational goals and their intended actions in order to influence public perception.
The idea that perception is reality is the basis for this sociological and social psychology theory. Perception of an individual—a manager or employee—fundamentally shapes how the public perceives an organization and its products.
Motives and Strategies
There are several motives that govern impression management. One is instrumental: we want to influence others and gain rewards. Giving the right impression facilitates desired social and material outcomes. Social outcomes can include approval, friendship, assistance, or power, and conveying an impression of competency in the workforce. These can trigger positive material rewards like higher salaries or better working conditions.
The second motive of self-presentation is expressive. We construct an image of ourselves to claim personal identity, and present ourselves in a manner that is consistent with that image. If people feel that their ability to express themselves is restricted, they react negatively, often by becoming defiant. People resist those who seek to curtail self-presentation expressiveness by adopting many different impression management strategies. One of them is ingratiation, the use of flattery or praise to highlight positive characteristics and increase social attractiveness. Another strategy is intimidation, which is aggressively showing anger to get others to hear and obey.
Basic Factors Governing Impression Management
There are a range of factors governing impression management. Impression management occurs in all social situations because people are always aware of being observed by others. The unique characteristics of a given social situation are important: cultural norms determine the appropriateness of particular verbal and nonverbal behaviors in different situations. These behaviors and actions have to be appropriate to the culture and the audience in order to positively influence impression management.
A person’s goals are another factor governing impression management. Depending on how they want to influence their audience regarding a certain topic, presenting themselves in different ways can shape different impressions and reactions in their audience.
Self-efficacy is also important to consider; this describes whether a person is confident that s/he can convey the intended impression successfully. If they aren’t confident, the audience will be able to tell.
5.2: Personality
5.2.1: The Big Five Personality Traits
The Big Five personality traits are openness, conscientiousness, extraversion, agreeableness, and neuroticism.
Learning Objective
Apply the “Big Five” personality traits identified in psychology to organizational behavior
Key Points
- The concept of the “Big Five” personality traits is taken from psychology and includes five broad domains that describe personality. The Big Five personality traits are openness, conscientiousness, extraversion, agreeableness, and neuroticism.
- These five factors are assumed to represent the basic structure behind all personality traits. They were defined and described by several different researchers during multiple periods of research.
- Employees are sometimes tested on the Big Five personality traits in collaborative situations to determine what strong personality traits they can add to a group dynamic.
- Businesses need to understand their people as well as their operations and processes. Understanding the personality components that drive the employee behavior is a very useful informational data point for management.
Key Term
- neuroticism
-
The tendency to easily experience unpleasant emotions such as anger, anxiety, depression, or vulnerability.
The concept of the “Big Five” personality traits is taken from psychology and includes five broad domains that describe personality. These five personality traits are used to understand the relationship between personality and various behaviors.
These five factors are assumed to represent the basic structure behind all personality traits. These five factors were defined and described by several different researchers during multiple periods of research. However, as a result of their broad definitions, the Big Five personality traits are not nearly as powerful in predicting and explaining actual behavior as are the more numerous lower-level, specific traits.
The Five Traits
The traits are:
- Openness – Openness to experience describes a person’s degree of intellectual curiosity, creativity, and preference for novelty and variety. Some disagreement remains about how to interpret this factor, which is sometimes called intellect.
- Conscientiousness – Conscientiousness is a tendency to show self-discipline, act dutifully, and aim for achievement. Conscientiousness also refers to planning, organization, and dependability.
- Extraversion – Extraversion describes energy, positive emotions, assertiveness, sociability, talkativeness, and the tendency to seek stimulation in the company of others.
- Agreeableness – Agreeableness is the tendency to be compassionate and cooperative towards others rather than suspicious and antagonistic.
- Neuroticism – Neuroticism describes vulnerability to unpleasant emotions like anger, anxiety, depression, or vulnerability. Neuroticism also refers to an individual’s level of emotional stability and impulse control and is sometimes referred to as emotional stability.
Applicability to Organizational Behavior
When scored for individual feedback, these traits are frequently presented as percentile scores. For example, a conscientiousness rating in the 80th percentile indicates a relatively strong sense of responsibility and orderliness, whereas an extraversion rating in the 5th percentile indicates an exceptional need for solitude and quiet.
Questionnaires for the Big Five personality traits
The Big Five personality traits are typically examined through surveys and questionnaires.
Employees are sometimes tested on the Big Five personality traits in collaborative situations to determine what strong personality traits they can add to the group dynamic. Personality tests can also be part of the behavioral interview process when a company is hiring to determine an individual’s ability to act on certain personality characteristics.
Understanding its people is as important to a company as understanding its operations and processes. Understanding what personality components drive the behavior of subordinates is a highly useful informational data point for management that can be used to determine what type of assignments should be set, how motivation should be pursued, what team dynamics may arise, and how to best approach conflict and/or praise when applicable.
5.2.2: The Myers-Briggs Personality Types
The Myers-Briggs Type Indicator is a commonly used personality test exploring 16 personality types.
Learning Objective
Summarize the Myers-Briggs (MBTI) personality assessment perspective and the four personality types it measures
Key Points
- The Myers-Briggs Type Indicator (MBTI) assessment is a questionnaire that measures the psychological preferences that influence how people perceive the world and make decisions. The MBTI sorts psychological differences into four opposite pairs, resulting in 16 possible personality types.
- None of these types are good or bad; however, Briggs and Myers theorized that societies as a whole naturally prefer one overall type.
- The four type preferences are Extraversion vs. Introversion, Sensing vs. Intuition, Thinking vs. Feeling, and Judgment vs. Perception. One possible classification of a personality type could be ESTJ: extraversion (E), sensing (S), thinking (T), judgment (J).
- Myers-Briggs tests are frequently used in the areas of career counseling, team building, group dynamics, professional development, marketing, leadership training, executive coaching, life coaching, personal development, marriage counseling, and workers’ compensation claims.
Key Term
- Forced-choice
-
A type of question used in psychological tests that only allows the individual to choose between one of two possible answers to each question.
The Myers-Briggs Type Indicator (MBTI) assessment is a questionnaire designed to measure the psychological preferences that shape how people perceive the world and make decisions. The original developers of the personality inventory were Katharine Cook Briggs and her daughter, Isabel Briggs Myers. They began work on a questionnaire during World War II to help women who were entering the industrial workforce as part of the war effort to understand their own personality preferences and use that knowledge to identify the jobs that would be best for them. That initial questionnaire grew into the Myers-Briggs Type Indicator, which was first published in 1962. The MBTI focuses on normal populations and emphasizes the value of naturally occurring differences between people.
MBTI personality types
The dimensions of the MBTI are seen here, along with temperament descriptions associated with each personality trait.
MBTI Defined
The MBTI sorts psychological differences into four opposite pairs, or dichotomies, resulting in 16 possible psychological personality types. None of these types are good or bad; however, Briggs and Myers theorized that societies as a whole naturally prefer one overall type. In the same way that writing with the left hand is hard work for a right-handed person, people find that using their opposite psychological preferences is difficult, even if they can become proficient by practicing and developing those different ways of thinking and behaving.
The 16 Personality Types
The 16 personality types are typically referred to by an abbreviation of four letters—the initial letters of each of their four type preferences. The four type preferences are: Extraversion vs. Introversion, Sensing vs. Intuition, Thinking vs. Feeling, and Judgment vs. Perception.
One possible classification of a personality type is ESTJ: extraversion (E), sensing (S), thinking (T), judgment (J). Another example is INFP: introversion (I), intuition (N), feeling (F), perception (P); and so on for all 16 possible type combinations. In this situation, extroversion means “outward turning” and introversion means “inward turning.” People who prefer judgment over perception are not necessarily more judgmental or less perceptive; they simply prefer one over the other. The most common combination from the Myers-Briggs test is ISFJ or Introvert, Sensing, Feeling, and Judgment.
The current North American English version of the Myers-Briggs test includes 93 forced-choice questions. Forced-choice means that the individual has to choose only one of two possible answers to each question. Myers-Briggs tests are frequently used in the areas of career counseling, team building, group dynamics, professional development, marketing, leadership training, executive coaching, life coaching, personal development, marriage counseling, and workers’ compensation claims.
Relevance to Management
One of the most common contexts for using the MBTI is team-building and employee personality identification. Managers are tasked with creating work groups and teams with a variety of human resources, which is a complicated social process of intuitively estimating who would complement who in group dynamics. The MBTI test is an excellent tool to measure and more accurately predict how individuals will interact in a group and what types of skills they may bring to the table.
One particularly good example is in the IE relationship. Understanding which employees in a team are naturally introverted is a useful way to ensure that a manager doesn’t miss out on these employees’ opinions just because they are naturally quiet. The manager could meet with them privately and informally—over coffee, for instance—and get their opinions. Similarly, knowing which members tend to be intuitive thinkers (NT) and which tend to understand emotions and be observant (SF) can lead the manager to give them very different tasks, though the two might work well together in a group setting since they balance each other. Management can use this tool to minimize conflict and optimize performance.
5.2.3: Other Important Trait Theories
The disposition theory, three fundamental traits, and HEXACO model of personality structure are applicable to the work place.
Learning Objective
Examine various perspectives on personality and how to measure it in the context of organizational behavior
Key Points
- Some important personality trait theories are: Gordon Allport’s dispositions, Hans Eysenck’s three fundamental traits and Michael Aston and Kibeom Lee’s six-dimensional HEXACO model of personality structure.
- Gordon Allport’s disposition theory includes cardinal traits, central traits, and secondary traits. Cardinal traits dominate an individual’s behavior, central traits are common to all individuals, and secondary traits are peripheral.
- Hans Eysenck rejected the idea that there are “tiers” of personality traits, theorizing instead that there are just three traits that describe human personality: extroversion, neuroticism, and psychoticism.
- The HEXACO model of personality identifies six factors of personality: Honesty, Emotionality, Extroversion, Agreeableness, Conscientiousness, and Openness to Experience.
Key Terms
- extroversion
-
Concern with or an orientation toward others or what is outside oneself; behavior expressing such an orientation.
- trait
-
An identifying characteristic, habit, or trend.
- Disposition
-
A tendency or inclination to respond a certain way under given circumstances.
The “Big Five” describes five important personality traits, and the Myers-Briggs Test identifies a number of different personality types, but there are other important traits that have been studied by psychologists. Some of these traits include Gordon Allport’s dispositions, Hans Eysenck’s three fundamental traits, and Michael Aston and Kibeom Lee’s six dimensional HEXACO model of personality structure. All of these theories discuss important personality traits that have been studied and identified.
Allport’s Disposition Theory
Gordon Allport’s disposition theory includes cardinal traits, central traits, and secondary traits.
Gordon Allport
American psychologist Gordon Allport wrote an influential work on prejudice, The Nature of Prejudice, published in 1979.
- Cardinal trait: A trait that dominates and shapes a person’s behavior. These are the ruling passions/obsessions, such as the desire for money, fame, love, etc.
- Central trait: A general characteristic that every person has to some degree. These are the basic building blocks that shape most of our behavior, although they are not as overwhelming as cardinal traits. An example of a central trait would be honesty.
- Secondary trait: a characteristic seen only in certain circumstances (such as particular likes or dislikes that only very close friend might know). They must be included to provide a complete picture of human complexity.
Eysenck’s Extroversion and Neuroticism Theory
Hans Eysenck rejected the idea that there are “tiers” of personality traits, theorizing instead that there are just three traits that describe human personality. These traits are extroversion, neuroticism, and psychoticism. Extroversion and neuroticism provide a two-dimensional space to describe individual differences in behavior. Eysenck described these as analogous to latitude and longitude describing a point on the Earth. An individual could rate high on both neuroticism and extroversion, low on both traits, or somewhere in between. Where an individual falls on the spectrum determines her/his overall personality traits.
The third dimension, psychoticism, was added to the model in the late 1970s as a result of collaborations between Eysenck and his wife, Sybil B. G. Eysenck.
Aston and Lee’s HEXACO Model of Personality
Aston and Lee’s six-dimensional HEXACO model of personality structure is based on a lexical hypothesis that analyzes the adjectives used in different to describe personality, beginning with English. Subsequent research was conducted in other languages, including Croatian, Dutch, Filipino, French, German, Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Korean, Polish, and Turkish. Comparisons of the results revealed six emergent factors. The six factors are generally named Honesty-Humility (H), Emotionality (E), Extroversion (X), Agreeableness (A), Conscientiousness (C), and Openness to Experience (O). After the adjectives that describe each of these six factors were collected using self-reports, they were distilled to four traits that describe each factor.
- Honesty-Humility (H): Sincerity, Fairness, Greed Avoidance, Modesty
- Emotionality (E): Fearfulness, Anxiety, Dependence, Sentimentality
- Extroversion (X): Social Self-Esteem, Social Boldness, Sociability, Liveliness
- Agreeableness (A): Forgivingness, Gentleness, Flexibility, Patience
- Conscientiousnes (C): Organization, Diligence, Perfectionism, Prudence
- Openness to Experience (O): Aesthetic Appreciation, Inquisitiveness, Creativity, Unconventionality
These three personality trait theories, among others, are used to describe and define personalities today in psychology and in organizational behavior.
5.3: Stress in Organizations
5.3.1: Defining Stress
Stress is defined in terms of its physical and physiological effects on a person, and can be a mental, physical, or emotional strain.
Learning Objective
Define stress within the field of organizational behavior and workplace dynamics
Key Points
- Differences in individual characteristics, such as personality and coping skills, can be very important predictors of whether certain job conditions will result in stress.
- Stress-related disorders include a broad array of conditions, including psychological disorders and other types of emotional strain, maladaptive behaviors, cognitive impairment, and various biological reactions – each of which can eventually compromise a person’s physical health.
- Categories of work demands that may cause stress include task demands, role demands, interpersonal demands, and physical demands.
Key Term
- stress
-
Mental, physical, or emotional strain caused by a demand that challenges or exceeds the individual’s coping ability.
Stress
Stress is defined in terms of how it impacts physical and psychological health; it includes mental, physical, and emotional strain. Stress occurs when a demand exceeds an individual’s coping ability and disrupts his or her psychological equilibrium. Stress occurs in the workplace when an employee perceives a situation to be too strenuous to handle, and therefore threatening to his or her well-being.
Stress
A black and white photo of a woman that captures her high level of stress.
Stress at Work
While it is generally agreed that stress occurs at work, views differ on the importance of worker characteristics versus working conditions as its primary cause. The differing viewpoints suggest different ways to prevent stress at work. Different individual characteristics, like personality and coping skills, can be very important predictors of whether certain job conditions will result in stress. In other words, what is stressful for one person may not be a problem for someone else.
Stress-related disorders encompass a broad array of conditions, including psychological disorders (e.g., depression, anxiety, post-traumatic stress disorder) and other types of emotional strain (e.g., dissatisfaction, fatigue, tension), maladaptive behaviors (e.g., aggression, substance abuse), and cognitive impairment (e.g., concentration and memory problems). Job stress is also associated with various biological reactions that may ultimately lead to compromised physical health, such as cardiovascular disease.
Categories of Work Stress
Four categories of stressors underline the different causal circumstances for stress at work:
- Task Demands – This is the sense of not knowing where a job will lead you and whether the activities and tasks will change. This uncertainty causes stress that manifests itself in feelings of lack of control, concern about career progress, and time pressures.
- Role Demands – Role conflict happens when an employee is exposed to inconsistent or difficult expectations. Examples include: interole conflict (when there are two or more expectations or separate roles for one person), intrarole conflict (varying expectations of one role), person-role conflict (ethics are challenged), and role ambiguity (confusion about their experiences in relation to the expectations of others).
- Interpersonal Demands – Examples include: emotional issues (abrasive personalities, offensive co-workers), sexual harassment (directed mostly toward women), and poor leadership (lack of management experience, poor style, cannot handle having power).
- Physical Demands – Many types of work are physically demanding, including strenuous activity, extreme working conditions, travel, exposure to hazardous materials, and working in a tight, loud office.
5.3.2: Causes of Workplace Stress
Work stress is caused by demands and pressure from both within and outside of the workplace.
Learning Objective
Evaluate the role of work conditions, economic factors, and organizational social dynamics in the experience of stress in the workplace
Key Points
- Job stress can result from interactions between the worker and the conditions of the work. This can include factors such as long work hours and an employee’s status in the organization.
- Economic factors that employees are facing in the 21st century, such as company layoffs in response to economic conditions, have been linked to increased stress levels.
- Uncertainty around the future of one’s job, lack of clarity about responsibilities, inconsistent or difficult expectations, interpersonal issues between workers, and physical demands of the work can also impact stress levels.
- Non-work demands, such as personal or home demands, can also contribute to stress both inside and outside of work.
Key Term
- stress
-
Mental, physical, or emotional strain due to a demand that exceeds an individual’s coping ability.
Work-Related Stress
Problems caused by stress have become a major concern to both employers and employees. Symptoms of stress can manifest both physiologically and psychologically. Work-related stress is typically caused by demands and pressure from either within or outside of the workplace; it can be derived from uncertainty over where the job will take the employee, inconsistent or difficult expectations, interpersonal issues, or physical demands.
Although the importance of individual differences cannot be ignored, scientific evidence suggests that certain working conditions are stressful to most people. Such evidence argues that working conditions are a key source of job stress and job redesign should be used as a primary prevention strategy.
Studies of Work-Related Stress
Large-scale surveys of working conditions—including conditions recognized as risk factors for job stress—were conducted in member states of the European Union in 1990, 1995, and 2000. Results showed a time-related trend that suggested an increase in work intensity. In 1990, the percentage of workers reporting that they worked at high speeds for at least one-quarter of their working time was 48%; this increased to 54% in 1995 and 56% in 2000. Similarly, 50% of workers reported that they worked against tight deadlines at least one-fourth of their working time in 1990; this increased to 56% in 1995 and 60% in 2000. However, no change was noted in the period from 1995 to 2000 in the percentage of workers reporting sufficient time to complete tasks (data was not collected in 1990 for this category).
A substantial percentage of Americans work very long hours. By one estimate, more than 26% of men and more than 11% of women worked 50 hours or more per week (outside of the home) in 2000. These figures represent a considerable increase over the previous three decades—especially for women. According to the Department of Labor, there has been an upward trend in hours worked among employed women, an increase in work weeks of greater than forty hours by men, and a considerable increase in combined working hours among working couples, particularly couples with young children.
Power and Stress
A person’s status in the workplace can also affect levels of stress. Stress in the workplace has the potential to affect employees of all categories, and managers as well as other kinds of workers are vulnerable to work overload. However, less powerful employees (those who have less control over their jobs) are more likely to experience stress than employees with more power. This indicates that authority is an important factor complicating the work stress environment.
Economics and Stress
Economic factors that employees are facing in the 21st century have been linked to increased stress levels as well. Researchers and social commentators have pointed out that advances in technology and communications have made companies more efficient and more productive than ever before. This increase in productivity has resulted in higher expectations and greater competition, which in turn place more stress on employees.
The following economic factors can contribute to workplace stress:
- Pressure from investors who can quickly withdraw their money from company stocks
- Lack of trade and professional unions in the workplace
- Inter-company rivalries caused by global competition
- The willingness of companies to swiftly lay off workers to cope with changing business environments
Social Interactions and Stress
Bullying in the workplace can also contribute to stress. Workplace bullying can involve threats to an employee’s professional or personal image or status, deliberate isolation, or giving an employee excess work.
Another type of workplace bullying is known as “destabilization.” Destabilization can occur when an employee is not given credit for their work or is assigned meaningless tasks. In effect, destabilization can create a hostile work environment for employees, negatively affecting their work ethic and therefore their contributions to the organization.
Stress Outside of the Workplace
Non-work demands can create stress both inside and outside of work. Stress is inherently cumulative, and it can be difficult to separate our personal and professional stress inducers. Examples of non-work stress that can be carried into the workplace include:
- Home demands: Relationships, children, and family responsibilities can add stress that is hard to leave behind when entering the workplace. The Academy of Management Journal states that this constitutes “an individual’s lack of personal resources needed to fulfill commitments, obligations, or requirements.”
- Personal demands: Personal demands are brought on by the person when he or she takes on too many responsibilities, either inside or outside of work.
5.3.3: Consequences of Workplace Stress
Stress can impact an individual mentally and physically and so can decrease employee efficiency and job satisfaction.
Learning Objective
Recognize the potentially severe consequences of work-related stress on an individual, particularly over time
Key Points
- Problems at work are more strongly associated with health complaints than any other life stressor.
- Participation problems such as absenteeism, tardiness, strikes, and turnover take a severe toll on a company.
- Individual distress manifests in three basic forms: psychological disorders, medical illnesses, and behavioral problems.
- When individual workers within an organization suffer from a high degree of stress, overall efficiency can substantially decrease. Stressed workers will ultimately foster a negative culture and show reduce operational capabilities.
Key Terms
- stress
-
Mental, physical, or emotional strain due to a demand that exceeds an individual’s ability to cope.
- psychosomatic
-
Pertaining to physical diseases or symptoms that have psychological causes.
Stress
Symptoms of stress
Stress can manifest as various symptoms affecting one’s body, mind, behavior, and/or emotions.
Negative or overwhelming work experiences can cause a person substantial distress. Burnout, depression, and psychosomatic disorders are particularly common outcomes of work-related stress. In general, individual distress manifests in three basic forms: psychological disorders, medical illnesses, and behavioral problems.
Psychological Disorders
Psychosomatic disorders are a type of psychological disorder. They are physical problems with a psychological cause. For example, a person who is extremely anxious about public speaking might feel extremely nauseated or may find themselves unable to speak at all when faced with the prospect of presenting in front of a group. Since stress of this type is often difficult to notice, managers would benefit from carefully monitoring employee behavior for indications of discomfort or stress.
Medical Illnesses
Physiological reactions to stress can have a long-term impact on physical health. In fact, stress is one of the leading precursors to long-term health issues. Backaches, stroke, heart disease, and peptic ulcers are just a few physical ailments that can arise when a person is under too much stress.
Behavioral Problems
A person can also exhibit behavioral problems when under stress, such as aggression, substance abuse, absenteeism, poor decision making, lack of creativity, or even sabotage. A stressed worker may neglect their duties, impeding workflows and processes so that the broader organization slows down and loses time and money. Managers should keep an eye out for such behaviors as possible indicators of workplace stress.
Organizational Effects of Stress
Stress in the workplace can be, so to speak, “contagious”—low job satisfaction is often something employees will discuss with one another. If stress is not noted and addressed by management early on, team dynamics can erode, hurting the social and cultural synergies present in the organization. Ultimately, the aggressive mentality will be difficult to remedy.
Managers are in a unique position when it comes to workplace stress. As they are responsible for setting the pace, assigning tasks, and fostering the social customs that govern the work group, management must be aware of the repercussions of mismanaging and inducing stress. Managers should consistently discuss job satisfaction and professional and personal health with each of their subordinates one on one.
5.3.4: Reducing Workplace Stress
A combination of organizational change and stress management is a productive approach to preventing stress at work.
Learning Objective
Examine the various ways in which job stress can be prevented or reduced in an organization
Key Points
- Stress management refers to a wide spectrum of techniques and therapies that aim to control a person’s levels of stress, especially chronic stress, to improve everyday functioning.
- To reduce workplace stress, managers can monitor each employee’s workload to ensure it is in line with their capabilities and resources.
- Managers can also be clear and explicit about general expectations and long-term objectives to ensure there is no discrepancy between what the manager is looking for and what the employee is working toward.
- Managers must keep culture in mind when approaching issues of workplace stress. They must quickly dismantle any negative workplace culture that arises, such as bullying or harassment, and replace it with a constructive working environment.
Key Term
- stress
-
Mental, physical, or emotional strain due to a demand that exceeds an individual’s ability to cope.
Stress management refers to a wide spectrum of techniques and therapies that aim to control a person’s levels of stress, especially chronic stress, to improve everyday functioning.
Preventing Job Stress
If employees are experiencing unhealthy levels of stress, a manager can bring in an objective outsider, such as a consultant, to suggest a fresh approach. But there are many ways managers can prevent job stress in the first place. A combination of organizational change and stress management is often the most effective approach. Among the many different techniques managers can use to effectively prevent employee stress, the main underlying themes are awareness of possibly stressful elements of the workplace and intervention when necessary to mitigate any stress that does arise.
Specifically, organizations can prevent employee stress in the following ways:
Intentional Job Design
- Design jobs that provide meaning and stimulation for workers as well as opportunities for them to use their skills.
- Establish work schedules that are compatible with demands and responsibilities outside the job.
- Consider flexible schedules—many organizations allow telecommuting to reduce the pressure of being a certain place at a certain time (which enables people to better balance their personal lives).
- Monitor each employee’s workload to ensure it is in line with their capabilities and resources.
Clear and Open Communication
- Teach employees about stress awareness and promote an open dialogue.
- Avoid ambiguity at all costs—clearly define workers’ roles and responsibilities.
- Reduce uncertainty about career development and future employment prospects.
Positive Workplace Culture
- Provide opportunities for social interaction among workers.
- Watch for signs of dissatisfaction or bullying and work to combat workplace discrimination (based on race, gender, national origin, religion, or language).
Employee Accountability
- Give workers opportunities to participate in decisions and actions that affect their jobs.
- Introduce a participative leadership style and involve as many subordinates as possible in resolving stress-producing problems.
Stress Prevention Programs
St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company conducted several studies on the effects of stress prevention programs in a hospital setting. Program activities included educating employees and management about workplace stress, changing hospital policies and procedures to reduce organizational sources of stress, and establishing of employee assistance programs. In one study, the frequency of medication errors declined by 50% after prevention activities were implemented in a 700-bed hospital. In a second study, there was a 70% reduction in malpractice claims among 22 hospitals that implemented stress prevention activities. In contrast, there was no reduction in claims in a matched group of 22 hospitals that did not implement stress prevention activities.
5.4: Drivers of Behavior
5.4.1: Defining Attitude
An attitude is generally defined as the way a person responds to his or her environment, either positively or negatively.
Learning Objective
Define attitude within the context of behavioral norms for employees in an organization
Key Points
- An attitude could be generally defined as a way a person responds to his or her environment, either positively or negatively. The precise definition of attitude is nonetheless a source of some discussion and debate.
- Work environment can affect a person’s attitude.
- Some attitudes are a dangerous element in the workplace, one that can spread to those closest to the employee and affect everyone’s performance.
- Attitudes are the confluence of an individual and external stimuli, and therefore everyone is in a position of responsibility to improve them (managers, employees, and organizations).
- A strong work environment is vital for an effective and efficient workplace.
Key Term
- attitude
-
Disposition or state of mind.
Overview
An attitude could be generally defined as the way a person responds to his or her environment, either positively or negatively. The definition of attitude is nonetheless a source of some discussion and debate.
When defining attitude, it is helpful to bear two useful conflicts in mind. The first is the existence of ambivalence or differences of attitude towards a given person, object, situation etc. from the same person, sometimes at the same time. This ambivalence indicates that attitude is inherently more complex than a simple sliding scale of positive and negative, and defining these axes in different ways is integral to identifying the essence of attitude. The second conflict to keep in mind is the degree of implicit versus explicit attitude, which is to say subconscious versus conscious. Indeed, people are often completely ignorant of their implicit attitudes, complicating the ability to study and interpret them accurately.
The takeaway here is to be specific when discussing attitudes, and define terms carefully. For a manager to say that somebody has attitude, or that somebody is being negative or positive about something, is vague and nonconstructive. Instead, a manager’s job is to observe and to try to pinpoint the possible causes and effects of a person’s perspective on something.
Attitudes in the Workplace
Everyone has attitudes about many things; these are not necessarily a bad thing. One aspect of employees’ attitude is the impact it can have on the people around them. People with a positive attitude can lift the spirits of their co-workers, while a person with a negative attitude can lower their spirits. Sometimes, though, this principle works in reverse, and attitudes are often more complex than positive or negative. Attitudes may affect both the employee’s work performance and the performances of co-workers .
Attitude
A person’s attitude can be influenced by his or her environment, just as a person’s attitude affects his or her environment.
Can Management Change People’s Attitudes?
Some attitudes represent a dangerous element in the workplace that can spread to those closest to the employee and affect everyone’s performance. Is it a manager’s responsibility to help change the person’s attitude? Should the employee alone be responsible? The answer is that attitudes are the confluence of an individual and external stimuli, and therefore everyone is in a position of responsibility.
Still, a manager may be able to influence a employee’s attitude if the root cause relates to work conditions or work environment. For example, employees may develop poor attitudes if they work long hours, if the company is having difficulties, or if they have relationship issues with the manager or another employee. Similarly, if employees feel believe there is little chance for advancement or that their efforts go unappreciated by the organization, they may develop a negative attitude. To the extent they are able, managers should strive to remedy these situations to encourage an effective work environment.
A strong work environment is vital for an effective and efficient workplace. Employees who are in a positive, encouraging work environment are more likely to seek solutions and remain loyal, even if the company is having financial difficulties. Even so, employees have some responsibility to alter their own attitudes. If management does everything in its power to create a positive environment and the employee refuses to participate, then managers can do little else to help. At times, attitudes are beyond the reach of the business to improve.
5.4.2: How Attitude Influences Behavior
Attitudes can positively or negatively affect a person’s behavior, regardless of whether the individual is aware of the effects.
Learning Objective
Explain how differing attitudes can have a meaningful effect on employee behavior
Key Points
- Attitudes are infectious and can affect the people that are near the person exhibiting a given attitude, which in turn can influence their behavior as well.
- Understanding different types of attitudes and their likely implications is useful in predicting how individuals’ attitudes influence their behavior.
- Daniel Katz identifies four categories of attitudes: utilitarian, knowledge, ego-defensive and value-expressive.
- Organizations can influence a employee’s attitudes and behavior by using different management strategies and by creating strong organizational environments.
- As people are affected in different ways by varying influences, an organization may want to implement multiple strategies.
Key Term
- behavior change
-
Any transformation or modification of human habits or patterns of conduct.
Individual Attitudes and Behaviors
Attitudes can positively or negatively affect a person’s behavior. A person may not always be aware of his or her attitude or the effect it is having on behavior. A person who has positive attitudes towards work and co-workers (such as contentment, friendliness, etc.) can positively influence those around them. These positive attitudes are usually manifested in a person’s behavior; people with a good attitude are active and productive and do what they can to improve the mood of those around them.
In much the same way, a person who displays negative attitudes (such as discontentment, boredom, etc.), will behave accordingly. People with these types of attitudes towards work may likewise affect those around them and behave in a manner that reduces efficiency and effectiveness.
Attitudinal Categories
Attitude and behavior interact differently based upon the attitude in question. Understanding different types of attitudes and their likely implications is useful in predicting how individuals’ attitudes may govern their behavior. Daniel Katz uses four attitude classifications:
- Utilitarian: Utilitarian refers to an individual’s attitude as derived from self or community interest. An example could be getting a raise. As a raise means more disposable income, employees will have a positive attitude about getting a raise, which may positively affect their behavior in some circumstances.
- Knowledge: Logic, or rationalizing, is another means by which people form attitudes. When an organization appeals to people’s logic and explains why it is assigning tasks or pursuing a strategy, it can generate a more positive disposition towards that task or strategy (and vice versa, if the employee does not recognize why a task is logical).
- Ego-defensive: People have a tendency to use attitudes to protect their ego, resulting in a common negative attitude. If a manager criticizes employees’ work without offering suggestions for improvement, employees may form a negative attitude and subsequently dismiss the manager as foolish in an effort to defend their work. Managers must therefore carefully manage criticism and offer solutions, not simply identify problems.
- Value-expressive: People develop central values over time. These values are not always explicit or simple. Managers should always be aware of what is important to their employees from a values perspective (that is, what do they stand for? why do they do what they do?). Having such an awareness can management to align organizational vision with individual values, thereby generating passion among the workforce.
Organizational Attitudes and Behaviors
Attitudes can be infectious and can influence the behavior of those around them. Organizations must therefore recognize that it is possible to influence a person’s attitude and, in turn, his or her behavior. A positive work environment, job satisfaction, a reward system, and a code of conduct can all help reinforce specific behaviors.
One key to altering an individual’s behavior is consistency. Fostering initiatives that influence behavior is not enough; everyone in the organization needs to be committed to the success of these initiatives. It is also important to remember that certain activities will be more effective with some people than with others. Management may want to outline a few different behavior-change strategies to have the biggest effect across the organization and take into consideration the diversity inherent in any group.
5.4.3: Defining Values
Values are guiding principles that determine individual morality and conduct.
Learning Objective
Define values in the context of organizational ethics and organizational behavior
Key Points
- Personal values are people’s internal conception of what is good, beneficial, important, useful, beautiful, desirable, constructive, etc.
- Values such as honesty, hard work, and discipline can increase an employee’s efficacy in the workplace and help them serve as a positive role model to others.
- Employees should not impose their own values on their co-workers.
- Management must take values into consideration when hiring to ensure that employee values align with the company’s, as well as those of other co-workers.
Key Term
- values
-
A collection of guiding principles; what an individual considers to be morally right and desirable in life, especially regarding personal conduct.
Overview
Personal values can be influenced by culture, tradition, and a combination of internal and external factors. Values determine what individuals find important in their daily life and help to shape their behavior in each situation they encounter. Since values often strongly influence both attitude and behavior, they serve as a kind of personal compass for employee conduct in the workplace. Values help determine whether an employee is passionate about work and the workplace, which in turn can lead to above-average returns, high employee satisfaction, strong team dynamics, and synergy.
How Are Values Formed?
Values are usually shaped by many different internal and external influences, including family, traditions, culture, and, more recently, media and the Internet. A person will filter all of these influences and meld them into a unique value set that may differ from the value sets of others in the same culture.
Values are thought to develop in various stages during a person’s upbringing, and they remain relatively consistent as children mature into adults. Sociologist Morris Massey outlines three critical development periods for an individual’s value system:
- Imprint period (birth to age seven): Individuals begin establishing the template for what will become their own values.
- Modeling period (ages eight to thirteen): The individual’s value template is sculpted and shaped by parents, teachers, and other people and experiences in the person’s life.
- Socialization period (ages thirteen to twenty-one): An individual fine-tunes values through personal exploration and comparing and contrasting with other people’s behavior.
Values in the Workplace
Values can strongly influence employee conduct in the workplace. If an employee values honesty, hard work, and discipline, for example, he will likely make an effort to exhibit those traits in the workplace. This person may therefore be a more efficient employee and a more positive role model to others than an employee with opposite values.
Conflict may arise, however, if an employee realizes that her co-workers do not share her values. For example, an employee who values hard work may resent co-workers who are lazy or unproductive without being reprimanded. Even so, additional conflicts can result if the employee attempts to force her own values on her co-workers.
Hiring for Values
If the managers of a business create a mission statement, they have likely decided what values they want their company to project to the public. The mission statement can help them seek out candidates whose personalities match these values, which can help reduce friction in the workplace and foster a positive work environment.
Skills-based hiring is important for efficiency and is relatively intuitive. However, hiring for values is at least as important. Because individual values have such strong attitudinal and behavioral effects, a company must hire teams of individuals whose values do not conflict with either each other’s or those of the organization.
Hard work
A strong work ethic is a personal value.
5.4.4: How Values Influence Behavior
Values influence behavior because people emulate the conduct they hold valuable.
Learning Objective
Discuss the positive relationship between meaningful corporate and employee values and behavior in the workplace
Key Points
- Values are an important element that affects individuals and how they behave towards others.
- Companies can influence a person’s behavior with codes of conduct, ethics and vision statements, ethics committees, and a punishment-and-reward system.
- A gap sometimes exists between a person’s values and behavior. Organizational strategies, such as a reward system, can close that gap.
- Culture is also largely relevant to how values shape behavior, as a given organizational culture can create camaraderie and social interdependence.
Key Term
- behavior
-
The way a living creature acts.
Overview
Values are defined as perspectives about an appropriate course of action. If a person values honesty, then he or she will strive to be honest. People who value transparency will work hard to be transparent. Values are one important element that affects individual character and behavior towards others. The relationship between values and behavior is intimate, as values create a construct for appropriate actions.
Values and Behavior in the Workplace
A work environment should strive to encourage positive values and discourage negative influences that affect behavior. All individuals possess a moral compass, defined via values, which direct how they treat others and conduct themselves. People who lack strong or ethical values may participate in negative behavior that can hurt the organization. While a company cannot do anything about the influences that shape a person’s values and behavior before hiring, the organization can try to influence employee behavior in the workplace.
Means of Encouraging or Discouraging Behavior
Training programs, codes of conduct, and ethics committees can inform employees of the types of behavior that the company finds acceptable and unacceptable. While these efforts will not necessarily not change an individual’s values, they can help them decide not to participate in unethical behavior while at work. Managers must emphasize not only an employee’s responsibilities, but also what the organization expects with respect to values and ethics. Ethics statements and vision statements are useful tools in communicating to employees what the company stands for and why.
A system of punishments and rewards can also help foster the type of values the company wants to see in its employees, essentially filtering behavior through conditioning. If people see that certain behaviors are rewarded, then they may decide to alter their behavior and in turn alter their values. In addition, a gap sometimes exists between a person’s values and behavior. This gap can stem from a conscious decision not to follow a specific value with a corresponding action. This decision can be influenced by how deeply this value affects the person’s character and by the surrounding environment.
Culture is also largely relevant to how values shape behavior, as a given organizational culture can create camaraderie and social interdependence. Conforming to the expectations and values of the broader organization is a common outcome of organizations with strong ethos and vision. Such an organization promotes passion and positive behavior in their employees. Of course, a company’s culture can work in both directions. Some industries are inherently competitive, valuing individual dominance over other individuals (for example, sales, stock trading, etc.). While some may view such a culture as objectively negative, it is subjectively useful for the organization to instill and develop these values to create certain behaviors (such as hard work and high motivation).
5.4.5: Defining Job Satisfaction
Job satisfaction is the level of contentment employees feel about their work, which can affect performance.
Learning Objective
Define job satisfaction in the context of the driving forces in organizational behavior
Key Points
- Job satisfaction can be influenced by a person’s ability to complete required tasks, the level of communication in an organization, and the way management treats employees.
- Measuring job satisfaction can be challenging, as the definition of satisfaction can be different for different people.
- If an organization is concerned about employee job satisfaction, management may conduct surveys to determine what type of strategies to implement. This approach helps management define job satisfaction objectively.
- Superior-subordinate communication, or the relationship between supervisors and their direct report(s), is another important influence on job satisfaction in the workplace.
Key Term
- job satisfaction
-
The level of contentment a person feels regarding his or her work.
What Is Job Satisfaction?
Job satisfaction is the level of contentment a person feels regarding his or her job. This feeling is mainly based on an individual’s perception of satisfaction. Job satisfaction can be influenced by a person’s ability to complete required tasks, the level of communication in an organization, and the way management treats employees.
Job satisfaction falls into two levels: affective job satisfaction and cognitive job satisfaction. Affective job satisfaction is a person’s emotional feeling about the job as a whole. Cognitive job satisfaction is how satisfied employees feel concerning some aspect of their job, such as pay, hours, or benefits.
Measuring Job Satisfaction
Many organizations face challenges in accurately measuring job satisfaction, as the definition of satisfaction can differ among various people within an organization. However, most organizations realize that workers’ level of job satisfaction can impact their job performance, and thus determining metrics is crucial to creating strong efficiency.
Despite widespread belief to the contrary, studies have shown that high-performing employees do not feel satisfied with their job simply as a result of to high-level titles or increased pay. This lack of correlation is an significant concern for organizations, since studies also reveal that the implementation of positive HR practices results in financial gain for the organizations. The cost of employees is quite high, and creating satisfaction relevant to the return on this investment is paramount. Simply put: positive work environments and increased shareholder value are directly related.
Some factors of job satisfaction may rank as more important than others, depending on each worker’s needs and personal and professional goals. To create a benchmark for measuring and ultimately creating job satisfaction, managers in an organization can employ proven test methods such as the Job Descriptive Index (JDI) or the Minnesota Satisfaction Questionnaire (MSQ). These assessments help management define job satisfaction objectively.
Important Factors
Typically, five factors can be used to measure and influence job satisfaction:
1. Pay or total compensation
2. The work itself (i.e., job specifics such as projects, responsibilities)
3. Promotion opportunities (i.e., expanded responsibilities, more prestigious title)
4. Relationship with supervisor
5. Interaction and work relationship with coworkers
Management and Communication
In addition to these five factors, one of the most important aspects of an individual’s work in a modern organization concerns communication demands that the employee encounters on the job. Demands can be characterized as a communication load: “the rate and complexity of communication inputs an individual must process in a particular time frame.” If an individual receives too many messages simultaneously, does not receive enough input on the job, or is unsuccessful in processing these inputs, the individual is more likely to become dissatisfied, aggravated, and unhappy with work, leading to a low level of job satisfaction.
Superior–subordinate communication, or the relationship between supervisors and their direct report(s), is another important influence on job satisfaction in the workplace. The way in which subordinates perceive a supervisor’s behavior can positively or negatively influence job satisfaction. Communication behavior—such as facial expression, eye contact, vocal expression, and body movement—is crucial to the superior–subordinate relationship.
5.4.6: How Job Satisfaction Influences Behavior
Job satisfaction can affect a person’s level of commitment to the organization, absenteeism, and job turnover.
Learning Objective
Discuss the way in which job satisfaction reflects upon work behaviors in an organization
Key Points
- If people are satisfied with the work they are doing, it feels less like work, thus motivating a more positive attitude and higher levels of passion.
- Individuals who are committed to their job will likely be more willing to work longer hours or take on additional responsibilities without an increase in pay.
- Satisfaction can be improved through effective management strategies. Managers are responsible for understanding what motivates employee satisfaction and creating a positive work environment conducive to it.
Key Terms
- job turnover
-
The number of employees who leave an organization of their own free will and need to be replaced.
- job description
-
An outline of the tasks and responsibilities in a post within an organization.
The Influence of Job Satisfaction on Behavior
Job satisfaction can affect a person’s level of commitment to the organization, absenteeism, and job turnover rate. It can also affect performance levels, employee willingness to participate in problem-solving activities, and the amount of effort employees put in to perform activities outside their job description. When people are satisfied with the work they are doing, then their job feels less like work and is a more enjoyable experience. Those who are satisfied in their jobs usually do not find it difficult to get up and go to work.
Job satisfaction
Job satisfaction can affect relationships.
Job satisfaction also reduces stress, which can affect job performance, mental well-being, and physical health. Stress can also affect decision-making—possibly leading to unethical or nonstrategic choices. Satisfied employees, on the other hand, maintain a more positive and carefree perspective about work. This positive outlook often spreads to co-workers and can have a positive experience on everyone’s performance. There are some indications that job satisfaction is directly tied to job performance; nonetheless, feeling less stressed can positively affect a person’s behavior.
Methods for Increasing Job Satisfaction
To determine if employees are actually satisfied with the work they do, organizations frequently conduct surveys to measure employees’ level of job satisfaction and to identify areas—on-boarding, job training, employee incentive programs, etc.—for improvement and job enrichment. Because job satisfaction varies for each individual, management teams employ several different strategies to help the majority of employees within an organization feel satisfied with their place in the company.
One proven way to enhance job satisfaction is rewarding employees based on performance and positive behavior. When employees go above and beyond their job description to complete a project or assist a colleague, their actions can be referred to as organizational citizenship behavior or OCB (see Bommer, Miles, and Grover, 2003). Bommer, Miles, and Grover state:
Social-information processing is predicated on the notion that people form ideas based on information drawn from their immediate environment, and the behavior of co-workers is a very salient component of an employee’s environment. Therefore, observing frequent citizenship episodes with in a workgroup is likely to lead to attitudes that such OCB is normal and appropriate. Consequently, the individual is likely to replicate this ‘normal’ behavior.
These positive changes in behavior show that people learn from their environments and that corporate culture plays a large part in creating job satisfaction. Managers are tasked with managing this positive culture and understanding how each employee is affected by cultural influences in the workplace. No two people are the same; this is where managers come into play. Managers must be insightful and observant, identifying what motivates high levels of job satisfaction in each individual and ensuring employees get what they need. In some ways, a manager’s customers are their subordinates. Understanding this dynamic is an important component of the role of management.
5.4.7: How Emotion and Mood Influence Behavior
Emotion and mood can affect temperament, personality, disposition, motivation, and initial perspectives and reactions.
Learning Objective
Describe the importance of employee moods and emotions on overall performance from an organizational perspective
Key Points
- The poor decision-making effects of a given mood can hinder a person’s job performance and lead to bad decisions that affect the company.
- Emotion is a subjective lens on an objective world; decision-making should discard emotion whenever possible. This is particularly important for managers, who make significant decisions on a daily basis.
- As emotion is largely a chemical balance (or imbalance) in the mind, emotions can quickly cloud judgment and complicate social interactions without the individual being consciously aware that it is happening.
Key Terms
- emotions
-
Subjective, conscious experiences that are characterized primarily by psycho-physiological expressions, biological reactions, and mental states.
- mood
-
A mental or emotional state.
Emotions in the Workplace
Emotions and mood can affect temperament, personality, disposition, and motivation. They can affect a person’s physical well-being, judgement, and perception. Emotions play a critical role in how individuals behave and react to external stimuli; they are often internalized enough for people to fail to notice when they are at work. Emotions and mood can cloud judgment and reduce rationality in decision-making.
Mood
All moods can affect judgment, perception, and physical and emotional well-being. Long-term exposure to negative moods or stressful environments can lead to illnesses such as heart disease, diabetes, and ulcers. The decision-making effects of any kind of bad mood can hinder a person’s job performance and lead to poor decisions that affect the company. In contrast, a positive mood can enhance creativity and problem solving. However, positive moods can also create false optimism and negatively influence decision making.
Emotion
Emotions are reciprocal with mood, temperament, personality, disposition, and motivation. Emotions can be influenced by hormones and neurotransmitters, such as dopamine and seratonin. Dopamine can affect a person’s energy level and mood, while seratonin can affect critical-thinking skills. As emotion is largely a chemical balance (or imbalance) in the mind, emotions can quickly cloud judgment and complicate social interactions without the individual being consciously aware that it is happening.
Plutchik Wheel
Emotions are complex and move in various directions. Modeling emotional feelings and considering their behavioral implications are useful in preventing emotions from having a negative effect on the workplace.
The implication for behavior is important for both managers and subordinates to understand. Workers must try to identify objectively when an emotional predisposition is influencing their behavior and judgement and ensure that the repercussions of the emotion are either positive or neutralized. Positive emotions can be a great thing, producing extroversion, energy and job satisfaction. However, both positive and negative emotions can distort the validity of a decision. Being overconfident, for example, can be just as dangerous as being under-confident.
Organizational Implications
By encouraging positive employee management relationships and employee dynamics, an organization may be able to balance a person’s mood and emotions. Improving the level of job satisfaction for employees is another way that a company can influence an employee’s mood. If a person is satisfied at work, that condition may reduce levels of stress and help influence motivation and disposition. Job satisfaction can affect a person’s mood and emotional state. Providing organizational benefits, such as a company gym, meditation classes, or company retreats, can likewise influence a person’s emotions. An active lifestyle has been shown to produce an increased level of dopamine, which can enhance energy and mood.
Managers are tasked not only with monitoring and controlling their own moods and emotions, but also with recognizing emotional issues in their subordinates. Managers should strive to balance the emotions of their subordinates, ensuring nothing negatively affects their mental well-being. This can be a difficult role for management, as many people display their emotions in different ways (and most tend to hide them, particularly at work). Managers must be both perceptive and strategic in ensuring a mental balance at work.
5.5: Motivating an Organization
5.5.1: The Importance of Motivation
Motivating employees can lead to increased productivity and allow an organization to achieve higher levels of output.
Learning Objective
Identify the importance of generating high levels of motivation in employees within an organizational behavior framework
Key Points
- Motivation is generally what energizes, maintains, and controls behavior.
- The role of motivation in the workplace is straightforward theoretically but is difficult to actually measure.
- Salary is often enough motivation to keep employees working for an organization, but it’s not always enough to push them to fulfill their full potential.
- Motivated employees will retain a high level of innovation while producing higher-quality work at a higher level of efficiency.
- The opportunity cost in motivating employees is essentially zero.
Key Terms
- innovation
-
The introduction of something new; the development of an original idea.
- Opportunity cost
-
The value of investing in the next best alternative; the value forfeited by taking a particular route.
- productivity
-
The rate at which products and services are generated relative to a particular workforce.
Motivation in the Workplace
Generally speaking, motivation is what energizes, maintains, and controls behavior. As such, it is clear why it plays an important role in the workplace. But empirically measuring that role is another matter; it is challenging to capture an individual’s drive in quantitative metrics in order to ascertain the degree to which higher motivation is responsible for higher productivity. However, it is widely accepted that motivated employees generate higher value and lead to more substantial levels of achievement. The management of motivation is therefore a critical element of success in any business; with an increase in productivity, an organization can achieve higher levels of output.
Research has shown that motivated employees will:
- Always look for a “better” way to complete a task
- Be more quality-oriented
- Work with higher productivity and efficiency
In summary, motivated employees will retain a high level of innovation while producing higher-quality work more efficiently. There is no downside—i.e., the opportunity cost of motivating employees is essentially zero, assuming it does not require additional capital to coach managers to act as effective motivators.
Internal and External Motivation
Salary is often enough to keep employees working for an organization, but it’s not always necessarily enough to push them to fulfill their full potential. Herzberg’s theory emphasizes that while salary is enough to avoid dissatisfaction, it is not necessarily enough to propel employees to increase their productivity and achievement. In fact, the output of employees whose motivation comes solely from salary and benefits tends to decline over time. To increase employees’ efficiency and work quality, managers must turn to understanding and responding to individuals’ internal and external motivations. External motives include work environment (e.g., cramped cubicle vs. airy, open office); internal motivations include thoughts and emotions (e.g., boredom with performing the same task over and over vs. excitement at being given a wide variety of project types).
Internal and external motives
There are four sources of motivation. The three internal motives are needs, cognitions, and emotions. The fourth source consists of external motives.
5.5.2: Perspectives on Motivation
Motivation in the workplace is primarily concerned with improving employees’ focus through the use of incentives.
Learning Objective
Compare and contrast the organizational behavior theories regarding analyzing and improving motivation in the workplace
Key Points
- Generally, motivation in the workplace can be thought of through one of four specific theoretical frameworks: needs-oriented, cognition-oriented, behavior-oriented, and job-oriented.
- In needs-oriented theories, motivation is achieved through fulfilling a particular employee’s needs, with anything from salary to a sense of fulfillment.
- In cognition-oriented theories, motivation is achieved through fulfilling employees’ rational expectation that they be compensated based directly on the amount of value they provide.
- In behavior-oriented theories, motivation is achieved through conditioning (reinforcement and punishment). Conditioning is the implementation of positive incentives to promote desirable behaviors and negative consequences to discourage undesirable behaviors.
- In job-oriented theories, motivation is achieved when employees feel fulfilled and interested in their work; financial compensation is only enough to avoid dissatisfaction.
Key Terms
- conditioning
-
A technique of behavior modification, developed by B.F. Skinner, that utilizes positive and negative reinforcement and positive and negative punishment to alter behavior.
- incentive
-
A reward used to motivate employees to perform better.
From a managerial perspective, very few ideas are more important than the dynamics of motivation. Understanding what moves employees toward efficiency and fulfillment is at the core of any manager’s responsibilities. Motivation in the workplace is primarily concerned with improving employees’ focus, often through pursuing positive incentives and avoiding negative ones.
Theories of motivation are of course rooted in psychology. An individual must direct their attention toward a task, generate the necessary effort to achieve that task, and persist in working toward it despite potential distractions. Various theories have attempted to identify the factors that contribute to effective employee motivation, most of which are easily divided into four broad categories:
- Needs-oriented theories
- Cognition-oriented theories
- Behavior-oriented theories
- Job-oriented theories
Needs-Oriented Theories
At its most basic, motivation can be defined as the fulfillment of various human needs. These needs can encompass a range of human desires, from basic, tangible needs of survival to complex, emotional needs surrounding an individual’s psychological well-being.
Hierarchy of Needs
The most well-known example of a needs-oriented theory of motivation is Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs. Maslow postulated that needs should be fulfilled in a particular scaffolded order, with food, water, and shelter in the bottom, most fundamental two tiers and intangible needs such as fulfillment, self-esteem, and a sense of belonging in the upper three tiers. While this framework makes a certain amount of logical sense, critics have noted that there have been minimal data that suggest employees strive to satisfy needs in the workplace in accordance with this hierarchical framework. But the fundamental idea behind Maslow’s model is that individuals have various tangible and intangible desires that can be leveraged in the use of motivational incentives.
Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs
Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs postulates that need must be fulfilled in a hierarchical order, from basic needs such as food and water to more intangible needs such as self-esteem and a sense of belonging.
Need for Achievement Theory
Atkinson and McClelland proposed the Need for Achievement Theory, which highlights three particular needs in the context of the workplace: achievement, authority, and affiliation. Atkinson and McClelland hypothesized that every individual has a need for all three of these intangible segments of fulfillment but that most individuals lean more toward one of the three. For example, a salesman with a quota to fulfill would be best paired with an achievement-oriented manager, as such a goal-oriented approach toward, for example, a specific number of sales would be highly motivating.
Cognition-Oriented Theories
Cognition-oriented theories generally revolve around expectations and deriving equitable compensation for a given effort or outcome. There are two main cognition-oriented theories: equity theory and expectancy theory.
Equity Theory
Equity Theory is based on the basic concept of exchange. It values the culmination of employee experience, skills, and performance against their respective compensation and advancement opportunities.
Expectancy Theory
Expectancy Theory is similarly derived, but it states this relationship through an equation: Motivation = Expectation (Σ Instrumentality × Valence). Instrumentality simply refers to the belief that a level of performance will result in a level of outcome; valence refers to the value of that outcome.
Essentially, Expectation Theory and Equity Theory demonstrate the value of rewarding an employee’s investment of time and effort with appropriate compensation.
Behavior-Oriented Theories
The underlying concept of behavioral approaches to motivation is rooted in theories of “conditioning,” particularly the work of psychologist B.F. Skinner. Behaviorism stipulates that an employer should promote positive behavior and deter negative behavior, generally through a basic rewards system. Variable compensation, as found in many sales jobs, is a prime example of this concept. When an employee makes a sale, the employer provides a certain portion of income to the employee that executed that sale. This positive reinforcement serves as a behavior modifier, motivating the employee to repeat this behavior and make more sales.
Job-Oriented Theories
Job-oriented theories adhere to the view that employees are motivated to complete tasks effectively because of an innate desire to be fulfilled or to contribute and that compensation and other forms of incentives are less important to them.
Two-Factor Theory
Frederick Herzberg’s Two-Factor Theory is the most well known of the job-oriented theories, despite the fact that it has not been supported by empirical evidence. Herzberg states that salary, benefits, status, and other tangible benefits for employees can only reduce dissatisfaction and that intangibles—such as autonomy, natural interest, recognition, and the responsibility of the work itself—are the true basis of motivation.
Work Engagement Theory
Other theories, such as Work Engagement Theory, similarly propose that intellectually fulfilling and emotionally immersive work is the foundation of a motivated workforce.
Clearly, our understanding of workplace motivation could benefit from further research and empirical analysis. But the variety of theories also highlights the fact that people can be motivated by different things in different circumstances. Effective organizational management requires an understanding of these theories as well as of their possible limitations.
5.6: Employee Needs and Motivation
5.6.1: Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs
Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs helps managers understand employees’ needs in order to further employees’ motivation.
Learning Objective
Diagram Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs in the context of organizational motivation and employee behaviors
Key Points
- Maslow is best known for his theory, the Hierarchy of Needs. Depicted in a pyramid, the theory explains the different levels and importance of human psychological and physical needs. It can be used by business managers to better understand employee motivation.
- The general needs in Maslow’s hierarchy include physiological needs (food and clothing), safety needs (job security), social needs (friendship), self-esteem, and self-actualization.
- Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs relates to organizational theory and behavior due to it’s exploration of worker motivation, enabling better managerial practices and higher job satisfaction.
- Managers must be perceptive and empathetic to their employees—they must listen to what their employees’ needs are and work to fulfill them.
Key Term
- self-actualization
-
The final level of psychological development, which can be achieved when all basic and mental needs are fulfilled.
Abraham Maslow was a social psychologist who focused on the entirety of human psychological needs rather than on individual psychological problems. Maslow is best known for his theory, the Hierarchy of Needs. Depicted in a pyramid, the theory explains the different levels of importance of human psychological and physical needs.
The general needs in Maslow’s hierarchy include physiological needs (food and clothing), safety needs (job security), social needs (friendship), self-esteem, and self-actualization. Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs can be used by managers to better understand employees’ needs and motivations, allowing them to best provide for employees’ needs and generate high productivity and job satisfaction.
The Hierarchy of Needs: Levels of the Pyramid
Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs
Each level of Maslow’s hierarchy outlines a specific category of need, each of which must be accomplished in a bottom-up order. Managers should correlate their managerial style with the needs of their employees.
At the bottom of the pyramid are the physiological (or basic) needs of a human being: food, water, sleep, and sex. The next level is safety needs: security, order, and stability. These two levels are important to the physical survival of the person. Once individuals have basic nutrition, shelter, and safety, they attempt to accomplish more.
The third level of need is love and belonging, which are psychological needs; when individuals have taken care of themselves physically, they are ready to share themselves with others, such as with family and friends. The fourth level is achieved when individuals feel comfortable with what they have accomplished. This is the esteem level, which includes the need to feel competent and recognized, such as through status and level of success. Then there is the cognitive level, where individuals intellectually stimulate themselves and explore. After that is the aesthetic level, which includes the need for harmony, order, and beauty.
At the top of the pyramid, self-actualization occurs when individuals reach a state of harmony and understanding because they have achieved their full potential. Once people have reached the self-actualization stage they focus on themselves and try to build their own image. They may look at this in terms of feelings such as self-confidence, or by accomplishing a set goal.
Hierarchy of Needs and Organizational Theory
Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs relates to organizational theory and behavior because it explores a worker’s motivation. For example, some people are prepared to work just for money, but others like going to work because of the friends they have made there or the fact that they are respected by others and recognized for their good work. One conclusion that can be made from Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs in the workforce is, “If a lower need is not met, then the higher ones are ignored.” For example, if employees are worried that they will be fired, and have no job security, they will be far more concerned about capital accumulation and ensuring their lower rungs can continue to be met (paying rent, paying bills, etc.) than about friendship and respect at work. However, if employees are wealthy enough to fulfill their basic needs, praise for good work and meaningful group relationships may be a more important motivation.
If a need is not met, staff may become very frustrated. For example, if someone works hard for a promotion and does not achieve the recognition they want, they may become demotivated and put in less effort. When a need is met it will no longer motivate the person, but the next need in the hierarchy will become important to that person. Keep in mind that it is not quite as simple in reality as in a model, and that individuals may have needs that are more complex or difficult to quantify than the hierarchy suggests. Managers must be perceptive and empathetic to their employees, they must listen to what their needs are and work to fulfill them.
5.6.2: Alderfer’s ERG Theory
Alderfer’s ERG theory, based on Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs, outlines three core needs: existence, relatedness, and growth.
Learning Objective
Discuss Clayton Alderfer’s ERG Theory relative to employee needs and motivation within an organization
Key Points
- ERG Theory posits that there are three groups of core needs: existence (E), relatedness (R), and growth (G)—hence the acronym “ERG”. These groups align with the levels of Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs.
- The “existence” needs describe our basic material requirements for living.
- The “relatedness” needs concern the maintaining of important interpersonal relationships.
- The “growth” needs relate to self-actualization and self-esteem.
- Alderfer also proposed that if an individual’s needs in a certain category are not met, then they will redouble their efforts toward fulfilling needs in a lower category.
Key Terms
- existence
-
The state of being or occurring.
- relatedness
-
The state of being connected, especially by kinship.
Clayton Paul Alderfer (b. 1940) is an American psychologist who further developed Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs into his own ERG Theory. ERG Theory posits that there are three groups of core needs: existence (E), relatedness (R), and growth (G)—hence the acronym “ERG.” These groups align with the Maslow’s levels of physiological needs, social needs, and self-actualization needs, respectively.
The “existence” needs describe our basic material requirements for living. These include what Maslow categorized as physiological needs (such as air, food, water, and shelter) and safety-related needs (such as health and secure employment and property).
The “relatedness” needs concern the maintaining of important interpersonal relationships. These needs are based in social interactions with others and align with Maslow’s levels of love/belonging-related needs (such as friendship, family, and sexual intiamcy) and esteem-related needs (such as respect of and by others).
Finally, the “growth” needs describe our intrinsic desire for personal development. These needs align with Maslow’s levels of esteem-related needs (such as self-esteem, confidence, and achievement) and self-actualization needs (such as morality, creativity, problem-solving, and acceptance of facts).
Alderfer proposed that if an individual’s needs in a certain category are not met, then they will redouble their efforts toward fulfilling needs in a lower category. For example, if an individual’s self-esteem is suffering, they will invest more effort in the relatedness category of needs.
5.6.3: McClelland’s Need Theory
David McClelland describes three central motivational paradigms: achievement, affiliation and power.
Learning Objective
Examine what McClelland’s Need Theory proposes regarding motivating employees and fulfilling their needs
Key Points
- McClelland’s Need Theory, created by psychologist David McClelland, is a motivational model that attempts to explain how the needs for achievement, power, and affiliation affect people’s actions in a management context.
- People who are achievement-motivated are driven by the desire to master tasks and situations.
- People who are affiliation-motivated are driven by the desire to create and maintain social relationships. They enjoy belonging to a group and want to feel loved and accepted.
- People who are power-motivated are driven by the desire to influence, teach, or encourage others.
- Each individual is motivated by varying degrees of each of these three categories of needs.
Key Terms
- zero-sum
-
Of any system in which all gains are offset by exactly equal losses.
- achievement
-
The act of performing, obtaining, or accomplishing.
- affiliation
-
The relationship that results from combining one thing with another.
Psychologist David McClelland developed Need Theory, a motivational model that attempts to explain how the needs for achievement, power (authority), and affiliation affect people’s actions in a management context. Need Theory is commonly often taught in management and organizational-behavior classes.
David McClelland
Psychologist David McClelland created Need Theory.
Achievement
People who are strongly achievement-motivated are driven by the desire for mastery. They prefer working on tasks of moderate difficulty in which outcomes are the result of their effort rather than of luck. They value receiving feedback on their work.
Affiliation
People who are strongly affiliation-motivated are driven by the desire to create and maintain social relationships. They enjoy belonging to a group and want to feel loved and accepted. They may not make effective managers because they may worry too much about how others will feel about them.
Power
People who are strongly power-motivated are driven by the desire to influence, teach, or encourage others. They enjoy work and place a high value on discipline. However, they may take a zero-sum approach to group work—for one person to win, or succeed, another must lose, or fail. If channeled appropriately, though, this can positively support group goals and help others in the group feel competent about their work.
Application of Need Theory
Need Theory does not claim that people can be categorized into one of three types. Rather, it asserts that all people are motivated by all of these needs in varying degrees and proportions. An individual’s balance of these needs forms a kind of profile that can be useful in determining a motivational paradigm for them. It is important to note that needs do not necessarily correlate with competencies; it is possible for an employee to be strongly affiliation-motivated, for example, but to still be successful in a situation in which his affiliation needs are not met.
McClelland proposes that those in top management positions should have a high need for power and a low need for affiliation. He also believes that although individuals with a need for achievement can make good managers, they are not generally suited to being in top management positions.
5.6.4: Herzberg’s Two-Factor Theory
Herzberg’s Two-Factor Theory states that certain factors cause job satisfaction and other factors cause dissatisfaction.
Learning Objective
Analyze Frederick Herzberg’s perspective on motivating employees through his Two-Factor Theory (also known as Motivation-Hygiene Theory)
Key Points
- According to Herzberg, intrinsic motivators and extrinsic motivators have an inverse relationship: intrinsic motivators tend to create motivation when they are present, whereas extrinsic motivators tend to reduce motivation when they are absent.
- Intrinsic motivators tend to represent less tangible, more emotional needs, such as challenging work, recognition, relationships, and growth potential.
- Extrinsic motivators tend to represent more tangible, basic needs, such as status, job security, salary, and fringe benefits.
- Extrinsic motivators are expected and so cause dissatisfaction if they are absent. Intrinsic motivators, on the other hand, can provide extra motivation. Because of this, satisfaction and dissatisfaction are independent; one does not necessarily increase exactly as the other decreases.
- Management is tasked with differentiating when more job satisfaction is needed (providing intrinsic motivators) and when less job dissatisfaction is needed (providing extrinsic motivators).
Key Terms
- Two-Factor Theory
-
A framework, developed by Frederick Herzberg, that suggests there are certain factors in the workplace that can cause job satisfaction and a separate set of factors can cause dissatisfaction.
- hygiene factors
-
Elements of life or work that do not increase satisfaction but that can lead to dissatisfaction if they are missing.
The Two Factors: Intrinsic and Extrinsic Motivators
Frederick Herzberg’s Two-Factor Theory, also known as Motivation-Hygiene Theory or intrinsic vs. extrinsic motivation, concludes that there are certain factors in the workplace that can cause job satisfaction and a separate set of factors that can cause dissatisfaction. It is critical to emphasize that this is not a linear relationship: the factors that cause satisfaction do not necessarily negate those that cause dissatisfaction; one does not necessarily increase exactly as the other decreases.
Extrinsic Motivators (Hygiene Factors)
Extrinsic motivators tend to represent more tangible, basic needs—i.e., the kinds of needs identified in McClelland’s “existence” category of needs in his ERG Theory or in the lower levels of Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs. Extrinsic motivators include status, job security, salary, and fringe benefits. Managers must realize that not providing the appropriate and expected extrinsic motivators will sow dissatisfaction and unmotivated behavior among employees.
Intrinsic Motivators (Motivation Factors)
Intrinsic motivators tend to represent less tangible, more emotional needs—i.e., the kinds of needs identified in McClelland’s “relatedness” and “growth” categories of needs in his ERG Theory and in the higher levels of Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs. Intrinsic motivators include challenging work, recognition, relationships, and growth potential. Managers must recognize that while these needs may be outside the more traditional scope of what the workplace should provide, they are absolutely critical in empowering strong individual and team performance.
Herzberg’s Theory in Context
Herzberg’s Two-Factor Theory, McClelland’s Need Theory, and Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs all talk about higher-level psychological needs such as achievement, recognition, responsibility, and advancement. The key factor that differentiates Two-Factor Theory is the idea of expectation.
According to Herzberg, intrinsic motivators and extrinsic motivators have an inverse relationship. This is to say that intrinsic motivators tend to inspire motivation when they are present, while extrinsic motivators tend to reduce motivation when they are absent. This is because of expectation. Extrinsic motivators (e.g., salary, benefits) are expected and so will not increase motivation when they are in place, but they will cause dissatisfaction when they are missing. Intrinsic motivators (e.g., challenging work), on the other hand, can be a source of additional motivation.
If management wants to increase employees’ job satisfaction, they should be concerned with the nature of the work itself—the opportunities it presents employees for gaining status, assuming responsibility, and achieving self-realization. If, on the other hand, management wishes to reduce dissatisfaction, then it must focus on the job environment—policies, procedures, supervision, and working conditions. To ensure a satisfied and productive workforce, managers must pay attention to both sets of job factors.
5.7: Process and Motivation
5.7.1: Equity Theory
Equity theory explains the relational satisfaction in terms of fair or unfair distribution of resources within interpersonal relationships.
Learning Objective
Discuss equity theory and its motivational implications at the organizational level
Key Points
- Equity theory proposes that individuals who perceive themselves as either under-rewarded or over-rewarded will experience distress, and that this distress leads to efforts to restore equity within the relationship.
- If an employee feels underpaid, then that employee will experience hostility towards the organization and perhaps co-workers, which may result in the employee’s diminished performance.
- When individuals find themselves participating in inequitable relationships, they become distressed.
- Managers must monitor their employees’ earnings, discuss this with their superiors, assess efficacy, and provide intangible rewards.
Key Terms
- equity theory
-
An attempt to explain relational satisfaction in terms of perceptions of fair or unfair distribution of resources within interpersonal relationships.
- equitable
-
Marked by or having equity.
Motivated by Equity
Equity theory attempts to explain relational satisfaction in terms of perceptions of fair or unfair distributions of resources within interpersonal relationships. Regarded as one of many theories of justice, equity theory was first developed in 1963 by John Stacey Adams. Adams, a workplace and behavioral psychologist, asserted that employees seek to maintain equity between what they put into a job and what they receive from it against the perceived inputs and outcomes of others.
Equity theory posits that people value fair treatment, which motivates them to maintain a similar standard of fairness with their co-workers and the organization. According to the theory, equity structure in the workplace is based on the ratio of inputs (employee contributions) to outcomes (salary and other rewards).
Imbalances
Equity theory proposes that individuals who perceive themselves as either under-rewarded or over-rewarded will experience distress, and that this distress leads to efforts to restore equity within the relationship. Equity theory focuses on determining whether the distribution of resources is fair to both relational partners. Equity is measured by comparing the ratios of contributions and benefits of each person within the relationship. Partners do not have to receive equal benefits (such as receiving the same amount of love, care, and financial security) or make equal contributions (such as investing the same amount of effort, time, and financial resources), as long as the ratio between these benefits and contributions is similar.
Much like other prevalent theories of motivation, such as Maslow’s hierarchy of needs, equity theory acknowledges that subtle and variable individual factors affect individuals’ assessment and perception of their relationship with their relational partners. According to Adams, underpayment inequity induces anger, while overpayment induces guilt. Compensation, whether hourly or salaried, is a central concern for employees and therefore the cause of equity or inequity in most, but not all, cases.
The Employee/Organization Relationship
In any position, employees wants to feel that their contributions and work performance are being rewarded with fair pay. An employee who feels underpaid may experience feelings of hostility towards the organization and perhaps co-workers. This hostility may lead to the employee under-performing and could cause job dissatisfaction in others.
Subtle or intangible compensation also plays an important role in feelings about equity. Receiving recognition for strong job performance and being thanked can create employee satisfaction, and therefore help the employee feel worthwhile, resulting in better outcomes for both the individual and the organization.
When individuals find themselves participating in inequitable relationships, they become distressed. The more inequitable the relationship, the more distress individuals feel.
The Role of Management
Depending upon the organizational structure and its distribution of authority, the decision to provide monetary compensation for a strong work deliverable is not always in the hands of an employee’s direct manager. As a result, managers must monitor their direct reports’ earnings, discuss this with their superiors, assess efficacy, and provide intangible rewards (such as recommendations, gratitude, authority, new projects, etc.). Creating and maintaining equity is a responsibility of all managers.
5.7.2: Assessing and Restoring Equity
The assessment and restoration of equity helps improve employee performance and organizational behavior.
Learning Objective
Distinguish the core components of equity theory that seek to measure equity accurately and restore equity when appropriate
Key Points
- Equity theory proposes that individuals who perceive themselves as either under-rewarded or over-rewarded will experience distress, and this distress leads to efforts to restore equity within the relationship.
- Individuals consider themselves treated fairly if they perceive the ratio of their own inputs to outcomes to be equivalent to those around them.
- In any position, employees want to feel that their contributions and work performance are being fairly rewarded. If this is not the case, management must intervene and either renegotiate or replace dissatisfied individuals.
Key Terms
- organization
-
A group of people or other legal entities with an explicit purpose and written rules.
- human resources
-
The personnel department of an organization, dealing with the recruitment, administration, management and training of employees.
Organizational Behavior
Similar to human resources management, organizational behavior management (OBM) is an important aspect of management. OBM applies psychological principles of organizational behavior and the experimental analysis of behavior to organizations to improve individual and group performance. The areas of application may include: systems analysis, management, and training and performance improvement. Equity theory plays a role in analyzing organizational behavior.
Definition of Equity Theory
Equity theory suggests that individuals who perceive themselves as either under-rewarded or over-rewarded will experience distress, and that this distress leads to efforts to restore equity within the relationship. The theory focuses on determining whether the distribution of resources is fair to both relational partners. Equity is measured by comparing the ratios of contributions and benefits of each person within the relationship.
Equity theory
The core concept of equity theory amounts to each party’s inputs and outcomes equating.
Assessing Equity
Individuals consider themselves treated fairly when they perceive the ratio of their inputs to outcomes to be equivalent to those around them. In practice, all else being equal, this means an employee would find it acceptable for a more senior colleague to receive higher compensation, since the value of the senior employee’s experience (and input) is higher. Employee job satisfaction often relies on comparisons with their co-workers.
If an employee observes another employee receive more recognition and rewards for contributions—even when both have performed the same amount and quality of work—the employee who receives fewer rewards will experience dissatisfaction. That employee may feel under-appreciated as a consequence. Equity theory proposes that rewards (outcomes) should be directly related to the quality and quantity of employees’ contributions (inputs). If both employees in this situation receive the same reward, the workforce is more likely to recognize that the organization is fair, observant, and appreciative.
Managers are tasked with assessing equity: identifying both the quantity and quality of a given individual’s inputs and comparing that to his or her overall compensation. Managers are also responsible for discussing this situation with their subordinates, ensuring that they feel their contributions are being matched by their salary and other forms of compensation. While this concern also falls within the human resources frame, the manager is more directly involved with employee’s actual contributions (and thus more accurate in assessing value).
Restoring Equity
In any position, employees want to feel that their contributions and work performance are being fairly compensated. If this is not the case, management must intervene and either renegotiate or replace the dissatisfied individual. Workers have a right to be compensated in a manner that reflects their value; if they are not, then management must restore this equity or risk losing valuable talent.
Organizations can ensure collective rewards are maximized through the use of accepted systems for equitably rewarding members. Systems of equity will evolve within groups, and members must encourage other members to accept and adhere to these systems. The only way groups can ensure equitable practices are observed is by making it more profitable to behave equitably than inequitably. Thus, an organization will generally reward members who treat others equitably and generally punish (increase the cost for) members who treat others inequitably.
5.7.3: Expectancy Theory
Expectancy theory deals with mental processes regarding choices and behaviors.
Learning Objective
Analyze Vroom’s expectancy theory to assess the accuracy and effectiveness of motivating based upon expectancy, instrumentality, and valence
Key Points
- Expectancy theory proposes that individuals decide to act in a certain way because they are motivated to select a behavior over other behaviors based on their expectation of the result.
- The individual chooses based on estimates of how well the expected results of a given behavior are going to match up with the desired results.
- Expectancy theory explains the behavioral process of why individuals are motivated to choose one behavioral option over another. It also explains how they make decisions to achieve the outcome that they perceive as most valuable.
Key Terms
- instrumentality
-
The quality or condition of serving a purpose, being useful.
- expectancy theory
-
A framework that holds that people decide to act in a certain way because they are motivated to select a specific behavior over other behaviors based on the expected result.
- valence
-
A one-dimensional value assigned to an object, situation, or state that can usually be positive or negative.
Overview
Expectancy theory is about the mental processes involved in making choices. In organizational behavior, expectancy theory embraces Victor Vroom’s definition of motivation. Vroom proposed that a person decides to behave in a certain way, selecting one behavior over other behaviors, based on the expected result of the selected behavior. For example, people will be willing to work harder if they think the extra effort will be rewarded.
In essence, the motivation behind chosen behavior is determined by the desirability of the expected outcome. At the theory’s core is the cognitive process of how an individual processes the different motivational elements. Processing is done before an individual makes the final choice. The expected result, therefore, is not the sole determining factor in the decision of how to behave because the person has to predict whether or not the expectation will be fulfilled.
Vroom’s Expectancy Theory
In 1964, Vroom defined motivation as a process controlled by the individual that governed choices among alternative forms of voluntary activities. Individuals make choices based on estimates of how well the expected results of a given behavior are going to match up with or eventually lead to the desired results.
In Vroom’s analysis, the basis for motivation is threefold:
- the individual’s expectancy that effort will lead to the intended performance
- the instrumentality of this performance in achieving a certain result
- the desirability of the result (known as valence) to the individual
Vroom introduces three variables within his expectancy theory: valence (V), expectancy (E), and instrumentality (I). These three elements also have clearly defined relationships: effort-performance expectancy (E>P expectancy), performance-outcome expectancy (P>O expectancy).
These three components of expectancy theory (expectancy, instrumentality, and valence) fit together in this fashion:
- Expectancy: Effort → Performance (E→P)
- Instrumentality: Performance → Outcome (P→O)
- Valence: V(O)
Effort → Performance (E→P): Expectancy is the belief that an effort (E) will result in attainment of desired performance (P) goals. Usually, this belief is based on an individual’s past experience, self-confidence, and the perceived difficulty of the performance standard or goal. Factors associated with the individual’s expectancy perception are competence, goal difficulty, and control.
Performance → Outcome (P→O): Instrumentality is the belief that a person will receive a desired outcome (O) if the performance expectation is met. This outcome may come in the form of a pay increase, promotion, recognition, or sense of accomplishment. Instrumentality is low when the outcome is the same for all possible levels of performance.
V(O): Valence is the value individuals place on outcomes (O) based on their needs, goals, values, and sources of motivation. Factors associated with the individual’s valence are values, needs, goals, preferences, sources of motivation, and the strength of an individual’s preference for a particular outcome.
Implications
Expectancy theory can help managers understand how individuals are motivated to choose among various behavioral alternatives. To enhance the connection between performance and outcomes, managers should use systems that tie rewards very closely to performance. Managers also need to ensure that the rewards provided are deserved and wanted by the recipients. To improve the connection between effort and performance, managers should use training to improve employee capabilities and help employees believe that added effort will in fact lead to better performance .
5.7.4: Goal-Setting Theory
People perform better when they are committed to achieving certain goals, enabling businesses to benefit from employing goal-setting theory.
Learning Objective
Apply goal-setting theory to the process and motivation considerations inherent in organizational behavior and business procedure
Key Points
- Studies of goal-setting suggest that it is an effective tool for making progress, as long as managers ensure that participants are clearly aware of what is expected from them.
- Goals that are difficult to achieve and specific tend to increase performance more than goals that are not.
- On a personal level, setting goals helps people work towards their own objectives (most commonly, financial or career-based goals).
- Managers should not constantly drive motivation, or keep track of an employee’s work on a continuous basis. Instead, they should use goals, which have the ability to function as a self-regulatory mechanism.
- Managers should also keep track of performance to allow employees to see how effective they have been in attaining their goals.
Key Terms
- motivation
-
Willingness of action, especially in behavior.
- productivity
-
The rate at which goods or services are produced by a standard population of workers.
Overview
People perform better when they are committed to achieving certain goals. Factors that ensure commitment to goals include:
- The importance of the expected outcomes of goal attainment
- Self-efficacy, or belief that the goal can be achieved
- Promises or engagements to others, which can strengthen level of commitment
Aim for the goal
Goal-setting is closely tied to performance. Those who set realistic but challenging goals are likely to perform better than those who do not.
Goal-setting is a key component of performance in a business setting, but certain principles apply. Goals that are difficult to achieve and specific tend to increase performance more than goals that are not. A goal can become more specific by attaching a quantity to it (for example, “increase productivity by 50 percent”) or by defining certain tasks that must be completed.
Goals in Business (Motivation)
Managers cannot constantly drive motivation, or keep track of an employee’s work on a continuous basis. Goals are therefore an important tool for managers, because goals have the ability to function as a self-regulatory mechanism that gives an employee a certain amount of guidance. Shalley, Locke, and Latham have identified four ways goal-setting can affect individual performance:
- Goals focus attention toward goal-relevant activities and away from goal-irrelevant activities.
- Goals serve as an energizer. Higher goals induce greater effort, while low goals induce lesser effort.
- Goals affect persistence.
- Goals activate cognitive knowledge and strategies that help employees cope with the situation at hand.
Locke et al. examined the behavioral effects of goal-setting, concluding that 90 percent of laboratory and field studies involving specific and challenging goals led to higher performance than those involving easy or no goals. While some managers believe it is sufficient to urge employees to “do their best,” Locke and Latham have a contrasting view. They propose that people who are told to “do their best” generally do not. To elicit some specific form of behavior from another person requires giving the person a clear view of what is expected. A goal is therefore vital, as it helps an individual focus his or her efforts in a specific direction.
However, when management merely dictates goals, employee motivation to meet these goals is diminished. To increase motivation, employees should participate in the goal-setting process.
Goals and Feedback
Managers should track performance so that employees can see how effective they have been in attaining their goals. Without proper feedback channels, employees find it impossible to adapt or adjust their behavior. Goal-setting and feedback go hand-in-hand. Without feedback, goal-setting is unlikely to work.
Providing feedback on short-term objectives helps to sustain an employee’s motivation and commitment to a goal. When giving feedback, managers should:
- Create a positive context
- Use constructive and positive language
- Focus on behaviors and strategies
- Tailor feedback to the needs of the individual worker
- Make feedback a two-way communication process
5.7.5: Setting the Right Goals
People perform better when they are committed to achieving certain goals, emphasizing the importance of strategic goal setting.
Learning Objective
Examine the inherent motivational value in setting meaningful goals and objectives in the organizational behavior frame
Key Points
- Setting goals is a process that requires buy-in from both the management and employee; it is best executed using tools such as goal-setting theory.
- The SMART model illustrates the goal-setting aims, where objectives are identified and pursued through being specific, measurable, achievable, realistic, and time-oriented.
- According to Locke and Latham, the effectiveness of goal setting can be explained by two aspects of Temporal Motivation Theory (TMT): the principle of diminishing returns and temporal discounting.
- Combining Locke and Latham’s perspective with SMART goal setting, individuals should focus on taking small steps towards larger objectives through specific, measurable, attainable, realistic, and timely goals.
Key Terms
- diminishing returns
-
A condition in which additional inputs into an organization, project, or process produce progressively fewer or lower-quality outputs and may decrease the total quantity or quality of outputs.
- quantitatively
-
Measurable numerically; demonstrated through numbers.
Introduction to Goal Setting
Goal setting involves establishing specific, measurable, achievable, realistic and time-targeted (SMART) goals. Work on the theory of goal-setting suggests that it is an effective tool for progress, primarily through ensuring that participants in a group with a common goal are clearly aware of what is expected from them (and able to measure it). On a personal level, setting goals helps people work towards their own objectives—most commonly financial or career-based goals.
Goal setting and achievement
Athletes set goals during the training process. Through choice, effort, persistence, and cognition, they can prepare to compete.
SMART Goals
Setting goals requires both the foresight to perceive future obstacles and a scale in which to measure and benchmark progress. Setting effective goals and identifying the the appropriate way in which to pursue these goals are both important elements of successfully implementing an effective motivational strategy. The SMART method for goal setting effectively summarizes the necessary steps to take when setting objectives:
- Specific: Establishing the appropriate scope of goals is difficult, and it is important to be as specific as possible to ensure successful implementation.
- Measurable: The ability to measure and assess progress quantitatively is useful in goal setting, as it provides motivational checkpoints and ensures progress stays on track.
- Achievable: Ensuring goals are achievable is important in successfully pursuing goals. People have a natural tendency to challenge themselves, but it is important to stay within the confines of ability.
- Realistic: Similar to achievable, realistic goal setting requires a grounded approach of identifying tangible, results-oriented objectives.
- Time-targeted: Establishing deadlines is essential for goals, particularly from a motivational perspective. Knowing the time frame necessary in which to complete the goal is important in ensuring the end product will be useful and relevant to the business.
Deriving Goal Setting from Temporal Motivation Theory
Locke and Latham note that goal-setting theory lacks “the issue of time perspective.” Taking this into consideration, Steel and Konig use Temporal Motivation Theory (TMT) to account for goal-setting’s effects and suggest new hypotheses regarding two moderators: goal difficulty and proximity.
Motivation over Time
The idea of time perspective is simpler than it sounds. Take an example of a university student who has 30 days to study for a final exam. On day 1, when the exam is still a month away, the student does not feel the time motivation very strongly. They are much more likely to choose an activity that is more enjoyable than studying. However, as the test approaches, the student will increasingly tend to choose studying due to the time perspective.
Larger Objectives vs. Series of Smaller Objectives
With this example in mind, it seems logical that structuring a project based on a series of smaller goals with closer deadlines rather than on one faraway end goal is likely to be more motivating. This is also supported by the idea of diminishing returns, which posits that for each unit of investment (be it a minute of time or a dollar) into a given process, less output will be produced. Therefore, combining a series of small objectives (processes) will be more motivating, causing less output to be lost to diminishing returns over time. It is related to the expression “the sum of the parts can be greater than the whole.”
SMART Goal-Setting and TMT
TMT (which draws from these two theories of time perspective and diminishing returns) and SMART goal setting together therefore tell us that to maximize motivation and therefore output, managers should divide projects into several more immediate, specific, and realistic sub-goals.
5.8: Reinforcement and Motivation
5.8.1: Reinforcement as a Management Tool
Reinforcement is a process of strengthening desirable behaviors, often through the use of rewards.
Learning Objective
Describe the role of behavioral reinforcement in organizational management
Key Points
- Reinforcement is a term used in behavioral analysis and in a specific kind of intentional behavior change known as operant conditioning. It is a process of increasing the incidence of a (measurable) desirable behavior.
- Reinforcement is a process in which someone is given a reward (i.e., “positive reinforcement”) or is spared an unpleasant consequence (i.e., “negative reinforcement”) to incentivize a certain desirable behavior.
- Incentive programs (e.g., bonuses, commissions, etc.) are examples of rewards (i.e., positive reinforcers) managers can give their employees to increase desirable results, such as sales.
Key Terms
- Positive Reinforcement
-
Giving a desired reward when a behavior is performed to increase how often the person repeats the behavior.
- reinforcement
-
The process of increasing the incidence of a directly measurable behavior.
- negative reinforcement
-
The removal of an unpleasant condition or consequence when a behavior is performed to increase how often the behavior is repeated.
Defining Reinforcement
Reinforcement is a term used in the context of behavioral analysis and in a specific kind of intentional behavior change known as operant conditioning. It is a process of increasing the incidence of a (measurable) behavior. Very basic examples of such behaviors include things like the rate of pulling a lever, the duration of holding down a button, or the speed with which a switch is flipped after a certain noise is sounded.
Positive and Negative Reinforcement
In reinforcement, the rate of the target behavior is increased by giving a reward (i.e., “positive reinforcement”) or by removing an unpleasant stimulus (i.e., “negative reinforcement”) immediately or shortly after each occurrence of the behavior. Giving a monkey a banana for performing a trick is an example of positive reinforcement; quieting a constant unpleasantly loud noise when a rat pushes a button is an example of negative reinforcement.
Reinforcement as a Management Tool
In a management context, reinforcers include salary increases, bonuses, promotions, variable incomes, flexible work hours, and paid sabbaticals. One particularly common positive-reinforcement technique is the incentive program, a formal scheme used to promote or encourage specific actions, behaviors, or results from employees over a defined period of time. Incentive programs can reduce turnover, boost morale and loyalty, improve wellness, increase retention, and drive daily performance among employees. Motivating staff will in turn help business outcomes and increase efficiency.
Managers are responsible for identifying what behaviors should be promoted and what should be discouraged and must carefully consider organizational objectives in this process. Implementing rewards and punishments that parallel the organization’s goals help to create a work culture and work environment that embody those goals and objectives.
Example of an Incentive Program
Let’s take an IT sales team as an example. The team’s overarching goal is to sell their new software to businesses. The manager may want to emphasize sales to partners of a certain size (i.e., big contracts). To this end, the manager may reward team members who gain clients of 5,000 or more employees with a commission of 5% of the overall sales volume for each such partner. This reward of a 5% commission reinforces the behavior of closing big contracts, strongly motivating team members to work toward that goal and thus likely increasing the number of big contracts closed.
Features of a Successful Incentive Program
To facilitate the creation of a profitable program, every feature of the incentive program must be tailored to the participants’ interests. A successful incentive program requires clearly defined rules, suitable rewards, efficient communication strategies, and measurable success metrics. By adapting each element of the program to fit the target audience, companies are better able to engage program participants and enhance overall program efficacy.
Reinforcing good behavior
This soldier reinforces her dog’s desirable behavior by giving it a treat.
5.8.2: Punishment as a Management Tool
Punishment is the imposition of a negative consequence with the goal of reducing or stopping someone’s undesirable behavior.
Learning Objective
Recognize the uses of punishment as a motivational tool in the context of organizational behavio
Key Points
- The purpose of punishment is to encourage and enforce “proper” behavior as defined by a group, an organization, or society through the use of negative consequences.
- Punishment, like reinforcement, is a term used in behavioral analysis and in a specific kind of intentional behavior change known as operant conditioning.
- Whereas reinforcement is used to increase desirable behavior, punishment is used to decrease undesirable behavior through the application of a negative consequence (positive punishment) or through the removal of something the person enjoys (negative punishment).
- Punishment can be used in a business context to prevent employees from doing something the organization or manager considers undesirable or wrong.
Key Term
- punishment
-
The act of imposing a sanction.
Defining Punishment
Punishment is a term used in the context of behavioral analysis and in a specific kind of intentional behavior change known as operant conditioning. It is a process of decreasing the incidence of a (measurable) behavior. Very basic examples of such behaviors include things like the rate of pulling a lever, the duration of holding down a button, or the speed with which a switch is flipped after a certain noise is sounded.
Positive and Negative Punishment
In punishment, the rate of the target behavior is decreased by imposing a negative consequence (i.e., “positive punishment”) or by removing a pleasant or desired stimulus (i.e., “negative punishment”) immediately or shortly after each occurrence of the behavior. Shocking a rat for turning left instead of right in a maze is an example of positive punishment; taking away a child’s toy after he hits his brother is an example of negative punishment.
Punishment as a Management Tool
The purpose of punishment is to prevent future occurrences of a given socially unacceptable or undesirable behavior. According to deterrence theory, the awareness of a punishment will prevent people from performing the behavior. This can be accomplished either through punishing someone immediately after the undesirable behavior so that they are reluctant to perform the behavior again or through educating people about the punishment preemptively so they are reluctant to perform the behavior at all. In a management context, punishment tools can include demotions, salary cuts, and terminations (fires).
In business organizations, punishment and deterrence theory play a vital role in shaping culture to be in line with operational expectations and in avoiding conflicts and negative outcomes both internally and externally. If employees clearly know what they are not supposed to do, they generally try to avoid doing it. Prevention is a much cheaper and easier approach than waiting for something bad to happen, so preemptive education regarding rules and penalties for rule violation is common practice.
Punishment of the Paddle
This is an old form of punishment.
5.8.3: Managerial Perspectives on Motivation
Managers can employ motivational theory and reinforcement tools to motivate employees and increase efficiency.
Learning Objective
Explain the managerial importance of understanding motivational theories as they pertain to an organization’s employees
Key Points
- Motivating employees is a primary responsibility of management, as motivational management enables higher outputs and job satisfaction from employees.
- While there is a great deal of research on motivation from the perspective of both management and psychology, a few specific psychological theories can be applied specifically to employee motivation.
- According to psychological theories of motivation, management is in the difficult position of identifying and fulfilling needs for different employees who will, in turn, require distinct motivational assistance.
- Managers may rely on a few tools to steer the direction of motivation. These include positive and negative reinforcements and positive and negative punishment.
Key Term
- motivation
-
Willingness to perform an action, especially a behavior; an incentive or reason for doing something.
Psychological Theories and Motivation
Motivation is the psychological boost that helps people achieve high performance and reach goals. Motivating employees is a primary managerial responsibility of management, as motivational management enables higher outputs and job satisfaction from employees.
While studies have produced a great deal of research on motivation, from the perspective of both management and psychology, a few psychological theories can be applied specifically to employee motivation. Using modern research and understanding what drives behavior are the focal points of organizational behavior study, and managers should actively apply these psychological frameworks to their everyday management strategies and considerations. These frameworks can be coupled with concepts of reinforcement and punishment as tools managers use to emphasize or discourage specific behaviors.
Need-based Theories
Need-based theories of motivation focus on an employee’s drive to satisfy needs by working. Needs range from basic physiological needs for survival to higher-level emotional needs, like belonging and self-actualization.
From the perspective of the manager, Maslow’s model (see below image) is highly useful in drawing a few simple yet important conclusions. First, if employees are not being paid enough to satisfy the bottom two tiers of the hierarchy (for example, pay rent, buy food, etc.), then they will be unmotivated to create a strong social environment, accomplish goals, or be creative. Salary, therefore, must be high enough to match or exceed a reasonable standard of living. Secondly, without a good culture for social interaction, employees will find it difficult to achieve high levels of creativity and problem-solving. If managers want to capture maximum value from employees, they must supply each component on this list—to the best of their ability—in reimbursements, culture, and goal setting.
Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs
The hierarchy underscores how management should assess employees’ needs. Salary encompasses the bottom two tiers (safety-related and physiological needs), while social and objective-based motivators address the higher needs (love and belonging, esteem, and self-actualization).
Equity Theory
Equity theory is derived from social-exchange theory. It explains motivation in the workplace as a cognitive process where the employee evaluates the balance between inputs (or efforts) in the workplace and the outcomes (or rewards) that are received or anticipated.
For management, the implications are similar to those of Maslow’s lower-level needs. Employees expect that they will receive an equivalent reimbursement for the value they create. Management must assess the value of the job objectively and clearly explain the exchange (time and efforts for money/benefits/job satisfaction) to the employee prior to the onset of work. Equity must be maintained for proper motivation, and managers are responsible for establishing equity within the organization.
Reinforcement and Punishment
Based upon the psychological theories of motivation discussed here, management is in the difficult position of identifying and fulfilling needs for different employees (who will in turn require different motivational assistance). To accomplish this need fulfillment, managers have a few tools to employ that allows them to steer the direction of motivation. These include positive and negative reinforcements and positive and negative punishments.
As noted above in Maslow’s hierarchy, employees are motivated in a linear fashion (fulfilling base needs will result in higher needs). As a result, a manager must recognize what level of the hierarchy an employee is on before using reinforcement or punishment. If the employee is more concerned about salary and creating enough capital to live comfortably, a manager could positively reinforce certain behaviors with bonus pay or raises. If an employee is pursuing esteem, managers can apply promotions or employee-achievement awards.
Similarly, punishments can be effective in emphasizing motivational successes and failures as well. Using equity theory, managers can consider employees’ actions in context with desired outcomes. For example, if an employee is often late and misses important meetings, resulting in a loss of revenue for the company, equity theory permits that this employee should be punished with lower pay. In this situation, equity theory allows management to motivate through punishing employees who do not create the required returns to pay their salaries.
5.9: Job Design and Motivation
5.9.1: Defining Job Design
Job design is the systematic and purposeful allocation of tasks to individuals and groups within an organization.
Learning Objective
Compare and contrast the multitude of job-design approaches and perspectives available in the organizational field
Key Points
- The key inputs for a strong job design are a task, motivation, resource allocation and a compensation system.
- Taylorism, or scientific management, is the original job-design theory. It stresses standardization of tasks and proper training of workers to administer the tasks for which they are responsible.
- The Socio-Technical Systems Approach is a theory that maps the evolution from individual work to work groups. The organization itself is structured to encourage group autonomy and productivity.
- The Core Characteristics Model connects job characteristics to the psychological states that the worker brings to the job. It emphasizes designing jobs so that they lead to desired outcomes.
- Taking into account these various theoretical models, job design is best described as specifying a task with enough context to communicate clearly and concisely what is expected of a given employee.
Key Term
- empower
-
To give people more confidence or strength to do something, often by enabling them to increase their control over their own life or situation.
Job Design Overview
Job design is the allocation of specific work tasks to individuals and groups. Allocating jobs and tasks means specifying the contents, method, and relationships of jobs to satisfy technological and organizational requirements, as well as the personal needs of jobholders.
Dick and Carey Systems Approach Model (Instructional Design)
The figure shows how an instructional system is designed. It represents a model of a job design with a specific application (instruction).
Key Elements of Job Design
To understand job design, it is helpful to identify some key elements and their relationship with job design processes.
- A task can be best defined as a piece of assigned work expected to be performed within a certain time. Job designers must strictly and thoroughly identify tasks that need completion.
- Motivation describes forces within the individual that account for the level, direction, and persistence of effort expended at work. Individuals need to be compelled, excited, and passionate to do their work. Managers should design jobs that motivate employees.
- Resource allocation occurs when an organization decides to appropriate or allocate certain resources to specific jobs, tasks, or dilemmas facing the organization. In job design, it is necessary to identify and structure jobs in a way that uses the company’s resources efficiently. Appropriate resource allocation allows large organizations to foster and develop innovation in their workforce and underscores strategy through distribution.
- Reward systems also play a role in job design. Reward systems include compensation, bonuses, raises, job security, benefits, and various other reward methods for employees. An outline or description of reward packages should be established when constructing jobs.
Theoretical Models of Job Design
Organizations may employ various theoretical approaches for job design. These include Taylorism, Socio-Technical Systems Approach, Core Characteristics Model, and Psychological Empowerment Theory. Each approach emphasizes different aspects to be considered in effective job design.
Taylorism
Taylorism, also known as scientific management, is a foundation for systematic job design. Frederick Taylor developed this theory in an effort to develop a “science” for every job within an organization according to the following principles:
- Create a standard method for each job.
- Successfully select and hire proper workers.
- Effectively train these workers.
- Support these workers.
The Socio-Technical Systems Approach
The Socio-Technical Systems Approach is based on the evolution from individual work to work groups. This approach has the following guiding principles:
- The design of the organization must fit its goals.
- Employees must be actively involved in designing the structure of the organization.
- Control of variances in production or service must be undertaken as close to their source as possible.
- Subsystems must be designed around relatively self-contained and recognizable units of work.
- Support systems must fit in with the design of the organization.
- The design should allow for a high-quality working life.
- Changes should continue to be made as necessary to meet changing environmental pressures.
Core Characteristics Model
Another modern job design theory is the Core Characteristics Model, which maintains five important job elements that motivate workers and performance:
- Skill variety
- Task identity
- Task significance
- Autonomy
- Job feedback
The individual elements are then proposed to lead to positive outcomes through three psychological states:
- Experienced meaningfulness
- Experienced responsibility
- Knowledge of results
Psychological Empowerment Theory
Psychological Empowerment Theory posits that there is a distinction between empowering practices and cognitive motivational states. When individuals are aware of the impact they have, they benefit more than if they cannot attribute positive impact to any of their actions.
Overall Trend
Many more iterations of job design theory have evolved, but general trends can be identified among them: job design is moving towards autonomous work teams and placing added emphasis on the importance of meaning derived from the individual.
5.9.2: Job Characteristics Theory
The Job Characteristics Theory is a framework for identifying how job characteristics affect job outcomes.
Learning Objective
Analyze the core characteristics, psychological states, and work outcomes in the Job Characteristics Theory, as identified by Hackman and Oldham
Key Points
- The Job Characteristics Theory (JCT), developed by Hackman and Oldham, is widely used as a framework to study how particular job characteristics affect job outcomes, including job satisfaction.
- The five job characteristics are skill variety, task variety, task significance, autonomy, and feedback.
- Three different psychological states determine how an employee reacts to job characteristics: experienced meaningfulness, experienced responsibility for outcomes, and knowledge of the actual results.
- Job outcomes, such as satisfaction and motivation, are the synthesis of core characteristics and psychological states.
Key Terms
- characteristic
-
A distinguishable feature of a person or thing.
- job analysis
-
The formal process of identifying the content of a position within an organization in terms of activities involved and attributes needed to perform the work, as well as major job requirements.
Core Characteristics
The Job Characteristics Theory (JCT), also referred to as Core Characteristics Model and developed by Hackman and Oldham, is widely used as a framework to study how particular job characteristics impact job outcomes, including job satisfaction. The theory states that there are five core job characteristics:
- Skill variety
- Task identity
- Task significance
- Autonomy
- Feedback
Each job has these characteristics to a greater or lesser extent. No one combination of characteristics makes for the ideal job; rather, it is the purpose of job design to adjust the levels of each characteristic to attune the overall job with the worker performing it. This alignment is important because the worker brings psychological states to bear upon the job that affect job outcomes when combined with the core characteristics.
Motivating potential score
The Job Characteristics Theory uses this equation to estimate the overall motivation inherent in a job design based upon the five core characteristics.
Psychological States
The core characteristics affect three critical psychological states of the workers doing the job:
- Experienced meaningfulness
- Experienced responsibility for outcomes
- Knowledge of the actual results
The job characteristics directly derive the three states. Indeed, the first three characteristics (skill variety, task variety and task significance) pertain to the meaningfulness of the work. Autonomy directly correlates to responsibility for outcomes, and knowledge of the actual results relates to feedback. Pictured as a process flow, the characteristics and psychological states operate in continuous feedback loop that allows employees to continue to be motivated by thoroughly owning and understanding the work in which they are involved.
Work Outcomes
The combination of core characteristics with psychological states influences work outcomes such as:
- Job satisfaction
- Absenteeism
- Work motivation
Therefore, the goal should be to design the job in such a way that the core characteristics complement the psychological states of the worker and lead to positive outcomes. The five core job characteristics can be combined to form a motivating potential score for a job that can be used as an index of how likely a job is to affect an employee’s attitudes and behaviors. Analyses of studies of the model provide some support for the validity of the Job Characteristics Theory.
5.9.3: Tactics for Improving Fit
Ways of improving job fit include assessing employee activities through various tools to increase employee satisfaction and efficiency.
Learning Objective
Describe ways in which management and supervisors can improve job design to fit employee and organizational needs
Key Points
- The flexibility to tailor job design more precisely for both organizational effectiveness and employee job satisfaction is a significant, ongoing part of the job design process.
- If a job is well designed, then its required competencies and responsibilities are explicit and clear.
- Training is meant to develop in the employee the skills required to improve job fit as the individual enters the workforce.
- Analyzing the outcomes of a given job within the organization, both from the task perspective and the employee perspective, can assist in improving fit.
- Supervisors can use interviews, surveys, observations, questionnaires, and checklists to observe efficacy of job design and improve fit for each employee.
Key Term
- job fit
-
Correlation between a given position’s roles, responsibilities, and objectives and the skills and competencies of the individual holding that position.
The Job Fit Template
The basis for improving fit between the employee and the job is striking a balance between job design and individual—crafting the job in such a way that it complements the employee’s individual skills, aspirations, personality, and attributes. Job design is usually completed prior to hiring the individual who then performs the identified duties. As a result, flexibility to tailor the job design for both organizational effectiveness and employee job satisfaction is a significant, ongoing part of the job design process.
If a job is well designed, then the competencies it requires and responsibilities it involves are explicit and clear. This design becomes the foundation for the job description, which is a more exact picture of the job’s nature and which comprises the following:
- The title and duties the job fulfills
- Who supervises the employee holding the job
- Experience and qualifications expected from an applicant
The job description outlines the general attributes of the person for whom the job is designed and serves as the basis for improvement and modification during the improvement process.
Training
The first step in improving fit for a given job design is training. Once an individual is hired to perform a specific set of duties, both management and human resources should assist in preparing the individual to accomplish these tasks. In this process, the organization is responsible for improving fit by supplying all of the necessary tools, contacts, and information employees will need to accomplish their objectives.
Job Analysis
Analyzing the outcomes of a given job within the organization, both from the task perspective and the employee perspective, can assist in improving fit by ensuring that the employee is both satisfied and accomplishing the desired objective. Job analysis employs a series of steps which enable a supervisor to assess a given employee/job fit and to improve the fit, if necessary. These steps include:
- Observation: The simplest method of assessing how a job and employee fit is observing the employee at work. The manager may find it useful to ask a few questions during this process, but it is important not to make the employee uncomfortable (which would skew the results).
- Survey/Questionnaire: Providing the employee with a survey is another effective data-collection strategy. A survey should provide dimensions of the job and allow the experts in that specific role to weigh the importance of each component. Supervisors can also gather data on what is working and what is not, allowing them to edit and improve task assignments.
- Interviews: One-on-one, formal or informal interviews are also a useful tool in gathering data about the employee, allowing the supervisor to obtain more details than a survey provides. In this situation, the supervisor can also customize each discussion to become more familiar with the personality, levels of satisfaction, and perceived efficiency of each employee.
- Checklist: Another method of improving job fit is to create a checklist. Employees or the supervisor can fill these out, identifying what tasks are being done early, on-time, or later (they can also note quality and resource efficiency).
Questionnaire
Employee questionnaires can be a useful method of assessing job fit.
5.10: Compensation and Motivation
5.10.1: Monetary Employee Compensation
Monetary compensation can be either guaranteed (base) pay or variable pay and positively correlates with job satisfaction.
Learning Objective
Identify the different cash compensation models (i.e., guaranteed and variable) and the behavioral implications of using monetary compensation
Key Points
- The basic element of guaranteed pay is the base salary, paid on an hourly, daily, weekly, bi-weekly, or monthly rate.
- Variable pay is a monetary (cash) reward, such as a bonus or commission, that is contingent on performance or results achieved.
- For many years, bonuses have been considered an incentive program that reinforces positive and efficient behavior among employees.
- Generally speaking, employees who feel that they are underpaid relative to their skill levels do not perform as well as those who feel that they are appropriately compensated.
Key Terms
- commission
-
A fee charged by an agent or broker for carrying out a transaction; for example, a finder’s fee.
- Variable Pay
-
A monetary (cash) reward that is contingent on discretion, performance, or results achieved.
Base Pay
Monetary compensation includes both guaranteed (base) and variable pay. The basic element of guaranteed pay is the base salary, paid on an hourly, daily, weekly, bi-weekly, or monthly rate. Many countries dictate the minimum base salary by defining a minimum wage.
U.S. Minimum Wage Map, 2007
A map of the United States comparing state minimum wage laws to the federal minimum wage. Kansas is the only state with a minimum wage rate lower than the federal one.
Individual skills and experience levels of employees leave room for differentiation of income levels within the job-based pay structure. In addition to base salary, other pay elements are based solely on employee/employer relations, such as salary and seniority allowance. Salaries and wages are tied to a job description that lays out the expectations and responsibilities of an employee. Management can refer to job descriptions to determine whether employees qualify for raises.
Variable Pay
Variable pay is a monetary reward that is contingent on discretion, performance, or results achieved. There are different types of variable pay plans, such as bonus schemes, sales incentives (commission), overtime pay, and more. Variable pay is common in industries such as real estate or insurance, where pay is based on commission or the amount of sales generated by the employee. In a typical variable pay plan, the salesperson might receive 50 percent of every dollar he brings in up to a defined level of revenue, after which pay increases to 85 percent for every dollar earned.
Bonuses represent another type of variable pay, one based on an employee’s performance during a certain period of time. Employees who are performing particularly well during a year may receive an additional bonus that is above their base salary or commission percentage.
Monetary Compensation and Behavior
From a behavioral perspective, bonuses have been studied to ascertain their effectiveness as an employee incentive to improve performance. B.F. Skinner, a behavioral psychologist, studied behavioral reactions to extrinsic environmental consequences such as reinforcement or punishment. Drawing on Skinner’s perspective, bonuses have served for a number of years as an incentive program to reinforce positive, efficient behavior among employees.
Additionally, behavioral and organizational psychologists have considered salaries in comparison with skill level to determine how employees perform based on their wage level. The results of these studies show that employees who feel that they are underpaid relative to their skill levels will not perform as well as they would if they felt that they were appropriately compensated.
The effect of compensation on employee job satisfaction has also been studied. Not surprisingly, employees who are paid more are more satisfied with their jobs and less inclined to leave their employers—up to a certain point (i.e., salary level). While the amount of that exact point is frequently debated, experts generally agree that somewhere beyond the ballpark of a six-figure salary range reflects diminishing returns (i.e., no additional benefit to the organization for paying the individual more).
5.10.2: Non-Monetary Employee Compensation
Non-monetary compensations (e.g., benefits) are essential in recruiting skilled employees and maintaining a satisfied workforce.
Learning Objective
Discuss non-monetary compensation benefits within the larger framework of motivation
Key Points
- Examples of non-monetary compensation include benefits, flex-time, time off, free or discounted parking, gym membership discounts, retirement matching, mentoring programs, tuition assistance, and childcare.
- A benefits plan is designed to address a specific need and is often provided in a non-cash form. Many countries dictate certain minimum benefits, such as paid time off, employer’s pension contribution, and sick pay.
- Many skilled laborers will not accept a position without at least a simple benefits package. It is standard practice in U.S. culture to offer a basic amount of non-monetary benefits to full-time, permanent employees.
Key Term
- non-monetary
-
Payment in the form of benefits, flex-time, time off, free or discounted parking, gym membership discounts, retirement plans, mentoring, tuition assistance, child care, or other non-cash option.
Benefits as Incentives
Non-monetary benefits are essential to attracting a productive workforce. Many skilled laborers will not accept a position that does not offer at least a simple benefits package. It is standard practice in U.S. culture to offer basic non-monetary benefits to full-time, permanent employees. Part-time and contract workers are not always offered these benefits, partly as a result of the high cost to businesses.
Offering benefits above the expected amount can be an incentive program and used to recruit highly skilled employees to an organization. For example, skilled employees may be more likely to join an organization that offers free onsite parking, retirement benefits, and extra paid time off than an organization that does not offer these fringe benefits. Companies also use non-monetary benefits to increase and maintain employee morale and satisfaction.
Benefits can be a key element in addressing the lowest level of Maslow’s needs hierarchy. If employees do not feel that an organization is treating them fairly with respect to basic needs (food, money for retirement, etc.), then they are likely to be less satisfied with their jobs, perform at a lower level, or leave. Those who do not feel their basic needs are met may also fail to reach higher levels of motivation.
Benefit Types
Employers have several options with respect to non-monetary compensation. These can include benefits (including medical or other insurance), flex-time, time off, free or discounted parking, gym membership discounts, retirement matching, mentoring programs, tuition assistance, and childcare. All of these benefits communicate to employees that their work is valued and promote a positive work-life balance. The idea behind benefits is to build a community and support system, which enables employees to focus on work rather than worry about life.
The largest category of non-monetary compensation includes benefits. Employee benefits can include paid time off, insurance (life, medical/dental, or disability coverage), and pension plans.
Legalities and Benefits
Many countries dictate different minimum benefits, such as paid time off, employer’s pension contribution, and sick pay. In the U.S., benefits may include a health plan to which the company contributes and that sometimes includes vision and dental coverage, along with basic health coverage. Some governments mandate benefits such as retirement savings matching, but organizations can offer additional retirement benefits through a matching plan.
Health insurance distribution (under 65 years)
Health insurance includes employer-sponsored health insurance, military health care, Medicaid, Medicare, and non-group health insurance. The largest group of insured Americans consists of middle- and upper-class employees receiving health insurance through employers. 16% of Americans remain uninsured.
5.10.3: Financial Rewards for Managers
Financial rewards are often used as a tool to motivate managers to perform better.
Learning Objective
Identify the relationship between management and pay-for-performance financial incentives.
Key Points
- Incentive programs, also known as “pay for performance,” provide employees, consumers, or providers with financial rewards as a way of motivating better performance.
- The view that managers are most responsible for strategic planning and decision making is part of the rationale for financial incentive programs. In this view, financial rewards such as bonuses are a performance-based incentive to improve productivity.
- One risk of incentive schemes is ethical hazard. Offering incentives to hit specific targets can result in the target becoming the primary goal, rather than the improvement of the company’s performance as a whole.
- The recession of 2008–2010 made it more difficult for businesses to offer managers monetary rewards.
Key Term
- incentive
-
Reward used to motivate employees toward better performance.
Incentive programs, also known as “pay for performance,” provide employees, consumers, or providers with financial rewards as a way of motivating better performance. Various behavioral factors might be considered prior to establishing an incentive program, including the target audience’s motivation, skills, recognition, understanding of the goals, and ability to measure progress. The interest of participants plays a vital role in determining an incentive program, as the goal is to motivate their behavior.
Pay-for-Performance Jobs
Pay-for-performance programs are quite common in a number of industries, most notably sales. A sales role often features a contractual agreement that stipulates a certain percentage of a given representative’s sales contribute to that sales rep’s own salary. This motivates sales professionals to pursue higher success rates, as their own income will directly correlate with their efficacy.
Other types of pay-for-performance jobs are found in the manufacturing, restaurant, and financial industries. The basic premise is simple: the more sales or profits generated by the individual, the larger the share of the organization’s profit that individual will receive in return.
Incentive Programs
Managerial roles can function similarly to these pay-for-performance jobs, where the success of the company (or department) will directly affect the salary of the manager. Managers are often motivated by financial rewards. Like other pay-for-performance programs, the incentive programs for managers are designed to increase their performance as well as the overall performance of the company. These and other incentive programs are often used to reduce turnover, boost morale and loyalty, improve employee wellness, increase retention, and drive performance.
The financial rewards of upper management are often the highest in the organization. Such financial incentive programs are based on the understanding that the top managers within a business are the most responsible for strategic planning and decision making. In this view, financial rewards like bonuses serve as an incentive for senior management to improve performance.
CEO pay growth compared to employee salaries, U.S. gross domestic product, and overall U.S. corporate profits
CEOs, as primary examples of upper managerial salary, receive high salaries in comparison to other gross income indicators. This contrast may be a result of the differing pay structure often associated with upper management.
A risk of incentive schemes is ethical hazards. Offering incentives to hit specific targets means the targets themselves can become the primary goal, rather than the improvement of the company’s performance as a whole. This mindset may cause a reduction in overall performance—even as the rate of hitting targets climbs. In the wake of the global recession of 2008–2010, financial incentive schemes received greater criticism and oversight, partly for this very reason.
Chapter 4: Organizational Culture and Innovation
4.1: Culture
4.1.1: Defining Organizational Culture
Organizational culture can be defined as the collective behavior of people within an organization and the meanings behind their actions.
Learning Objective
Define culture and it’s conceptual development within the context of organizations and innovation
Key Points
- Culture is inherently intangible, and a static definition of culture struggles to encapsulate the meaning and implications of its role in an organization.
- One way to define culture is simply as the overarching mentality and expectation of behavior within the context of a given group (e.g., an organization, business, country, etc.).
- Corporate culture is usually derived from the top down (i.e., upper management sets the tone) and comes in the form of expectation and consistency throughout the organization.
- Culture can be manipulated and altered depending on leadership and members. Instilling positive culture that promotes effective employee behavior is a manager’s primary task.
- While there are many models for and perspectives on defining culture within an organization, models such as Geert Hofstede’s, Edgar Schein’s and Gerry Johnson’s are useful in properly framing a comprehensive definition.
Key Term
- culture
-
The beliefs, values, behavior, and material objects that constitute a people’s way of life.
Culture is inherently intangible, and a static definition of culture struggles to encapsulate the meaning and implications of its role in an organization. One way to define culture is simply as the overarching mentality and expectation of behavior within the context of a given group (e.g., an organization, business, country, etc.). Culture provides a guiding perspective on how individuals within that group should act, and what meaning can be derived from those actions. Expectation, traditions, value, ethics, vision, and mission can all both communicate and reinforce a given group culture. Above all else, culture must be shared internally; otherwise it loses its form.
Culture in Business
Corporate culture is usually derived from the top down (i.e., upper management sets the tone) and comes in the form of expectation and consistency throughout the organization. All employees and managers must uphold these cultural expectations to generate a working environment that correlates to cultural expectations. The shared assumptions should be implicit in behavior and explicit in the mission, vision and ethics statements of the organization. Consistency between expectation and action is key here.
People working at Wikimedia
Even small things, such as the way an office space is set up, can set the tone for organizational culture.
Culture and Adaptability
Culture can be manipulated and altered, depending on leadership and members. Let’s take the simple example of a car dealership. Selling cars is usually a commission business, where the salesperson is a central success factor. Many car dealerships find that competition is an effective cultural component and embed that into the organization. This is easily accomplished with the right tools. A car dealership owner may hire specifically for competitiveness, making it clear that this is the type of individual they want to hire. The owner can create high variable salary and low fixed salary so that high performers are much more highly prized and rewarded than ineffective salespeople. The owner could give out awards at the end of each quarter to the most successful salesperson. The list could go on and on, but the important consideration here is how strategy and culture can be intertwined to evolve together.
Perspectives on Culture
Culture is a deeply important element of organizations and societies that is studied extensively in a variety of disciplines. This has generated more definitions of culture and how to go about empirically measuring it than could be touched upon in one overview. However, a few important perspectives for a business manager include:
- Hofstede’s Cultural Dimensions Theory – Postulates that cultural differences to be aware of include different perspectives on power distance, masculinity (vs. femininity), individualism (vs. collectivism), avoidance of uncertainty, long-term orientation, and indulgence.
- Schein’s Cognitive Levels of Organizational Culture – Edgar Schein believes that culture can be viewed most simply via artifacts (e.g., facilities, dress code, etc.), more acutely through values (e.g., focus on quality, loyalty or other central values) and most complexly through tacit assumptions (i.e., unspoken rules of behavior and other intangible expectations that are very difficult to observe and measure).
- Gerry Johnson’s Cultural Web – This includes the elements of culture, which is an important aspect of how we define it. Johnson underlines the paradigm, control system, organizational structure, power structure, symbols, stories, and myths as central determinants of what a given organizational culture stands for.
While each of these theories is complex, all together they help create a clearer picture of what exactly culture is and how it applies to managers and organizations.
4.1.2: The Impact of Culture on an Organization
Culture is a malleable component of an organization that can adapt and evolve through influences to create value.
Learning Objective
Identify the central components of an organization or company that result from the influence cultural dispositions
Key Points
- Culture, particularly in large organizations that have a great deal of momentum, can be difficult to influence or change.
- Understanding how to change an organizational culture requires some insight into what creates culture in the first place and how altering those components may impact meaningful cultural development.
- Some examples of organizational facets that influence culture are mission and vision statements, control systems, organizational structures, power hierarchies, symbols, routines, and internal stories and myths.
- When integrating culture change, it is important to update mission and vision statements, ensure buy-in from upper management, update control systems and power hierarchies, hire people representative of the desired culture (and remove those who are not), and update the corporate ethos.
Key Terms
- paradigm
-
A system of assumptions, concepts, values, and practices that constitutes a way of viewing reality.
- joint venture
-
A cooperative partnership between two individuals or businesses in which profits and risks are shared.
- inertia
-
The property of a body that resists any change to its uniform motion; equivalent to its mass. Figuratively, in a person, unwillingness to change.
Culture, particularly in large organizations that have a great deal of internal momentum, can be difficult to influence or change. The size of an organization and the strength of its culture are the biggest contributors to cultural inertia. Big and strong organizational cultures will have a powerful tendency to continue moving in the direction they are already moving (momentum). Therefore, managers must understand not only how to create culture, but also how to change it when necessary to ensure a positive, efficient and ethical culture.
Cultural Factors
Understanding how to change an organizational culture requires some insight into what creates culture in the first place and how altering those components may impact meaningful cultural development. Gerry Johnson’s cultural web offers great clarity about how an organizational culture responds to and reflects influencing factors. These include:
- The paradigm: The mission statement, vision, ethics statement, and other overt definitions of culture.
- Control systems: The processes in place to monitor what is going on, such as an employee handbook.
- Organizational structures: This comes down to the hierarchy, or who reports to whom and why.
- Power structures: Similar to the organizational structure above, this pertains to who has the power to make decisions.
- Symbols: Most organizations have brand images and other symbols which represent what the culture stands for (logos, etc.).
- Rituals and routines: In the business setting this is simply the way in which group interactions are organized. One example is the weekly staff meeting.
- Stories and myths: CEOs and other figureheads often have stories or legends associated with them; this generates culture through idolatry.
While these are only a few of the elements of culture, they capture a wide variety of components that managers can use to influence and change the general cultural predisposition.
Implementing Culture Change
Cummings and Worley identify a useful way to frame the stages or steps in integrating broad organizational change through cultural reform in six stages, which correlates well with the factors identified above. These stages include:
- Ensure clarity in the strategic vision. This means making sure that the mission statement, vision statement and overall strategy work together to create one strong culture statement. The vision in particular must describe the new culture forcefully and persuasively.
- Ensure buy-in from the top down. This means communicating (and often determining) specific aspects of needed culture change at the upper managerial level.
- Lead by example. Top management needs to exhibit the kinds of values and behaviors that they want to see in the rest of the company.
- Identify areas in the organizational structure and control systems which require updates to conform with the new or adapted culture. This includes altering employee handbooks, compensation strategies, hierarchy, decision-making authority and other central components of structure.
- Follow through on the mandate. Terminating employees who do not conform to the desired culture is difficult. But it allows you to bring in new talent that aligns better with your desired culture. Ensuring proper emphasis on the new culture in training materials is useful in this process.
- Finally, ensure that the ethical and legal implications of the adapted culture are understood, planned for and in line with corporate ethics.
Joint ventures and mergers and acquisitions usually require large cultural changes. When different cultures come together it is wise to expect some degree of culture-clash and differences of opinion. Managers, particularly upper management, must be aware of the implications of cultural change, the facets of organizational culture and the steps involved in altering it. While this model describes a long process that is generally more applicable to large cultural overhauls, the general strategy is useful for managers leading meaningful cultural change at all levels.
4.1.3: Types of Organizational Culture
While there is no single “type” of organizational culture, some common models provide a useful framework for managers.
Learning Objective
Differentiate between varying organizational culture tendencies, specifically within the context of Hofstede’s cultural dimensions theory
Key Points
- While there are many ways to divide and define culture into “types,” Geert Hofstede, Edgar Schein, and Charles Handy provide three basic theoretical frameworks.
- Hofstede postulates six dimensions of culture based on a study conducted at IBM offices in 50 different countries. These include power distance, uncertainty avoidance, individualism (vs. collectivism), masculinity (v.s femininity), long-term orientation, and restraint.
- Edgar Schein organizes culture into three types: artifacts (tangible cultural displays), values, and assumptions.
- Charles Handy identifies four types of organizational culture: power, role, task, and person. Each type of culture has strong implications on types of organizational structure.
Key Terms
- normative
-
Of, pertaining to, or using a norm or standard.
- cultural
-
Of or pertaining to culture.
Several methods have been used to classify organizational culture. While there is no single “type” of organizational culture, and cultures can vary widely from one organization to the next, commonalities do exist, and some researchers have developed models to describe different indicators of organizational cultures. We will briefly discuss the details of three influential models on organizational cultures.
Hofstede’s Cultural Dimensions
While there are several types of cultural and organizational theory models, Hofstede’s cultural dimensions theory is one of the most cited and referenced. Hofstede looked for global differences in culture across 100,000 IBM employees in 50 countries in an effort to determine the defining characteristics of global cultures in the workplace. With the rise of globalization, this is particularly relevant to organizational culture.
Through this process, he underlined observations that relate to six different cultural dimensions (originally there were five, but they have been updated in response to further research):
- Power distance: Power distance is simply the degree to which an authority figure can exert power and how difficult it is for a subordinate to contradict them.
- Uncertainty avoidance: Uncertainty avoidance describes an organization’s comfort level with risk-taking. As risk and return are largely correlative in the business environment, it is particularly important for organizations to instill a consistent level of comfort with taking risks.
- Individualism vs. collectivism: This could best be described as the degree to which an organization integrates a group mentality and promotes a strong sense of community (as opposed to independence) within the organization.
- Masculinity vs. femininity: This refers to the ways that behavior is characterized as “masculine” or “feminine” within an organization. For example, an aggressive and hyper-competitive culture is likely to be defined as masculine.
- Long-Term Orientation: This is the degree to which an organization or culture plans pragmatically for the future or attempts to create short-term gains. How far out is strategy considered, and to what degree are longer-term goal incorporated into company strategy?
- Indulgence vs. Restraint: This pertains to the amount (and ease) of spending and fulfillment of needs. For example, a restrained culture may have strict rules and regulations for tapping company resources.
Edgar Schein’s Cultural Model
Edgar Schein’s model underlines three types of culture within an organization, which, as a simpler model than Hofstede’s, is somewhat more generalized. Schein focuses on artifacts, values, and assumptions:
Schein’s model
Diagram of Schein’s organizational behavior model, which depicts the three central components of an organization’s culture: artifacts (visual symbols such as office dress code), values (company goals and standards), and assumptions (implicit, unacknowledged standards or biases).
- Artifacts: The simplest perspective on culture is provided by the tangible artifacts that reveal specific cultural predispositions. How desks are situated, how people dress, how offices are decorated, etc., are examples of organizational artifacts.
- Values: Values pertain largely to the ethics embedded in an organization. What does the organization stand for? This is usually openly communicated with the public and demonstrated internally by employees. An example might be a non-profit organization trying to mitigate poverty. The values of charity, understanding, empowerment, and empathy would be deeply ingrained within the organization.
- Assumptions: The final type of culture, according to Schein, is much more difficult to deduce through observation alone. These are tacit assumptions that infect the way in which communication occurs and individuals behave. They are often unconscious, yet hugely important. In many ways, this correlates with Hofstede’s cultural dimensions. For example, a culture of avoiding risk wherever possible may be an assumption which employees act upon without realizing it, and without receiving any directives to do so. High power distance could be another, where employees intuit that they should show a high degree of deference to their superiors without being specifically told to do so.
Charles Handy’s Four Types of Culture
Charles Handy put forward a framework of four different types of culture that remains relevant today. His four types include:
- Power culture: In this type of culture, there is usually a head honcho who makes rapid decisions and controls the organizational direction. This is most appropriate in smaller organizations, and require a strong sense of deference to the leader.
- Role culture: Structure is defined and operations are predictable. Usually this creates a functional structure, where individuals know their job, report to their superiors (who have a similar skill set), and value efficiency and accuracy above all.
- Task culture: Teams are formed to solve particular problems. Power is derived from membership in teams that have the expertise to execute a task. Due to the importance of given tasks, and the number of small teams in play, a matrix structure is common.
- Person culture: In this type of culture, horizontal structures are most applicable. Each individual is seen as valuable and more important than the organization itself. This can be difficult to sustain, as the organization may suffer due to competing people and priorities.
While there are many other ways to divide and define culture, these three offer a good window into the literature surrounding cultural types.
4.1.4: Core Culture
Core culture is the underlying value that defines organizational identity through observable culture.
Learning Objective
Identify the general definition and characteristics of a healthy core culture, alongside how this translates into observable culture.
Key Points
- Core and observable culture are two facets of the same organizational culture, with core culture being inward-facing and intrinsic and observable culture being more external and tangible (outward-facing).
- In essence, core culture defines the values and assumptions of an organization, as described by Edgar Schein’s Model of Organizational Culture.
- Core culture is made up of the intangible values and ethos that define an organization’s cultural framework. Observable culture is the external reflection of this cultural perspective.
- Management is tasked with both the creation and consistent application of core culture at the organizational level.
Key Term
- Core Culture
-
The underlying value that defines the organization’s identity through observable culture.
Core Culture and Observable Culture
Core and observable culture are two facets of the same organizational culture, with core culture being inward-facing and intrinsic and observable culture being more external and tangible (outward-facing). Core culture, as the name denotes, is the root of what observable culture will communicate to stakeholders. Core culture is more ideological and strategic, representing concepts such as vision (long-term agenda and values), while observable culture is more of a communications channel (i.e., stories, logos, symbols, branding, mission statement, and office environment).
Edgar Schein and Core Culture
One useful theoretical framework to consider when differentiating between core and observable culture is Edgar Schein’s Organizational Culture Model. This mode simply and efficiently illustrates the cultural facets of a given organization as an upside-down triangle.
Schein’s model of organizational culture
Diagram of Schein’s organizational behavior model, which depicts the three central components of an organization’s culture: artifacts (visual symbols such as office dress code), values (company goals and standards), and assumptions (implicit, unacknowledged standards or biases).
The broader base at the top of the inverted pyramid represents artifacts, the simplest and most physical (i.e., observable) elements of a given culture. This includes the way desks are situated in an office (collaborative or individualistic?), the colors and shapes used in the logo, the general dress code, etc.
The next level is values, which bridges the gap between observable and core culture. Values are explicitly and observably stated in organizational literature (i.e., the employee handbook and mission statement), but also implicitly executed in individual behaviors. While it is observable when the CEO makes a public statement for shareholders or when the promotional team writes a press release, it is also derived directly from discussions of what the core culture is. This is where observable culture begins to transform into core culture.
The final component identified by Schein is parallel with the concept of core culture: assumptions. The assumptions made by the individuals within an organization are so intimately tied to the core organizational culture that they are virtually unrecognizable. In many ways, one could equate core culture with an individual’s subconscious. While our subconscious so often drives our conscious behavior, we rarely realize it. Core culture has the same relationship with observable culture: core culture is created first, and ultimately drives the visible cultural aspects of the organization.
Creating Core Culture
Organizational culture, both observable and core, is created first at the managerial level. Leaders must define not only what it is they are working towards, but also how the organization will come to define itself during the process. The core culture created by leadership sets the tone for employee behavior and assumptions in the future.
Upper management must decide which values and ethos will constitute the core of the organizational culture, and then instill this internally, in their employees, and communicate it externally, to stakeholders (via observable culture). Management is tasked with both the creation and consistent application of core culture at the organizational level.
4.2: Shaping Organizational Culture
4.2.1: Building Organizational Culture
Managers are tasked with both creating and communicating a consistent organizational culture.
Learning Objective
Describe strategies used by managers to create and maintain a consistent organizational culture.
Key Points
- The process of instilling culture into an organization involves communicating and integrating a broad cultural framework throughout the organizational process.
- A strong culture is integral to long-term organizational sustainability and success; a primary responsibility of management is to both define and communicate this sense of shared organizational culture.
- Organizational culture is often defined by the work environment that management creates (i.e., mission statement, organizational structure, rules, symbols, etc.).
- Managers must be careful to instill the culture that is most conducive to both the strategy and objectives of the organization over the long term.
Key Terms
- organizational culture
-
The collective behavior of the people who make up an organization, including values, visions, norms, working language, systems, symbols, beliefs, and habits.
- culture
-
The beliefs, values, behavior, and material objects that constitute a people’s way of life.
Organizational culture refers to the collective behavior of the people who make up an organization; this includes their values, visions, norms, working language, systems, symbols, beliefs, and habits. Organizational culture affects the way people and groups interact with each other, with clients, and with stakeholders. A strong culture is integral to long-term organizational sustainability and success, and one of management’s primary responsibilities is to both define and communicate this sense of shared culture.
The process of ingraining culture into an organization is simply one of communicating and integrating a broad cultural framework throughout the organizational process. Central to this process is ensuring that each and every employee both understands and aligns with the values and direction of the broader organization. This creates a sense of community among employees and ensures that the broader objectives and mission of the organization are clear.
While there are a variety of cultural perspectives and many organizational elements within a culture, the initial process of instilling culture is relatively consistent from a managerial perspective. The creation of a given culture is often defined by management’s strategy for addressing the following issues:
- The paradigm: Management determines both the mission and vision of the organization and sets a groundwork for the values that employees are expected to align with. Determining these factors and communicating them effectively are absolutely critical to successfully instilling organizational culture.
- Control systems: An example of this may be an employee handbook where behavioral expectations are laid out explicitly (where possible) for employees to read and understand.
- Organizational structures: The choice of an organizational structure has enormous cultural implications for openness of communication, organization of resources, and flow of information.
- Power structures: Power and culture are often intertwined: the degree to which specific individuals are free (or not) to make decisions is indicative of the openness and fluidity of the organization.
- Symbols: All strong brands associate with symbols (think logos). These are not randomly selected: symbols show which specific facets of an organizational culture management considers most important.
- Rituals and routines: Routines are strong behavior modifiers that significantly impact the culture of a given organization. A looser and more open work environment (limited routines, high individual freedom) may create more innovation while heavily structured routines may create more efficiency and predictability.
- Stories and myths: Finally, stories are powerful communicators of culture. Walmart uses Sam Walton’s founding as a powerful myth to promote efficiency and the desire to try new things and integrate various products and services. This is organizationally defining.
Cultural change in an organization
The feedback loop of cultural change in an organization involve people’s intentions to enable, engage, encourage, and exemplify the new desired behaviors; this in turn influences the frequency of behaviors. After enough reinforcement, those behaviors become the norm, which self-reinforces through increasing people’s exemplification of those behaviors.
Overall, managers must be aware of their role as cultural ambassadors and their responsibility in creating a context for successfully instilling organizational culture. For example, promoting a strong authoritarian hierarchy and strong innovation would be an oversight in the field of organizational culture from a management professional. Managers must be careful to instill the culture that is most conducive to both the strategy and objectives of the organization over the long term.
4.2.2: Communicating Organizational Culture
Management is tasked with both creating culture and accurately communicating it across the organization.
Learning Objective
Recognize the role of management in communicating and teaching organizational culture to employees and subordinates.
Key Points
- Corporate culture is used to control, coordinate, and integrate company subsidiaries.
- The role of the manager is essential to the successful communication of a given organizational culture because managers are figureheads and role models for how individuals in the organization should behave.
- Organizations should strive for what is considered a “healthy” organizational culture to increase productivity, growth, efficiency, and to reduce counterproductive behavior and turnover of employees.
Key Term
- organization
-
A group of people or other legal entities with an explicit purpose and written rules.
Corporate culture is used to control, coordinate, and integrate company subsidiaries. Culture runs deeper than this definition, however, because culture also represents the embedded values, traditions, beliefs, and behaviors of a given group. Culture is indicative not only of what individuals pursue and believe in, but also their behaviors, assumptions, and communications. As a result, culture is both complex to create and challenging to communicate and imbue within the organization.
Communicating Culture
The role of the manager is essential to the successful communication of a given organizational culture because managers are figureheads and role models for how individuals in the organization should behave. While it is too simplistic to say that culture is a top-down communicative process, there is relevance to the idea that culture generally begins with the founders of the organization and the values they emphasize in the organizational growth and hiring process.
Leaders have a number of tools and strategies at their disposal to communicate culture. Some of the most critical of these are structure, hierarchy, mission and vision statements, employee handbooks, hiring processes, and employee training and initiation. With many diverse tools for communicating culture comes the challenge of aligning each perspective for consistency of message: for instance, the employee training program must emphasize the same values as the mission statement and must match the executive mandate for organizational structure and design.
Communication is the core tool for managing this cultural integration, enabling executives to remind employees what the organization stands for and why it’s important. Holding company-wide quarterly meetings to emphasize objectives and strategy and sending out emails with key successes and developmental challenges are great ways to keep the conversation going.
The Role of HR
It is also critical to make the hiring process match and promote the culture by hiring talent that is consistent with cultural expectations and implementing training programs that effectively emphasize what the organization stands for and why. Human resource professionals are tasked with identifying candidates with culturally consistent perspectives and with underlining the importance of cultural considerations in interviews and on-boarding processes.
Organization triangle
This organization triangle illustrates the idea that structure, process, and the people involved all contribute to the culture of an organization.
4.2.3: Building a Culture of High Performance
A high-performing culture is a results-driven business culture focused on generating efficiency and completing objectives.
Learning Objective
Analyze the primary drivers and positive characteristics of a high-performing culture.
Key Points
- Every business has its own culture. High-performance cultures are specifically focused on setting and accomplishing objectives with a high degree of efficiency and efficacy.
- High-performing teams are an integral component of high-performance cultures.
- A high-performing team is a group of people with complementary talents and skills. They are given clear roles and are committed to a common purpose. This enables synergy.
- Culture is a combination of individual perspectives and the environment in which they operate. Business looking to create a high-performance culture must create an interdependent environment which empowers employee responsibility and decision-making.
Key Terms
- SMART
-
Goal-setting criteria: Specific, Measurable, Attainable, Realistic, and Timely.
- performing
-
The stage of group development when the the team is able to function as a unit, finding ways to get the job done smoothly and effectively without inappropriate conflict or supervision.
- high-performing team
-
groups that are highly focused on their goals and that achieve superior business results.
Organizations need to be productive in order to achieve their goals. Over time, productivity can become a part of organizational culture, eventually becoming integrated into the company’s operations and processes. The business becomes known for its productivity, and high performance becomes second-nature for its employees. A high-performing culture is defined by a focus on generating and accomplishing objectives. There is a strong sense of both results-orientation and employee interdependence.
A High-Performing team
An effective way to achieve high-performing culture is to create high-performing teams. A high-performing team is best defined as a group of interdependent employees whose skills and personalities complement one another and lead to above-average operational results. High-performance teams are a central building block of high-performance culture, and they thrive in innovative and empowering environments.
Leadership in any team environment is critical to success, but leadership within a high-performance culture is often complex. While leadership is normally static in a hierarchical environment, high-performance teams benefit from shared leadership by utilizing the different talents and perspectives of each team member in the decision-making process. This creates a strong culture of shared leadership which in turn can generate above-average results and highly motivated employees who trust one another.
Culture is defined by creating its own consciousness in an organization, indicating shared norms and values. These shared values are central elements of the organization, as they generate buy-in and dedication from employees. These shared values create an expectation of success, both professional and personal, that can create high levels of trust and shared accountability. In short, shared values are key to creating strong team dynamics.
There are ten elements in particular that are important to successfully integrating high-performance teams within an organizational culture:
- Participative leadership – Involve the entire team when making decisions, and rely on specialists only when applicable.
- Effective decision making – Ensure that decision-making is both strategic and efficient. Group decision-making is often slowed when team dynamics are weak, which requires team-building to fix.
- Open and clear communication – As always with group dynamics, communication is key to success. Ensure everyone is speaking and listening.
- Valued diversity – Team synergy is lost when groupthink dominates the discussion. Instill open-mindedness and dispel social fears of disagreeing.
- Mutual trust – Reliance upon one another, and trust in each other’s skills and capabilities, allows for less duplication of work and more overall synergy.
- Managing conflict – Conflict is inevitable and not necessarily a bad thing. Deal with it calmly and without personal biases or emotions. Let the best ideas win.
- Clear goals – SMART objectives are essential to high performance, just as understanding where one is going is essential to finding the best route.
- Defined roles and responsibilities – Everyone should have a clear understanding of why they are on the team and what they are responsible for.
- Coordinated relationships – Building strong team dynamics requires team members to understand each other and build strong relationships. Utilize ice-breaking activities and promote casual discussion to get this started.
- Positive atmosphere – Wherever possible, make sure the general perspective is one of constructive commentary. Maintaining a positive outlook empowers communication and improves team spirit.
New York Yankees
A Great Team
4.3: Adapting and Innovating
4.3.1: Benefits of Innovation
Innovation may be linked to positive changes in efficiency, productivity, quality, competitiveness, and market share, among other factors.
Learning Objective
Identify the organizational benefits derived through enabling internal innovation
Key Points
- Innovation is the development of customer value through solutions that meet new needs, unarticulated needs, or existing market needs in unique ways.
- Innovative employees increase productivity by creating and executing new processes which in turn may increase competitive advantage and provide meaningful differentiation.
- Managers who promote an innovative environment can see value through increased employee motivation, creativity, and autonomy; stronger teams; and strategic recommendations from the bottom up.
- Clarity about and understanding of roles, increased responsibilities, strategic partnerships, senior management support, organizational restructuring, and investment in human resources can all enrich organizational culture and innovation.
Key Terms
- innovation
-
A change in customs; something new and contrary to established customs, manners, or rites.
- productivity
-
The rate at which goods or services are produced by a standard population of workers.
- efficiency
-
The extent to which a resource, such as electricity, is used for the intended purpose; the ratio of useful work to energy expended.
Defining Innovation
Innovation is the development of customer value through solutions that meet new, undefined, or existing market needs in unique ways. Solutions may include new or more effective products, processes, services, technologies, or ideas that are more readily available to markets, governments, and society.
Innovation is easily confused with words like invention or improvement. They are, however, different terms. Innovation refers to coming up with a better idea or method, or integrating a new approach within a contextual model, while invention is more statically about creating something new. Innovation refers to to finding new ways to do things, while improvement is about doing the same thing more effectively.
Organizational Benefits of Innovation
From an organizational perspective, managers encourage innovation because of the value it can capture. Innovative employees increase productivity through by creating and executing new processes, which in turn may increase competitive advantage and provide meaningful differentiation. Innovative organizations are inherently more adaptable to the external environment; this allows them to react faster and more effectively to avoid risk and capture opportunities.
From a managerial perspective, innovative employees tend to be more motivated and involved in the organization. Empowering employees to innovate and improve their work processes provides a sense of autonomy that boosts job satisfaction. From a broader perspective, empowering employees to engage in broader organization-wide innovation creates a strong sense of teamwork and community and ensures that employees are actively aware of and invested in organizational objectives and strategy. Managers who promote an innovative environment can see value through increased employee motivation, creativity, and autonomy; stronger teams; and strategic recommendations from the bottom up.
Managers can accomplish this through providing top-down support to employees, providing clear roles and responsibilities while allowing individuals the freedom to pursue these as they see fit. Supporting the HR and IT departments so that they can provide training and tools for higher employee efficiency can contribute substantially to a culture of internal innovation. This requires open-minded and motivational leaders in managerial positions who are capable of steering employee efforts without diminishing employee creativity.
4.3.2: Characteristics of Innovative Organizations
According to recent research, companies that make a commitment to innovation are exceptional performers in their respective industries.
Learning Objective
Outline the critical success factors and characteristics of an adaptable and innovative organizational culture
Key Points
- Being receptive to new business ideas means being receptive to the idea that mistakes are a necessary part of the process.
- Everyone in the business needs to keep an open mind and develop the capacity to look at things with fresh eyes.
- It is likely that some successful innovations will result from chance discoveries.
- Managers must understand that employees too mired in routine work and too criticized for trying new methods will inherently fail to create innovations that may drive organizational growth.
Key Term
- innovation
-
A change in customs; something new and contrary to established customs, manners, or rites.
Many business experts argue that companies that make a substantial commitment to innovation and entrench it deeply throughout their culture will perform exceptionally well. But how can innovation be facilitated within the organizational framework? The following are some examples of characteristics that lead to successful innovation.
Accept Mistakes as Part of the Process
A Minnesota Mining & Manufacturing researcher was looking for ways to improve the adhesives used in 3M tapes that he discovered an adhesive that formed itself into tiny spheres. At first, it seemed as though his work was a failure. However, the new adhesive was later used on Post-it notes—a great innovation and business success for the company. Being receptive to new business ideas means being receptive to mistakes as a necessary, and sometimes even crucial, part of the process.
Keep an Open Mind and Think Laterally
Possibilities for innovation exist everywhere. To realize them, everyone in the business needs to keep an open mind and develop the capacity to look at things with fresh eyes.
The classic example of a company that completely transformed itself as a result of lateral thinking is the Finnish company Nokia, whose original core business was wood pulp and logging. When the collapse of communism opened the Russian market to the west, Nokia’s core business was seriously threatened by cheaper imports from Russia’s seemingly limitless forests. In the deep recession of the early 1990s, Nokia’s management concluded that the only real competitive advantage they retained was a very efficient communications system developed in the 1970s that helped them keep in touch with their remote logging operations. That single realization transformed the company into one of the world’s most successful vendors of communications equipment.
Nokia cell phone
Nokia successfully transformed itself from a logging company to an electronic-communications company through innovation.
Managerial Implications
As is usually the case, these principles are easier said than done. Managers must carefully consider what type of work environment they project for their subordinates. Managers must understand that employees too mired in routine work and who are criticized for trying new methods will inherently fail to create innovations that may drive organizational growth. There is therefore a balancing act between enabling employees to try new things and take risks vs. ensuring that tasks are completed on time with reasonable success.
4.3.3: Types of Innovation
There are three main modes of innovation: entrepreneurial value-based, technology-based, and strategic-reflexive.
Learning Objective
Outline a categorical overview of the potential ways in which innovation can be pursued and identified.
Key Points
- The entrepreneurial method of innovation is one in which change is initiated by an individual’s actions and drive to create a business venture of adaptation.
- Technology-based functional innovation occurs when the development of new technology drives innovation.
- The strategic-reflexive mode describes innovation that springs from individuals’ interactions with their organization’s common values and goals.
- Other types of innovation include: incremental, architectural, generational, manufacturing, financial, and cumulative.
Key Term
- innovation
-
A change in customs; something new and contrary to established customs, manners, or rites.
In business and economics, innovation is the catalyst to growth. Fuglsang and Sundbo (2005) suggest that there are three modes of innovation. The first is an entrepreneurial value-based method where change is initiated by an individual’s actions. The second is a technology-based functional mode in which the development of new technology drives innovation. The third is a strategic-reflexive mode in which innovation results from individual’s interactions with their organization’s set of common values and goals. The following graphic provides an example of the innovation process.
Innovation process
Innovation involves continuous improvement throughout phases of a development program. Phases can be iterative and recursive (meaning that they do not proceed linearly from one to the next; rather, earlier phases can be returned to for further improvement as needed). Such phases include market analysis and consumer research, which progress to design and prototyping, after which follow naming and packaging design and ultimately retail and production support.
Entrepreneurial Innovation
The innovation dimension of entrepreneurship refers to the pursuit of creative or novel solutions to challenges confronting a firm. These challenges can include developing new products and services or new administrative techniques and technologies for performing organizational functions (e.g., production, marketing, and sales and distribution).
Technological Innovation
Technological innovation takes place when companies try to gain a competitive advantage either by reducing costs or by introducing a new technology. Technological innovation has been a hot topic in recent years, particularly when coupled with the concept of disruptive innovation. Disruptive innovation is usually a technological advancement that renders previous products/services (or even entire industries) irrelevant. For example, the smartphone disrupted landlines, Netflix made Blockbuster obsolete, and mp3s have marginalized CD players.
Strategic Innovation
The strategic-reflexive mode of innovation is the most effective mode for change and innovation. While technological innovation is clear and easy to define, strategic innovation is inherently intangible and organizational in nature. Strategic innovation pertains to processes: how things are done as opposed to what the end product is. Strategic changes can be disruptive but are more often incremental. Incremental innovation is the idea that small changes, when effected in large volume, can rapidly transform the broader organization.
Walmart’s “Hub and Spoke” distribution model is a classic example of strategic innovation. Walmart succeeded thanks to process efficiency enabled via innovative operational paradigms and distribution strategies. By utilizing a maximum efficiency warehousing and distribution model, refined over and over again incrementally for improvement, Walmart has sustained a competitive advantage for decades.
Other Applications of Innovation
- Generational innovation involves changes in subsystems linked together with existing linking mechanisms.
- Architectural innovation involves changes in linkages between existing subsystems.
- Incremental innovations improve price/performance advancement at a rate consistent with the existing technical trajectory. Radical innovations advance the price/performance frontier by much more than the existing rate of progress.
- Manufacturing process innovation refers to all the activities required to invent and implement a new manufacturing process.
- Cumulative innovation is any instance of something new being created from more than one source. Remixing music is a direct example of cumulative innovation.
- Financial innovation has brought many new financial instruments with pay-offs or values depending on the prices of stocks. Examples include exchange-traded funds (ETFs) and equity swaps.
4.3.4: Speed of Innovation
Companies compete to adapt their products and services to incorporate new innovations first.
Learning Objective
Recognize the challenge inherent in adopting new ideas and the subsequent considerations pertaining to the speed of pursuing them.
Key Points
- Speed of innovation can pose a major challenge for organizations responding to external change.
- Profits depend on speed of innovation and the ability to attract customers. Big corporations used to dominate, but now industry leaders are often small, highly flexible groups that come up with great ideas, build trustworthy branding for themselves and their products, and market them effectively.
- A first-mover in a given innovation captures the obvious advantage of tapping into a new market before the competition. This can also allow the first-mover to capture the new technology for its own brand.
- First-movers encounter high fiscal risks in integrating a new product or services into their distribution, and failure often means sunk costs. Late-comers to the game can simply observe the success or failure of other competitors and make a more informed (and less risky) decision.
Key Terms
- Cannibalization
-
The reduction of sales or market share for one of your own products by introducing another.
- innovation
-
A change in customs; something new and contrary to established customs, manners, or rites.
The best ideas should implemented as quickly as possible—not just by the idea generator but also by others who have a different viewpoint. It is imperative that the idea is honed and refined while it is still fresh. For example, an idea for a new product might start out as a crude model built from polystyrene, foam, or cardboard that will evolve quickly into a more professional prototype.
Product Innovation Approach
Innovation involves continuous improvement throughout phases of a development program. Phases can be iterative and recursive (meaning that they do not proceed linearly from one to the next; rather, earlier phases can be returned to for further improvement as needed). Such phases include market analysis and consumer research, which progress to design and prototyping, after which follow naming and packaging design and ultimately retail and production support.
Robert Reich observes that profits in the old economy came from economies of scale, i.e., long runs of almost identical products. Thus we had factories, assembly lines, and industries. Today, profits come from speed of innovation and the ability to attract and keep customers. Therefore, while the big winners in the old economy were big corporations, today’s big winners are often small, highly flexible groups that devise great ideas, develop trustworthy branding for themselves and their products, and market these effectively. The winning competitors are those who are first at providing lower prices and higher value through intermediaries of trustworthy brands. To keep the lead, however, these companies have to keep innovating lest they fall behind the competition.
The Benefit of Moving First
Speed of innovation poses a major challenge for organizations responding to external change. A high rate of change can be seen in the shortening of product life cycles, increased technological change, increased speed of innovation, and increased speed of diffusion of innovations. These are key challenges for organizations, as the profit generation of new ideas must fit into a slimmer chronological window—thus underlining the great value of being a first-mover.
A first-mover in a given innovation captures the obvious advantage of tapping into a new market before its competitors. This also sometimes allows the first-mover to identify its brand with the new technology (i.e., saying “Google it” as shorthand for online search or calling any and all mp3 players an iPod). These branding hurdles must be tackled by any competitor following in the footsteps of the first-mover.
However, speed is not everything. First-movers encounter serious disadvantages, the most notable of which are freeloaders. First-movers also encounter high fiscal risks in integrating a new product or services into their distribution, and failure often means sunk costs. Latecomers to the game can simply observe the success or failure of other competitors and make more informed (and less risky) decisions about entering the market segment. Similarly, first movers must carefully consider cannibalization—where their new innovative products steal sales from their older products still on store shelves. Speedy innovation and moving first requires great foresight, planning, and managerial skill to execute effectively to minimize risks.
4.3.5: Sustainability Innovation
Sustainability innovation combines sustainability (endurance through renewal, maintenance, and sustenance) with innovation.
Learning Objective
Describe how organizational culture adds value by generating an innovative approach to sustainability issues
Key Points
- Sustainopreneurship describes using creative organizing to solve problems related to sustainability to in turn create social and environmental sustainability as a strategic objective and purpose.
- Solving sustainability-related problems is the be-all and end-all of sustainability entrepreneurship.
- Passively heated houses, solar cells, organic food, fair trade products, hybrid cars, and car sharing are all examples of sustainability innovations.
Key Terms
- sustainability
-
Configuring human activity so that societies are able to meet current needs while preserving biodiversity and natural ecosystems for future generations.
- innovation
-
A change in customs; something new and contrary to established customs, manners, or rites.
Sustainability is the capacity to endure through renewal, maintenance, and sustenance (or nourishment), which is different than durability (the capacity to endure through resistance to change). Innovation is the creation of new value through the use of solutions that meet new, previously unknown, or existing needs in new ways. Innovation should be pursued with sustainability in mind as a critical strategic objective, as the integration of new business ideas with the broader community and environment is central to long-term success.
Sustainability Entrepreneurship
“Sustainopreneurship” describes using creative business organizing to solve problems related to sustainability to create social and environmental sustainability as a strategic objective and purpose, while at the same time respecting the boundaries set in order to maintain the life support systems of the process. In other words, it is “business with a cause,” where the world’s problems are turned into business opportunities for deploying sustainability innovations. Sustainopreneurship is entrepreneurship and innovation for sustainability.
This definition is highlighted by three distinguishing dimensions. The first is oriented towards “why” – a company’s purpose and motive in adopting sustainable entrepreneurship. The second and third reflect two dimensions of “how” the process is carried out.
- Entrepreneurship consciously sets out to find or create innovations to solve sustainability-related problems.
- Entrepreneurship moves solutions to market through creative organizing.
- Entrepreneurship adds sustainability value while respecting life support systems.
Solving sustainability-related problems from the organizational frame is the be-all and end-all of sustainability entrepreneurship. This means that all three dimensions are simultaneously present in the process.
An example to provide context: Interface Global produces modular carpeting. Sustainability is the core operating mission and vision of the broader organization. Through greening their supply chain, minimizing water use, cutting electric costs, reducing fuel costs through better distribution, and a number of other innovative process improvements, Interface Global produces high quality carpets at a lower cost and smaller environmental footprint. The company created a sustainable business strategy through innovative thinking.
4.3.6: Social Innovation
Social innovation refers to new strategies, concepts, ideas, and organizations that meet societal needs of all kinds.
Learning Objective
Define social innovation and the potential positive outcomes of employing it within an organizational culture
Key Points
- Social innovation can refer to social processes of innovation, such as open source methods and techniques.
- Social innovation can also refer to innovations that have a social purpose, like microcredit or distance learning, and can be related to social entrepreneurship.
- Social innovation can take place within the government sector, the for-profit sector, the nonprofit sector (also known as the third sector), or in the spaces between them.
Key Terms
- social capital
-
The value created by interpersonal relationships with expected returns in the marketplace.
- innovation
-
A change in customs; something new and contrary to established customs, manners, or rites.
- social
-
Of or relating to society.
Example
- Prominent social innovators include Bangladeshi Muhammad Yunus, the founder of Grameen Bank, which pioneered the concept of microcredit for supporting innovators in multiple developing countries in Asia, Africa, and Latin America.
Social innovation refers to new strategies, concepts, ideas, and organizations that extend and strengthen civil society or meet societal needs of all kinds—from working conditions and education to community development and health.
Organizations, both for for-profit and nonprofit, benefit enormously from incorporating social innovation into their operations. Giving back to to the community and empowering the individuals you work with and sell to (i.e., stakeholders) improves employee morale, grows wealth for potential customers, builds a strong brand, and underlines social responsibility and high ethical standards as central to the organizational character.
Example of a social innovation program
A health camp conducted for villagers as part of the Social Innovation Program at SOIL, in partnership with the Max India Foundation.
The term “social innovation” has overlapping meanings. Sometimes it refers to social processes of innovation like open-source methods and techniques. Other times it refers to innovations that have a social purpose, like microcredit or distance learning. The concept can also be related to social entrepreneurship (entrepreneurship is not necessarily innovative, but it can be a means of innovation). On occasion, it also overlaps with innovation in public policy and governance. Social innovation can take place within the government sector, the for-profit sector, the nonprofit sector (also known as the third sector), or in the spaces between them. Research has focused on the types of platforms needed to facilitate such cross-sector collaborative social innovation.
The Process of Social Innovation
Social innovation is often an effort of mental creativity that involves fluency and flexibility across a wide range of disciplines. The act of social innovation in a sector encompasses diverse disciplines within society. The social innovation theory of “connected difference” emphasizes three key dimensions of social innovation:
- First, it usually produces new combinations or hybrids of existing elements, rather than wholly new.
- Second, it cuts across organizational or disciplinary boundaries.
- Last, it creates compelling new relationships between previously separate individuals and groups. Social innovation is currently gaining visibility within academia.
Examples of Social Innovation
There are many examples of social innovation making a meaningful difference across the globe—from huge organizations like the Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation funding multinational initiatives to small groups of community leaders collecting money to help buy new high school textbooks. Some specific examples include:
- The University of Chicago sought to develop social innovations that would address and ameliorate the immense problems caused by poverty in a largely immigrant city around the turn of the 20th century.
- Prominent social innovators include Bangladeshi Muhammad Yunus, the founder of Grameen Bank, who pioneered the concept of microcredit for supporting innovators in multiple developing countries in Asia, Africa, and Latin America.
- Stephen Goldsmith, former Indianapolis mayor, engaged the private sector in providing many city services.
4.3.7: Commercializing Innovative Products
Commercialization is the process or cycle of introducing a new product or production method into the market.
Learning Objective
Examine the three key aspects of the commercialization process and outline the four key questions that must be answered prior to the commercialization of a new and innovative product
Key Points
- The actual launch of a new product is the final stage of new product development. This is when the most money is spent for advertising, sales promotion, and other marketing efforts.
- It is important to emphasize that the commercialization strategy and feasibility should have been considered and approved long before the actual execution of commercialization – as the time, efforts and development costs have already largely been incurred.
- Organizations must consider who they are selling to and where they are selling when determining the most effective process for commercialization.
- The primary target consumer group includes innovators, early adopters, heavy users, and opinion leaders. Their buy-in will ensure adoption by other consumers in the marketplace during the product growth period.
Key Terms
- early adopter
-
A person who begins using a product or service at or around the time it becomes available.
- commercialization
-
The act of positioning a product to make a profit.
Commercialization is often confused with sales, marketing, or business development. In the context of innovation, commercialization is the process of introducing a new product or service to the public market. Innovations are defined as new products or services that improve upon their predecessors, and the process of integrating them into the current market is a critical component of successfully bringing them to market. Great innovations are not always brought to market due to a lack of feasibility or poor planning. Long-term planning is crucial in the commercialization process because this is when the most money will be spent—on advertising, sales promotions, and other marketing efforts after the launch of a new product.
Product innovation approach
Innovation involves continuous improvement throughout phases of a development program. Phases can be iterative and recursive (meaning that they do not proceed linearly from one to the next; rather, earlier phases can be returned to for further improvement as needed). Such phases include market analysis and consumer research, which progress to design and prototyping, after which follow naming and packaging design and ultimately retail and production support.
The Commercialization Process
The commercialization process has three key aspects:
- Carefully select, based upon comprehensive market research, which products can be sustained financially in which markets for long-term success.
- Planning for various phases and/or stages in the commercialization process is key. Consider geographic distribution, different demographics, etc.
- Finally, identify and involve key stakeholders early, including consumers.
Key Strategic Questions
When bringing a product to market, a number of key strategic questions need to be answered satisfactorily long before substantial costs are incurred for commercialization. These questions are simple to ask but complex to answer, and business analysts and market researchers will spend a considerable amount of time approaching them via research models and careful financial consideration.
- When: The company has to time introducing the product perfectly. If there is a risk of cannibalizing the sales of the company’s other products, if the product could benefit from further development, or if the economy is forecasted to improve in the near future, the product’s launch should be delayed. Similarly, many items are seasonal (e.g., fashion) and so should be timed appropriately to maximize revenue.
- Where: The company has to decide where to launch its products. This can be in a single location, in one or several larger regions, or in a national or international market. This decision will be strongly influenced by the company’s resources; larger companies can reach broader geographic audiences. It is important to keep in mind where the early adopters will be and where competitive gaps may exist. In the global marketplace, this question is increasingly complex.
- To whom: The primary target consumer group will have been identified earlier through research and test marketing. This primary consumer group will include innovators, early adopters, heavy users, and opinion leaders. Their buy-in will ensure adoption by other consumers in the marketplace during the product growth period.
- How: The company has to decide on an action plan for introducing the product by implementing these decisions. It has to develop a viable marketing mix and create a respective marketing budget.
While these questions are key considerations in the commercialization process, remember that they should have been answered long before the commercialization stage. After all, if the need is not sufficiently widespread or the market not sufficiently developed, there is little reason to have pursued a given innovation in the first place.
4.3.8: Fostering Innovation
Offering employees challenges, freedom, resources, encouragement, and support can help them to innovate.
Learning Objective
Outline how to encourage creativity, participation and innovation through effective management
Key Points
- People perform best when they are driven by inspiration and are encouraged to push their boundaries and think outside the box.
- Teamwork enhances people’s strengths and lessens their individual weaknesses.
- One of the most powerful tools for promoting employee creativity and innovation is recognition.
- Ultimately, in developing a culture of innovation you want employees to feel comfortable experimenting and offering suggestions without fear of criticism or punishment for mistakes.
Key Terms
- creativity
-
The quality or ability to create or invent something.
- innovation
-
A change in customs; something new and contrary to established customs, manners, or rites.
Strategies capable of producing innovation require resources and energy; it is therefore necessary to discuss in your business plan the organizational structures and practices you will put in place to encourage and support innovation. Amabile (1998) points to six general categories of effective management practices that create a learning culture within an organization:
- Providing employees with a challenge
- Providing freedom to innovate
- Providing the resources needed to create new ideas/products
- Providing diversity of perspectives and backgrounds within groups
- Providing supervisor encouragement
- Providing organizational support
Innovation
Cartoon shows the challenge of translating innovation (designers) to economic success.
Create a Culture of Innovation
You will likely find that you need to generate hundreds of ideas to find ten good ones that will create value for your organization. This is part of the creative brainstorming process, and it should be encouraged. It should be the responsibility of every individual in the organization to come up with ideas, not just the founder or key staff. Here are some suggestions to encourage the flow of ideas.
Encourage Creativity
Encouraging creativity helps keep staff happy. If they think something is important and has the potential to create a financial payoff for the company, let them follow their idea. People perform best when they are driven by inspiration and encouraged to push their boundaries and think outside the box. But employees cannot do this when they are being micromanaged. Employees need to feel independent enough to own their innovative thinking and to pursue the ideas they are passionate about. In fact, if management effectively fosters a creative and open environment, innovation will happen naturally.
Encourage Participation
Teamwork enhances people’s strengths and mitigates their individual weaknesses. Effective teamwork also promotes the awareness that it is in everyone’s best interests to keep the business growing and improving. Creating a participation-based environment means creating smart teams, encouraging open dialogue, and minimizing authority. Criticism is productive and should be encouraged, but it must be used constructively.
Provide Recognition and Rewards
One of the most powerful tools for promoting employee creativity and innovation is recognition. People want to be recognized and rewarded for their ideas and initiatives, and it is a practice that can have tremendous payoff for the organization. Sometimes the recognition required may be as simple as mentioning a person’s effort in a newsletter. If a staff member comes up with a really creative idea, mention them in the company newsletter or on the news board even if their idea can’t be implemented immediately. Make it clear that compensation and promotions are tied to innovative thinking.
Enable Employee Innovation
You may have an innovative culture in your organization, but you also need to familiarize staff with some of the hallmarks of continuing innovation. For example, you could educate employees at regular training sessions on topics such as creativity, entrepreneurship, and teamwork. Each session might conclude with the assignment of an exercise to be performed over the next few working weeks that will consolidate lessons learned. Your aim here is to give employees a taste of innovation so they will embrace the process.
Other Motivators
- Profit-sharing and bonuses
- Days off
- Extra vacation time
Encourage employees to take advantage of coffee breaks, lunch breaks, and taxi rides. Often great ideas that can lead to innovation will happen outside the places where we expect them to happen. If it’s hard to get staff together for common informal breaks, consider taking them out for an informal meal where you can encourage creative discussion about work. Also be sure to encourage laughter at meetings because laughter is an effective measure of how comfortable people feel about expressing themselves.
4.4: Technology and Innovation
4.4.1: Technology as a Driver and Enabler of Innovation
Technology is a powerful driver of both the evolution and proliferation of innovation.
Learning Objective
Examine the role of technology as a driver of competitive advantage and innovation in the business framework
Key Points
- Innovation is a primary source of competitive advantage for companies in essentially all industries and environments and drives efficiency, productivity, and differentiation to fill a higher variety of needs.
- Technology builds upon itself, enabling innovative approaches within the evolution of technology.
- Technological hubs such as California’s Silicon Valley provide powerful resources that entrepreneurs and businesses can leverage in pursuing innovation.
- Technological advances, particularly in communication and transportation, further innovation.
- India, China, and the United States are all strong representations of how embracing technology leads to innovation, which in turn leads to economic growth.
Key Terms
- Scalable
-
Able to change in size or to scale up.
- innovation
-
The introduction of something new; the development of an original idea.
- proliferate
-
To increase in number or spread rapidly.
Innovation is a primary source of competitive advantage for companies in essentially all industries and environments, and drives forward efficiency, higher productivity, and differentiation to fill a wide variety of needs. One particular perspective on economics isolates innovation as a core driving force, alongside knowledge, technology, and entrepreneurship. This theory of innovation economics notes that the neoclassical approach (monetary accumulation driving growth) overlooks the critical aspect of the appropriate knowledge and technological capabilities.
Scaling Technology
Technology in particular is a powerful driving force in innovative capacity, particularly as it pertains to both the evolution of innovations and the way they proliferate. Technology is innately scalable, demonstrating a consistent trend toward new innovations as a result of improving upon current ones. Product life cycles shows how economic returns go through a steep exponential growth phase and an eventual evening out, which motivates businesses to leverage technology to produce new innovations.
Technology Hubs
Technological Innovation Chart
This chart demonstrates the pattern of innovation over time. Note the overlapping trajectories of technologies: one product may dominate the market and grow at a high rate; the next (“emerging”) product may start low while the other product is dominant but in turn grow to dominate the market even more thoroughly than the first, as technology and production are refined and improved.
The proliferation of innovation pertains to two important factors of technology driving innovation: the creation of geographic hubs for technology and empowerment of knowledge exchange through communication and transportation. Places like California’s Silicon Valleya and Baden-Wurttenberg, Germany are strong examples of the value of technological hubs. The close proximity of various resources and collaborators in each hub stimulates a higher degree of innovative capacity.
Communication and cumulative knowledge in these technology hubs allows for these innovations to spread via technology to be implemented across the globe with relative immediacy. This spread of ideas can be built upon quickly and universally, creating the ability for innovation to be further expanded upon by different parties across the globe. Collaboration on a global scale as a result of technological progress has allowed for exponential levels of innovation.
Correlations Between Technology, Innovation, and Growth
Empirical evidence generates a positive correlation between technological innovation and economic performance. Between 1981 and 2004, India and China, developed a National Innovation System designed to invest heavily in R&D with a particular focus on patents and high-tech and service exports. During this timeframe, both countries experienced extremely high levels of GDP growth by linking the science sector with the business sector, importing technology, and creating incentives for innovation.
Additionally, the Council of Foreign Relations asserted that the U.S.’ s large share of the global market in the 1970s was likely a result of its aggressive investment in new technologies. These technological innovations generated are hypothesized to be a central driving force in the steady economic expansion of the U.S., allowing it to maintain it’s place as the world’s largest economy.
4.4.2: The Technology Life Cycle
The technology life cycle describes the costs and profits of a product from technological development to market maturity to decline.
Learning Objective
Categorize the four distinct stages in the technology life cycle and apply the five demographic consumer groups in the context of these stages
Key Points
- The technology life cycle seeks to predict the adoption, acceptance, and eventual decline of new technological innovations.
- Understanding and effectively estimating technology life cycle allows for a more accurate reading of whether and when research and development costs will be offset by profits.
- The technology life cycle has four distinct stages: research and development, ascent, maturity, and decline.
- The adoption of these technologies also has a life cycle with five chronological demographics: innovators, early adopters, early majority, late majority, and laggards.
- By leveraging these models, businesses and institutions can exercise some foresight in ascertaining return on investment as their technologies mature.
Key Terms
- demographic
-
A characteristic used to identify people within a statistical framework.
- competitive advantage
-
Something that places a company or a person above the competition.
- Foresight
-
The ability to accurately estimate future outcomes.
The technology life cycle (TLC) describes the costs and profits of a product from technological development phase to market maturity to eventual decline. Research and development (R&D) costs must be offset by profits once a product comes to market. Varying product lifespans mean that businesses must understand and accurately project returns on their R&D investments based on potential product longevity in the market.
Due to rapidly increasing rates of innovation, products such as electronics and pharmaceuticals in particular are vulnerable to shorter life cycles (when considered against such benchmarks as steel or paper). Thus TLC is focused primarily on the time and cost of development as it relates to the projected profits. TLC can be described as having four distinct stages:
Technology life cycle chart
This chart illustrates the stages in the technological life cycle.
- Research and Development – During this stage, risks are taken to invest in technological innovations. By strategically directing R&D towards the most promising projects, companies and research institutions slowly work their way toward beta versions of new technologies.
- Ascent Phase – This phase covers the timeframe from product invention to the point at which out-of-pocket costs are fully recovered. At this junction the goal is to see to the rapid growth and distribution of the invention and leverage the competitive advantage of having the newest and most effective product.
- Maturity Stage – As the new innovation becomes accepted by the general population and competitors enter the market, supply begins to outstrip demand. During this stage, returns begin to slow as the concept becomes normalized.
- Decline (or Decay) Phase – The final phase is when the utility and potential value to be captured in producing and selling the product begins dipping. This decline eventually reaches the point of a zero-sum game, where margins are no longer procured.
Product development and capitalizing on the new invention covers the business side of these R&D investments in technology. The other important consideration is the differentiation in consumer adoption of new technological innovations. These have also been distributed into phases which effectively summarize the demographic groups presented during each stage of TLC:
Technology adoption life cycle
This adoption chart highlights the way in which consumers embrace new products and services.
- Innovators – These are risk-oriented, leading-edge minded individuals who are extremely interested in technological developments (often within a particular industry). Innovators are a fractional segment of the overall consumer population.
- Early Adopters – A larger but still relatively small demographic, these individuals are generally risk-oriented and highly adaptable to new technology. Early adopters follow the innovators in embracing new products, and tend to be young and well-educated.
- Early Majority – Much larger and more careful than the previous two groups, the early majority are open to new ideas but generally wait to see how they are received before investing.
- Late Majority – Slightly conservative and risk-averse, the late majority is a large group of potential customers who need convincing before investing in something new.
- Laggards – Extremely frugal, conservative, and often technology-averse, laggards are a small population of usually older and uneducated individuals who avoid risks and only invest in new ideas once they are extremely well-established.
Taking these two models into consideration, a business unit with a new product or service must consider the scale of investment in R&D, the projected life cycle the technology will likely maintain, and the way in which customers will adopt this product. By leveraging these models, businesses and institutions can exercise some foresight in ascertaining the returns on investment as their technologies mature.
4.4.3: Assessing an Organization’s Technological Needs
Assessing the internal technological assets and future needs of an organization prepares management for successful technology integration.
Learning Objective
Apply the four strategies of information gathering and introspection that allow for effective assessment of technology needs in an organization
Key Points
- Companies must prioritize their ability to assess their technological needs, particularly as they may relate to achieving optimal efficiency and productivity.
- Companies looking to stay ahead of the competition should gather data internally and externally to facilitate forecasting and the crafting of implementation technology strategies.
- In addition to noting new technological advances, the assessment process is also heavily internal and necessitates that companies isolate their technological strengths and weaknesses.
Key Terms
- productivity
-
The rate at which products and services are produced relative to a particular workforce.
- forecasting
-
To estimate how a condition will be in the future.
- introspection
-
Self-assessment, or an individual or company looking inward to measure certain strengths and weaknesses.
Remaining competitive and remaining technologically vigilant are virtually synonymous at this point in business development. Companies must prioritize their ability to assess their technological needs, particularly as they may relate to achieving optimal efficiency and productivity. There are various concepts that are typical of this managerial technology assessment strategy:
- Technology Strategy – identifying the logic or role of technology within the company.
- Technology Forecasting – identifying applicable technologies for the company, potentially through scouting.
- Technology Roadmapping – ascertaining the trajectories of technological advancement and applying business or market needs to this assessment.
- Technology Portfolios – accumulating all technologies relevant to products or operations to determine which are ideal for internal implementation.
All four of these strategies revolve both around information gathering and introspection into business operations and processes. All four can be improved upon through technological advances. Integrated planning in pursuit of optimization through new technologies keeps efficiency at or above competitive levels. This internal technology assessment also includes noting when and whether it is necessary to construct employee training programs for new technology.
Technology and Market Share
As successive groups of consumers adopt new technology a bell curve emerges – this is referred to as the innovation adoption life cycle (the blue bell curve on the above graphic). The percentages on the x-axis indicate the size of the populations (relative to the entire consumer group for a given good) in each segment. By keeping pace with technological innovation, and offering products early enough to capture the majority of the market, businesses can gain competitive advantage. If a business is too late to enter a newly emerged technological market, it can be quite difficult to attain a high percentage of the market share, as represented on the y-axis (which has often been claimed by other incumbents, as the intersecting yellow line on the graph indicates).
4.4.4: Understanding Current Trends in Technology
Understanding current technologies and trends allows a company to align and synchronize operations to optimize returns on innovation.
Learning Objective
Recognize the importance of keeping pace with current technologies and trends to retain competitive capacity and identify the four specific dimensions of business technology management (BTM)
Key Points
- Business technology management (BTM) provides a bridge between previously established tools and standards within a business environment and the newer, more operationally efficient tools and standards technological progress provides.
- Aligning technologies with current business initiatives and strategies is the most basic way for a business to remain competitive in the current technological climate.
- Companies that can improve on alignment to synchronize the technological landscape internally (often through researching and developing innovations in-house) can achieve foresight and long-term benefits through forecasting future technological necessities.
- BTM has four dimensions: process, organization, information, and technology.
- Effectively employing these four dimensions of BTM provides companies the potential to project technological trends, and synchronize them with their strategies.
Key Terms
- SBUs
-
Strategic Business Units; separate elements of a company, organized by similarity of processes and objectives.
- Alignment
-
The process of adjusting a mechanism (or business) so that its parts act in concert.
- Synchronization
-
The process of aligning all inputs to optimize output.
Businesses are tasked with the ongoing responsibility of keeping up with evolving technology trends to stay competitive. Trends in technology extend out like the branches of a tree: each new innovation creates the possibility for multiple new innovations. The field of business technology management (BTM) arose to provide businesses with the best approaches for assessing and implementing these varying technological advances into their strategies.
BTM
Alignment
BTM provides a bridge between previously established tools and standards within a business environment and newer, more operationally efficient tools and standards in technology. BTM does this by creating a set of principles and guidelines for companies to follow as they pursue alignment. Alignment, in this respect, can be defined as how an institution’s technology supports and enables technology while avoiding constraints in direct relation to company strategies, objectives, and competition. When companies accomplish this in any given technological environment, they have attained BTM maturity relative to that time frame and industry.
Synchronization
Alignment is only the first step: the next step is synchronization. Like alignment, synchronization enables execution, but it also helps companies develop the capacity to anticipate and adapt future business models and strategies. This is generally accomplished by investing in research and development and staying ahead of the standard technologies by anticipating or even innovating past them. This business technology leadership role is long-term oriented and very effective in maintaining competitive advantages in any given industry, but it is particularly important for industries in the tech sectors.
Cycle of Research and Development
The Cycle of Research and Development moves through theorizing, to hypothesizing, to design, to implementation, to study, and back to theorizing to begin the cycle again.
Companies use four specific dimensions of BTM to achieve this understanding of current technologies and trends:
- Process – Companies must execute a set of fluid and repeatable processes that can be consistently scaled up through evaluation.
- Organization – Utilizing an organized business structure or corporate framework, often through strategic business units (SBUs), provides substantial value in centralizing processes and assessing needs.
- Information – Scouting and assessing the current technological environment through extensive research teams is necessary to make the appropriate decisions (see “Sourcing Technology” and “Assessing Needs in Technology” within this Boundless segment).
- Technology – Finally, improving upon these processes within SBUs via leveraging the appropriate data and information will drive strategic acquisition of beneficial technological improvements based upon current trends.
Taken together, these four dimensions applied to alignment and synchronization of new technology can help businesses keep up with or ever stay ahead of current technologies and trends. Companies can benefit from the intrinsic opportunities technological progress provides while offsetting the intrinsic risks of external technological development.
4.4.5: Sourcing Technology
Technology sourcing involves isolating and implementing new innovations within an existing business framework.
Learning Objective
Illustrate the varying cost structures, licensing, and scouting procedures involved with technology sourcing
Key Points
- Sourcing new technology involves the scouting and researching of new technological potential and the eventual transfer of these technologies to a company.
- Technology scouting is based around identifying new technologies, organizing and channeling data on these technologies, and assessing the ease and value of implementing them.
- Companies capitalize on the successful scouting of a new technology by sourcing it from the appropriate party for their own use.
- Tech transfer drawbacks primarily involve the cost of licensing patents and training employees to effectively use the new technology.
- Some organizations, such as Sourceforge, Wikipedia, and Boundless, provide knowledge and technology for free in an open source strategy.
Key Terms
- patent
-
A legal right to a particular innovation, protecting it from being copied or employed by another without consent or license.
- Sourcing
-
The supply of resources needed by a particular company or individual.
- Scouting
-
The act of seeking or searching.
Technology Sourcing Strategies
Technology sourcing, or the pursuit of implementing new technologies within a businesses strategic framework, involves isolating and applying new technologies to current models. Technology can be developed internally or isolated through technology scouting and then implemented through technology transfer. In deciding which approach is optimal for them, organizations must consider such factors as the advantage of being first to market, research and developments costs and capabilities, and market research and data gathering costs. Therefore the strategies behind sourcing technology can be complex, varying by industry, company size, economic strength, and the availability of easily implemented technology.
Technology Scouting
Technology scouting is essentially forecasting technological developments through information gathering. Technology scouts can either be internal employees or external consultants specifically designated to the task of researching developments in a particular technological field. This can be loosely referred to as a three-step process:
- Identify emerging technologies.
- Channel and organize new technological data within an organization.
- Provide a corporate context to support or refute the acquisition of said technology.
When technology scouting isolates new developments that could potentially provide advantages for an incumbent, strategies to acquire or source this technology become a focal point. Technology transfer, and the commercialization of technological abilities, is an enormous market both in the U.S. and abroad. Though governments, universities, and open source websites (such as Sourceforge, Wikipedia, and Boundless) often provide knowledge and technological know-how free of charge, most often technology is not free.
Technology Sourcing Pros and Cons
In the Information Age knowledge is power, and more than ever companies are trying to protect their knowledge from competitors or freeloaders by using patents and trade secrets. Transfer of technology is therefore expensive, from licensing the patented technology to requesting training in new technological advances for staff. Despite the distinct advantages of staying ahead of the curve relative to technological capabilities, there are some drawbacks to tech transfer. One strong example of the drawbacks in technological transfer and sourcing can be illustrated by the image below.
Stages in technology development
Technology develops through a series of stages: basic technology research, research to prove feasibility, technology development, technology demonstration, system/subsystem development, and system test, launch & operations.
The first five levels of innovation, from basic research to technology demonstration, are often where investment begins pouring in, alongside the attempt to implement in order to stay competitive. As you may note, this is prior to the testing phases and therefore investors at this stage must accept the inherent risk of the new technology presenting significant hurdles to optimizing perceived potential or effective implementation. Early adopters and innovators suffer the risk of employing a new technology that has not been fully debugged, minimizing what should have been strong returns on investment (ROI). Technology scouts should therefore be highly circumspect and meticulous in their research processes, ensuring that new technological innovations will indeed provide what they promise.
4.5: Intrapreneurship
4.5.1: Defining Intrapreneurship
Intrapreneurship means behaving like an entrepreneur while working within a large organization.
Learning Objective
Define intrapreneurship as a means of enabling organizational change and the pursuit of an innovative culture
Key Points
- The intrapreneur acts as an “inside entrepreneur” who focuses on innovation and creativity while operating within the goals and environment of an organization.
- Intrapreneurs bring their ideas to the firm to generate new products, processes, or services and thereby act as a force for change within the organization. Intrapreneurship adds to the innovation potential of an organization.
- In many ways, the benefits of intrepreneurship are difficult to forecast and thus difficult to justify. As a result, good managers must be long-term oriented and open-minded to implement entrepreneurship.
Key Terms
- innovation
-
A change in customs; something new and contrary to established customs, manners, or rites.
- entrepreneur
-
A person who organizes and operates a business venture and assumes much of the associated risk.
Intrapreneurship means behaving like an entrepreneur while working within a large organization. According to social scientist Joseph Schumpeter, introducing new technologies, increasing efficiency and productivity, and generating new products or services are all qualities characteristic of intrepreneurs.
Intrapreneurs and Corporate Management
Intrapreneurship is now known as the practice of a corporate management style that integrates risk-taking and innovation approaches. It also incorporates the reward and motivational techniques that are traditionally thought of as being the sole province of entrepreneurship.
The intrapreneur acts as an “inside entrepreneur” who focuses on innovation and creativity while operating within the goals and environment of an organization. Intrapreneurs bring their ideas to the firm to generate new products, processes, or services and thereby act as a force for change within the organization. Capturing a little of the dynamic nature of entrepreneurial management (trying things until successful, learning from failures, attempting to conserve resources, and so on) adds to the innovation potential of an otherwise static organization without exposing those employees to the risks or accountability normally associated with entrepreneurship.
Theory and Practice
Incorporating entrepreneurial concepts into traditional corporate environments is easy to promote in theory: capturing the innovative attitudes of small start-ups within the larger organizational context (i.e., with more resources) seems intuitive. In reality, entrepreneurship is often much easier to discuss in a classroom than to integrate into an actual organization. There are many reasons for this that generally boil down to simple issues of size and corporate inertia.
Companies are built on structures and hierarchies which in turn create a dependable and repeatable operational process. This process leads to value creation, and efficiency is always a focal point in operational contexts. When innovation and intrepreneurship enters this equation they are often seen as costs without tangible and definite benefits, and as lacking consistency and applicability to the current model. In many ways, the benefits of intrepreneurship are difficult to forecast and thus difficult to justify. As a result, good managers must be long-term oriented and open-minded in order to capture the benefits of instilling an intrepreneurial spirit.
4.5.2: Building Support for Intrapreneurship
Building internal support for intrepreneurship is a prerequisite to creating meaningful change in an organization.
Learning Objective
Justify the role of the intrapreneur, not only as an innovative thinker but also a strategic communicator capable of initiating change organizationally.
Key Points
- An intrapreneur is tasked not only with creating a new and innovative concept but also with communicating the concept in a way that builds support for the new initiative.
- One useful way to integrate stakeholders and speak the language of upper management is to numerically demonstrate that a new idea is financially and strategically feasible.
- Building support by identifying and communicating with key stakeholders and decision-makers is essential to bringing change to an organization.
- Intrapreneurs must also be willing to become change agents: people who act as catalysts for incorporating new ideas within the organization. Intrapreneurs, from this perspective, must display strong leadership and communication skills.
Key Term
- comprehensive
-
Broadly or completely covering; including a large proportion of something.
Building support is important when you are bringing change to the organization. Employees bold enough to be intrepreneurs must recognize the challenge they are taking on from the organizational frame. Organizations have great momentum and are, in most cases, inherently resilient to change. This places a great strain on an innovative employee with an interesting idea because s/he is tasked not only with implementing the idea but also with communicating it to key decision-makers to gain approval.
Key Stakeholders
Intrapreneurs need to know who the key stakeholders are and how to capture their attention. For starters, upper management is often where the decision-making power lies. Having access to upper management, and understanding the strategic motivations behind their decisions, plays an integral role in building top-down support organizationally. Customers are also key stakeholders because their needs are the primary determinant of organizational trajectory. Recognizing what customers want and learning how to give it to them more effectively are integral to successful intrapreneurship.
One useful way to integrate stakeholders and speak the language of upper management is to numerically demonstrate that a new idea is financially and strategically feasible. A net present value (NPV) analysis factors in the total time it will take to initiate a new project, along with costs incurred and value generated over a given timeframe. This enables intrapreneurs a tool to communicate, in today’s dollars, how much a given new venture will cost compared with how much it will bring in (i.e., a profit margin).
Being a Change Agent
A change agent
Marissa Mayer was recruited from Google to be the Yahoo CEO so she could set and execute the strategy that might turn the company around.
Change agents know how to get people in an organization involved in solving their own problems. A change agent’s main strength is a comprehensive knowledge of human behavior supported by a number of intervention techniques. Understanding not only how to innovate but also how to operate as a catalyst for change is a useful characteristic for aspiring intrapreneurs. Building support is largely a social and behavioral challenge, and change agents understand how to communicate why a proposed change is important and how it is attainable.
4.6: Managing Change for Organizations
4.6.1: Managers as Leaders of Change
Leaders are in the unique role of not only designing change initiatives but also enacting and communicating them.
Learning Objective
Review the strategies leaders must use to lead change effectively
Key Points
- Managing change requires more than simple planning; the significant human element of change resistance needs to be addressed to ensure success.
- Leaders must define change strategy and communicate it effectively to shareholders, empower and support employees, and mitigate resistance to the change initiative.
- Conner identifies six distinct leadership styles related to change: anti-change, rational, panacea, bolt-on, integrated, and continuous. Each leadership style represents a unique set of perceptions, attitudes, and behaviors regarding how organizational disruption should be addressed.
- Conner also posited that the six leadership styles are related to two different types of organizational change: first-order change and second-order change. Different leadership styles are more effective in different situations.
Key Terms
- leading
-
To conduct or direct with authority.
- attribute
-
A characteristic or quality of a thing.
Managing change requires strong leadership and an understanding of how organizational change occurs. Leaders are in the unique role of not only designing change initiatives but enacting and communicating them to subordinates. Managing change requires more than simple planning: the significant human element of change resistance needs to be addressed to ensure success.
Leadership Strategies for Change
Successful change management is more likely if leaders:
- Create a definable strategy – Define measurable stakeholder aims, create a business case for their achievement (and keep it continuously updated), monitor assumptions, risks, dependencies, costs, return on investment, and cultural issues affecting the progress of the associated work.
- Communicate effectively – Explain to stakeholders why the change is being undertaken, what the benefits of successful implementation will be, and what how the change is being rolled out.
- Empower employees – Devise an effective education, training, or skills upgrading scheme for the organization.
- Counter resistance – Identify employee issues and align them to the overall strategic direction of the organization. Adapt the change initiative when necessary to mitigate discontentment.
- Support employees – Provide personal counseling (if required) to alleviate any change-related fears.
- Track progress – Monitor the implementation and fine-tuning as required.
These six components of change are the responsibility of management to create and implement.
The reengineering process
Change management is often termed a “re-engineering process.” This flowchart shows the reciprocal relationships involved in each step: the mission defines and is accomplished via work processes, which execute and are guided by decisions, which consider and are supported by information, which employs and are processed via technology.
Six Leadership Styles for Change
Conner (1998) identified six distinct leadership styles related to change: anti-change, rational, panacea, bolt-on, integrated, and continuous. Each leadership style “represents a unique set of perceptions, attitudes, and behaviors regarding how organizational disruption should be addressed.” Stopper (1999) characterizes each of Conner’s leadership styles in this way:
- The anti-change leader – A leader embracing this style seeks to avoid change as much as possible. The message is, “Stay the course. Keep adjustments small. No need to change in any major way.”
- The rational leader – This leader focuses on how to constrain and control change with logical planning and clearly defined steps.
- The panacea leader – The panacea leader believes that the way to respond to pressure for change is to communicate and motivate. These leaders understand the resilience to change they are likely to encounter as well as the inevitability of change as organizations evolve. They tend to focus on fostering enthusiasm for change.
- The bolt-on leader – This leader strives to regain control of a changing situation by attaching (bolting on) change management techniques to ad-hoc projects that are created in response to pressure for change. This manager is more concerned about helping others change than creating a strategy for the actual change itself.
- The integrated leader – The integrated leader searches for ways to use the structure and discipline of what Harding and Rouse (2007) called “human due diligence” (the leadership practice of understanding the culture of an organization and the roles, capabilities, and attitudes of its people) as individual change projects are created and implemented. The concept is simply to combine, or integrate, human and cultural concerns with the strategy itself.
- The continuous leader – The continuous leader works to create an agile and quick-responding organization that can quickly anticipate threats and seize opportunities as change initiatives are designed and implemented. Continuous leaders believe that to disruption is continuous, and adaptability a necessary organizational competency.
Conner says that these six leadership styles are related to two different types of organizational change: first-order change and second-order change. First-order change is incremental, piecemeal change. According to Conner, second-order change is “nonlinear in nature and reflects movement that is fundamentally different from anything seen before within the existing framework.”
Conner identifies the first four leadership styles as appropriate for managing first-order change. When an organization is engaging in discontinuous, transformational change, however, integrated and continuous leadership styles are more appropriate .
4.6.2: Types of Organizational Change
There are three main categories of change: business process re-engineering, technological change, and incremental change.
Learning Objective
Differentiate between business process re-engineering, technological change, and incremental change as the three main categories of organizational development
Key Points
- Business process re-engineering focuses on the analysis and design of workflows and processes within an organization.
- Technological change refers to the process of invention, innovation, and diffusion of technology or processes.
- Incremental change means introducing many small, gradual changes to a project instead of a few large, rapid changes.
Key Terms
- incremental
-
Occurring over a series of gradual increments, or small steps.
- devise
-
To use one’s intellect to plan or design something.
- incremental model
-
A method of product development where the model is designed, implemented, and tested incrementally (a little more is added each time) until the product is finished.
Change management is an approach to shifting or transitioning individuals, teams, and organizations from their current state to a desired future state. It is an organizational process aimed at helping stakeholders accept and embrace change in their business environment. In some project management contexts, change management refers to a project management process wherein changes to a project are formally introduced and approved.
Kotter defines change management as the utilization of basic structures and tools to control any organizational change effort. Change management’s goal is to maximize organizational benefit, minimize impacts on workers, and avoid distractions. There are different types of change an can organization face.
Business Process Re-Engineering
Business process re-engineering (BPR) is a business management strategy first pioneered in the early 1990s that focuses on the analysis and design of workflows and processes within an organization. BPR aims to help organizations fundamentally rethink how they do their work in order to dramatically improve customer service, cut operational costs, and become world-class competitors. In the mid-1990s, as many as 60% of the Fortune 500 companies claimed to have either initiated re-engineering efforts or begun planning for it.
BPR helps companies radically restructure their organizations by focusing on their business processes from the ground up. A business process is a set of logically related tasks performed to achieve a defined business outcome. Re-engineering emphasizes a holistic focus on business objectives and how processes relate to them, encouraging full-scale recreation of processes rather than iterative optimization of sub-processes.
Business process re-engineering is also known as business process redesign, business transformation, and business process change management.
Incremental Change
Incremental change is a method of introducing many small, gradual (and often unplanned) changes to a project instead of a few large, rapid (and extensively planned) changes. Wikipedia illustrates the concept by building an encyclopedia bit by bit. Another good example of incremental change is a manufacturing company making hundreds of small components that go into a larger product, like a car. Improving the manufacturing process of each of these integral components one at a time to cut costs and improve process efficiency overall is incremental change.
Technological Change
Technological change (TC) describes the overall process of invention, innovation, and diffusion of technology or processes. The term is synonymous with technological development, technological achievement, and technological progress. In essence, TC is the invention of a technology (or a process), the continuous process of improving a technology (which often makes it cheaper), and its diffusion throughout industry or society. In short, technological change is based on both better and more technology integrated into the framework of existing operational processes.
4.6.3: Inside and Outside Forces for Organizational Change
Inside forces include strategic and human resource changes, while outside forces include macroeconomic and technological change.
Learning Objective
Identify the internal and external pressures for change, which drive organizations to adapt and evolve
Key Points
- Change management is an approach to shifting individuals, teams, and organizations to a desired future state. Examples of organizational change can include strategic, operational, and technological change that can come from inside or outside the organization.
- Outside forces for change include macroeconomics, technological evolution, globalization, new legislation, and competitive dynamics.
- Inside forces for change include intrapreneurship, new management and restructuring.
- The first step in effective change management is being prepared, in a timely and knowledgeable fashion, for internal and external potentialities that may force organizational adaptation.
Key Term
- macroeconomic
-
Relating to the entire economy, including the growth rate, money and credit, exchange rates, the total amount of goods and services produced, etc.
Change management is an approach to shifting or transitioning individuals, teams, and organizations from their existing state to a desired future state. Examples of organizational change can include strategic, operational, and technological changes coming from inside or outside the organization. Understanding key internal and external change catalysts is critical to successful change management for organizational leaders.
Outside Forces
While there are seemingly endless external considerations that can motivate an organization to change, a few common considerations should be constantly monitored. These include economic factors, competitive dynamics, new technology, globalization, and legislative changes:
- Economics – The 2008 economic collapse is a strong example of why adaptability is important. As consumers tightened their belts, organizations had to either do the same and lower supply to match lowered demand, or come up with new goods to entice them. Migrating from one volume to another can financially challenging, and change strategies such as creating new affordable product lines or more efficient operational paradigms are key to changing for success.
- Competition – Changes in the competitive landscape, such as new incumbents, mergers and acquisitions, new product offerings, and bankruptcies, can substantially impact a company’s strategy and operations. For example, if a competitor releases a new product that threatens to steal market share, an organization must be ready to change and adapt to retain their customer base.
- Technology – Technological changes are a constant threat, and embracing new technologies ahead of the competition requires adaptability. When media went digital, adaptable companies found ways to evolve their operations to stay competitive. Many companies that could not evolve quickly failed.
- Globalization – Capturing new global markets requires product, cultural, and communicative adaptability. Catering to new demographics and identifying opportunities and threats as they appear in the global market is integral to adapting for optimal value.
- Legislation – New laws and legislation can dramatically change operations. Companies in industries that impact the environment must constantly strive to adapt to cleaner and more socially responsible operating methodologies. Failing to keep pace can result in substantial fines and financial detriments, not to mention negative branding.
Inside Forces
There are many inside forces to keep in mind as well, ranging from employee changes to cultural reform to operational challenges.Understanding where this change is coming from is the first step to timely and appropriate change management.
- Management Change – New CEOs or other executive players can significantly impact strategy and corporate culture. Understanding the risks associated with hiring (or promoting for) new upper management is key to making a good decision on best fit.
- Organizational Restructuring – Organizations may be required to significantly alter their existing structure to adapt to the development of new strategic business units, new product lines, or global expansion. Changing structure means disrupting hierarchies and communications, which must then be reintegrated. Employees must be trained on the change and the implications it will have for their everyday operations.
- Intrapreneurship – New ideas come from inside the organization as well as outside the organization, and capitalizing on a great new idea will likely require some internal reconsideration. Integrating a new idea may require reallocation of resources, new hires and talent management, and new branding.
4.6.4: Common Targets of Organizational Change
Change management can be implemented to change an organization’s mission, strategy, structure, technology, or culture.
Learning Objective
Recognize and discuss the various components of an organization which may undergo change through the evolution and adaptation of organizational strategy and/or objectives
Key Points
- Organizational change management should begin with a systematic diagnosis of the current situation in order to determine the organization’s need for and ability to change.
- Prior to a cultural change initiative, a needs assessment should examine the current organizational culture and operations. The goal is a careful and objective consideration of what is working and what is not.
- Areas of change include mission, strategy, operations, technology, culture, branding, employees, and work flows.
- Change management should also make use of performance metrics, such as financial results, operational efficiency, leadership commitment, communication effectiveness, and the perceived need for change.
Key Terms
- organization
-
A group of people or other legal entities with an explicit purpose and written rules.
- change management
-
The controlled implementation of required changes to some system; includes version control and planned fallback.
When an organization requires changes to address counterproductive aspects of organizational culture, the process can be daunting. Cultural change is usually necessary to reduce employee turnover, influence employee behavior, make improvements to the company, refocus the company objectives, rescale the organization, provide better customer service, or achieve specific company goals and results. Cultural change can be impacted by a number of elements, including the external environment and industry competitors, changes in industry standards, technology changes, the size and nature of the workforce, and the organization’s history and management.
Assessing Change Needs
Prior to launching a cultural change initiative, a company should carry out a needs assessment to examine the existing organizational culture and operations. Careful and objective consideration of what is working and what is not, as well as what is parallel with the broader organizational objectives and what is not, are critical to success here.
Areas that need to change can be identified through interviews, focus groups, observation, and other methods of internal and external research. A company must clearly identify the existing culture and then design a change process to implement the desired culture.
Common Areas of Change
Common areas of organizational change include:
- Mission
- Strategy
- Operational changes, including structure and hierarchies
- Technology
- Culture
- Employees and/or management
- Work flows (particularly relevant in manufacturing)
- Branding
Organizational change management should begin with a systematic diagnosis of the existing situation in order to determine the organization’s need for and ability to change. The objectives, content, and process of change should be specified as part of the change management plan.
Change management processes can benefit from creative marketing to facilitate communication between change audiences and a deep social understanding of leadership styles and group dynamics. To track transformation projects, organizational change management should align group expectations, communicate, integrate teams, and manage and train people. Change management should also make use of performance metrics including financial results, operational efficiency, leadership commitment, communication effectiveness, and the perceived need for change in order to design appropriate strategies that make the change in organizational culture as smooth and as efficient as possible.
4.6.5: Organizational Development
Organizational development is a deliberately planned effort to increase an organization’s relevance and viability.
Learning Objective
Explain the role of organizational development in leadership and organizational change
Key Points
- Organizational development (OD) is an ongoing, systematic process of implementing effective organizational change.
- The purpose of organizational development is to address the evolving needs of successful organizations.
- Organizational development is often facilitated with the assistance of a “catalyst” or “change agent” such as an effective or influential leader.
- An important role of a leader is to analyze and assess the effectiveness of this developmental process and motivate the organization to achieve developmental targets.
Key Terms
- viability
-
The ability to live or to succeed.
- catalyst
-
Someone or something that encourages progress or change.
Organization development (OD) is a deliberately planned effort to increase an organization’s relevance and viability. Vasudevan has referred to OD as a systemic learning and development strategy intended to change the basics of beliefs, attitudes, and relevance of an organization’s values and structure. This process helps the organization to better absorb disruptive technologies, market opportunities, and ensuing challenges and chaos. Essentially, organizational development is the framework for a change process that is designed to produce desirable and positive results for all stakeholders and the environment.
The Nature of Organizational Development
Organizational development is a lifelong, built-in mechanism to improve an organization internally. This is often done with the assistance of a “change agent” or “catalyst” who enables appropriate theories and techniques from applied behavioral sciences, anthropology, sociology, and phenomenology. The terms “change agent” and “catalyst” suggest a leader who is engaged in transformation leadership as opposed to management (management being a more incremental or efficiency-based change methodology).
A manager providing advice to a team
Organizational development is often facilitated with the assistance of a “catalyst” or “change agent” such as an influential manager.
Although behavioral science provided the basic foundation for the study and practice of OD, new and emerging fields of study have made their presence felt. Experts in systems thinking and organizational learning have also emerged as OD catalysts. These emergent perspectives view the organization as the holistic interplay of a number of systems, all of which impact the processes and outputs of the entire organization.
Applications of Organizational Development
The purpose of OD is to address the evolving needs of successful organizations. It represents a concerted collaboration of internal and external experts in the field to discover the processes an organization can use to become more effective.
Organizational development aims to improve an organization’s capacity to handle its internal and external functioning and relationships. This includes improving interpersonal and group processes; communication; the organization’s ability to cope with problems; decision-making processes; leadership styles; conflict and trust; and cooperation among organizational members.
Weisbord
Weisbord presents a six-box model for understanding—and thereby changing and improving—an organization:
- Purposes: Are employees clear about the organization’s mission, purpose, and goals? Do they support the organization’s purpose?
- Structure: How is the organization’s work divided? Is there an adequate fit between the purpose and the internal structure?
- Relationships: What are the relationships between individuals, units, or departments that perform different tasks? What are the relationships between the people and the requirements of their jobs?
- Rewards: For what actions does the organization formally reward or punish its members?
- Leadership: Does leadership watch for “blips” among the other areas and maintain balance among them?
- Helpful mechanisms: Do planning, control, budgeting, and other information systems help organization members accomplish their goal?
Lewin
Lewin’s description of the process of change involves three steps:
- Unfreezing: Faced with a dilemma or issue, the individual or group becomes aware of a need to change.
- Changing: The situation is diagnosed and new models of behavior are explored and tested.
- Refreezing: Application of new behavior is evaluated, and if it proves to be reinforcing, the behavior is adopted.
Effectiveness of Organizational Development
The efficacy of organizational development is predicated on the adaptability of the organization and the overall successful integration of new ideas and strategies within an existing framework. Resistance to change is a fundamental organizational problem as all organizations have a degree of general inertia. This is further complicated by the difficulty in quantitatively measuring changes in areas that are generally intangible (i.e., culture).
To remedy this, organizations pursuing OD must set clear and measurable objectives prior to committing to a change initiative. An important role of the leader is to analyze and assess the effectiveness of this developmental process and motivate the organization to achieve developmental targets.
4.7: Managing Change for Employees
4.7.1: Phases of Organizational Change: Lewin
Kurt Lewin’s phases of change (unfreezing, change, and freezing) describe how people react and adapt to change.
Learning Objective
Explain Kurt Lewin’s Phases of Changes model, a three-stage process allowing for organizational change
Key Points
- Kurt Lewin described change as a three-stage process that includes unfreezing, change, and freezing. Lewin emphasizes that change is not a series of individual processes but rather one that flows from one process to the next.
- The first stage (unfreezing) involves overcoming inertia and dismantling the existing “mind set.” This involves getting over the initial defense mechanisms that people exhibit to avoid making a change.
- In the second stage, the actual change occurs. This is typically a period of confusion and transition in which people are unsure about the change and what may happen in the future.
- In the third stage (freezing), the new mindset of the change begins to become the standard, and people’s comfort levels return to normal.
- Although some managers still use Lewin’s model, its most important contribution is the idea that change should be thought of as a process instead of as individual stages.
Key Terms
- Defense Mechanisms
-
Psychological strategies (such as denial, repression, or rationalization) that are brought into play to avoid or adjust to uncomfortable situations.
- Organizational Psychology
-
The scientific study of employees, workplaces, and organizations.
Change is a fundamental component of any organization looking to continuously improve and evolve. A few researchers and academics have determined how to best model and present methods of change for managing employees. Kurt Lewin was one of these academics and was known as one of the leaders of organizational psychology.
Kurt Lewin
Lewin was an influential behavioral and organizational psychologist who proposed the Phases of Change Model.
The Three Phases of Change
This early model developed by Lewin describes change as a three-stage process of unfreezing, change, and freezing. In this Phases of Change Model, Lewin emphasizes that change is not a series of individual processes but rather one that flows from one process to the next.
The first stage (unfreezing) involves overcoming inertia and dismantling the existing mind set. It involves getting over the initial defense mechanisms that people exhibit to avoid making a change. People eventually realize that change is necessary and urgent, and this realization allows them to move on to the next stage.
In the second stage, the actual change occurs. This is typically a period of confusion and transition in which people are unsure about the change and what may happen in the future. People are aware that the old ways are being challenged, but they do not yet have a clear picture as to what these ways will be replaced with. During this stage, an organization’s leaders need to focus on clearly communicating to employees the reasons for change and the steps needed to achieve it.
Lewin labeled the third and final stage freezing, though it may be useful to think of this stage as “refreezing.” During this stage, the new mindset of the change begins to become the standard, and people’s comfort levels return to normal. Many people criticize this component of Lewin’s model, arguing that there is never time for people to comfortably adapt to change in the fast-paced world of today.
Although some managers still use Lewin’s model, its most important contribution is the idea that change should be thought of as a process instead of individual stages. This is important for understanding how employees may react to change in the workplace and why some may adapt more quickly to change than others.
4.7.2: Strategies for Successful Organizational Change
To implement a successful change, managers should focus on communication, training, monitoring, and counseling for the workforce.
Learning Objective
Evaluate differing strategies for enabling changes within an organizational culture while mitigating resistance and issues
Key Points
- Organizational change often elicits concern and discomfort among employees. Change is a human effort as much as it is a strategic one.
- During an organizational change, it is essential for managers to communicate the reasons for the change as well as the process needed to make the change. This should include clear objectives and strategic implications.
- Effective education and training is essential for employees to understand and adapt to a change in the workforce.
- One of the most important steps in managing a successful change is to monitor how the change is playing out in the organization. Quantitative tools can be used to measure and assess effectiveness.
Key Terms
- proactive change
-
The shifting or transitioning of individuals, teams, and organizations from a current state to a desired future state before being incited by an event.
- reactive change
-
The shifting or transitioning of individuals, teams, and organizations from a current state to a desired future state in response to an event.
Understanding Change Management
When change is implemented in an organization, there is often resistance. This resistance often stems from people’s fear—of change in the work itself, of change in the process of completing work, or of the possibility that the change may result in the loss of their job. As a result, managers and organizational leaders should have a strategic approach to enabling change that ensures it is maximally effective in the organization.
Change management is the study of how to integrate changes without damaging the organizational culture or efficiency. At its core, change management is about knowing strategically what to change and how to manage the human element of this process. Change management is broken into 4 elements:
- Recognize the changes in the broader business environment
- Develop the necessary adjustments for the company’s needs
- Train employees on the appropriate changes
- Win the support of employees
Note that a central themes of change management revolve around training and supporting employees. This is a critical managerial responsibility for enabling change.
Key Enablers to Change
Transparency and Effective Communication
During an organizational change, it is essential for managers to communicate the reasons for the change as well as the process needed to make the change. For example, if management wants to implement a procedure that will help to improve the production of the workforce, but they require a lot of initial labor to get the new procedure up and running, they should communicate why the change in procedure is necessary. If staff understands why the change is taking place, they will be more likely to agree with the implementation and see the benefit.
Effective Education and Training
Education and training is essential for employees to understand and adapt to a change in the workforce. When a new process is put into place, employees will likely be unfamiliar with the process and how it will fit into their daily workflow. Training in this situation is necessary to help employees become familiar with the change and better adapt to it.
Personal Counseling
When a major change happens in the workplace, some employees may feel very uncomfortable about the change—especially the employees most affected by the change. For these employees it may be useful to have a program, most likely through human resources, that will help them adapt to the change.
Monitoring the Implementation
One of the most important steps in managing a successful change is to monitor how the change is playing out in the organization. This can be done by looking at historical data and examining how employees are performing with the change compared to how they were performing in the past. Additionally, management will want to monitor how the change is affecting the overall production process. If the change is not improving the process after the initial implementation, management may want to fine-tune the process to make sure that the change is successful.
Generic strategy
Maintaining focus on learning and growth (e.g., employee training), internal business processes (e.g., establishing partnerships), customer-oriented processes (e.g., inspiring loyalty), and financial concerns (e.g., maximizing shareholder value) is integral to successful change management.
4.7.3: Steps to Smooth Organizational Change: Kotter
Kotter’s model details a process where managers may initiate, direct, implement, and foster organizational change via employee engagement.
Learning Objective
Employ John Paul Kotter’s eight step model to outline steps toward smooth and efficient change in an organization
Key Points
- John Paul Kotter is a former professor at the Harvard Business School and is regarded as an authority on leadership and change.
- The eight stages of Kotter’s change model include: increase urgency, build the guiding team, get the vision right, communicate for buy-in, empower action, create short-term wins, don’t let up, and make change stick.
- By following Kotter’s eight steps, managers can implement change and make it an integral part of the organization’s culture. This is accomplished by making sure that change sticks with the culture and becomes an expected part of the continued development of the organization.
Key Terms
- vision
-
A clear, distinctive, and specific vision of the future, usually connected with a leader’s strategic advances for the organization.
- Buy-in
-
Support; agreement; approval; blessing (in a secular sense). A sense of believability in the potential outcomes achieved through group process.
John Paul Kotter
John Paul Kotter (born 1947) is a former professor at the Harvard Business School, an acclaimed author, and Chief Innovation Officer at Kotter International. He is regarded as an authority on leadership and change. Kotter created the Eights Steps to Change Model that is currently the most widely-used framework for managing organizational change. In his observations, Kotter concluded that the organizations that are the most successful in implementing change go through the following series of eight steps.
The Eight Steps
1. Increase urgency: Managers must inspire people to move, make objectives real and relevant, and further their desire to make change happen. Getting momentum for change is key.
2. Build the guiding team: The company must get the right people in place as leaders with the right emotional commitment and understanding and the right mix of skills and levels.
3. Get the vision right: Managers must get the team to establish a simple vision and strategy and then focus on the emotional and creative aspects necessary to drive service and efficiency.
4. Communicate for buy-in: Involving as many people as possible, managers must communicate the essentials and appeal and respond to people’s needs. Additionally, they must remove clutter and streamline technological communications, making it efficient rather than overwhelming for employees.
5. Empower action: This step removes obstacles wherever possible, enables constructive feedback, and garners support from leaders—complete with motivational rewards that recognize progress and achievements.
6. Create short-term wins: Managers must set aims that are easy to achieve in manageable chunks. They must also manage the number of initiatives taking place at once and finish current stages before starting new ones.
Short-term wins
A step in Kotter’s model of change is to celebrate short-term wins while working toward an overall goal of change.
7. Don’t let up: Managers must foster and encourage determination, persistence, and ongoing progress reporting. This can be done by highlighting achieved and future milestones.
8. Make change stick: This step reinforces the value of successful change via recruitment, promotion, and new change leaders. The company should change a fundamental part of the culture during this step so people do not consider it as foreign.
By following these eight steps to successful change, managers can work to mitigate the risks associated with changes that employees do not like. In order to reduce potential organizational obstacles, managers have to make sure that all of their employees are on board with the change and are willing to assist with it.
Chapter 3: Organizational Theory
3.1: Why Study Organizational Theory
3.1.1: What is Organizational Behavior?
Organizational behavior is the field of study that investigates how organizational structures affect behavior within organizations.
Learning Objective
Define organizational behavior and the way in which computer modeling and systematic frameworks enable further study
Key Points
- Organizational behavior studies organizations from multiple viewpoints, including behavior within the organization and in relation to other organizations.
- Micro organizational behavior refers to individual and group dynamics in an organizational setting.
- Macro organizational theory studies whole organizations and industries, including how they adapt, and the strategies, structures, and contingencies that guide them.
- Concepts such as leadership, decision making, team building, motivation, and job satisfaction are all facets of organizational behavior and responsibilities of management.
- Organizational behavior also deals heavily in culture. Company or corporate culture is difficult to define but is extremely relevant to how organizations behave.
Key Term
- behavior
-
The way a living creature acts.
Definition of Organizational Behavior
Organizational behavior studies the impact individuals, groups, and structures have on human behavior within organizations. It is an interdisciplinary field that includes sociology, psychology, communication, and management. Organizational behavior complements organizational theory, which focuses on organizational and intra-organizational topics, and complements human-resource studies, which is more focused on everyday business practices.
Behavior model
Diagram of Schein’s organizational behavior model, which depicts the three central components of an organization’s culture: artifacts (visual symbols such as office dress code), values (company goals and standards), and assumptions (implicit, unacknowledged standards or biases).
Different Types of Organizational Behavior
Organizational studies encompass the study of organizations from multiple perspectives, methods, and levels of analysis. “Micro” organizational behavior refers to individual and group dynamics in organizations. “Macro” strategic management and organizational theory studies whole organizations and industries, especially how they adapt, and the strategies, structures, and contingencies that guide them. Some scholars also include the categories of “meso”-scale structures, involving power, culture, and the networks of individuals in organizations, and “field”-level analysis, which studies how entire populations of organizations interact.
Many factors come into play whenever people interact in organizations. Modern organizational studies attempt to understand and model these factors. Organizational studies seek to control, predict, and explain. Organizational behavior can play a major role in organizational development, enhancing overall organizational performance, as well as also enhancing individual and group performance, satisfaction, and commitment.
Topics in Organizational Behavior
Organizational behavior is particularly relevant in the field of management due to the fact that it encompasses many of the issues managers face on a daily basis. Concepts such as leadership, decision making, team building, motivation, and job satisfaction are all facets of organizational behavior and responsibilities of management. Understanding not only how to delegate tasks and organize resources but also how to analyze behavior and motivate productivity is critical for success in management.
Organizational behavior also deals heavily in culture. Company or corporate culture is difficult to define but is extremely relevant to how organizations behave. A Wall Street stock-trading company, for example, will have a dramatically different work culture than an academic department at a university. Understanding and defining these work cultures and the behavioral implications they embed organizationally is also a central topic in organizational behavior.
3.1.2: Why Study Organizational Theory?
Organizational theory studies organizations to identify how they solve problems and how they maximize efficiency and productivity.
Learning Objective
Define the value and applications of organizational theory from a business perspective.
Key Points
- Correctly applying organizational theory can have several benefits for both the organization and society at large. Developments in organizations help boost economic potential in a society and help generate the tools necessary to fuel its capitalistic system.
- Once an organization sees a window for expansion, it begins to grow and thus alters the economic equilibrium by catapulting itself forward. This expansion induces changes not only in the organization’s infrastructure but also in competing organizations and the economy as a whole.
- One example of how development in organizational theory improves efficiency is in factory production. Henry Ford created the assembly line, a system of organization that enabled efficiency and drove both Ford and the U.S. economy forward.
Key Terms
- efficiency
-
The extent to which a resource, such as electricity, is used for the intended purpose; the ratio of useful work to energy expended.
- normative
-
Of, pertaining to, or using a standard.
Definition of Organizational Theory
Organizational theory studies organizations to identify the patterns and structures they use to solve problems, maximize efficiency and productivity, and meet the expectations of stakeholders. Organizational theory then uses these patterns to formulate normative theories of how organizations function best. Therefore, organizational theory can be used in order to learn the best ways to run an organization or identify organizations that are managed in such a way that they are likely to be successful.
Organizational theory and stakeholders
Organizational theory examines patterns in meeting stakeholders’ needs. This concept map illustrates common internal and external stakeholders: internal stakeholders include employees and managers, while external stakeholders include customers, suppliers, creditors, and society at large. A company must take all of these stakeholders’ interests into account.
Organizational Theory
Correctly applying organizational theory can have several benefits for both the organization and society at large. As many organizations strive to integrate themselves into capitalistic societies, they initiate a ripple effect between other competing firms and already-existing economic pressures. Once an organization sees a window for expansion, it begins to grow by producing more and thus alters the economic equilibrium by catapulting itself forward into a new environment of production. This expansion induces changes not only in the organization’s infrastructure but also in competing organizations and the economy as a whole. Other firms observe these innovative developments and recreate them efficiently. Developments in organizations help boost economic potential in a society and help generate the tools necessary to fuel its capitalistic system.
One example of how development in an organization affects the modern era is through factory production. The concept of factory production amplified production as a whole and allowed for the organized division of labor to start. It centralized facets of the workforce and began to define the rules of production and trade, which also led to specialization. Henry Ford implemented an innovative design by modifying factory production and creating the assembly line, which is still used in many factories in contemporary society. These developments make it easier for a company to produce and thus incentivize firms to aggregate and utilize more efficient methods for running their companies.
Organizational theory can also help identify malicious forms of corporate practice and use them to highlight future precautionary measures. The nuclear accident at Three Mile Island helped determine ways to ensure the prevention of similar incidents. In that case, developments in organizational theory led to stronger government regulations and stronger production-related safety mandates.
3.2: Classical Perspectives
3.2.1: Classical Versus Behavioral Perspectives
The classical perspective focuses on direct inputs to efficiency, while the behavioral perspective examines indirect inputs too.
Learning Objective
Compare and contrast the central concepts that define a classical organizational-theory approach and a behavioral perspective.
Key Points
- The classical perspective of management emerged from the Industrial Revolution and focuses on the efficiency, productivity, and output of employees as well as of the organization as a whole. It generally does not focus on human or behavioral attributes or variation among employees.
- The classical perspective of management is often criticized for ignoring human desires and needs in the workplace and does not take into consideration human error in work performance. The classical perspective has strong influences on modern operations and process improvement.
- The behavioral perspective of management (sometimes called the “human relations perspective”) takes a much different approach from the classical perspective: it is generally more concerned with employee well-being and encourages management approaches that consider the employee as a motivated worker who genuinely wants to work.
Key Terms
- micromanage
-
To rely on extreme supervision and close monitoring of employee work.
- psychosocial
-
Related to one’s psychological development in, and interaction with, a social environment.
The Classical Perspective of Management
The classical perspective of management, which emerged from the Industrial Revolution, focuses on improving the efficiency, productivity, and output of employees, as well as the business as a whole. However, it generally does not focus on human or behavioral attributes or variances among employees, such as how job satisfaction improves employee efficiency.
Frederick Winslow Taylor
Scientific management theory, which was first introduced by Frederick Winslow Taylor, focused on production efficiency and productivity of employees. By managing production efficiency as a science, Taylor thought that worker productivity could be completely controlled. He used the scientific method of measurement to create guidelines for the training and management of employees. This quantitative, efficiency-based approach is representative of the classical perspective.
Max Weber
Classical Perspective of Management
The classical perspective of management focused on improving worker productivity.
Another leader in the classical perspective of management, Max Weber, created the bureaucracy theory of management, which focuses on the theme of rationalization, rules, and expertise for an organization as a whole. Weber’s theory also focuses on efficiency and clear roles in an organization, meaning that management in organizations should run as effectively as possible with as little bureaucracy as possible. One example of Weber’s management theory is the modern “flat” organization, which promotes as few managerial levels as possible between management and employees.
Henri Fayol
Henri Fayol, another leader in classical management theory, also focused on the efficiency of workers, but he looked at it from a managerial perspective—i.e., he focused on improving management efficiency rather than on improving each individual employee’s efficiency. Fayol created six functions of management, which are now taught as the following four essential functions of management: planning, organizing, leading, and controlling.
The classical perspective of management theory pulls largely from these three theorists (Taylor, Weber, and Fayol) and focuses on the efficiency of employees and on improving an organization’s productivity through quantitative (i.e., measurable, data-driven) methods. The classical perspective is often criticized for ignoring human desires and needs in the workplace and typically does not take into consideration human error in work performance. The classical perspective has strong influences on modern operations and process improvement, which uses quantitative metrics to determine how effectively a process is running.
The Behavioral Perspective of Management
The behavioral perspective of management (sometimes called the “human relations perspective”) takes a much different approach from the classical perspective. It began in the 1920s with theorists such as Elton Mayo, Abraham Maslow, and Mary Parker Follett.
The Hawthorne Studies
The Hawthorne studies were an important start to the behavioral perspective of management. These were a series of research studies conducted with the workers at the Hawthorne plant of the Western Electric Company. The Hawthorne studies found that workers were more strongly motivated by psychosocial factors than by economic or financial incentives.
Abraham Maslow
Around this same time, Abraham Maslow created his hierarchy-of-needs theory, which showed that workers were motivated through a series of lower-level to higher-level needs. This theory has been applied in the workplace to better understand “soft” factors of employee motivation, such as goal setting and team involvement, in order to better manage employees.
Douglas McGregor
Additional theories in the behavioral perspective include Douglas McGregor’s Theory X and Theory Y, which have to do with the perceptions managers have about their employees and how employees react to those perceptions. In Theory X, managers assume employees are inherently lazy and, therefore, micromanage. In Theory Y, managers are more laissez-faire and allow employees more freedom in their work. McGregor’s theory of management is an example of how behavior-management theory looks more into the “human” factors of management and encourages managers to understand how psychological characteristics can improve or hinder employee performance.
Generally, the behavioral perspective is much more concerned with employee well-being and encourages management approaches that consider the employee as a motivated worker who wants to work and wants to produce quality work. This theory therefore encourages a management approach that is less focused on micromanaging and is more focused on building relationships with employees in order to help them achieve their workplace goals and work as effectively and efficiently as possible.
3.2.2: Scientific Management: Taylor and the Gilbreths
Scientific management focuses on improving efficiency and output through scientific studies of workers’ processes.
Learning Objective
Differentiate between Taylorism and the Gilbreths’ perspective on the one hand and motion studies on scientific management on the other
Key Points
- Scientific management, or Taylorism, is a management theory that analyzes work flows to improve economic efficiency, especially labor productivity. This management theory, developed by Frederick Winslow Taylor, was dominant in manufacturing industries in the 1880s and 1890s.
- Important components of scientific management include analysis, synthesis, logic, rationality, empiricism, work ethic, efficiency, elimination of waste, and standardized best practices.
- Taylor and the Gilbreths introduced methods of measuring worker productivity, including time studies and motion studies, which are still used today in operations and management.
Key Terms
- Scientific Management
-
An early 20th-century theory that analyzed workflows in order to improve efficiency.
- Time studies
-
Created by Frederick Winslow Taylor, these break down each job into component parts and time each part to determine the most efficient method of working.
- Taylorism
-
Scientific management; an early 20th-century theory of management that analyzed workflows in order to improve efficiency.
- Motion Study
-
Created by Frank and Lillian Gilbreth, these analyzed work motions by filming workers and emphasized areas for efficiency improvement by reducing motion.
Taylorism
Scientific management, or Taylorism, is a management theory that analyzes work flows to improve economic efficiency, especially labor productivity. This management theory, developed by Frederick Winslow Taylor, was popular in the 1880s and 1890s in manufacturing industries.
While the terms “scientific management” and “Taylorism” are often treated as synonymous, an alternative view considers Taylorism to be the first form of scientific management. Taylorism is sometimes called the “classical perspective,” meaning that it is still observed for its influence but no longer practiced exclusively. Scientific management was best known from 1910 to 1920, but in the 1920s, competing management theories and methods emerged, rendering scientific management largely obsolete by the 1930s. However, many of the themes of scientific management are still seen in industrial engineering and management today.
Frederick Winslow Taylor
Frederick Winslow Taylor is considered the creator of scientific management.
Important components of scientific management include analysis, synthesis, logic, rationality, empiricism, work ethic, efficiency, elimination of waste, and standardized best practices. All of these components focus on the efficiency of the worker and not on any specific behavioral qualities or variations among workers.
Today, an example of scientific management would be determining the amount of time it takes workers to complete a specific task and determining ways to decrease this amount of time by eliminating any potential waste in the workers’ process. A significant part of Taylorism was time studies. Taylor was concerned with reducing process time and worked with factory managers on scientific time studies. At its most basic level, time studies involve breaking down each job into component parts, timing each element, and rearranging the parts into the most efficient method of working. By counting and calculating, Taylor sought to transform management into a set of calculated and written techniques.
Frank and Lillian Gilbreth
While Taylor was conducting his time studies, Frank and Lillian Gilbreth were completing their own work in motion studies to further scientific management. The Gilbreths made use of scientific insights to develop a study method based on the analysis of work motions, consisting in part of filming the details of a worker’s activities while recording the time it took to complete those activities. The films helped to create a visual record of how work was completed, and emphasized areas for improvement. Secondly, the films also served the purpose of training workers about the best way to perform their work.
This method allowed the Gilbreths to build on the best elements of the work flows and create a standardized best practice. Time and motion studies are used together to achieve rational and reasonable results and find the best practice for implementing new work methods. While Taylor’s work is often associated with that of the Gilbreths, there is often a clear philosophical divide between the two scientific-management theories. Taylor was focused on reducing process time, while the Gilbreths tried to make the overall process more efficient by reducing the motions involved. They saw their approach as more concerned with workers’ welfare than Taylorism, in which workers were less relevant than profit. This difference led to a personal rift between Taylor and the Gilbreths, which, after Taylor’s death, turned into a feud between the Gilbreths and Taylor’s followers.
Even though scientific management was considered background in the 1930s, it continues to make significant contributions to management theory today. With the advancement of statistical methods used in scientific management, quality assurance and quality control began in the 1920s and 1930s. During the 1940s and 1950s, scientific management evolved into operations management, operations research, and management cybernetics. In the 1980s, total quality management became widely popular, and in the 1990s “re-engineering” became increasingly popular. One could validly argue that Taylorism sent the groundwork for these large and influential fields we practice today.
3.2.3: Bureaucratic Organizations: Weber
Weber’s bureaucracy focused on creating rules and regulations to simplify complex procedures in societies and workplaces.
Learning Objective
Define bureaucratic organization, as theorized by the German sociologist Max Weber
Key Points
- Max Weber was a member of the classical school of management, and his writing contributed to the field’s scientific school of thought. He wrote about the importance of bureaucracy in society.
- Weberian bureaucracy is characterized by hierarchical organization, action taken on the basis of (and recorded in) written rules, and bureaucratic officials requiring expert training. Career advancement depends on technical qualifications judged by an organization, not individuals.
- Weber’s ideas on bureaucracy stemmed from society during the Industrial Revolution. As Weber understood it, society was being driven by the passage of rational ideas into culture, which, in turn, transformed society into an increasingly bureaucratic entity.
Key Terms
- bureaucratic control
-
Setting standards, measuring actual performance, and taking corrective action through administrative or hierarchical techniques such as creating policies.
- iron cage
-
Weber’s theory that a bureaucratic society would result in a situation in which it would be impossible to avoid bureaucracy and thus society would become increasingly more rational.
- bureaucracy
-
A complex means of managing life in social institutions that includes rules and regulations, patterns, and procedures that are designed to simplify the functioning of complex organizations.
Max Weber was a German sociologist, political economist, and administrative scholar who contributed to the study of bureaucracy and administrative literature during the late 1800s and early 1900s. Weber was a member of the classical school of management, and his writing contributed to the field’s scientific school of thought. Weber’s ideas on bureaucracy stemmed from society during the Industrial Revolution. As Weber understood it, particularly during the Industrial Revolution of the late nineteenth century, society was being driven by the passage of rational ideas into culture, which, in turn, transformed society into an increasingly bureaucratic entity.
Bureaucracy Defined
Bureaucracy is a complex means of managing life in social institutions that includes rules and regulations, patterns, and procedures that are designed to simplify the functioning of complex organizations. An example of bureaucracy would be the forms used to pay income taxes. Specific information and procedures are required to fill them out. Included in those forms, however, are countless rules and laws that dictate what can and cannot be included. Bureaucracy simplifies the process of paying taxes by putting the process into a formulaic structure, but simultaneously complicates the process by adding rules and regulations.
IRS tax form
An IRS tax form is an example of a complex form.
Bureaucracy in the Workplace
Weber’s theories on bureaucracy included topics such as specialization of the work force, the merit system, standardized principles, and structure and hierarchy in the workplace. In his writings, Weber focused on the idea of a bureaucracy, which differs from a traditional managerial organization because workers are judged by impersonal, rule-based activity and promotion is based on merit and performance rather than on immeasurable qualities. Weberian bureaucracy is also characterized by hierarchical organization, delineated lines of authority in a fixed area of activity, action taken on the basis of (and recorded in) written rules, and bureaucratic officials requiring expert training. In a bureaucracy, career advancement depends on technical qualifications judged by an organization, not individuals. Weber’s studies of bureaucracy contributed to classical management theory by suggesting that clear guidelines and authority need to be set in order encourage an effective workplace. Weber did not see any alternative to bureaucracy and predicted that this would lead to an “iron cage,” or a situation in which people would not be able to avoid bureaucracy, and society would thus become increasingly more rational. Weber viewed this as a bleak outcome that would affect individuals’ happiness as they would be forced to function in a highly rational society with rigid rules and norms without the possibility to change it. Of course, due to the advent of the behavior-management movement in the 1920s, this bleak situation did not come to pass.
3.2.4: Administrative Management: Fayol’s Principles
Fayol’s approach differed from scientific management in that it focused on efficiency through management training and behavioral characteristics.
Learning Objective
Outline Fayol’s effect on administrative management through the recognition of his 14 management principles
Key Points
- Fayol took a top-down approach to management by focusing on managerial practices to increase efficiency in organizations. His writing provided guidance to managers on how to accomplish their managerial duties and on the practices in which they should engage.
- The major difference between Fayol and Taylor is Fayol’s concern with the “human” and behavioral characterisitcs of employees and his focus on training management instead of on individual worker efficiency.
- Fayol stressed the importance and the practice of forecasting and planning in order to train management and improve workplace productivity.
- Fayol is also famous for putting forward 14 principles of management and the five elements that constitute managerial responsibilities.
Key Terms
- Fayolism
-
An approach that focused on managerial practices that could minimize misunderstandings and increase efficiency in organizations.
- top-down
-
Of or relating to a perspective that progresses from a single, large basic unit to multiple, smaller subunits.
Henri Fayol
Fayol was a classical management theorist, widely regarded as the father of modern operational-management theory. His ideas are a fundamental part of modern management concepts.
Comparisons with Taylorism
Fayol is often compared to Frederick Winslow Taylor, who developed scientific management. However, Fayol differed from Taylor in his focus and developed his ideas independently. Taylor was concerned with task time and improving worker efficiency, while Fayol was concerned with management and the human and behavioral factors in management.
Another major difference between Taylor and Fayol’s theories is that Taylor viewed management improvements as happening from the bottom up, or starting with the most elemental units of activity and making individual workers more efficient. In contrast, Fayol emphasized a more top-down perspective that was focused on educating management on improving processes first and then moving to workers. Fayol believed that by focusing on managerial practices organizations could minimize misunderstandings and increase efficiency.
His writings guided managers on how to accomplish their managerial duties and on the practices in which they should engage. In his book “General and Industrial Management” Fayol outlined his theory of general management, which he believed could be applied to the administration of myriad industries. As a result of his concern for workers, Fayol was considered one of the early fathers of the human relations movement.
Henri Fayol
Henri Fayol pioneered definitions of control for management science.
Fayol’s 14 Principles of Management
Fayol developed 14 principles of management in order to help managers conduct their affairs more effectively. Today, these principles are still used but are often interpreted differently. The fourteen principles are as follows:
1. division of work
2. delegation of authority
3. discipline
4. chain of commands
5. congenial workplace
6. interrelation between individual interests and common organizational goals
7. compensation package
8. centralization
9. scalar chains
10. order
11. equity
12. job guarantee
13. initiatives
14. team spirit
Fayol’s Five Elements of Management
Fayol is also famous for his five elements of management, which outline the key responsibilities of good managers:
- Planning: Managers should draft strategies and objectives to determine the stages of the plan and the technology necessary to implement it.
- Organizing: Managers must organize and provide the resources necessary to execute said plan, including raw materials, tools, capital, and human resources.
- Command (delegation): Managers must utilize authority and a thorough understanding of long-term goals to delegate tasks and make decisions for the betterment of the organization.
- Coordination: High-level managers must work to integrate all activities to facilitate organizational success. Communication is key to success in this component.
- Monitoring: Managers must compare the activities of the personnel to the plan of action; this is the evaluation component of management.
3.2.5: Flaws in the Classical Perspectives
The classical approach to management is often criticized for viewing a worker as a mere tool to improve efficiency.
Learning Objective
Assess the comprehensive arguments underlining the flaws in utilizing classical organizational theory perspectives, primarily Taylorism and the scientific method
Key Points
- Under Taylorism, the work effort of workers increased in intensity, but eventually workers became dissatisfied with the work environment and became angry, decreasing overall work ethic and productivity.
- Taylorism’s negative effects on worker morale only added fuel to the fire of existing labor-management conflict and inevitably contributed to the strengthening of labor unions.
- The criticisms of classical management theory opened doors for theorists such as George Elton Mayo and Abraham Maslow, who emphasized the human and behavioral aspects of management.
- The scientific management approach is also lacking when applied to larger, more operationally complex organizations. Managerial efficacy and the empowerment of employees are more important to overall productivity when tasks are not simple and homogeneous.
Key Term
- Taylorism
-
Scientific management; a theory of management of the early 20th century that analyzed workflows in order to improve efficiency.
The Downside of Efficiency
The classical view of management tends to focus on the efficiency and productivity of workers rather than on workers’ human needs. Generally the classical view is associated with Taylorism and scientific management, which are largely criticized for viewing the worker as more of a gear in the machine than an individual. Under Taylorism the work effort of workers increased in intensity, but eventually workers became dissatisfied with the work environment and became angry, which affected their overall work ethic. This dissatisfaction undoes the value captured via increased efficiency.
Taylorism’s negative effects on worker morale only added fuel to the fire of existing labor-management conflict, which frequently raged out of control between the mid-19th and mid-20th centuries (when Taylorism was most influential), and thus it inevitably contributed to the strengthening of labor unions. That outcome neutralized most or all of the benefit of any productivity gains that Taylorism had achieved. The net benefit to owners and management ended up being small or negative. It would take new efforts, borrowing some ideas from Taylorism but mixing them with others, to produce more successful formulas.
Factory workers
Taylorism and classical management styles negatively affected the morale of workers, which created a negative relationship between workers and managers.
Scientific management also led to other pressures tending toward worker unhappiness. Offshoring and automation are two such pressures that have led to the erosion of employment. Both were made possible by the deskilling of jobs, which arose because of the knowledge transfer that scientific management achieved, whereby knowledge was transferred to cheaper workers, as well as from workers into tools.
The Human Factor
To summarize, the underlying weakness of the classical view of management is the omission of the fact that employees are people first and resources second. This criticism opened doors for theorists such as George Elton Mayo and Abraham Maslow, who emphasized the human and behavioral aspects of management. After all, what value is wealth if the individual loses the sense of self-worth and happiness required to enjoy it? The behavioral approach to management took an entirely different approach and focused on managing morale, leadership, and other behavioral factors to encourage productivity rather than solely managing the time and efficiency of workers.
Corporate Growth
Another disadvantage of the classical perspective arises from the growing size and complexity of the modern organization. Using metrics to examine specific employee behavior may be feasible in a smaller organization pursuing homoegeneous tasks, but it becomes more difficult when trying to accomplish this at an organization that has hundreds of employees pursuing various complex functions. In this situation, it may be more beneficial to use tactics that are less focused on the individual employee and more on improving overall productivity. This will involve less micromanaging and more trusting employees to do the right thing while at the workplace. The onus of enabling efficiency, therefore, shifts from workers to managers.
3.3: Behavioral Perspectives
3.3.1: The Behavioral-Science Approach
Behavioral science uses research and the scientific method to determine and understand behavior in the workplace.
Learning Objective
Define the behavioral approaches which maximize potential within a company or organization
Key Points
- Behavioral science draws from a number of different fields and theories, primarily those of psychology, social neuroscience, and cognitive science.
- One application of the behavioral-science approach can be seen in a field called organizational development. Organizational development is an ongoing, systematic process of implementing effective organizational change.
- Behavioral sciences include relational sciences, which deal with relationships, interaction, communication networks, associations, and relational strategies.
- Combined, the behavioral science approach is broadly about understanding individual and group behavioral dynamics to initiate meaningful organizational development.
Key Term
- organizational development
-
An ongoing, systematic process of implementing effective organizational change using theories from behavioral sciences.
Behavioral science draws from a number of different fields and theories, primarily those of psychology, social neuroscience, and cognitive science. Behavioral science uses research and the scientific method to determine and understand behavior in the workplace. Many of the theories in the behavioral perspective are included in the behavioral-science approach to management. For example, the Hawthorne studies used the scientific method and are considered to be a part of the behavioral-science approach.
Behavioral science within the business management environment is a specific application of this field, and employs a number of specific types of behavioral observations. This includes concepts such as information processing, relationships and motivation, and organizational development.
Information Processing
Information processing involves determining how people process stimuli in their environment. This field deals with the processing of stimuli from the social environment by cognitive entities in order to engage in decision making, social judgment, and social perception. The field is particularly concerned with information processing as it relates to individual functioning and the survival of an organism in a social environment.
Relationships
Behavioral sciences also include relational sciences that deal with relationships, interaction, communication networks, associations, and relational strategies or dynamics between organisms or cognitive entities in a social system. The emphasis on using quantitative data and qualitative research methods to determine how people process information and understand social relationships is important to helping managers better understand the proven methods for increasing employee motivation and employee productivity. The behavioral-science approach and the myriad of fields it encompasses is the most common study of management science today.
Organizational Development
The primary application of the behavioral-science approach can be seen in the field of organizational development. Organizational development is an ongoing, systematic process of implementing effective organizational change. Organizational development is considered both a field of applied behavioral science that focuses on understanding and managing organizational change as well as a field of scientific study and inquiry. It uses components of behavioral sciences and studies in the fields of sociology, psychology, and theories of motivation, learning, and personality to implement effective organizational change and aid in the development of employees.
Organization triangle
This diagram illustrates the idea that structure, process, and the people involved all play a role in an organization’s culture.
Combined, the behavioral-science approach is broadly about understanding individual and group behavioral dynamics to initiate meaningful organizational development. The study of human behavior in the context of organizational change is an integral part of empowering organizations to grow, adapt, and learn to capture competitive advantage.
3.3.2: Behaviorism: Follett, Munsterberg, and Mayo
Behaviorism initiated a focus on the psychological and human factors influencing workers.
Learning Objective
Compare and contrast the three most famous pioneers and founders of the behavioral perspective in organizational theory
Key Points
- Mary Parker Follett, Hugo Munsterberg, and Elton Mayo are all considered pioneers and founders of the behaviorism movement in management theory. They wrote about the importance of considering behavioral aspects of workers in addition to the efficiency of workers.
- Mary Parker Follett (September 3, 1868 – December 18, 1933) was an American social worker, management consultant, and pioneer in the fields of organizational theory and organizational behavior.
- Hugo Munsterberg was one of the pioneers of applied psychology, extending his research and theories to industrial/organizational (I/O), legal, medical, clinical, educational, and business settings.
- Elton Mayo is known as the founder of the human relations movement. His research includes the Hawthorne studies and his book The Human Problems of an Industrialized Civilization.
Key Term
- Industrial Psychology
-
A field focusing on topics such as hiring workers with personalities and mental abilities best suited to certain types of vocations.
Mary Parker Follett, Hugo Munsterberg, and Elton Mayo are all considered pioneers and founders of the industrial/organizational psychology and behaviorism movements in management theory. These three individuals wrote about the importance of considering behavioral aspects of workers in addition to the efficiency of workers. This was, in many ways, a continuation of the scientific method, with the critical difference of incorporating the human factors involved in effective management.
Follett
Mary Parker Follett (September 3, 1868 – December 18, 1933) was an American social worker, management consultant, and pioneer in the fields of organizational theory and organizational behavior. She criticized the overmanagement of employees, a process now known as micromanaging. Follett was known for the concept of reciprocal relationships and the idea that authority is inferior to integrative collaboration. Managers should enable, not dictate.
She also distinguished herself in the field of management by being sought out by President Theodore Roosevelt as his personal consultant on managing not-for-profit, non-governmental, and voluntary organizations. In her capacity as a management theorist, Mary Parker Follett pioneered the understanding of lateral processes within hierarchical organizations. Her contributions aided the beginning of the behaviorism movement of management by presenting the worker as more than just a machine.
Mary Parker Follett
Mary Parker Follett defined management as “the art of getting things done through people.”
Munsterberg
Hugo Munsterberg (June 1, 1863 – December 19, 1916) was a German-American psychologist. He was one of the pioneers of applied psychology, extending his research and theories to industrial/organizational (I/O), legal, medical, clinical, educational, and business settings. Munsterberg’s writings are considered the genesis of the field of industrial psychology.
Industrial psychology, according to Munsterberg, focuses on topics such as hiring workers with personalities and mental abilities best suited to certain types of vocations, as well as on ways to increase motivation, performance, and retention. Munsterberg suggests that psychology could be used in many different industrial applications, including management, vocational decisions, advertising, job performance, and employee motivation. Many of Munsterberg’s ideas, especially the idea of matching an individual’s personality with the correct job set and skills, are common in the use of industrial/organizational psychology today.
Hugo Munsterberg
Munsterberg is considered the father of industrial/organizational psychology.
Mayo
George Elton Mayo (December 26, 1880 – September 7, 1949) was an Australian psychologist, sociologist, and organization theorist. Mayo is known as the founder of the human relations movement. His research includes the Hawthorne studies and his book The Human Problems of an Industrialized Civilization (1933).
The research he conducted in the Hawthorne studies of the 1930s showed the importance of groups in affecting the behavior of individuals at work. Mayo’s employees Roethlisberger and Dickson conducted the practical experiments. This enabled him to make certain deductions about how managers should behave. He concluded that people’s work performance is dependent on both social issues and job content. He suggested a tension between workers’ “logic of sentiment” and managers’ “logic of cost and efficiency” that could lead to conflict within organizations. Mayo’s studies contributed to the behaviorism movement in management as managers became more aware of the “soft” skills that are important to successful management.
Follett, Munsterberg, and Mayo each introduced important components and ideas into the behaviorism perspective of management. They all believed that successful management comes from understanding how to best treat and motivate employees in order to help them succeed in their jobs and become as efficient as possible.
3.3.3: The Human Side: Hawthorne
The Hawthorne studies found that workers were more responsive to group involvement and managerial attention than to financial incentives.
Learning Objective
Evaluate Mayo and Roethlisberger’s Hawthorne study relative to the behavioral perspective in organizational theories
Key Points
- The Hawthorne studies, which were conducted by Elton Mayo and Fritz Roethlisberger in the 1920s with the workers at the Hawthorne plant of the Western Electric Company, were part of an emphasis on socio-psychological aspects of human behavior in organizations.
- Hawthorne researchers hypothesized that choosing one’s own coworkers, working as a group, being treated as special (as evidenced by working in a separate room), and having a sympathetic supervisor were reasons for increases in worker productivity.
- The Hawthorne studies found that monetary incentives and good working conditions are generally less important in improving employee productivity than meeting employees’ need and desire to belong to a group and be included in decision making and work.
Key Term
- Hawthorne studies
-
A series of investigations conducted in the 1920s emphasizing the socio-psychological aspects of human behavior in organizations.
The Hawthorne studies were conducted with the workers at the Hawthorne plant of the Western Electric Company by Elton Mayo and Fritz Roethlisberger in the 1920s. The Hawthorne studies were part of a refocus on managerial strategy incorporating the socio-psychological aspects of human behavior in organizations.
Western Electric Company, the location of the Hawthorne studies
This is where the studies where conducted—a factory outside of Chicago.
The studies suggested that employees have social and psychological needs—along with economic and financial needs—which must be met in order to be motivated to complete their assigned tasks. The human relations movement is concerned with morale, leadership, and factors that aid in the cooperation of workers.
This theory of management was a byproduct of the issues that arose from the classical, scientific perspectives on management (i.e., Taylorism). The simplest explanation of the hypothesis being investigated is quite intuitive. Employees (i.e. human resources) are not merely motivated by financial gain, and productivity is not simply a byproduct of incentives and optimized working spaces. People are motivated by inclusion, constructive feedback, interest, autonomy, and a wide variety of other ‘soft’ factors (i.e. factors aside from money and other tangible resources).
Results of the Hawthorne Studies
The studies originally looked into whether workers were more responsive and worked more efficiently under certain environmental conditions, such as improved lighting. The results were surprising, as Mayo and Roethlisberger found that workers were more responsive to social factors—such as the people they worked with on a team and the amount of interest their manager had in their work—than the factors (lighting, etc.) the researchers had gone in to inspect.
The Hawthorne studies helped conclude that workers were highly responsive to additional attention from their managers and the feeling that their managers actually cared about, and were interested in, their work. The studies also concluded that although financial motives are important, social factors are equally important in defining the worker productivity.
There were a number of other experiments conducted in the Hawthorne studies, including one in which two women were chosen as test subjects and were then asked to choose four other workers to join the test group. Together, the women worked assembling telephone relays in a separate room over the course of five years (1927–1932), and their output was measured.
The measuring began in secret. It started two weeks before moving the women to an experiment room and continued throughout the study. In the experiment room, they had a supervisor who discussed changes with them and, at times, used their suggestions. The researchers then spent five years measuring how different variables impacted both the group’s and the individuals’ productivity. Some of the variables included giving two five-minute breaks (after a discussion with the group on the best length of time), and then changing to two 10-minute breaks (not the preference of the group).
Intangible Motivators
Changing a variable usually increased productivity, even if the variable was just a change back to the original condition. Researchers concluded that the employees worked harder because they thought they were being monitored individually. Researchers hypothesized that choosing one’s own coworkers, working as a group, being treated as special (as evidenced by working in a separate room), and having a sympathetic supervisor were the real reasons for the productivity increase.
The Hawthorne studies showed that people’s work performance is dependent on social issues and job satisfaction, and that monetary incentives and good working conditions are generally less important in improving employee productivity than meeting individuals’ need and desire to belong to a group and be included in decision making and work.
3.3.4: Managerial Assumption: McGregor
McGregor introduced Theories X and Y, which summarize and compare the classical management and behavioral management perspectives.
Learning Objective
Explain Douglas McGregor’s Theory X and Theory Y approach, merging classical and behavioral organizational theories
Key Points
- Douglas McGregor was a management professor at the MIT Sloan School of Management. He wrote a book in 1960 called The Human Side of Management, which suggested motivating employees through authoritative direction and employee self-control, respectively called Theory X and Theory Y.
- Theory X, based more on classical management theory, assumes that workers need a high amount of supervision because people are inherently lazy. It assumes that managers need to motivate through coercion and punishment.
- Theory Y assumes that employees are ambitious, self-motivated, exercise self-control, and generally enjoy mental and physical work duties. Theory Y is in line with behavioral management theories.
- Theories X and Y relate to Maslow’s hierarchy of needs in that they see human behavior and motivation as the main priority in maximizing output in the workplace.
Key Terms
- Theory Y
-
Postulates that employees are capable of being ambitious and self-motivated under suitable conditions; contrasted with Theory X.
- Theory X
-
Suggests that employees are inherently lazy and irresponsible and will tend to avoid work unless closely supervised and given incentives; contrasted with Theory Y.
Douglas McGregor was a management professor at the MIT Sloan School of Management. He wrote a book in 1960 called The Human Side of Management, which suggested motivating employees through authoritative direction and employee self-control. McGregor’s book was voted the fourth most influential management book of the 20th century in a poll of the Fellows of the Academy of Management.
McGregor’s main theory is comprised of Theory X and Theory Y. Theory X, based more on classical management theory, assumes that workers need a high amount of supervision because people are inherently lazy. Theory Y assumes that employees are ambitious, self-motivated, exercise self-control, and generally enjoy mental and physical work duties. Theory Y is in line with behavioral management theories. Often, managers’ actions toward their employees are affected by the theory to which they subscribe.
Theory X
In Theory X, managers tend to micro-manage and closely supervise employees. Complex hierarchical structures are needed in order to offer a narrow span of control at every level of the organization. Employees show little ambition without an incentive program and avoid responsibility whenever possible. Managers in Theory X rely more heavily on punishment, fear, and coercion as motivational techniques and less on reward. Managers and employees in this theory are generally mistrusted and they do not have rewarding relationships. Usually these managers believe that the sole purpose of the employee’s interest in the job is money.
Theory Y
Theory Y managers are generally the opposite. They believe that given the proper conditions, employees will learn to seek out and accept responsibility and to exercise self-direction in accomplishing objectives, that most people will want to do well at work, and that the satisfaction of doing a good job will be a strong motivation. Many people interpret Theory Y as a positive set of beliefs about workers.
McGregor thinks that Theory Y managers are more likely than Theory X managers to develop the climate of trust with employees that is required for human-resource development. This type of human-resource development is much more similar to the behavioral management theories of Maslow’s self-actualization and the Hawthorne studies than any of the classical theories of management.
Theory X or Theory Y?
Theories X and Y relate to Maslow’s hierarchy of needs in that they see human behavior and motivation as the main priority in maximizing output in the workplace. Both McGregor and Maslow would say that in order to help employees achieve maximum efficiency and happiness with their work, a Theory Y manager would need to promote morality, creativity, problem solving, and a lack of prejudice. McGregor was a lifetime proponent of Theory Y.
Modern organizations in developed countries generally side with McGregor, in that they believe Theory Y is superior in getting positive results from employees (and subsequently job satisfaction for employees). However, both theories are still prominent in the workplace, where many managers treat their employees as if they are lazy and likely to perform poorly without stringent rules and supervision. In management, just as everywhere else, it is difficult to effect social change in the face of human nature, even when the benefits are established.
3.3.5: Productivity: Argyris
Argyris’s theory of single- and double-loop learning has been applied to management theory to suggest the best ways for employees to learn.
Learning Objective
Identify Chris Argyris’s key contributions to organizational theory through single-loop and double-loop learning
Key Points
- Argyris studied how humans design and decide on their actions under difficult or stressful situations. He believed that human actions are controlled by environmental variables, which determine the key differences between single-loop learning and double-loop learning.
- In single-loop learning, individuals, groups, or organizations modify their actions according to the difference between expected and obtained outcomes.
- In double-loop learning, individuals, groups, or organizations question the values, assumptions, and policies that led to the actions in the first place.
- Argyris’s theory of single- and double-loop learning has been applied to management theory in order to suggest the best way for employees to learn and think about new goals and strategies for an organization.
Key Terms
- single-loop learning
-
A theory that says individuals, groups, or organizations modify their actions according to the difference between expected and obtained outcomes.
- learning organization
-
A company that facilitates the learning of its members and continuously transforms itself.
- double-loop learning
-
A theory in which an organization or individual questions the values, assumptions, and policies that led to a given situation.
Chris Argyris is an American business theorist, a professor emeritus at Harvard Business School, and a thought leader at Monitor Group. He is best known for his work on learning theories in the area of learning organizations.
Argyris conducted a series of research studies in action science, which studies how humans design and decide on their actions under difficult or stressful situations. Argyris believed that human actions are controlled by environmental variables, which determine the key differences between single-loop and double-loop learning.
Single-Loop Learning
In single-loop learning, entities (such as individuals, groups, or organizations) modify their actions according to the difference between expected and obtained outcomes. This essentially means that learning is through experience and direct reflection on outcomes, where the ends are justifying the means and dictating the fulcrum of the discussion and learning outcomes.
In many ways, this is a more reactionary approach. Individuals are tasked with identifying successes and failures, pursuing formulas for the former and minimizing the latter. While this type of learning, and this broader type of behavior, is extremely common in the real world, it is not the ideal method to learn and adapt from a broader organizational level. It tends to be simple and short-term, which is not always conducive to sustainability.
Double-Loop Learning
In double-loop learning, the entities question the values, assumptions, and policies that led to the actions in the first place; if they are able to view and modify those values, then second-order or double-loop learning has taken place. This is a more integrative, process-oriented, and collaborative approach. It is also much more complex, difficult, and sensitive, as the core values and strategies in place must be analyzed, questioned, and defended (or discarded).
The simple truth is that people fear change, actively avoid conflict, and generally preserve the status quo. Double-loop learning requires the bravery to challenge what is established organizationally, identify broader systemic issues, and fix problems at the source.
Single- and double-loop learning
Argyris wrote about the theories of single- and double-loop learning, which determine how people make decisions in difficult situations.
For example, a company that is facing a problem with its management strategy may decide to focus on how to improve or implement the strategy in different ways. In this situation, the company uses single-loop learning because management is focused on making changes without reconsidering the fundamental standard or strategy itself. However, if the company were to entirely reconsider the problematic strategy and start from scratch, this would constitute double-loop learning. Double-loop learning may lead to a change in the original strategy or goals that the company had in the first place.
Argyris’s theory of single- and double-loop learning has been applied to management theory in order to suggest the best way for employees to learn and think about new goals and strategies for an organization.
3.4: Modern Thinking
3.4.1: Quantitative and Analytical Management Tools
Quantitative tools are used by management to determine where a company is doing well or struggling compared to the industry and competitors.
Learning Objective
Give examples of quantitative and analytical management tools that assist organizations in better understanding workflow, financials and employee efficiency
Key Points
- Many quantitative and analytic tools are available for managers to better understand workflow processes, financial management, and employee efficiency.
- A decision tree is a decision support tool that uses a tree-like graph or model of decisions and their possible consequences, including chance event outcomes, resource costs, and utility.
- Simulation is the imitation of a real-world process or system over time.
- Trend charts are often used in management to display data over time to explore any potential trends, either positive or negative, that require additional attention by management. It is important to use statistical confidence intervals when utilizing this type of forecast.
- Benchmarking allows a manager to see how different aspects of a business are performing compared to national, regional, and industry standards. It also allows management to explore how the company is performing compared to its competitors.
- Financial projections and net-present-value (NPV) analyses are also commonplace when deciding upon new operations quantitatively—where the company predicts profitability in today’s dollars.
Key Terms
- benchmarking
-
A technique that allows a manager to compare metrics, such as quality, time, and cost, across an industry and against competitors.
- decision tree
-
A visualization of a complex decision-making situation in which the possible decisions and their likely outcomes are organized in the form of a graph that resembles a tree.
Managers can use many different quantitative and analytic tools to better understand workflow processes, financial management, and employee efficiency. These tools, such as decision tress, simulation, trend charts, benchmarking, and financial projections, help managers improve their decision-making abilities, determine how the business is performing relative to competitors, and discover opportunities for improvement. Using these tools to create quantitative and measurable metrics helps an organization see exactly where it is performing well and where it is performing poorly.
Types of Quantitative Tools
Decision Tree
A decision tree is a branching graph or model of decisions and their possible consequences, including chance event outcomes, resource costs, and utility. Decision trees are commonly used in operations research (specifically in decision analysis) to help identify a strategy most likely to reach a specified goal. They can also be used to map out a thought process or the possible consequences of a decision. A manager may use this tool when deciding between different projects or investments.
Decision tree
Decision trees are used to determine the consequences and potential outcomes of an investment or a project. This decision tree shows the money lost or gained at each step along multiple potential paths of action. The path that results in the highest financial gain by the end is generally the one that should be chosen.
Simulation
Simulation is the imitation of a real-world process or system over time. The act of simulating something first requires that a model be developed; this model represents the key characteristics or behaviors of the selected physical or abstract system or process. A simulation could be used to study investment decisions by actively playing out what may happen in certain situations.
Trend Chart
Trend charts are often used to display data over time to explore any potential trends (either positive or negative) that require additional attention by management. Many metrics are analyzed using trend charts, including employee productivity, financial metrics, operational efficiency, and comparisons between competitors. Trends are only ever in the past, however, and utilizing confidence intervals when projected with trends is critical to their effectiveness.
Trend chart
A trend chart shows changes in spending, prices, efficiency, or any other metric that management is interested in analyzing over time. This chart of U.S. defense spending from 2000–2011 shows that overall spending increased from $300 billion to $700 billion due to increases in both the Department of Defense (DOD) budget and overseas (war-related) spending.
Benchmarking
Benchmarking allows a manager to see how different aspects of a business (usually quality, time, and cost) are performing compared to national, regional, and industry standards. It also allows a manager to explore how the company is performing compared to competitors. In the process of benchmarking, management identifies the best firms in the industry, or in another industry where similar processes exist, and compares the results and processes of the target firms to management’s own results and processes. In this way, management learns how well the targets perform and, more importantly, the business processes that explain why these firms are successful.
Financial Projections
Managers can also use financial analysis as a management tool. When investing in a project or an acquisition of any kind, a manager will always want to know how quickly the investment will bring in a profit. For example, when a company invests in a new building, management will calculate how long it will take for the building to generate enough income to cover the upfront cost of the building and therefore start bringing in profits. This calculation is sometimes called a payback period. Payback period intuitively measures how long something takes to pay for itself. All else being equal, shorter payback periods are preferable to longer payback periods. This is often referred to as an NPV, or a net present value, where the company calculates the future value of the project in today’s dollars. It is critical to remember that a dollar today and a dollar tomorrow have a different value.
3.4.2: Operations-Management Tools
Six Sigma and Lean are two popular operations-management theories that help managers improve the efficiency of their production processes.
Learning Objective
Give examples of operations management tools that assist the organization in overseeing, designing and controlling production processes
Key Points
- The main tools of operations management come from two popular theories of organizing business: Six Sigma and Lean.
- Six Sigma relies on particular quality-management methods, such as statistical analytics, and creates a special infrastructure of employees within an organization (e.g., “Black Belts,” “Green Belts”) who are experts in these methods.
- Lean is a production theory that considers the expenditure of resources for any goal other than the creation of value for customers wasteful, and thus a good target for elimination.
- By leveraging operational paradigms constructed to deliberately capture value through maximizing efficiency, managers can lower costs for companies and prices for consumers.
Key Terms
- Lean
-
Lean is a production strategy focused on eliminating all unnecessary waste in production.
- Six Sigma
-
A process-improvement method that focuses on statistical methods to reduce the number of defects in a process.
Operations management is a type of management that oversees, designs, and controls a company’s production processes. This type of management is also tasked with redesigning business operations in the production of goods and/or services, if that is necessary. Operations managers are responsible for ensuring that business operations are efficient, both in terms of conserving resources and in terms of meeting customer requirements. They manage the process that converts inputs (materials, labor, and energy) into outputs (goods and services). In order to accomplish this task, managers utilize various tools, two of the most influential being Six Sigma and Lean.
Six Sigma
Six Sigma is a strategy designed to improve the quality of process outputs. The Six Sigma program accomplishes this by identifying and removing the causes of defects (errors) and by minimizing the variability present in manufacturing and business processes.
This strategy relies on particular quality-management methods, such as statistical analytics, and creates a special infrastructure of employees within an organization (e.g., “Black Belts,” “Green Belts”) who are experts in these methods. Each Six Sigma project in an organization follows a defined sequence of steps and has quantified financial targets such as reducing costs or increasing profits. Among the tools used in Six Sigma are process mapping, trending charts, calculations of potential defects, ratios, and statistics. Best practices for work within a team are also used.
Six Sigma
Six Sigma is a tool used by many managers when determining how to reduce the number of defects created by their processes.
Lean
Lean is similar to Six Sigma, but is slightly less focused on defect rate and more focused on eliminating the amount of waste and excessive steps in an operation. Lean is a production theory that considers the expenditure of resources for any goal other than the creation of value for the customer wasteful, and thus a target for elimination. Beginning from the perspective of the consumer of a product or service, “value” is defined as any action or process that a customer would be willing to pay for. Lean employs tools to evaluate production workflow and determine where there is waste. Examples of this waste would be excess motion, inventory, and overproduction.
Examples of Six Sigma and Lean
In many ways, Lean manufacturing and Six Sigma is reminiscent of Henry Ford and systematic process improvements. The overarching theme is simply to minimize time expenditures on behalf of employees and maximize output with the same amount of input. Toyota (and the concept of kaizen) is a fantastic example of Lean manufacturing and what is called just-in-time (JIT) inventory management. Toyota became famous in manufacturing for timing every specific element of the manufacturing process to ensure that minimal warehousing was required, delivering each new add-on component at precisely the time it would be needed and in exactly the location it would be installed. This created a process flow that minimized space usage (lowering costs), optimized timing, and created widespread consistency of operational flow.
Lean and Six Sigma are the two main tools for managers in operations management. Both of these operational strategies offer managers an extensive toolbox with which to analyze how efficiently their production is running. These tools analyze workflow, evaluate the presence and cause of waste, and decrease defects in products or services, all of which make a company more efficient.
3.4.3: The Systems Viewpoint
Systems thinking is an approach to problem solving that considers the overall system instead of focusing on specific parts of a system.
Learning Objective
Define the systems view as it applies to business strategies and overall organizational control
Key Points
- Systems thinking is an approach to problem solving that views problems as part of an overall system. This is opposed to problem-solving strategies that only focus on specific parts or outcomes of a problem.
- Systems thinking approaches problems as a set of habits or practices within a framework. It is based on the belief that the component parts of a system are best understood in the context of their relationships with each other rather than in isolation.
- Systems thinking is opposed to fragmented thinking, which involves thinking about specific problems without considering the context, environment, and effects of similar problems.
Key Term
- fragmented thinking
-
Thinking about problems as isolated events instead of considering problems as resulting from a system as a whole.
Systems thinking is the process of understanding how people and situations influence one another within a closed system. In nature, air, water, movement, plants, and animals interact with one another and survive or perish in relationship with each other. In business, management also involves systems thinking.
Organizational Systems
Organizational systems consist of people, structures, and processes working together to make an organization healthy or unhealthy. The end product of effective systems management is synergy, in which the end product has more value than the individual sum of its parts. Systems generally contain the following aspects:
- Inputs (e.g., people, time, energy, information)
- Processes or reactions (e.g., tools, software, analyses)
- Outputs (e.g., products, reports, plans)
- Feedback mechanisms (e.g., information, reports)
Problem Solving
When problem-solving, advocates of systems thinking must consider specific problems within an overall system rather than reacting to specific issues or specific outcomes. In systems thinking, problems are conceptualized as a set of habits or practices that exist within a framework. Practitioners of systems thinking believe that the component parts of a system can best be understood, and best analyzed, in the context of their relationships with other parts of a system .
Systems thinking
Focus on the interaction of isolated problems with one another: just as separate gears work with each other, problems in one area can effect other areas in a system as well.
This method is opposed to a reductive framework that attempts to focus closely on a single problem. In this type of fragmented thinking, problems are addressed without considering the context, environment, or the impact of similar problems. Fragmented thinking often results in solutions that cannot be applied to multiple situations and are unlikely to remain relevant over time. This means management will be putting out more fires because the root problem is unresolved.
Here is an example of systems thinking: say that a single department, Human Resources, is beset with problems in workflow and efficiency. A manager who uses systems thinking to fix this problem looks at Human Resources in the context of all of the workflow in the company to see whether the “Human Resources problem” could actually be a company-wide issue. Only a systems-thinking approach can lead to this realization because systems thinking provides insight into how problems that manifest in a specific location can spring from distant, seemingly unrelated locations. This helps managers get an accurate understanding of the problem and facilitates a superior response to the problem.
Example
Here is an example of systems thinking: say that a single department, Human Resources, is beset with problems in workflow and efficiency. A manager who uses systems thinking to fix this problem looks at Human Resources in the context of all of the workflow in the company to see whether the “Human Resources problem” could actually be a company-wide issue. Only a systems-thinking approach can lead to this realization because systems thinking provides insight into how problems that manifest in a specific location can spring from distant, seemingly unrelated locations. This helps managers get an accurate understanding of the problem and facilitates a superior response to the problem.
3.4.4: The Contingency Viewpoint
The contingency viewpoint of management proposes that there is no standard for management; instead, management depends on the situation.
Learning Objective
Recognize the potential flexibility and value that can be captured through considering contingencies and alternatives from a managerial perspective
Key Points
- The contingency viewpoint is a more recent development in organizational theory that attempts to integrate a variety of management approaches, proposing that there is no one best way to organize a corporation or lead a company.
- Debating which one of the previous approaches to management is the “best” approach is irrelevant in contingency theory, since the heart of the contingency approach is that there is no “one best way” for managing and leading an organization.
- The contingency viewpoint focuses on management’s ability to achieve alignments and good fits between employees and circumstances by considering multiple solutions to determine the best one for each particular problem.
- The focal point, and modern relevance, of this perspective is the concept of adaptability. Technology and globalization evolve the business environment so rapidly that adaptable strategies are more appropriate than static ones, making contingencies key to success.
Key Term
- Contingency Viewpoint
-
A theory of management that proposes that there is no standard for management practice, instead it should depend on the situation.
The contingency viewpoint is a more recent development of organizational theory that attempts to integrate a variety of management approaches by proposing that there is no one best way to organize a corporation or lead a company. Instead, the optimal course of action is contingent or dependent upon the specific internal and external situation management may find itself in.
Perspective on Previous Theories
The contingency approach claims that past theories, such as Max Weber’s bureaucracy theory of management and Taylor’s scientific management, are no longer practiced because they fail to recognize that management style and organizational structure are influenced by various aspects of the environment, known as contingency factors. Debating which one of the previous approaches to management is the “best” approach is irrelevant in contingency theory, since the heart of the contingency approach is that there is no “one best way” for managing and leading an organization.
Possibilities
The basic premise behind contingency theory is that there are limitless possibilities that companies must be prepared to adapt to strategically.
An Outline of Contingency Theory
By its nature, contingency theory avoids static rules. There are, however, common contingencies that businesses must react to, including technology, competition, governments, unions, consumer interest groups, new markets and consumers, and economic factors. Fred Fiedler takes this a step further to identify three leadership styles and empirical situation measurements to assess the degree of favorability a given contingency offers:
- The leader-member relationship, which is the most important variable in determining the situation’s favorableness.
- The degree of task structure, which is the second most important input into the favorableness of the situation.
- The leader’s position power obtained through formal authority: this is the third most important dimension of the situation.
In other words, leadership needs to ensure that it is able to assess a situation, determine the task structure, and obtain a position of formal authority in order to be able to adequately manage a contingency situation.
An example of the contingency viewpoint in action is a manager facing a situation with an employee who regularly shows up late to work. A manager could have a written protocol for this situation in which there is only one option: give the employee notice. Under the contingency viewpoint, however, the manager may decide to better understand the situation by talking to the employee about why s/he is late to work and then deciding on the most effective and appropriate course of action. The value in this lies in the information the manager acquires about the employee: maybe there are extenuating circumstances that can be relatively easy to work around. In this case, the contingency approach allows the employee to keep her/his job and saves the manager from going through the time and trouble to dismiss one employee and hire another.
A leader’s ability to manage under the contingency viewpoint depends largely on the nature of the environment and how the organization relates to the environment. Therefore, the organizational structure is a major component of the approach that management may take in resolving problems under contingency theory.
3.4.5: Quality Control and Assurance
Quality assurance and quality control are intended to ensure that products are created with the fewest number of defects possible.
Learning Objective
Discuss quality control (QC) and quality assurance (QA) as integral components of an effective organizational management structure
Key Points
- Quality assurance (QA) refers to planned and systematic activities implemented in a quality system to fulfill the quality requirements for a product or service.
- Quality control (QC) is a process by which products are tested to uncover defects and the results are reported to management, which makes the decision to allow or deny product release.
- Quality control and quality assurance work together to make sure that a company’s products have the lowest possible error rate.
- As global markets expand, and as outsourcing becomes common practice, QC and QA are increasingly important strategic initiatives. When companies do not control their manufacturing process, they must invest in controlling the quality of their vendors.
Key Term
- Failure testing
-
Failure testing involves determining the point of stress level in which a product will fail.
Quality assurance and quality control are two methods of planning and implementing structured methods in a work process to ensure that products are created with the highest possible quality and with the smallest number of defects and problems.
Quality Assurance
Quality assurance (QA) refers to the planned and systematic activities implemented in a quality system to fulfill the quality requirements for a product or service It is a systematic measurement compared to a set standard, with process monitoring used to prevent errors. This can be contrasted with quality control, which is focused on process outputs. Two key principles of QA are:
- Fit for purpose: The product should be suitable for its intended purpose.
- Right the first time: Mistakes should be eliminated.
QA includes managing the quality of raw materials, assemblies, products, components, services related to production, management processes, production processes, and inspection processes. The critical takeaway here is that QA equates to process observations.
Quality assurance is measured through failure testing and statistical control. Failure testing determines the stress levels under which a product will fail by exposing it to unanticipated stresses, like intense vibration, temperature, and humidity. Stress testing uncovers problems that can be fixed with simple changes to improve the product. Statistical controls ensure that an organization is producing quality products at the lowest possible defect rate. Many organizations use Six Sigma levels of quality, so the likelihood of an unexpected failure is less than four in one million.
Assembly line and quality control
Many processes, such as assembly lines, help ensure quality assurance and control by streamlining the production process.
Quality Control
Quality control (QC) is the process of testing finished products to uncover defects and reporting the results to management, which makes the decision to allow or deny product release. It differs from quality assurance, which attempts to improve and stabilize a product, and eliminate any flaws, during production.
Controls also include product inspection: every product is examined visually before the product is sold into the external market. Inspectors are provided with lists and descriptions of unacceptable product defects, such as cracks or surface blemishes. Efficient quality control depends on top-notch visual examination of products, employee training, and organizational culture.
Quality control and quality assurance work together to make sure that companies produce products that have the lowest possible error rate, so there will be fewer customer complaints and no need to rework the product in the future.
Outsourcing
Due to the high degree of vendor dependency, many corporations find their manufacturing processes are conducted outside of their organization. This can lead to difficulties in maintaining process quality. In this situation, a corporation needs to invest in QC professionals to maintain organizational standards. The primary takeaway here is that QC is not simply an internal concern for many businesses, but also an external vendor selection criteria.
3.4.6: Evidence-Based Management
Evidence-based management emphasizes the importance of managers using the scientific method to make decisions.
Learning Objective
Discuss the modern organizational theory perspective on utilizing evidence-based strategies, as is common in many science disciplines, to make business decisions
Key Points
- Evidence-based management is rooted in evidence-based medicine, a movement to apply the scientific method to medical practice. Evidence-based management is an emerging movement to explicitly use current best practices in managerial decision-making.
- Evidence-based management bases managerial decisions and organizational practices on the best available scientific evidence.
- While there is a rich body of academic literature pertaining to tried-and-true managerial strategies, real-world application of such resources is relatively rare.
- Promoting evidence-based management is challenging because it can conflict with traditional definitions and expectations of management.
- Little shared terminology exists between managers of different companies, which makes it difficult for managers to hold discussions on evidence-based practices. The adoption of evidence-based practices is likely to be organization-specific instead of happening across organizations.
Key Term
- terminology
-
The set of terms actually used in any business, art, science, or the like; nomenclature; technical terms; such as, the terminology of chemistry.
Evidence-based management (EBMgt or EBM) is an emerging movement that explicitly uses current best practices in managerial decision-making. Evidence-based management is rooted in evidence-based medicine, which is the rigorous statistical and experimental process that new pharmaceuticals go through prior to being deemed safe to use. This results in treatments that are the maximally effective and safe for patients. Applying this to business simply means utilizing the scientific method, which integrates rigorous and objective hypothesis testing, in order to identify best practices.
Research and Evidence-Based Management
Evidence-Based Management is modeled after Evidence-Based Medicine, which emphasizes the importance of scientific research in decision-making.
The Scientific Method
Evidence-based management bases managerial decisions and organizational practices on the best available scientific evidence. Practicing EBMgt requires managers to collect data, run tests, generate hypotheses, and objectively interpret the findings to create an accurate depiction of the efficacy of a given managerial style or decision. This is quite challenging, because management is much less tangible and measurable than many other scientific disciplines.
An example of EBMgt in practice could be a group of managers in an organization trying to determine how to improve job satisfaction. They could conduct a comprehensive and objective (therefore blind) survey across a large number of organizations, collecting enough data on the organizational reimbursements for employees, employee satisfaction, and company cultures to determine if a positive company culture is more relevant than salary to job satisfaction. After collecting n number of responses, this data could be assessed statically for a confidence interval, revealing the conclusion to be either significant or insignificant to future management decisions.
Integration with Organizations
While there is a rich body of academic literature pertaining to tested and true managerial strategies, real-world application of such resources is relatively rare. MBAs and degree holders in business have some exposure to this literature, but rarely move it from the theoretical realm to actual practice. Motivating real-life applications of these studies for management could prove advantageous for companies looking to improve their managerial effectiveness.
An important component of evidence-based management is helping managers understand the importance of backing up decisions with sound scientific reasoning. Unfortunately little shared language or terminology exists between managers, which makes it difficult for managers to hold discussions of evidence-based practices. For this reason, the adoption of evidence-based practices is likely to be organization-specific, where leaders take the initiative to build an evidence-based internal culture.
3.5: Evolving Organizations
3.5.1: Knowledge Management and Behavior Modification
Knowledge management and behavior modification are tactics employers use to ensure organizational growth and adaptability.
Learning Objective
Compare and contrast the acquisition of knowledge and the modification of behavior as internally evolving organizational components
Key Points
- Knowledge management is an organizational concept that takes the best knowledge from individual employees and organizes it into a functional learning and education system that all employees can learn from.
- Knowledge management is usually implemented by a company’s information technology department via electronic collection of specific components of employee expertise, creation of online learning modules, and redistribution of the modules to the whole company.
- Behavioral modification includes the alteration of an individual’s behavior through data collection and positive/negative reinforcement.
- In an organization, behavior modification is typically studied to examine how employees perceive their performance in relation to rewards. At a high level, it is used to develop strategies for improving performance behavior.
Key Term
- Knowledge management
-
Used in organizations to collect employee’s specialized knowledge and organize, redistribute, and share with the company.
Knowledge management (KM), and the modification of behavior through utilizing organizational knowledge, is central to an organization’s ability to grow and adapt. The value of knowledge management from the perspective of the organization is its ability to help employees learn and improve their skills, allowing the organization itself to evolve and achieve higher efficiency. Knowledge is an intangible resource which organizations can concretize by documenting experience over time. This helps them to avoid repeating mistakes and to improve current strategies.
Knowledge Management
Knowledge management is the range of strategies and practices used by an organization to identify, create, represent, distribute, and enable the adoption of employee insights and experiences. These insights and experiences constitute the company’s “knowledge,” either embodied in individuals or embedded in organizations as processes or practices. KM includes courses taught in the fields of business administration, information systems, management, and library and information sciences.
More recently, other fields have started contributing to KM research, including information and media, computer science, public health, and public policy. Knowledge management also focuses on organizational objectives such as improved performance, competitive advantage, innovation, and continuous improvement. KM is similar to organizational learning but distinguishes itself because it focuses more on knowledge as a strategic asset of a company’s employees. It encourages the sharing of knowledge to further the company’s success.
Many organizations include resources dedicated to internal knowledge management efforts in their business strategy, information technology, or human resource management departments. Consulting companies are also sometimes hired to provide advice about knowledge management. Knowledge management in a company is sometimes seen as an organizational concept that takes the best knowledge from individual employees and organizes it into functional learning and education systems that all employees can learn from. The company’s information technology department can make this happen by electronically collecting specific components of an employee’s knowledge expertise, creating an online learning module, and redistributing it to the company.
For example, an employee who is particularly knowledgeable about a certain computer system. This employee may be asked to write a training manual or presentation about this computer system which is then distributed to the company so that others can also benefit from that individual’s knowledge. Knowledge-sharing is the most important component of knowledge management and is essential to helping an organization evolve and grow.
Behavior Modification
Behavior modification was first introduced in psychology as a collection of behavioral change techniques to increase or decrease the frequency of behaviors. In psychology, behavioral modification was made popular by B. F. Skinner, who analyzed the triggers and rewards for certain behaviors in a series of experiments with animals. Behavioral modification includes altering an individual’s behavior through positive and negative reinforcement.
B.F. Skinner
B.F. Skinner introduced the study of behavior modification, focusing on how animals and humans react to reward and punishment. His theories are still used in behavior modification today.
Behavior modification in an organization is typically studied to examine how employees perceive their performance in relation to rewards. The process of behavioral modification in the workplace focuses on identifying the frequency of certain performance-related behavior, as well as determining what started or triggered that specific behavior. Once the trigger is identified, management can determine if it wants to develop a different trigger to change the employee’s performance or if it should sustain the current performance through rewards and appraisal.
Behavioral modification is generally used on a broader scale to determine how best to develop employee performance to move an organization in the desired direction. Knowledge management can help with this by providing employees with adequate training and skills and making sure that they know that they are valuable members of the organization worth investing in and empowering. Training employees and improving their knowledge, skills, and behavioral approaches to work helps an organization to evolve and improve.
Example
An example of knowledge management would involve an employee who is particularly knowledgeable about a certain computer system. This employee may be asked to write a training manual or presentation about this computer system, which is then distributed to the company so that others can also benefit from that individual’s knowledge.
3.5.2: Accelerated Change and Adaptation
Change management facilitates employee adaptation to organizational change.
Learning Objective
Identify the role of change management with the larger context of organizational theory
Key Points
- Change is essential to organizational growth and development. But employees can be uncomfortable with change, particularly when it affects their work on a daily basis.
- Sometimes an organization faces accelerated change, from attempts to change its overall mission, for example, or to implement a disruptive technology. In this situation it is important for employees to be able to adapt quickly.
- Quick adaptation to change is facilitated through change management strategies such as communication, employee alignment with expectations, training, and transparency of management.
Key Term
- change management
-
Change management attempts to use strategies such as communication and training to help employees become more comfortable with organizational changes.
Managing Change and Adaptation
Change is essential to organizational growth and development. But employees don’t always embrace change, particularly when it upsets routines and/or the status quo. Employees can view change as a threat if it impacts their daily tasks, training, or possibly their job. Change management is an approach to shifting and transitioning individuals, teams, and organizations from a current state to a desired future state. It is an organizational process aimed at helping change stakeholders to accept and embrace changes in their business environment.
Drivers of rapid adaptation are numerous, but one of the most relevant to modern organizations is the advent of new technology. When the smartphone was introduced and became popular, all companies in the phone industry had to react rapidly to switch their operational focus to smart phones, data plans, app stores, and multiple device integration. Companies that could not react and adapt quickly enough to the disruptive technology were left in the dust.
Sometimes an organization faces accelerated change when it is attempting to change its overall mission and refocus its vision. In the recent recession, this occurred within a number of organizations that thought that the best way to survive was to re-brand or reorganize their business strategy as a whole. Changing a company’s brand or overarching strategy (i.e., differentiation to low-cost or vice versa) is a massive overhaul that will undoubtedly upset a number of people internally and externally. Responsible change is a complex process.
Organizational Change and Employees
Major changes to an organization will force employees to adapt. Employees may not approve of the change, but they will be required to adapt to it if they want to keep their jobs. This is likely to create tension between what the employees want and what is occurring in the organization. Change management helps employees adapt to accelerated organizational change by attempting to eliminate the tension between employees’ resistance to and suspicions about change and the organization’s new direction.
Change management uses basic structure and tools to control an organizational change effort; these primarily revolve around ensuring that all stakeholders are aware of what’s going on and involving them in the strategic process. Managerial transparency about what is happening and why is critical to employee buy-in. Communicating effectively and comprehensively and hearing out employee fears, criticisms, and suggestions are integral to ensuring that everyone is on the same page. When changing the organization is required to remain profitable, employees will understand that they must pitch in to maintain the relevancy of their job.
3.5.3: The Role of the Manager in an Evolving Organization
Managers play a number of roles in evolving organizations, including leader, negotiator, figurehead, liaison, and communicator.
Learning Objective
Break down the various and critical roles a leader must play in the transitional process from an organization perspective
Key Points
- A manager needs to be a good leader. While a manager organizes and plans, s/he must also inspire employees with a vision for the organization.
- A manager needs to be an effective negotiator. When organizations are developing or undergoing change, the manager is often required to negotiate with competitors, contractors, suppliers, and employees.
- A manager must be a good figurehead who reinforces the mission and vision of an organization to employees, customers, and other stakeholders.
- A manager needs to be an effective communicator and liaison between employees, customers, and other managers of the organization.
Key Term
- leader
-
A leader is thought to differ from a manager in that a leader’s intention is to inspire and motivate while a manager’s role is focused more on organization and planning.
Managers play an integral part in an organization’s growth and evolution. Organizational growth is a complex process, particularly in larger organizations with more inertia. Organizations are essentially a compilation of moving parts: motivating each individual, with her/his unique talents and motivation, to change direction simultaneously (and in the same direction) is extremely challenging, and requires highly effective managers with highly developed communication skills.
Managers must do more than accept change: they must facilitate the evolutionary process. In these situations, organizations need a manager who can fulfill several roles, including leader, negotiator, figurehead, and communicator. In each of these roles, the manager’s goal is to help employees through the change with the least possible number of conflicts and issues.
The Role of a Manager during Organizational Change
Leader
To effectively implement change, a manager needs to be a good leader. The manager must organize and plan the change and use leadership skills to inspire employees to embrace it. This is a complex and intangible skill, one which incorporates each of the roles listed below as well. Leadership is a broad term that incorporates communicating and inspiring those around you to embrace a perspective.
Negotiator
A negotiator is similar to a leader. When organizations are developing or undergoing change, the manager is often required to negotiate clearly and steadfastly with competitors, contractors, suppliers, and employees. A manager needs to be able to negotiate with all of these parties in a way that effectively serves the best interests of the organization.
Figurehead
A manager also needs to act as a figurehead of the organization. Upper management in particular is responsible for creating and reinforcing delivery of the mission and vision of an organization to employees, customers, and other stakeholders. Employees in particular must understand where the organization is headed and what its ultimate goals are. A manager-figurehead can come to symbolize the organization as a whole for customers. The manager who builds a positive rapport with both customers and employees creates a positive association of her/himself with the organization at large.
Liaison and Communicator
When managers effectively communicate their vision for the organization, employees are more likely to engage with their work and exert themselves to further the organizational mission. Communication is at the core of managing change effectively. Transparency and empathy are integral to making employees aware of and comfortable with the changes taking place. Managers in an evolving organization must stay in constant contact with their direct reports to ensure that everything is running smoothly and that all stakeholders are educated and on board.
Chapter 2: Organizational Structure
2.1: Defining Organization
2.1.1: The Role of Management in an Organization
Management is tasked with generating an organizational system and integrating operations for high efficiency.
Learning Objective
Categorize the three primary managerial levels in an organization
Key Points
- Management may be described as the the people who design an organization’s structure and determine how different aspects of the organization will interact.
- Management entails six basic functions: planning, organizing, staffing, leading, controlling, and motivating.
- Different levels of management will participate in different components of this design process, with upper management creating the initial organizational architecture and structure.
- Organizational design is largely a function based on systems thinking: identifying the moving parts within an organization that add value and ensuring that these parts function together as an effective and efficient whole.
- Organizational design is less static in modern organizations; therefore, management must actively adapt organizational design to various challenges, opportunities, and technological improvements to maintain competitive output.
Key Terms
- organization chart
-
A graphic display of reporting relationships, which sometimes displays position titles and position holders.
- systems thinking
-
The process of understanding how parts influence one another within a whole.
Management and Organizational Design
Management can be described as the people who design an organization’s structure and determine how different aspects of the organization will interact. When designing an organization, managers must consider characteristics such as simplicity, flexibility, reliability, economy, and acceptability. Different levels of management will participate in different components of this design process, with upper management creating the initial organizational architecture and structure.
Organizational design is largely a function based on systems thinking. Systems thinking involves identifying the moving parts within an organization that add value and ensuring that these parts function together as an effective and efficient whole. Perspective is essential in systems thinking: a manager’s role in organizational design is to refrain from thinking of departments, individuals, processes, and problems as separate from the system and instead think of them as indivisible components of the broader organizational process.
Modern organizations exist within a framework of globalization and constant technological disruptions; as a result their organizational design is less static than in the past. Management must actively adapt organizations to meet various challenges, opportunities, and technological improvements to maintain competitive output. Because the organization is always changing, the problems of process and design are essentially limitless. Using a systems approach, managers view their objectives as moving targets and actively engage in expanding the organization day by day.
Management Processes
Organizations can be viewed as systems in which management creates the architecture for the system of production. Managers’ role in organizational design is central but must be understood in the context of their overall responsibilities within the organization.
Management operates through functions such as planning, organizing, staffing, leading/directing, controlling/monitoring, and motivation. These functions enable management to create strategies and compile resources to lead operations and monitor outputs.
The functions of management
Management operates through four main functions: planning, organizing, directing (i.e., leading), and controlling (i.e., monitoring and assessing).
Management Hierarchy
All levels of management perform these functions. However, the amount of time a manager spends on each function depends on the level of management and the needs of the organization—factors which play a role in organizational design.
- Top-level managers include the board of directors, president, vice-president, CEO, and other similar positions. They are responsible for planning and directing the entire organization.
- Middle-level managers include general managers, branch managers, and department managers, all of whom are accountable to the top-level management for the functions of their departments. They devote more time to organizing and directing.
- First-level managers include supervisors, section leads, foremen, and similar positions. They focus on controlling and directing.
As a result of this hierarchy, upper management will view the organizational design from a macro-level and consider all moving parts of the organization. Middle-management will generally focus on operations within functional or geographic areas. Lower-level managers will look at specific processes within functions or regions. From an organizational-design perspective, the higher managers are in the organization, the broader the view they will take and the greater number of moving parts they will consider.
2.1.2: Basic Types of Organizations
Most organizations fall into one of four types: pyramids/hierarchies, committees/juries, matrix organizations, and ecologies.
Learning Objective
Describe the basic types of organizations using four common structures
Key Points
- Organizations fall into one of four basic types: pyramids/hierarchies, committees/juries, matrix organizations, and ecologies.
- From a business perspective, the choice of organizational design has substantial implications for strategy, authority distribution, resource allocation, and functional approaches.
- A pyramid/hierarchy has a leader who is responsible for making all decisions that affect the organization. This leader manages other organizational members.
- Committees/juries consist of groups of peers who decide collectively, sometimes by casting votes, on the appropriate courses of action within the organization.
- Matrix organizations assign workers to more than one reporting line in an attempt to maximize the benefits of both functional and decentralized organizational forms.
- In ecologies, each business unit represents an individual profit center that holds employees accountable for the unit’s profitability.
Key Terms
- decentralized
-
A structure where business units operate autonomously and have greater decision-making power.
- functional
-
A structure that consists of activities such as coordination, supervision, and task allocation.
- common law
-
A precedent or policy developed by judges through decisions of courts and similar tribunals.
Basic Organizational Structures
An organization is a social entity with collective goals that is linked to an external environment. Most organizational structures fall into one of four types: pyramids/hierarchies, committees/juries, matrix organizations, and ecologies. From a business perspective, the choice of organizational design has substantial implications for strategy, authority distribution, resource allocation, and functional approaches.
Pyramid/Hierarchy
An organization using a pyramid or hierarchy structure has a leader who is responsible for and makes all the decisions affecting the organization. This leader manages other organizational members. Pyramids and hierarchies often rely on bureaucratic practices, such as clearly defined roles and responsibilities and rigid command and control structures. Like a physical pyramid, these organizations need a sturdy base with sufficient members to support various levels of management within the overall structure so that the organization does not fall short of its goals.
From a business perspective, a hierarchy will often be divided according to function or geography. For example, a global retailer may utilize a geographic hierarchy at the upper level, with each geographic branch creating a functional hierarchy beneath it. A smaller organization operating in a single region may simply have a functional hierarchy.
The Iraqi Special Security Organization
This organizational chart of the Iraqi Special Security Organization illustrates a hierarchy. Note the multiple separate layers to the organization’s hierarchy; the lowest layer includes individual branches, the next layer involves supervisory directorates, which report to the director’s office, who is accountable to the scientific branch.
Committee/Jury
Committees or juries consist of groups of peers who decide collectively, sometimes by casting votes, on the appropriate courses of action within an organization. Committees and juries have a basic distinction: members of a committee usually perform additional actions after the group reaches a decision, while a jury’s work concludes once the group has reached a decision. In countries with common-law practices, for example, a jury of peers render innocent or guilty verdicts in the court system. Juries are often used to determine athletic contests, book awards, and similar contests.
In the business world, a committee structure is more commonly found in smaller institutions. A start-up company with three people, for example, may easily function as a committee in which decisions are made via discussion. Committees represent a decentralized approach to organizational design and tend to have a collaborative, often unstructured workplace. The more people involved, the more disparate and less effective committee structures become.
Matrix
Matrix organizations assign employees to two reporting lines, each with a boss representing a different hierarchy. One hierarchy is functional and assures that experts in the organization are well-trained and assessed by bosses who are highly qualified in the same areas of expertise. The other hierarchy is executive and works to ensure the experts bring specific projects to completion. Matrix organizations are by far the most complex and are more common in large corporations.
Projects can be organized by product, region, customer type, or other organizational need. The matrix structure combines the best parts of both separate structures. In a matrix organization, teams of employees perform work to take advantage of the strengths and compensate for the weaknesses of both the functional and decentralized forms of organizational structure. Matrix organizations may be further categorized as one of the following types:
- Weak/Functional Matrix: A project manager with limited authority is assigned to oversee cross-functional aspects of the project. Functional managers maintain control over their resources and project areas.
- Balanced/Functional Matrix: A project manager is assigned to oversee the project. Power is shared equally between the project manager and functional managers, combining the best aspects of functional and project-oriented organizations. This system is the most difficult to maintain because of difficulties in power-sharing.
- Strong/Project Matrix: A project manager is primarily responsible for the project. Functional managers provide technical expertise and assign resources as needed.
Ecology
In ecologies, each business unit represents an individual profit center that holds employees accountable for the unit’s profitability. These kinds of organizations foster intense competition, as all members are paid for the actual work they perform. Ineffective parts of the organization are left to fail and thriving parts are rewarded with more work. Companies that use this organizational structure define roles and responsibilities strictly, and each business unit tends to operate autonomously. In an ecology organization, clearly defined, measurable objectives that reflect the business’s goals are critical.
2.1.3: The Organizational Chart
An organization chart is a diagram that illustrates the structure of an organization.
Learning Objective
Compare the various types of organization charts that describe company structures
Key Points
- Organization charts are a vital tool of management and can be classified into three broad categories: hierarchical, matrix, and flat (or horizontal).
- Organization charts illustrate the structure of an organization, the relationships and relative ranks of its business units/divisions, and the positions or roles assigned to each unit/division.
- Before working with an organization, employees should procure a copy of its organizational chart. A new employee or manager can then understand how authority is distributed within the organization and with whom to consult about various concerns.
Key Term
- decentralized
-
Dispersed rather than concentrated in a single, central location or authority.
The Purpose of Organization Charts
An organization chart (sometimes called an organizational chart, an org chart, or an organogram) is a diagram that illustrates the structure of an organization, the relationships and relative ranks of its business units/divisions, and the positions or roles assigned to each unit/division.
Examples of such roles include managers of various departments, subordinates within these departments, directors, and chief executive officers. When an organization chart grows too large, it can be split into smaller charts that show only individual departments within the organization.
Prior to applying for a job or beginning work with an organization, a prospective employee should procure a copy of the organization chart. New employees or managers can then know with whom to consult about particular issues, as well as understand the distribution of authority within the company. The org chart can also provide insight into the broader strategy of the company—such as the degree of innovation versus process control being pursued, the flexibility of project management, the degree of autonomy, and the broader company culture.
The different types of organization charts include hierarchical, matrix, and flat (also known as horizontal). These are described briefly below.
Hierarchical Organization Charts
A hierarchical organization is an organizational structure with several reporting layers. Every entity within the organization—except for the owners—is subordinate and reports to a higher level entity.
Matrix Organization Charts
A matrix organizational chart displays how people with similar skills are pooled together for work assignments.
Matrix organizational chart
In a matrix structure, the organization is grouped by both product and function. Product lines are managed horizontally and functions are managed vertically. This means that each function—e.g., research, production, sales, and finance—has separate internal divisions for each product.
Flat or Horizontal Organization Charts
A flat organization chart shows few or no levels of intervening management between staff and managers. A flat chart will simply look like a line of boxes with no overt authority implied.
2.1.4: Characteristics of Organizational Structures
Important characteristics of an organization’s structure include span of control, departmentalization, centralization, and decentralization.
Learning Objective
Outline the departmentalization options available to corporations from an organizational structure perspective and differentiate between centralized and decentralized decision-making, and the resulting structural implications
Key Points
- Organizational structures provide basic frameworks to help operations proceed smoothly and functionally.
- Span of control refers to the number of subordinates a supervisor has; it is used as a means of ensuring proper coordination and a sense of accountability among employees.
- Departmentalization is the basis by which an organization groups tasks together. There are five common approaches: functional, divisional, matrix, team, and network.
- Centralization occurs when decision-making authority is located in the upper organizational levels. Centralization increases consistency in the processes and procedures that employees use in performing tasks.
- Decentralization occurs when decision-making authority is located in the lower organizational levels. With decentralized authority, important decisions are made by middle-level and supervisory-level managers, thereby increasing adaptability.
Key Term
- span of control
-
The number of subordinates a supervisor has.
Organizational structures provide basic frameworks to help operations proceed smoothly and functionally. Types of organizational structures include functional, divisional, matrix, team, network, and horizontal structures. Each of these structures provides different degrees of four common organizational elements: span of control, departmentalization, centralization, and decentralization.
Span of Control
Span of control—or the number of subordinates a supervisor has—is used as a means of ensuring proper coordination and a sense of accountability among employees. It determines the number of levels of management an organization has as well as the number of employees a manager can efficiently and effectively manage. In the execution of a task, hierarchical organizations usually have different levels of task processes. Workers at various levels send reports on their progress to the next levels until the work is completed.
In the past it was not uncommon to see average spans of one to four (one manager supervising four employees). With the development of inexpensive information technology in the 1980s, corporate leaders flattened many organizational structures and caused average spans to move closer to one to ten. As this technology developed further and eased many middle-managerial tasks (such as collecting, manipulating, and presenting operational information), upper management found they could save money by hiring fewer middle managers.
Departmentalization
Departmentalization is the process of grouping individuals into departments and grouping departments into total organizations. Different approaches include:
- Functional – departmentalization by common skills and work tasks
- Divisional – departmentalization by common product, program, or geographical location
- Matrix – a complex combination of functional and divisional
- Team – departmentalization by teams of people brought together to accomplish specific tasks
- Network – independent departments providing functions for a central core breaker
Centralization
Centralization occurs when decision-making authority is located in the upper organizational levels. Centralization increases consistency in the processes and procedures that employees use in performing tasks. In this way, it promotes workplace harmony among workers and reduces the cost of production. Centralization is usually helpful when an organization is in crisis and/or faces the risk of failure.
Centralization allows for rapid, department-wide decision-making; there is also less duplication of work because fewer employees perform the same task. However, it can limit flexibility and natural synergies. Autonomy in decision-making is reserved for only a small number of individuals within the workforce, potentially limiting creativity.
Centralization vs. decentralization
This diagram compares visual representations of a centralized vs. decentralized organizational structure. Notice how the representation of the centralized organization looks like one large asterisk with many spokes, whereas the representation of the decentralized organization looks like many small interconnected asterisks.
Decentralization
Decentralization occurs when decision-making authority is dispersed among the lower organizational levels. With decentralized authority, important decisions are made by middle-level and supervisory-level managers. Because there are fewer hierarchical layers to navigate, this kind of structure helps to enable adaptability, quick reactions to lower level issues, and more empowered employees. However, making organization-wide changes that are implemented homogeneously can become quite difficult in this system.
2.2: Components of an Organization
2.2.1: Schein’s Common Elements of an Organization
The four common elements of an organization include common purpose, coordinated effort, division of labor, and hierarchy of authority.
Learning Objective
Describe the common elements that define an organizational structure, according to Edgar Schein
Key Points
- Organizational psychologist Edgar Schein proposed four common elements of an organization’s structure: common purpose, coordinated effort, division of labor, and hierarchy of authority.
- Common purpose unifies employees or members by giving everyone an understanding of the organization’s mission, strategy, and values.
- Coordinated effort is the organization of individual efforts into a group or collective effort.
- Division of labor is an arrangement in which different people perform discrete parts of a task for greater efficiency.
- Hierarchy of authority is the control mechanism for making sure the right people do the right things at the right time. This control enables organization members to make decisions quickly when necessary.
Key Term
- organizational psychologist
-
A person who conducts scientific study of employees and workplaces.
Common Elements of Organizations
Organizational psychologist Edgar Schein proposes four common elements of an organization’s structure:
- Common purpose
- Coordinated effort
- Division of labor
- Hierarchy of authority
From a manager’s point of view, operations are made successful by instilling a common purpose to create a coordinated effort across the organization and organizing resources based on tasks and decision making. Each of the four elements is relatively straightforward in theory but represents a critical component of an effective structure.
Common Purpose
An organization without a clear purpose or mission soon begins to drift and become disorganized. A common purpose unifies employees or members and gives everyone an understanding of the organization’s direction. Ensuring that the common purpose is effectively communicated across organizations (particularly large organizations with many moving parts) is a central task for managers. Managers communicate this purpose by educating all employees on the general strategy, mission statement, values, and short- and long-term objectives of the organization.
Coordinated Effort
Coordinating effort involves working together in a way that maximizes resources. The common purpose is achieved through the coordinated effort of all individuals and groups within an organization. The broader group’s diverse skill sets and personalities must be leveraged in a way that adds value. The act of coordinating organizational effort is perhaps the most important responsibility of managers because it motivates and distributes human resources to capture value.
Division of Labor
Division of labor is also known as work specification for greater efficiency. It involves delegating specific parts of a broader task to different people within the organization based upon their particular abilities and skills. Using division of labor, an organization can parcel out a complex work effort for specialists to perform. By systematically dividing complex tasks into specialized jobs, an organization uses its human resources more efficiently.
Hierarchy of Authority
Hierarchy of authority is essentially the chain of command—a control mechanism for making sure the right people do the right things at the right time. While there are a wide variety of organizational structures—some with more centralization of authority than others—hierarchy in decision making is a critical factor for success. Knowing who will make decisions under what circumstances enables organizations to be agile, while ambiguity of authority can often slow the decision-making process. Authority enables organizations to set directions and select strategies, which can in turn enable a common purpose.
2.3: Common Organizational Structures
2.3.1: Functional Structure
An organization with a functional structure is divided based on functional areas, such as IT, finance, or marketing.
Learning Objective
Explain the functional structure within the larger context of organizational structures in general
Key Points
- A functional organization is a common type of organizational structure in which the organization is divided into smaller groups based on specialized functional areas, such as IT, finance, or marketing.
- Functional departmentalization arguably allows for greater operational efficiency because employees with shared skills and knowledge are grouped together by function.
- A disadvantage of this type of structure is that the different functional groups may not communicate with one another, potentially decreasing flexibility and innovation. A recent trend aimed at combating this disadvantage is the use of teams that cross traditional departmental lines.
Key Terms
- departmentalization
-
The organization of something into groups according to function, geographic location, etc.
- silo
-
In business, a unit or department within which communication and collaboration occurs vertically, with limited cooperation outside the unit.
Overview of the Functional Structure
An organization can be arranged according to a variety of structures, which determine how the organization will operate and perform. In a functional structure, a common configuration, an organization is divided into smaller groups by areas of specialty (such as IT, finance, operations, and marketing). Some refer to these functional areas as “silos”—entities that are vertical and disconnected from each other. Correspondingly, the company’s top management team typically consists of several functional heads (such as the chief financial officer and the chief operating officer). Communication generally occurs within each functional department and is transmitted across departments through the department heads.
Functional structure at FedEx
This organizational chart shows a broad functional structure at FedEx. Each different functions (e.g., HR, finance, marketing) is managed from the top down via functional heads (the CFO, the CIO, various VPs, etc.).
Advantages of a Functional Structure
Functional departments arguably permit greater operational efficiency because employees with shared skills and knowledge are grouped together by functions performed. Each group of specialists can therefore operate independently with management acting as the point of cross-communication between functional areas. This arrangement allows for increased specialization.
Disadvantages of a Functional Structure
A disadvantage of this structure is that the different functional groups may not communicate with one another, potentially decreasing flexibility and innovation. Functional structures may also be susceptible to tunnel vision, with each function perceiving the organization only from within the frame of its own operation. Recent trends that aim to combat these disadvantages include the use of teams that cross traditional departmental lines and the promotion of cross-functional communication.
Functional structures appear in a variety of organizations across many industries. They may be most effective within large corporations that produce relatively homogeneous goods. Smaller companies that require more adaptability and creativity may feel confined by the communicative and creative silos functional structures tend to produce.
2.3.2: Divisional Structure
Divisional structures group various organizational functions into product or regional divisions.
Learning Objective
Describe the basic premise behind divisional structures within the general framework of organizational structure
Key Points
- The divisional structure is a type of organizational structure that groups each organizational function into a division. These divisions can correspond to either products or geographies.
- Each division contains all the necessary resources and functions within it to support that product line or geography (for example, its own finance, IT, and marketing departments).
- A multidivisional form (or “M-form”) is a legal structure in which one parent company owns subsidiary companies, each of which uses the parent company’s brand and name.
- The divisional structure is useful because failure of one division doesn’t directly threaten the other divisions. In the multidivisional structure, the subsidiaries benefit from the use of the brand and capital of the parent company.
- Disadvantages of divisional structure can include operational inefficiencies from separating specialized function. For the multidivisional structure, disadvantages can include increased accounting and taxes.
Key Terms
- subsidiary
-
A company owned by a parent company or holding company.
- division
-
A section of a large company.
- parent company
-
An entity that owns or controls another entity.
Divisional Structure Overview
Organizations can be structured in various ways, with each structure determining the manner in which the organization operates and performs. A divisional organization groups each organizational function into a division.
U.S. Department of Energy organization chart
The DOE organization chart shows a divisional structure with different divisions under each of three under-secretaries for energy. Each of the three division is in charge of a different set of tasks: environmental responsibilities, nuclear-energy responsibilities, or research responsibilities.
Divisional Strategies
Each division within this structure can correspond to either products or geographies of the organization. Each division contains all the necessary resources and functions within it to support that particular product line or geography (for example, its own finance, IT, and marketing departments). Product and geographic divisional structures may be characterized as follows:
- Product departmentalization: A divisional structure organized by product departmentalization means that the various activities related to the product or service are under the authority of one manager. If the division builds luxury sedans or SUVs, for example, the SUV division will have its own sales, engineering, and marketing departments distinct from those departments within the luxury sedan division.
- Geographic departmentalization: Geographic departmentalization involves grouping activities based on geography, such as an Asia/Pacific or Latin American division. Geographic departmentalization is particularly important if tastes and brand responses differ across regions, as it allows for flexibility in product offerings and marketing strategies (an approach known as localization).
A common legal structure known as the multidivisional form (or “M-form”) also uses the divisional structure. In this form, one parent company owns subsidiary companies, each of which uses its brand and name. The whole organization is ultimately controlled by central management; however, most decisions are left to autonomous divisions. This business structure is typically found in companies that operate worldwide—for example, Virgin Group is the parent company of Virgin Mobile and Virgin Records.
Advantages of a Divisional Structure
As with all organizational structure types, the divisional structure offers distinct advantages and disadvantages. Generally speaking, divisions work best for companies with wide variance in product offerings or regions of geographic operation. The divisional structure can be useful because it affords the company greater operational flexibility. In addition, the failure of one division does not directly threaten the other divisions. In the multidivisional structure, subsidiaries benefit from the use of the brand and capital of the parent company.
Disadvantages of a Divisional Structure
Some disadvantages of this structure include operational inefficiencies from separating specialized functions—for example, finance personnel in one division do not communicate with those in another division. Disadvantages of the multidivisional structure can include increased accounting and tax implications.
2.3.3: Matrix Structure
The matrix structure is a type of organizational structure in which individuals are grouped via two operational frames.
Learning Objective
Illustrate the way two different operational perspectives can be crossed in a matrix structure to organize a company
Key Points
- The matrix structure is a type of organizational structure in which individuals are grouped simultaneously by two different operational perspectives.
- Matrix structures are inherently complex and versatile, making them more appropriate for large companies operating across different industries or geographic regions.
- Proponents suggest that matrix management is more dynamic than functional management in that it allows team members to share information more readily across task boundaries; it also allows for specialization that can increase depth of knowledge.
- A disadvantage of the matrix structure is the increased complexity in the chain of command, which can lead to a higher manager-to-worker ratio and contribute to conflicting loyalties among employees.
Key Term
- matrix
-
A two-dimensional array.
Overview of the Matrix Structure
Organizations can be structured in various ways, and the structure of an organization determines how it operates and performs. The matrix structure is a type of organizational structure in which individuals are grouped by two different operational perspectives simultaneously; this structure has both advantages and disadvantages but is generally best employed by companies large enough to justify the increased complexity.
Matrix organizational structure
In a matrix structure, the organization is grouped by both product and function. Product lines are managed horizontally and functions are managed vertically. This means that each function—e.g., research, production, sales, and finance—has separate internal divisions for each product.
In matrix management, the organization is grouped by any two perspectives the company deems most appropriate. Common organizational perspectives include function and product, function and region, or region and product. In an organization grouped by function and product, for example, each product line will have management that corresponds to each function. If the organization has three functions and three products, the matrix structure will have nine (
) potential managerial interactions. This example illustrates how inherently complex matrix structures are in comparison to other, more linear structures.
Advantages of a Matrix Structure
Proponents of matrix management suggest that this structure allows team members to share information more readily across task boundaries, countering the “silo” critique of functional management. Matrix structures also allow for specialization that can both increase depth of knowledge and assign individuals according to project needs.
Disadvantages of a Matrix Structure
A disadvantage of the matrix structure is the increased complexity in the chain of command when employees are assigned to both functional and project managers. This increase in complexity can result in a higher manager-to-worker ratio, which can in turn increase costs or lead to conflicting employee loyalties. It can also create a gridlock in decision making if a manager on one end of the matrix disagrees with another manager. Blurred authority in a matrix structure can result in reduced agility in decision making and conflict resolution.
Matrix structures should generally only be used when the operational complexity of the organization demands it. A company that operates in various regions with various products may require interaction between product development teams and geographic marketing specialists—suggesting a matrix may be applicable. Generally speaking, larger companies with a need for a great deal of cross-departmental communication benefit most from this model.
2.3.4: Team-Based Structure
The team structure is a newer, less hierarchical organizational structure in which individuals are grouped into teams.
Learning Objective
Classify team-based structures within the larger context of the most common organizational structures
Key Points
- The team structure in large organizations is a newer type of organizational structure. A team should be a group of workers, with complementary skills and synergistic efforts, all working toward a common goal.
- An organization may have several teams that can change over time. Teams that include members from different functions are known as cross-functional teams.
- Although teams are characterized as less hierarchical, they typically still include a management structure (or management team).
- Critics argue that the use of the word “team” to describe modern organizational structures is a fad—that some teams are not really teams at all but merely groups of staff.
- One aspect of team-based structures likely to persist indefinitely is the integration of team cultures within an broader structure (such as a functional structure with interspersed teams).
Key Terms
- hierarchical
-
Classified or arranged according to various criteria into successive ranks or grades.
- synergistic
-
Cooperative, working together, interacting, mutually stimulating.
Overview of the Team-Based Structure
Organizations can be structured in various ways, and the structure of an organization determines how it operates and performs. The team structure in large organizations is considered a newer type of organization that is less hierarchical, less structured, and more fluid than traditional structures (such as functional or divisional). A team is a group of employees—ideally with complementary skills and synergistic efforts—working toward a common goal. Teams are created by grouping employees in a way that generates a variety of expertise and addresses a specific operational component of an organization. These teams can change and adapt to fulfill group and organizational objectives.
Some teams endure over time, while others—such as project teams—are disbanded at the project’s end. Teams that include members from different functions are known as cross-functional teams. Although teams are described as less hierarchical, they typically still include a management structure.
Critics argue that the use of the word “team” to describe modern organizational structures is a fad; according to them, some teams are not really teams at all but rather groups of staff. That said, team-building is now a frequent practice of many organizations and can include activities such as bonding exercises and even overnight retreats to foster team cohesion. To the extent that these exercises are meaningful to employees, they can be effective in improving employee motivation and company productivity.
Integration with Other Structures
One aspect of team-based structures that will likely persist indefinitely is the integration of team cultures within an broader structure (e.g., a functional structure with teams interspersed). Such integration allows for the authority and organization of a more concrete structure while at the same time capturing the cross-functional and projected-oriented advantages of teams.
For example, imagine Proctor and Gamble brings together a group of employees from finance, marketing, and research and development—all representing different geographic regions. This newly created team is tasked with the project of creating a laundry detergent that is convenient, economic, and aligned with the company’s manufacturing capabilities. The project team might be allocated a certain number of hours a month to devote to team objectives; however, members of the team are still expected to work within their respective functional departments.
2.3.5: Network Structure
In the network structure, managers coordinate and control relationships with the firm that are both internal and external.
Learning Objective
Identify the structural implications of a network-based organizational design
Key Points
- The network structure is a newer type of organizational structure viewed as less hierarchical (i.e., more “flat”), more decentralized, and more flexible than other structures.
- In a network structure, managers coordinate and control relationships that are both internal and external to the firm.
- The concept underlying the network structure is the social network—a social structure of interactions. Open communication and reliable partners (both internally and externally) are key components of social networks.
- Proponents argue that the network structure is more agile than other structures. Because it is decentralized, a network organization has fewer tiers, a wider span of control, and a bottom-up flow of decision making and ideas.
- A disadvantage of the network structure is that this more fluid structure can lead to more complex relations in the organization.
Key Terms
- agile
-
Apt or ready to move; nimble; active.
- decentralized
-
Diffuse; having no center or several centers.
- network
-
Any interconnected group or system.
Overview of the Network Structure
An organization can be structured in various ways that determine how it operates and performs. The network structure is a newer type of organizational structure often viewed as less hierarchical (i.e., more flat), more decentralized, and more flexible than other structures. In this structure, managers coordinate and control relations that are both internal and external to the firm.
The concept underlying the network structure is the social network—a social structure of interactions. At the organizational level, social networks can include intra-organizational or inter-organizational ties representing either formal or informal relationships. At the industry level, complex networks can include technological and innovation networks that may span several geographic areas and organizations. From a management perspective, the network structure is unique among other organizational structures that focus on the internal dynamics within the firm.
A network organization sounds complex, but it is at its core a simple concept. Take, for example, a T-shirt design company. Because the company leaders are mainly interested in design, they may not want to get too heavily involved in either manufacturing or retail; however, both aspects of the business are necessary to complete their operations. To maintain control of their product, they may rent retail space through their network and purchase production capabilities from a variety of partner organizations that have their own manufacturing facilities. While the core company focuses mainly on designing products and tracking finances, this network of partnerships enables it to be much more than just a design operation.
Like other organizational structures, the network structure has its advantages and its disadvantages.
Advantages of a Network Structure
Proponents argue that the network structure is more agile compared to other structures (such as functional areas, divisions, or even some teams). Communication is less siloed and flows freely, possibly opening up more opportunities for innovation. Because the network structure is decentralized, it has fewer tiers in its organizational makeup, a wider span of control, and a bottom-up flow of decision making and ideas.
Disadvantages of a Network Structure
On the other hand, this more fluid structure can lead to a more complex set of relationships in the organization. For example, lines of accountability may be less clear, and reliance on external vendors can be quite high. These potentially unpredictable variables essentially reduce the core company’s control over its operational success.
2.3.6: Modular Structure
In the modular structure, an organization focuses on developing specialized and relatively autonomous strategic business units.
Learning Objective
Define the nature and value of a modular structure in an organizational framework
Key Points
- The modular structure divides the business into small, tightly knit strategic business units (SBUs),which focus on specific elements of the organizational process.
- Interdependencies between modules tends to be weak; however, flexibility is extremely high.
- An advantage of the modular structure is that loosely coupled structures enable organizations to be more flexible and restructure more easily. For example, a firm can switch between different providers and thus respond more quickly to different market needs.
- Increased internalization and more tightly coupled structures can produce better communication and intellectual property gains. As a result, some argue that the modularity of a firm should be limited to the extent the flexibility it affords results in gains.
- Various degrees of modularity are possible; however, a business must be consistent in the degree of modularity it employs.
Key Terms
- modular
-
Consisting of separate units, especially where each unit performs a specified function and could be replaced by a similar unit for the same function, independently of other units.
- disaggregation
-
A division or breaking up into constituent parts, particularly categories which have been lumped together.
Overview of the Modular Structure
Organizations can be structured in various ways that determine how the organization operates and performs. The modular structure focuses on dividing the business into small, tightly knit strategic business units (SBUs), which focus on specific elements of the organizational process. Interdependence among the units is limited because the focus of many SBUs is more inward than outward and because loyalty within SBUs tends to be very strong.
The term modularity is widely used in studies of technological and organizational systems. Product systems are deemed modular when they can be broken down into a number of components that can then be mixed and matched to connect, interact, or exchange resources. Modularization within organizations leads to the disaggregation of the traditional form of hierarchical governance into relatively small, autonomous organizational units (modules). Although modules are not generally interdependent, the modular organization is extremely flexible.
For example, a firm that employs contract manufacturing rather than in-house manufacturing is using an organizational component that is more independent. The firm can switch between different contract manufacturers that perform different functions; the contract manufacturer can similarly work for different firms. Another (more internally focused) modular model involves the existence of various consumer services which cater to dramatically different needs or demographics. At GNU Health, for example, the surgery unit may interact with different departments at different times for different reasons.
Modular organizations
A modular organization involves several largely independent bodies that can rearrange and work with different other departments as needed. This image shows the GNU health module interacting with many different departments, such as oncology, radiology, surgery and pediatrics, across many contexts, such as location and socioeconomic status.
Advantages of a Modular Structure
One advantage of the modular structure is that loosely coupled structures can enable organizations to be more flexible and restructure more easily. For example, a firm can switch between different providers and thus respond more quickly to different market needs. An organization can also fill its own corporate needs internally by creating a new modular department, which can operate interdependently with the whole.
Disadvantages of a Modular Structure
On the other hand, more internalization and more tightly coupled structures can produce better communication and intellectual property gains. As a result, critics of the modular organization argue that a firm’s modularity should be limited to the extent that its flexible nature affords gains. Various degrees of modularity are possible but not necessarily useful if the pros do not outweigh the cons. Managers must carefully consider whether or not a modular structure would be useful, either entirely or partially, for a given organization.
2.4: Factors to Consider in Organizational Design
2.4.1: Considering the Environment
Considerations of the external environment—including uncertainty, competition, and resources—are key in determining organizational design.
Learning Objective
Identify the inherent complexities in the external environment that influence the design of an organization’s structure
Key Points
- Organizational design is dictated by a variety of factors, including the size of the company, the diversity of the organization’s operations, and the environment in which it operates.
- According to several theories, considerations of the external environment are a key aspect of organizational design. These considerations include how organizations cope with conditions of uncertainty, procure external resources, and compete with other organizations.
- A company in a highly uncertain environment must prioritize adaptability over a more rigid and functional strategy. In contrast, a company in a mature market with limited variability and uncertainty should pursue more structure.
- A company with a low-cost strategy relative to its competition may benefit from a more simplistic and fixed structural approach to operations, while a company pursuing differentiation must prioritize flexibility and a more diversified structure.
Key Terms
- differentiation
-
A strategy focused on creating a unique product for a particular population.
- strategy
-
A plan of action intended to accomplish a specific goal.
Overview
Organizational design is dictated by a variety of factors, including the size of the company, the diversity of the organization’s operations, and the environment in which it operates. Considerations of the external environment are a key aspect of organizational design. The environment in which an organization operates can be defined from a number of different angles, each of which generates different structural and design strategies to remain competitive.
Complexity
Complexity theory postulates that organizations must adapt to uncertainty in their environments. The complexity theory treats organizations and firms as collections of strategies and structures that interact to achieve the highest efficiency within a given environment. Therefore, companies in a highly uncertain environment must prioritize adaptability over a more rigid and functional strategy. Alternatively, a fixed and specific approach to organizational design will capture more value in a mature market, where variability and uncertainty are limited.
Resource Dependence
Another perspective on organizational design is resource dependence theory—the study of how external resources affect the behavior of the organization. Procuring external resources is important in both the strategic and tactical management of any company. Resource-dependence theory explores the implications regarding the optimal divisional structure of organizations, recruitment of board members and employees, production strategies, contract structure, external organizational links, and many other aspects of organizational strategy.
Competition
Another environmental factor that shapes organization design is competition. Higher levels of competition require different organizational structures to offset competitors’ advantages while emphasizing the company’s own strengths. A company that demonstrates strength in differentiation relative to the competition benefits from implementing a divisional or matrix strategy, which in turn allows the company to manage a wide variety of demographic-specific products or services. Alternatively, a company that demonstrates a low-cost strength (producing products cheaper than the competition) benefits from employing a structural or bureaucratic strategy to streamline operations.
Identifying External Factors
In considering organizational design relative to the environment, managers may find it helpful to employ two specific frameworks to identify external factors and internal strengths and weaknesses:
- SWOT analysis: In this particular model, a company’s strengths and weaknesses are assessed in the context of the opportunities and threats in the business environment. A SWOT analysis enables a company to identify the ideal structure to maximize its internal strengths while capturing external opportunities and avoiding threats.
- Porter’s five-forces analysis: This analysis identifies factors of the industry’s competitive environment that may substantially influence a company’s strategic design. The five forces include power of buyers, power of suppliers, rivalry (competition), substitutes, and barriers to entry (how difficult it is for new firms to enter the industry). Understanding these varying forces gives the company an idea of how adaptable or fixed the organizational structure should be to capture value.
Porter’s five-forces model
Porter’s five-forces analysis identifies five environmental factors that can influence a company’s strategic design: power of buyers, power of suppliers, competition, substitutes, and barriers to entry.
Smaller, more agile companies tend to thrive better in uncertain or constantly changing markets, while larger, more structured companies function best in consistent, predictable environments. Understanding these tools and frameworks alongside the varying external forces that act upon a business will allow companies to make strategic organizational decisions that optimize their competitive strength.
2.4.2: Considering Company Size
The size and operational scale of a company is important to consider when identifying the ideal organization structure.
Learning Objective
Explain how the size of a company helps determine the organizational structure that optimizes operational efficiency and managerial capacity
Key Points
- Company size plays a substantial role in determining the ideal structure of the company: the larger the company, the greater need for increased complexity and divisions to achieve synergy.
- Companies may adopt any of six organizational structures based on company size and diversity in scope of operations: pre-bureaucratic, bureaucratic, post-bureaucratic, functional, divisional, and matrix.
- Smaller companies function best with pre-bureaucratic or post-bureaucratic structures. Pre-bureaucratic structures are inherently adaptable and flexible and therefore particularly effective for small companies aspiring to expand.
- Larger companies usually achieve higher efficiency through functional, bureaucratic, divisional, and matrix structures (depending on the scale, scope, and complexity of operations).
- Understanding the varying pros and cons of each structure will help companies to plan their organization design and structure in a way that optimizes resources and allows for growth.
Key Terms
- economies of scope
-
Strategies of incorporating a wider variety of products or services to capture value through the ways in which they interact or overlap.
- Homogeneous
-
Having a uniform makeup; having the same composition throughout.
- economies of scale
-
Processes in which an increase in quantity will result in a decrease in average cost of production (per unit).
Company Size and Organizational Structure
Organizational design can be defined narrowly as the strategic process of shaping the organization’s structure and roles to create or optimize competitive capabilities in a given market. This definition underscores why it is important for companies to identify the factors of the organization that determine its ideal structure—most specifically the size, scope, and operational initiatives of the company.
Company size plays a particularly important role in determining an organization’s ideal structure: the larger the company, the greater the need for increased complexity and divisions to achieve synergy. The organizational structure should be designed in ways that specifically optimize the effort and input compared to output. Larger companies with a wider range of operational initiatives require careful structural considerations to achieve this optimization.
Types of Organizational Structure
Companies may adopt one of six organizational structures based upon company size and diversity of scope of operations.
Pre-bureaucratic
Ideal for smaller companies, the pre-bureaucratic structure deliberately lacks standardized tasks and strategic division of responsibility. Instead, this is an agile framework aimed at leveraging employees in any and all roles to optimize competitiveness.
Bureaucratic
A bureaucratic framework functions well in large corporations with relatively complex operational initiatives. This structure is rigid and mechanical, with strict subordination to ensure consistency across varying business units.
Post-bureaucratic
This structure is a combination of bureaucratic and pre-bureaucratic, where individual contribution and control are coupled with authority and structure. In this structure, consensus is the driving force behind decision making and authority. Post-bureaucratic structure is better suited to smaller or medium-sized organizations (such as nonprofits or community organizations) where the importance of the decisions made outweighs the importance of efficiency.
Functional
A functional structure focuses on developing highly efficient and specific divisions which perform specialized tasks. This structure works well for large organizations pursuing economies of scale, usually through production of a large quantity of homogeneous goods at the lowest possible cost and highest possible speed. The downside of this structure is that each division is generally autonomous, with limited communication across business functions.
Divisional
A divisional structure is also a framework best leveraged by larger companies; instead of economies of scale, however, they are in pursuit of economies of scope. Economies of scope simply means a high variance in product or service. As a result, different divisions will handle different products or geographic locations/markets. For example, Disney may have a division for TV shows, a division for movies, a division for theme parks, and a division for merchandise.
Matrix
A matrix structure is used by the largest companies with the highest level of complexity. This structure combines functional and divisional concepts to create a product-specific and division-specific organization. In the Disney example, the theme park division would also contain a functional structure within it (i.e., theme park accounting, theme park sales, theme park customer service, etc.).
Strategic Organizational Design
Structure becomes more difficult to change as companies evolve; for this reason, understanding which specific structure will function best within a given company environment is an important early step for the management team. Smaller companies function best as pre-bureaucratic or post-bureaucratic; the inherent adaptability and flexibility of the pre-bureaucratic structure is particularly effective for small companies aspiring to expand. Larger companies, on the other hand, achieve higher efficiency through functional, bureaucratic, divisional, and matrix structures (depending on the scale, scope, and complexity of operations).
McDonald’s fast-food restaurants departmentalize varying elements of their operation to optimize efficiency. This structure is divisional, meaning each specific company operation is segmented (for example, operations, finance/accounting, marketing, etc.).
2.4.3: Considering Technology
Technology impacts organizational design and productivity by enhancing the efficiency of communication and resource flow.
Learning Objective
Recognize the intrinsic structural value of the ever-evolving technological environment
Key Points
- Organizations use technological tools to enhance productivity and to initiate new and more efficient structural designs for the organization. These uses of technology become potential sources of economic value and competitive advantage.
- An example of an organizational structure emerging from newer technological trends is what some have called the “virtual organization,” which connects a network of organizations via the internet.
- A network structure is another kind of organizational structure that is heavily reliant upon technology for communication.
- More traditional organizational structures also benefit greatly from the advance of technology. Managers can communicate and delegate much more effectively through using technologies such as email, calendars, online presentations, and other virtual tools.
Key Terms
- supply chain
-
A system of organizations, people, technology, activities, information, and resources involved in moving a product or service from the supplier to the customer.
- network
-
Any interconnected group or system.
Organizational design can be defined narrowly as the strategic process of shaping an organization’s structure and roles to create or optimize capabilities for competition in a given market.
Technology is an important factor to consider in organizational design. Modern organizations can be treated as complex and adaptive systems that include a mix of human and technological interactions. Organizations can utilize technological tools to enhance productivity and to initiate new and more efficient structural designs for the organization, thereby adding potential sources of economic value and competitive advantage.
Technology
Technology has opened doors to incorporating new and advanced forms of organizational design. This is most notably seen through rapid global communications and the ability to constantly and economically be in contact.
Technological Organizational Structures
An example of an organizational structure that has emerged from newer technological trends is what some have called the “virtual organization,” which connects a network of organizations via the internet. Over the internet, an organization with a small core can still operate globally as a market leader in its niche. This can dramatically reduce costs and overhead, remove the necessity for an expensive office building, and enable small, dynamic teams to travel and conduct work wherever they are needed.
A similar organizational design that is heavily reliant upon technological capabilities is the network structure. While the network structure existed prior to recent technologies (i.e., affordable communications via internet, cell phones, etc.), the existence of complex telecommunications networks and logistics technologies has greatly increased the viability of this structure.
Technology and Traditional Structures
Technology can also affect other longstanding elements of an organization. For example, information systems allow managers to take a much more analytic view of their businesses than before the advent of such systems. Managers can communicate and delegate much more effectively through using technologies such as email, calendars, online presentations, and other virtual tools.
Technology has also impacted supply chain management—the management of a network of interconnected businesses involved in the provision of product and service packages required by the end customers in a supply chain. Supply chain management now has the capacity to track, forecast, predict, and refine the outbound logistics, contributing to a wide variety of logistical advantages (such as minimizing costs from warehousing, fuel, negative environmental impacts, or packaging).
Technology simplifies the process of managing reports, collecting communications, and keeping in touch, enabling management in more formal structures to take on more workers. Increases in technology have essentially allowed organizations to scale up their companies through more effective and efficient teams.
2.4.4: Considering the Organizational Life Cycle
The life cycle of an organization is important to consider when determining its overall design and structure.
Learning Objective
Describe the way in which life cycles influence an organization’s overall design and structure
Key Points
- From an organizational perspective, the “life cycle” can refer to various factors such as the age of the organization, the maturation of a particular product or process, or the maturation of the broader industry.
- In organizational ecology, the idea of age dependence is used to examine how an organization’s risk of mortality relates to its age. Richard L. Daft outlines different patterns of age dependence in his four stages model.
- The idea of the Enterprise Life Cycle in enterprise architecture argues for a life cycle concept as an overarching design strategy—a dynamic, iterative process of changing the enterprise over time by incorporating, maintaining, and disposing of new and existing elements of the enterprise.
- Companies must understand clearly where they are in their life cycle and what influence this will have on their optimal organizational structure.
Key Terms
- life cycle
-
The useful life of a product or system; the developmental history of an individual, group or entity.
- assessment
-
An appraisal or evaluation.
- strategy
-
A plan of action intended to accomplish a specific goal.
Organization design can be defined narrowly as the strategic process of shaping organizational structure and roles to create or optimize capabilities for competition in a given market. The life cycle of an organization, industry, and/or product can be an important factor in organization design.
The life cycle of a business
Organizations must always be striving to sustain their position in a given competitive environment. This often requires structural evolution and rapid iterations in the feedback loop of disruption, growth, refinement, and renewal.
Overview of the Life Cycle
From an organizational perspective, “life cycle” can refer to various factors such as the age of the organization itself, the maturation of a particular product or process, or the maturation of the broader industry. In organizational ecology, the idea of age dependence is used to examine how an organization’s risk of mortality relates to the age of that organization. Generally speaking, organizations go through the following stages:
- Birth
- Growth
- Maturity
- Decline
- Death
The Enterprise Life Cycle
The Enterprise Life Cycle is a model that underlines the way in which organizations remain relevant. The Enterprise Life Cycle is the dynamic, iterative process of changing an enterprise over time by incorporating new business processes, technologies, and capabilities, as well as maintaining, using, and disposing of existing elements of the enterprise.
Richard L. Daft’s Four Stages
Richard L. Daft theorized four stages of the organizational life cycle, each with critical transitions:
- Entrepreneurial stage → Crisis: Need for leadership
- Collectivity stage → Crisis: Need for delegation
- Formalization stage → Crisis: Too much red tape
- Elaboration stage → Crisis: Need for revitalization
Structural Implications of the Life Cycle
The life cycle of an organization is important to consider when making decisions about the organization’s structure and design. Richard L. Daft’s model underlines critical problems within each stage of an organization’s life cycle that can often be solved through intelligent structural design.
Daft first notes that the entrepreneurial (or startup) stage of an organization requires leadership. In this situation, decision-making must be enabled and bureaucracy should be minimized. This lends itself well to pre-bureaucratic stuctures in which everyone involved is empowered to take the reins and employ their creativity and innovation.
In the collectivity stage, momentum has been created and expansion is required. This is where functional or divisional strategies may begin to emerge, enabling managers to build teams and delegate tasks.
Companies continue to expand in the formalization stage, requiring increased bureaucracy and more levels of authority to approve a given decision. In this stage they grow large enough to accommodate functional, divisional, or even matrix structures in order to produce at scale. Organizations in this stage must be careful not to fall too strongly into rigid structures that inhibit or disrupt efficiency, communication, or decision-making.
The Enterprise Life Cycle comes strongly into play in the elaboration stage. During this stage the organization must retain its relevance in the industry through reinforcing competitive advantages and/or creating new products to fill changing consumer needs. This requires a great deal of organized creativity and exploration of new markets, which may justify team or divisional structures within the broader organizational structure. Such structures allow small teams to experiment and react quickly as they try new entrepreneurial strategies while the larger organization maintains operative efficiency in established markets.
2.5: Trends in Organization
2.5.1: Flattening Hierarchies
Flattening hierarchies can benefit smaller organizations by increasing employee empowerment, participation, and efficiency.
Learning Objective
Define a flattened hierarchy, specifically in which situations where the utilization of this model is appropriate and beneficial for an organization
Key Points
- A hierarchy can link entities either directly or indirectly; it can also link entities either vertically or horizontally. The only direct links in a hierarchy are to a person’s immediate superior or subordinates.
- The flat organization model essentially “flattens” the hierarchy and promotes employee involvement through a decentralized decision-making process.
- According to the logic behind this model, well-trained workers will be more productive when they are directly involved in the decision-making process rather than closely supervised by many layers of management.
- Flat organizations are most relevant in specific scenarios—most notably small organizations that are dependent upon creativity, freedom of action, and high-powered employees.
Key Term
- hierarchy
-
An arrangement of items in which each item is represented as being above, below, or at the same level as other items.
Links within Hierarchies
Hierarchies can be linked in several different ways. A hierarchy can link entities either directly or indirectly; it can also link entities either vertically or horizontally. The only direct links in a hierarchy are to a person’s immediate superior or subordinates. Parts of the hierarchy that are not linked vertically to one another can be horizontally linked through a path by traveling up the hierarchy; this path eventually reaches a common direct or indirect superior and then travels down the hierarchy again. An example of this would be two colleagues who each report to a common superior but have the same relative amount of authority in the organization.
Flat Hierarchies
Flat (or horizontal) organizational structures have few or no levels of intervening management between staff and managers. This “flattened” hierarchy promotes employee involvement through a decentralized decision-making process. The idea is that well-trained workers will be more productive when they are directly involved in the decision-making process rather than closely supervised by many layers of management.
Flat organization chart
This diagram illustrates the structure of a flat organization: there is no low- or mid-level management—just one manager and the rest of the staff.
Advantages of Flattened Hierarchies
Flat structures empower each individual within the company to be involved in decision-making processes. This allows for a great deal of creative discussion and operational diversity and tends to create great variance in new ideas. By elevating the level of responsibility of baseline employees and eliminating layers of middle management, comments and feedback can quickly reach all personnel involved in decisions. Response to customer feedback can be carried out more rapidly.
This type of structure generally works best in smaller organizations or individual units within larger organizations. Start-up companies, “mom and pop shops,” and other small independent businesses are the most common examples of a flat structure.
Disadvantages of Flattened Hierarchies
Flat organizations are difficult to maintain as companies grow larger and more complex. When organizations reach a critical size, they can retain a streamlined structure; however, they cannot keep a completely flat manager-to-staff hierarchy without impacting productivity. Certain financial responsibilities may also require a traditional hierarchical structure. While the flat structure can foster employee empowerment, involvement, and creativity, it can also create inefficiency in decision-making processes. Some theorize that flat organizations become more traditionally hierarchical when they gear themselves more toward productivity.
Because the interaction between workers is more frequent, this organizational structure generally depends on a more personal relationship between workers and managers. As a result, the structure can be more time-consuming to build than a traditional hierarchical model.
2.5.2: Decentralizing Responsibility
In decentralized structures, responsibility for decision making is broadly dispersed down to the lower levels of an organization.
Learning Objective
Compare and contrast centralization and decentralization of responsibility within the organizational hierarchy
Key Points
- Decentralization is the process of dispersing decision making authority among the people, citizens, employees, or other elements of an organization or sector.
- A decentralized organization shows fewer tiers in the organizational structure, a wider span of control, and a bottom-to-top flow of ideas and decision making.
- The bottom-to-top flow of information allows lower-level employees to better inform the officials of the organization during any decision making processes.
- When companies decentralize authority, however, there can be confusion as to how final decisions are made.
Key Terms
- governance
-
Accountability for consistent and cohesive policies, processes, and decision rights.
- authority
-
The power to enforce rules or give orders.
- mechanistic organization
-
A bureaucratic structure.
Decentralization is the process of dispersing decision making authority among the people, citizens, employees, or other elements of an organization or sector. In decentralized structures, responsibility for decision making and accountability are broadly dispersed down to the lower levels of an organization. This dispersion can be intentional or unintentional. A decentralized organization tends to show fewer tiers in its organizational structure (less hierarchy), a wider span of control, and a bottom-to-top or horizontal flow of decision making and ideas.
Decentralization
The management structure in a decentralized organization changes from a top-down approach to more of a peer-to-peer approach.
Contrasting Centralized and Decentralized Structures
In a centralized organization, decisions are made by top executives on the basis of current policies. These decisions or policies are then enforced through several tiers of hierarchy within the organization, gradually broadening the span of control until they reach the bottom tier.
In a decentralized organization, the top executives delegate much of their decision making authority to lower tiers of the organizational structure. This type of structure tends to be seen in organizations that run on less rigid policies and wider spans of control among each officer of the organization. The wider spans of control also reduce the number of tiers within the organization, giving its structure a flat appearance .
Decentralized organizational chart
This image illustrates a decentralized (often referred to as a “flat”) organizational chart. Note that there are not multiple layers of management; there is one manager and then the rest of the staff. This means that each staff-person necessarily has more responsibility and therefore more autonomy.
Advantages of Decentralization
One advantage of this structure—if the correct controls are in place—is the bottom-up flow of information. This flow allows lower-level employees to better inform the officials of the organization during any decision making processes. For example, if an experienced technician at the lowest tier of an organization knows how to increase the efficiency of the production, the bottom-to-top flow of information can allow this knowledge to pass up to the executive officers.
Disadvantages of Decentralization
On the other side of the argument, when companies decentralize authority there can be confusion as to how final decisions are made. It can be difficult to empower multiple people without certain decisions negatively interacting with other decisions. Decentralized organizations must be mindful of the possibility of running in too many different directions at once. Because of this, decentralization is most effective in organizations that have transparent strategies, a strong mission, and a clear vision.
2.5.3: Increasing Empowerment
Modern organizations are more aware of the value of empowered employees and actively strive to structurally increase empowerment.
Learning Objective
Discuss the advantages of empowerment in an organization, and how organizational structure can improve upon the promotion of empowered employees
Key Points
- Empowerment is a process that enables individuals and groups to fully access their personal and collective power, authority, and influence, and to employ this power when engaging with other people, other institutions, or society.
- Leaders within an organization can play a strong role in encouraging employees to put empowerment into practice.
- To enable empowerment, managers can share information, provide employees with autonomy, and migrate to self-managed teams when possible.
- Though the idea of empowerment can produce successful results, it is important to understand the risks. More decision-makers means more discussion about how a process should be accomplished and more moving parts within the organization, increasing complexity.
Key Term
- empowerment
-
The accessing and employing of political, social, or economic power by an individual or group.
Defining Empowerment
Empowerment is a process that enables individuals and groups to fully access personal and collective power and employ this power when engaging with other people, other institutions, or society. Empowerment does not give people power; rather, it helps to release and express the power that people already have.
Empowerment encourages people to gain the skills and knowledge that allows them to overcome obstacles in life and work. This will ultimately enable personal development and a deeper sense of professional fulfillment. Empowering people in organizations can encourage more confident, capable, and motivated employees. Organizations are increasingly aware that empowerment often leads to better performance and higher operational efficiency, and there is a general trend toward structuring organizations for empowerment.
Empowerment within the Organization
Empowering employees in the workplace means providing them with opportunities to make their own decisions related to their tasks. This can be a powerful and positive aspect within an organization that promotes shared power and enables checks and balances in decision-making processes.
Empowerment in organizations includes:
- Making decisions about personal and collective circumstances;
- Accessing information and resources for decision-making;
- Considering a range of options from which to choose (and understanding the options rather than just deciding yes or no);
- Exercising assertiveness in collective decision-making;
- Employing positive thoughts toward the ability to make change;
- Learning and accessing skills for improving personal and collective circumstances; and
- Informing others’ perceptions though exchange, education, and engagement.
Though the idea of empowerment can produce very successful results, there are certain risks are involved. When turning responsibility over to others, it is important to keep in mind that diversifying power creates more voices and therefore potentially more conflict and discussion. All of these elements can slow down the decision-making process. As organizations move toward higher levels of empowerment, protocols should be put in place to mitigate failure and improve decision-making efficiency across the board.
Decentralization
One key technique of empowering employees and providing autonomy is decentralizing the organizational structure. Notice how the diagram of the centralized organization looks like one large asterisk with many spokes, whereas the diagram of the decentralized organization looks like many small interconnected asterisks.
Increasing Empowerment
Leaders within an organization can encourage employees to put empowerment into practice in several ways. If leaders want to tap into the possibilities of an empowerment-based company, they need to have confidence in employees. Employees should also be given opportunities to make their own decisions and succeed. For an empowerment-based organization, rules and policies that interfere with self-management should be made more lenient. Leaders should also set goals that can inspire people.
The following are three key concepts that leaders can use to empower employees throughout an organization:
- Share information with everyone. By sharing information with everyone, leaders gain a clear picture of the company and its current situation. Allowing all employees to view company information helps to build trust between employers and employees. This also provides decision-makers with important perspectives to assess prior to deciding.
- Create autonomy through boundaries. By opening communication through information sharing, space can be created for feedback and dialogue about what holds people back from being empowered. It is critical that leaders minimize micro-management so that employees, who are specialists at the function they are assigned, can set the tone for how a particular task is accomplished.
- Replace the old hierarchy with self-managed teams. By replacing the old hierarchy with self-managed teams, more responsibility is placed upon unique and self-managed teams; this can lead to better communication, diversity of strategies, and higher performance.
The success of the modern organization relies heavily on understanding the complexity of a diverse global market. Leveraging employee knowledge and enabling autonomy is increasingly important in capturing value and attaining competitive advantages in this complex business environment.
2.5.4: Increasing Adaptation
In order to succeed, modern organizations must constantly adapt to evolving technologies and expanding global markets.
Learning Objective
Identify the importance and inherent value of increasing adaptation within company structures and performance
Key Points
- Technological advances, global market expansions, and the potential for constant (sometimes disruptive) innovation all point to the need for organizations to be adaptive.
- Blockbuster and Netflix provide a classic example: in this case, Blockbuster was simply too slow to adapt to the demand for live-streaming videos.
- If an organization takes on the identity of a growing, adapting, and learning organization, these qualities become part of the fabric of how it operates.
- Implementing an adaptable strategy may have effects that ripple across an organization. Minimizing disruption can reduce costs and save time.
- Resistance to change is considered a major obstacle to creating effective adaptability in an organization. Integrating changes step by step while utilizing focus groups and training sessions can improve the efficacy of adaptation.
Key Term
- adaptation
-
Adjustment to extant conditions; modification of a thing or its parts in a way that makes it more fit for existence under the conditions of its current environment.
The Importance of Adaptation
Organizational adaption is becoming increasingly relevant to both strategy and structure as the business environment changes more quickly each year. Technological innovations, global market expansions, and the potential for constant (sometimes disruptive) innovation all point to the need for organizations to be adaptive.
There are a number of examples in which some organizations have adapted to new technologies or global competition, while others have failed to adapt and subsequently gone under. Blockbuster and Netflix provide a classic example: in this case, Blockbuster was simply too slow to adapt to the demand for live-streaming videos. Netflix, on the other hand, embraced this technological evolution and pioneered a user-friendly interface, gaining the company enormous value.
Increasing Adaptation
Strategic management largely pertains to adapting an organization to its business environment. The greatest agent for organizational change is the socialization aspect of culture, which can be empowered structurally. If an organization takes on the identity of a growing, adapting, and learning organization, these qualities become part of the fabric of how it operates. Knowing how and being able to increase this adaptability is important to organizational success.
Implementing a strategy of adaptation may have effects that ripple across an organization. Increasing an organization’s ability to adapt to change and minimize disruption can reduce costs and save time. One approach for increasing adaptation is to appoint an individual to champion the changes, address and eventually enlist opponents, and proactively identify and mitigate problems.
Challenges in Adaptation
Resistance to change is considered a major obstacle to creating effective adaptability in an organization. Organizational change can lead to loss of stability and—if this instability becomes great enough—loss of organizational effectiveness.
Organizational loss of effectiveness (LOE)
Organizational change can cause a loss of stability and results in the development of a predictable and measurable set of symptoms within an organization. When a significant number of these symptoms are present simultaneously, an organizational loss of effectiveness (LOE) will occur (Grady, 2005).
The following are methods that can be employed to help an organization and its staff to cope with change:
- Form focus groups. Staff from different departments can be selected to form focus groups, where quality data can be collected. In focus group discussions, staff should be given the chance to freely express their opinions and share their experiences.
- Provide training. Providing training courses to staff on new processes or structures can help to increase staff competence and reduce their resistance to change.
- Implement changes step by step. This involves first implementing the system in small groups—such as several departments or sections—and then widening the scope of implementation. This step-by-step approach can help by exposing problems raised simultaneously across the small groups and providing management with sufficient time to solve these problems before implementing the system across the organization.
2.5.5: Moving to Flexible Work Schedules
Employers can offer flexible working arrangements in the form of flextime and telecommuting work.
Learning Objective
Identify critical factors of success in creating a “telework” organization
Key Points
- Companies have begun to recognize how important a healthy work-life balance is to the productivity and creativity of their employees. Integrating new technologies for flexible schedules is a great opportunity to capture this value.
- Flextime and telecommuting (telework) are popular strategies that enable employees to set their own schedules and work from wherever is most convenient for them.
- In addition to supporting the required incremental technologies, a well-functioning telework organization needs a management system that is at least as effective as that of a traditional organization.
- Management teams face additional issues such as how to supervise employees who are often out of the office, how to monitor staff productivity with less personal interaction, how to build a strong virtual team, and how to maintain relationships between remote employees.
Key Term
- telecommute
-
To work from home, sometimes for part of a working day or week, using a computer connected to the employer’s network or via the internet.
Companies have begun to recognize how important a healthy work-life balance is to the productivity and creativity of their employees. Research by Kenexa Research Institute in 2007 showed that employees who were more favorable toward their organization’s efforts to support work-life balance also indicated a lower intent to leave the organization, greater pride in their organization, a willingness to recommend the organization as a place to work, and higher overall job satisfaction.
Employers can offer a range of different programs and initiatives that support such a work-life balance. Flexible working arrangements such as flextime and telecommuting work are becoming increasingly popular. More proactive employers can also provide compulsory leave, implement strict maximum hours, or foster an environment that encourages employees not to continue working after hours.
Telecommuting
Telecommuting (or telework) is a work arrangement in which employees do not commute to a central place of work. A person who telecommutes is known as a “telecommuter,” “teleworker,” or “home-sourced employee.” Many telecommuters work from home while others—sometimes called “nomad workers”—use mobile telecommunications technology to work from coffee shops or other locations. This allows employees the flexibility of adapting their work schedule to their living situation.
This arrangement is also quite popular in circumstances of sick leave, pregnancy, parenting, and other important life events. In the past these events could have resulted in temporary loss of employment. Being able to work from anywhere with an internet connection is a modern luxury that adaptable companies should be well aware of.
Home office
This small office is designed for telecommuting.
Flextime
Flextime (also called flexitime or flexi-time) is a variable work schedule, unlike traditional work arrangements in which employees work a standard 9 a.m. to 5 p.m. shift. In this arrangement, there is typically a core period of approximately 50% of the total working day when employees are expected to be at work (for example, between 11 a.m. and 3 p.m.). The rest of the working day is “flextime” in which employees can choose when they work. Employees are still required to complete the necessary work and achieve total daily, weekly, or monthly hours in the region of what the employer expects.
A flextime policy allows staff to determine when they will work, and a flexplace policy allows staff to determine where they will work. These strategies allow employees to adapt their work hours based on public transport schedules, child-care responsibilities, rush-hour traffic, and other elements.
Establishing a Telework Organization
In addition to supporting the required incremental technologies, a well-functioning telework organization needs a management system that is at least as effective as that of a traditional organization. Management teams face additional issues such as how to supervise employees who are often out of the office, how to monitor staff productivity with less personal interaction, how to build a strong virtual team, and how to maintain relationships between remote employees.
Some suggested best practices for maintaining a successful telework organization include:
- Develop a daily schedule. Setting a standardized daily schedule can help remote teleworkers feel as though they are really at work. It can also make it easier for supervisors to monitor staff activities and can lead to increased productivity.
- Establish milestone dates. Milestone dates help keep projects on track and make it easier to spot problems while there is still time to effectively deal with them.
- Encourage social networking. Employee surveys show that being able to keep in touch and communicate with colleagues despite physical distance can boost employee satisfaction and encourage top talent to stick around.
- Address problems right away. Respond to problems immediately even if they are reported by email or text message. This will prevent teleworkers from feeling isolated.
- Design key performance indicators (KPIs) for remote workers. These KPIs can also be used to measure the effectiveness of in-office staff and maintain an equivalence among the distinct employee categories.
- Start workdays by holding a five-minute team video-conference. This helps supervisors to maintain a regular check-in routine; it also enables employees to catch up on team work progress and feel connected to the whole organization.
- Manage by observation. A successful telework or telecommuting program requires a management style that is results-oriented (as opposed to task-oriented). This is referred to as management by objectives as opposed to management by observation.
2.5.6: Increasing Coordination
Increasing coordination helps organizations to maintain efficient operations through communication and control.
Learning Objective
Identify the way in which effective coordination across an organization can be increased through effective structure and good management
Key Points
- Coordination is a managerial function in which different activities of the business are properly adjusted and interlinked.
- The management team must pay special attention to issues related to coordination and governance and be able to improve upon coordination through effective management.
- Managers should strengthen communication across all facets of the organization to increase the level of integration between each moving part.
- If there is a lack of coordination, there is a risk that responsibility will become dispersed and tasks will be left unclaimed. Organizing accountability for every task helps to ensure that efforts are tangibly coordinated.
Key Terms
- division
-
A section of a large company.
- margin
-
A permissible difference; allowing some freedom to move within limits.
- centralization
-
The act or process of combining or reducing several parts into a whole.
Defining Coordination
Coordination is the act of organizing and enabling different people to work together to achieve an organization’s goals. It is a managerial function in which different activities of the business are properly adjusted and interlinked.
Employees within the functional divisions of an organization tend to perform a specialized set of tasks, such as engineering. This leads to operational efficiency within that group. However, it can also lead to a lack of communication between various functional groups within an organization, rendering the organization slow and inflexible .
Organizational structure
This is an example of an organizational structure. At a high level are multiple functional groups, or “modules”—technical, marketing, and intellectual property. The linked working groups (e.g., data coding workgroup, security workgroup, and audio and video compression workgroup) within the technical functional group likely have coordinated functions.
Increasing Coordination
Coordination is simply the managerial ability to maintain operations and ensure they are properly integrated with one another; therefore, increasing coordination is closely related to improving managerial skills. The management team must pay special attention to issues related to coordination and governance and be able to improve upon coordination through effective management.
Increasing coordination internally can be accomplished by keeping all moving parts of the organization on the same page. There are a number of ways to improve upon the coordination of different departments, work groups, teams, or functional specialists. These include creating a well-communicated and accurate mission statement; clearly defining strategic objectives; monitoring and evaluating each functional group; providing company-wide updates and communications from each department; and, wherever possible, promoting cross-departmental meetings and projects. While this list is long and complex, the underlying concept is relatively simple: managers should strengthen communication across all facets of the organization to increase the level of integration between each moving part.
Structural Implications
In practice, coordination involves a delicate balance between centralization and decentralization. However, maintaining coordination does not necessarily imply that decision-making processes are centralized or that actions are carried out without the support of employees. Put simply, it is important to ensure that there is a person or team in place that takes responsibility for general tasks.
If there is a lack of coordination, there is a risk that responsibility will become dispersed and tasks will be left unclaimed. Organizing accountability for every task helps to ensure that efforts are tangibly coordinated and provides structure to operational expectations. Structure is a central determinant of effective coordination across an organization as it enables communications, underlines responsibilities, and provides concrete authority in decision-making.
Chapter 1: Introduction to Management
1.1: Principles of Management
1.1.1: Defining Management
Management is the act of engaging with an organization’s human talent and its resources to accomplish desired goals and objectives.
Learning Objective
Outline the theoretical scope and basic function that represent managerial responsibilities within a company
Key Points
- Management comprises planning, organizing, staffing, leading/directing, and controlling an organization (a group of one or more people or entities) or effort for the purpose of accomplishing a goal.
- In for-profit work, the primary function of management is meeting the needs of various stakeholders of the organization, such as customers, debtors, and owners.
- In the public sector of countries that are representative democracies, voters elect politicians to public office, who then hire managers and administrators to oversee the everyday responsibilities that support those elected to office.
- Since an organization can be viewed as a type of system, managers provide the necessary human action, so the organizational system produces planned outcomes or goals desired by the various stakeholders.
Key Terms
- shareholder
-
Through owning stock, the real owner of a publicly traded business that is run by management.
- theoretical
-
Of or relating to the underlying principles or methods of a given technical skill, art, etc., as opposed to its practice.
- stakeholders
-
Persons or organizations with a legitimate interest in a given situation, action, or enterprise which are directly affected by the organization’s actions.
Overview
Management is the act of engaging with an organization’s human talent and using the physical resources at a manager’s disposal to accomplish desired goals and objectives efficiently and effectively. Management comprises planning, organizing, staffing, leading, directing, and controlling an organization (a group of one or more people or entities) or effort for the purpose of accomplishing a goal.
One of the most important duties for a manager is effectively using an organization’s resources. This duty involves deploying and manipulating human resources (or human capital), as well as efficiently allocating the organization’s financial, technological, and natural resources.
Since organizations can be viewed as systems, management can also be defined as human action, such as product design, that enables the system to produce useful outcomes. This view suggests that we must manage ourselves as a prerequisite to attempting to manage others.
Theoretical Scope
At first, management may be considered as a type of function, one which measures financial metrics, adjusts strategic plans, and meets organizational goals. This applies even in situations where planning does not take place. From this perspective, Henri Fayol (1841–1925) considers management to consist of six functions: forecasting, planning, organizing, commanding, coordinating, and controlling. He was one of the most influential contributors to modern concepts of management.
In another way of thinking, Mary Parker Follett (1868–1933) defined management as “the art of getting things done through people.” She described management as philosophy. Some people, however, find this definition useful but far too narrow. The phrase “management is what managers do” occurs widely, suggesting the difficulty of defining management, the shifting nature of definitions, and the connection of managerial practices with the existence of a managerial cadre or class.
Another perspective regards management as equivalent to “business administration” and thus excludes management in places outside commerce, for example in charities and in the public sector. More realistically, however, every organization must manage its work, people, processes, technology, etc. to maximize effectiveness and accomplish its goals.
Nature of Managerial Work
In the for-profit environment, management is tasked primarily with meeting the needs of a range of stakeholders. This typically involves making a profit (for the shareholders), creating valued products at a reasonable cost (for customers), and providing rewarding employment opportunities (for employees). Nonprofit management has the added importance of attracting and retaining donors.
In most models of management/governance, shareholders vote for the board of directors, and the board then hires senior management. Some organizations have experimented with other methods (such as employee-voting models) of selecting or reviewing managers, but this occurs only very rarely. In the public sector of countries that are representative democracies, voters elect politicians to public office. Such politicians hire managers and administrators.
Several historical shifts in management have occurred throughout the ages. Towards the end of the 20th century, business management came to consist of six separate branches, namely:
- Human resource management
- Operations management or production management
- Strategic management
- Marketing management
- Financial management
- Information technology management (responsible for the management information systems)
Basic Functions
Management operates through various functions, such as planning, organizing, staffing, leading/directing, controlling/monitoring, and motivating.
- Planning: Deciding what needs to happen in the future (today, next week, next month, next year, over the next five years, etc.) and generating plans for action.
- Organizing: Implementing a pattern of relationships among workers and making optimum use of the resources required to enable the successful carrying out of plans.
- Staffing: Job analysis, recruitment, and hiring of people with the necessary skills for appropriate jobs. Providing or facilitating ongoing training, if necessary, to keep skills current.
- Leading/directing: Determining what needs to be done in a situation and getting people to do it.
- Controlling/monitoring: Checking current outcomes against forecast plans and making adjustments when necessary so that goals are achieved.
- Motivating: Motivation is a basic function of management because without motivation, employees may feel disconnected from their work and the organization, which can lead to ineffective performance. If managers do not motivate their employees, they may not feel their work is contributing to the overall goals of the organization (which are usually set by top-level management).
Mary Parker Follett
Mary Parker Follett defined management as “the art of getting things done through people.”
1.1.2: Fulfilling the Organizing Function
Management organizes by creating patterns of relationships among workers, optimizing use of resources to accomplish business objectives.
Learning Objective
Define the organizing function within a business framework, specifically the generation of structure and authority
Key Points
- The organizing function typically follows the planning stage. Specific organizing duties involve the assignment of tasks, the grouping of tasks into departments, the assignment of authority, and the allocation of resources across the organization.
- Authority is a manager’s formal and legitimate right to make decisions, issue orders, and allocate resources to achieve organization’s objectives. Types of authority include line, functional, and staff.
- Organizations will use different structural strategies, which significantly affects the chain of command and decision-making process within an organization. These structures include centralized, decentralized, tall, and flat.
- When approaching an organization within a company or institution, it is important to understand the implications of different structures as they pertain to the strategy and operations of the company.
Key Terms
- controller
-
A person who audits and manages the financial affairs of a company or government; a comptroller.
- delegation
-
The act of commiting a task to someone, especially a subordinate.
- organizing
-
To constitute in parts, each having a special function, act, office, or relation.
- capital expenditure
-
Funds spent by a company to acquire or upgrade a long-term asset.
Management and Organization
Management operates through various functions, often classified as planning, organizing, staffing, leading/directing, controlling/monitoring, and motivating. The organizing function creates the pattern of relationships among workers and makes optimal use of resources to enable the accomplishment of business plans and objectives.
The organizing function typically follows the planning stage. Specific organizing duties involve the assignment of tasks, the grouping of tasks into departments, and the assignment of authority and allocation of resources across the organization.
The management process
The management process involves tasks and goals of planning, organizing, directing, and controlling.
Structure
Structure is the framework in which the organization defines how tasks are divided, resources are deployed, and departments are coordinated. It is a set of formal tasks assigned to individuals and departments. Formal reporting relationships include lines of authority, decision responsibility, number of hierarchical levels, and span of managers’ control. Structure is also the design of systems to ensure effective coordination of employees across departments.
Authority/Chain of Command
Authority is a manager’s formal and legitimate right to make decisions, issue orders, and allocate resources to achieve desired outcomes for an organization. Responsibility is an employee’s duty to perform assigned tasks or activities. Accountability means that those with authority and responsibility must report and justify task outcomes to those above them in the chain of command.
Through delegation, managers transfer authority and responsibility to their subordinates. Organizations today tend to encourage delegation from the highest to lowest possible levels. Delegation can improve flexibility to meet customers’ needs and to adapt to competitive environments. Managers may find delegation difficult, since control over the task assigned (and eventual outcome) is relinquished.
One critical risk of command chains is micromanagement, where managers fail to delegate effectively and exercise excessive control over their subordinates’ projects. Micromanagement reduces efficiency and limits autonomy, thus limiting the adaptability of a given organization. Effective chains of command must allow for flexibility and efficient delegation.
Types of Authority (and Responsibility)
- Line authority: Managers have the formal power to direct and control immediate subordinates executing specific tasks within a chain of command, usually within a specific department. The superior issues orders and is responsible for the result; the subordinate obeys and is responsible only for executing the order according to instructions.
- Functional authority: Managers have formal power over a specific subset of activities that include outside departments. For instance, a production manager may have the line authority to decide whether and when a new machine is needed, but a controller with functional authority requires that a capital expenditure proposal be submitted first, showing that the investment in a new machine will yield a minimum return. The legal department may also have functional authority to interfere in any activity that could have legal consequences. For example, a purchase contract for a new machine cannot be approved without a review of the machine’s safety standards.
- Staff authority: Staff specialists manage operations in their areas of expertise. Staff authority is not real authority because a staff manager does not order or instruct but simply advises, recommends, and counsels in the staff specialists’ area of expertise; the manager is responsible only for the quality of the advice (in line with the respective professional standards, etc.). Staff authority represents a communication relationship with management. It has an influence that derives indirectly from line authority at a higher level.
Organizational Structure and Control/Decision-Making
- Tall structure: A management structure characterized by an overall narrow span of management, a relatively large number of hierarchical levels, tight control, and reduced communication overhead. Decision-making can be quite rapid, if it occurs from the top down.
- Flat structure: A management structure characterized by a wide span of control and relatively few hierarchical levels, loose control, and ease of delegation. Decision-making is often slower, as it involves a high degree of integration across the company.
- Centralization: The location of decision making authority near top organizational levels. Similar to a tall structure, this expedites decision-making from the top down.
- Decentralization: The location of decision making authority is relatively evenly dispersed across the company. This works well when creativity and independent operations create value for the organization.
As each structure will create a different organizational approach to operations, it is critical to consider how the selection of a structure will affect the business process. Enabling creativity and minimizing control often comes at the cost of speed and efficiency, and vice versa.
1.1.3: Fulfilling the Controlling Function
Management control can be defined as a systematic effort to compare performance to predetermined standards and address deficiencies.
Learning Objective
Outline the characteristics and elements of the controlling function
Key Points
- Control is a continuous and forward-looking process designed to objectively benchmark operations with the projected plan or projections.
- The four basic elements in a control system are: the characteristic or condition to be controlled, the sensor, the comparator, and the activator.
- Control is a continuous process.
- Control is a continuous and forward-looking process designed to benchmark operations with the projected plan or projections.
Key Terms
- Systematic
-
Methodical, regular, and orderly.
- control
-
Influence or authority over.
- hierarchy
-
An arrangement of items in which the items are represented as being “above,” “below,” or “at the same level as” one another.
Control
In 1916, Henri Fayol formulated one of the first definitions of control as it pertains to management: “Control consists of verifying whether everything occurs in conformity with the plan adopted, the instructions issued, and principles established. It’s object is to point out weaknesses and errors in order to rectify [them] and prevent recurrence.”
Management control can be defined as a systematic effort by business management to compare performance to predetermined standards, plans, or objectives in order to determine whether performance is in line with these standards. It is also used to determine if any remedial action is required to ensure that human and other corporate resources are being used in the most effective and efficient way possible to achieve corporate objectives.
Control can also be defined as “that function of the system that adjusts operations as needed to achieve the plan, or to maintain variations from system objectives within allowable limits.” The control subsystem functions in close harmony with the operating system. The degree to which they interact depends on the nature of the operating system and its objectives. Stability concerns a system’s ability to maintain a pattern of output without wide fluctuations. Rapidity of response pertains to the speed with which a system can correct variations and return to expected output.
From these definitions, the close link between planning and controlling can be seen. Planning is a process by which an organization’s objectives and the methods to achieve the objectives are established, and controlling is a process that measures and directs the actual performance against the planned goals of the organization. Therefore, goals and objectives are often referred to as the siamese twins of management: the managerial function of management and the correction of performance in order to ensure that enterprise objectives and the goals devised to attain them are being accomplished.
Characteristics of Control
Control has several characteristics. It may be described as being:
- A continuous process.
- A management process.
- Embedded in each level of organizational hierarchy.
- Forward-looking.
- Closely linked with planning.
- A tool for achieving organizational activities.
- An end process.
The Elements of Control
The four basic elements in a control system:
- The characteristic or condition to be controlled – We select a specific characteristic because a correlation exists between it and how the system is performing. The characteristic may be the output of the system during any stage of processing or it may be a condition that is the result of the system. For example, in an elementary school system, the hours a teacher works or the gain in knowledge demonstrated by the students on a national examination are examples of characteristics that may be selected for measurement, or control.
- The sensor – This is the means for measuring the characteristic or condition. For example, in a home-heating system, this device would be the thermostat; and in a quality-control system, this measurement might be performed by a visual inspection of the product.
- The comparator – This determines the need for correction by comparing what is occurring with what has been planned. Some deviation from the plan is usual and expected, but when variations are beyond those considered acceptable, corrective action is required. It involves a sort of preventative action to indicate that good control is being achieved.
- The activator – This is the corrective action taken to return the system to expected output. The actual person, device, or method used to direct corrective inputs into the operating system may take a variety of forms. It may be a hydraulic controller positioned by a solenoid or electric motor in response to an electronic error signal, an employee directed to rework the parts that failed to pass quality inspection, or a school principal who decides to buy additional books to provide for an increased number of students. As long as a plan is performed within allowable limits, corrective action is not necessary; however, this seldom occurs in practice.
These occur in the same sequence and maintain a consistent relationship to each other in every system.
1.1.4: Fulfilling the Leading Function
Managers lead their organizations and can vary their style and approach to achieve the desired outcome.
Learning Objective
Identify the key characteristics and considerations of the leadership function within the organizational framework
Key Points
- Leaders who demonstrate persistence, tenacity, determination, and synergistic communication skills will bring out the same qualities in their groups.
- Leadership can be viewed as either individualistic or group-based and can be considered “transactional” (i.e. procedures, rewards, etc.) or “transformational” (i.e. charisma, creativity, etc. ).
- A leadership style is often determined by context, whereas the degree of control (autocratic or democratic) may alter based upon the situation or process being managed.
- Positive reinforcement is an example of a leadership technique. This reinforcement occurs when a positive stimulus is presented in response to a behavior, increasing the likelihood of that behavior in the future.
Key Term
- laissez-faire
-
In business, an environment in which an organization’s employees are free from excessive oversight or management, with sufficient control only to ensure organizational goals are met.
Defining Leadership
Over the years the philosophical terms “management” and “leadership” have been used both as synonyms and with clearly differentiated meanings. Debate is fairly common about whether the use of these terms should be restricted and generally reflects an awareness of the distinction made by Burns (1978) between “transactional” leadership (characterized by emphasis on procedures, contingent reward, management by exception) and “transformational” leadership (characterized by charisma, personal relationships, creativity). Management is often associated with the former and leadership with the latter.
Leaders who demonstrate persistence, tenacity, determination, and synergistic communication skills will bring out the same qualities in their groups. Good leaders use their own inner mentors to energize their team and organizations and lead a team to achieve success.
Group Leadership
In contrast to individual leadership, some organizations have adopted group leadership. In this situation, more than one person provides direction to the group as a whole. Some organizations have taken this approach in hopes of increasing creativity, reducing costs, or downsizing. Others may see the traditional leadership of a boss as costing too much in team performance. In some situations, the team members best able to handle any given phase of the project become the temporary leaders. Additionally, staff experiences energy and success when each team member has access to elevated levels of empowerment.
Leadership Styles
A leadership style is a leader’s approach towards providing direction, implementing plans, and motivating people. It is the result of the philosophy, personality, and experience of the leader. Rhetoric specialists have also developed models for understanding leadership (Robert Hariman, Political Style; Philippe-Joseph Salazar, L’Hyperpolitique. Technologies politiques De La Domination).
Engaging Style of Leadership
Different styles of leadership can achieve the leading function.
Different situations call for different leadership styles. In an emergency, when there is little time to reach an agreement and where a designated authority has significantly more experience or expertise than the rest of the team, an autocratic leadership style may be most effective. However, in a highly motivated and aligned team, with a homogeneous level of expertise, a more democratic or laissez-faire style may be more effective. The leadership style adopted should be the one that most effectively achieves the objectives of the group while balancing the interests of its individual members.
Positive Reinforcement
Anyone thinking about managing a team must consider positive reinforcement. B.F. Skinner, the father of behavior modification, developed this concept. Positive reinforcement occurs when a positive stimulus is presented in response to a behavior, increasing the likelihood of that behavior in the future.
The following is an example of how positive reinforcement can be used in a business setting. Assume praise is a positive reinforcement for a particular employee. This employee does not show up to work on time every day. The manager of this employee decides to praise the employee for showing up on time when the employee actually does so. As a result, the employee comes to work on time more often because the employee likes to be praised. In this example, praise (the stimulus) is a positive reinforcement for this employee because the employee arrives at work on time (the behavior) more frequently after being praised for it.
The use of positive reinforcement is a successful and growing technique used by leaders to motivate and attain desired behaviors from subordinates. Organizations, such as Frito-Lay, 3M, Goodrich, Michigan Bell, and Emery Air Freight, have all used reinforcement to increase productivity. Empirical research covering the last 20 years suggests that reinforcement theory has a 17% increase in performance. Additionally, many reinforcement techniques, such as the use of praise, are inexpensive and provide higher performance and employee satisfaction for lower costs.
1.1.5: Fulfilling the Planning Function
Planning is the process of thinking about and organizing the activities required to achieve strategic objectives.
Learning Objective
Illustrate the primary considerations and influencing factors for organizations when pursuing strategic planning
Key Points
- Planning involves the maintenance and organizational approach of achieving strategic objectives.
- To meet objectives, managers may develop plans such as a business plan or a marketing plan.
- Strategic planning is an organization’s process of defining its strategy or direction and making decisions about how to allocate its resources to pursue this strategy.
- When pursuing strategic planning, organizations should ask themselves what they do, for whom do they do it, and how they can excel (or differentiate from) competitors.
- The execution of the planning function requires a comprehensive understanding (or generation of) a vision, mission, set of values, and general strategy.
Key Terms
- strategy
-
A plan of action intended to accomplish a specific goal.
- allocating
-
The act of distributing a given set of resources according to a plan.
- forecasting
-
The act of estimating future outcomes.
Planning
Planning is the process of thinking about and organizing the activities required to achieve a desired goal. Planning involves the creation and maintenance of a given organizational operation. This thought process is essential to the refinement of objectives and their integration with other plans. Planning combines forecasting of developments with preparing scenarios for how to react to those developments. An important, albeit often ignored, aspect of planning is the relationship it holds with forecasting. Forecasting can be described as predicting what the future will look like, whereas planning predicts what the future should look like.
Research planning
Planning involves the creation and maintenance of a plan.
Planning is also a management process, concerned with defining goals for a company’s future direction and determining the missions and resources to achieve those targets. To meet objectives, managers may develop plans, such as a business plan or a marketing plan. The purpose may be achievement of certain goals or targets. Planning revolves largely around identifying the resources available for a given project and utilizing optimally to achieve best scenario outcomes.
Strategic Planning
Strategic planning is an organization’s process of defining its strategy or direction and making decisions about allocating its resources to pursue this strategy. To determine the direction of the organization, it is necessary to understand its current position and the possible avenues through which it can pursue a particular course of action. Generally, strategic planning deals with at least one of three key questions:
- What do we do?
- For whom do we do it?
- How do we excel?
The key components of strategic planning include an understanding of the firm’s vision, mission, values, and strategies. (Often a “vision statement” and a “mission statement” may encapsulate the vision and mission. )
- Vision: This outlines what the organization wants to be or how it wants the world in which it operates to be (an “idealized” view of the world). It is a long-term view and concentrates on the future. It can be emotive and is a source of inspiration. For example, a charity working with the poor might have a vision statement that reads “A World without Poverty.”
- Mission: It defines the fundamental purpose of an organization or an enterprise, succinctly describing why it exists and what it does to achieve its vision. For example, the charity above might have a mission statement as “providing jobs for the homeless and unemployed.”
- Values: These are beliefs that are shared among the stakeholders of an organization. Values drive an organization’s culture and priorities and provide a framework in which decisions are made. For example, “knowledge and skills are the keys to success,” or “give a man bread and feed him for a day, but teach him to farm and feed him for life.” These example values place the priorities of self-sufficiency over shelter.
- Strategy: Strategy, narrowly defined, means “the art of the general”—a combination of the ends (goals) for which the firm is striving and the means (policies) by which it is seeking to get there. A strategy is sometimes called a roadmap, which is the path chosen to move towards the end vision. The most important part of implementing the strategy is ensuring the company is going in the right direction, which is towards the end vision.
Tools and Approaches
There are many approaches to strategic planning, but typically one of the following is used:
- Situation-Target-Proposal: Situation – Evaluate the current situation and how it came about. Target – Define goals and/or objectives (sometimes called ideal state). Path/Proposal – Map a possible route to the goals/objectives.
- Draw-See-Think-Plan: Draw – What is the ideal image or the desired end state? See – What is today’s situation? What is the gap from ideal and why? Think – What specific actions must be taken to close the gap between today’s situation and the ideal state? Plan – What resources are required to execute the activities?
Among the most useful tools for strategic planning is a SWOT analysis (Strengths, Weaknesses, Opportunities, and Threats). The main objective of this tool is to analyze internal strategic factors (strengths and weaknesses attributed to the organization) and external factors beyond control of the organization (such as opportunities and threats).
1.2: Management Levels and Types
1.2.1: Top-Level Management
Top-level managers determine broad strategic strokes for the organization in general, and focus on the big picture.
Learning Objective
Understand the responsibilities and characteristics of top-level management
Key Points
- Vertically ordering managerial functions allows managers at different tiers to focus on different ranges or scopes of organizational behavior and strategy.
- One of the weaknesses of this type of managerial organization is that it can polarize power and salary, as well as create a rigid structure that reduces information flow.
- Top-level managers (such as CEOs) tend to be big-picture strategic thinkers with a substantial amount of experience in the industry and/or function they manage.
- The executive team focuses on determining long-term strategy, strategic alliances, large financial decisions, and management of stakeholders (and the board of directors).
Key Term
- hierarchical
-
Ranked in some order, often order of importance or power.
Some views on management revolve around vertical differentiation, or creating an hierarchical view of managers. This is useful to visualize in a chart, where top management is logically at the top, overseeing the entire organization. Middle managers are in the middle, acting as a bridge between upper management and certain work groups. Lower managers are task or process oriented, managing functional specialists and projects.
The Pros and Cons of Vertical Thinking
The primary advantage of this perspective is that different management professionals can view the organization from different angles. Top-level managers tend to focus mostly on strategy and bigger picture thinking, while middle managers focus on aligning a large work group towards shared objectives. Frontline management thrives in pursuing operational efficiency, hiring on entry and mid-level talent, and assessing performance.
On the downside, this tends to consolidate power at the top of the organization, of building steep corporate ladders and often heavily polarized income. It can also create one-way information flows, where top management creates plans without understanding the core processes of the organization. Managing organizations vertically can reduce flexibility and agility.
FedEx Organizational Structure
This is an organizational structure example that cleanly demonstrates a vertical delegation of managerial responsibilities. The higher the level of management, the broader their scope. This means that lower level managers have a high degree of detail-orientation.
Top-level Management
Core Characteristics
High level managers tend to have a substantial amount of experience, ideally across a wide variety of functions. Many high-level managers become part of an executive team by mastering their functional disciplines across various roles, becoming the Chief Operations Officer (COO), Chief Marketing Officer (CMO), Chief Technology Officer (CIO or CTO), Chief Financial Officer (CFO) or Chief Executive Officer (CEO).
Top management teams are also often industry experts, having a close association with the long term trajectory of the businesses they operate in. They often benefit from being charismatic, powerful communicators with a strong sense of accountability, confidence, integrity, and a comfort with risk.
Responsibilities
The primary role of the executive team, or the top-level managers, is to look at the organization as a whole and derive broad strategic plans. Company policies, substantial financial investments, strategic alliances, discussions with the board, stakeholder management, and other top-level managerial tasks are often high-risk high return decision-making initiatives in nature. Top-level management roles are therefore often high stress and high influence roles within the organization.
1.2.2: Middle-Level Management
Middle management is the intermediate management level accountable to top management and responsible for leading lower level managers.
Learning Objective
Recognize the specific responsibilities and job functions often assigned to middle-level management professionals
Key Points
- Middle management is at the center of a hierarchical organization, subordinate to the senior management but above the lowest levels of operational staff.
- Middle managers are accountable to top management for their department’s function. They provide guidance to lower-level managers and inspire them to perform better.
- Middle-management functions generally revolve around enabling teams of workers to perform effectively and efficiently and reporting these performance indicators to upper management.
- Middle management may be reduced in organizations as a result of reorganization. Such changes can take the form of downsizing, “delayering,” and outsourcing.
Key Terms
- delayering
-
A planned reduction in the number of layers of a management hierarchy.
- mentoring
-
Acting as a teacher or guide; providing advice and direction for one less experienced.
Defining Middle Management
Most organizations have three management levels: first-level, middle-level, and top-level managers. These managers are classified according to a hierarchy of authority and perform different tasks. In many organizations, the number of managers in each level gives the organization a pyramid structure.
Middle management is the intermediate leadership level of a hierarchical organization, being subordinate to the senior management but above the lowest levels of operational staff. For example, operational supervisors may be considered middle management; they may also be categorized as non-management staff, depending upon the policy of the particular organization.
Four-tier pyramid: Workers, middle managers, senior managers, and executives
This figure illustrates the hierarchy of management within an IT department. Note that middle management is tasked with (1) their tier of technical skills, i.e. information management systems, as well as (2) communication of system efficacy upward to senior managers and (3) delegating tasks downward to workers.
Middle-Management Roles
Middle-level managers can include general managers, branch managers, and department managers. They are accountable to the top-level management for their department’s function, and they devote more time to organizational and directional functions than upper management. A middle manager’s role may emphasize:
- Executing organizational plans in conformance with the company’s policies and the objectives of the top management;
- Defining and discussing information and policies from top management to lower management;
- Most importantly, inspiring and providing guidance to lower-level managers to assist them in performance improvement and accomplishment of business objectives.
Middle managers may also communicate upward by offering suggestions and feedback to top managers. Because middle managers are more involved in the day-to-day workings of a company, they can provide valuable information to top managers that will help them improve the organization’s performance using a broader, more strategic view.
Middle-Management Functions
Middle managers’ roles may include several tasks depending on their department. Some of their functions are as follows:
- Designing and implementing effective group work and information systems
- Defining and monitoring group-level performance indicators
- Diagnosing and resolving problems within and among work groups
- Designing and implementing reward systems
- Supporting cooperative behavior
- Reporting performance statistics up the chain of command and, when applicable, recommending strategic changes
Because middle managers work with both top-level managers and first-level managers, middle managers tend to have excellent interpersonal skills relating to communication, motivation, and mentoring. Leadership skills are also important in delegating tasks to first-level managers.
Middle management may be reduced in organizations as a result of reorganization. Such changes include downsizing, ‘delayering’ (reducing the number of management levels), and outsourcing. The changes may occur in an effort to reduce costs (as middle management is commonly paid more than junior staff) or to make the organization flatter, which empowers employees, leaving the organization more innovative and flexible.
1.2.3: Frontline Management
Frontline management balances functional expertise with strong interpersonal skills to optimize specific operational processes.
Learning Objective
Recognize the core competencies and common responsibilities of frontline management
Key Points
- Management is sometimes viewed through a hierarchical frame, dividing management groups by frontline, middle, and upper levels.
- Separating management vertically allows different management groups to focus on different organizational scopes. Frontline managers are more zoomed in, whereas executives are more zoomed out.
- Frontline managers often balance a functional or technical understanding of those who report to them with the interpersonal skills of a manager.
- This form of leadership requires a strong ability to communicate, mentor, train, hire, organize, optimize processes, and prioritize.
One perspective that can be taken on management is a hierarchical view. Under this perspective, managers are responsible for different degrees of organizational scope, which can be visualized as having responsibility over a larger volume of processes and people. When illustrating this concept, the lower level managers are at the bottom of the chart (often shaped something like a pyramid) while the executives are at the top.
USCG Organization Chart
This is a simple example of an organizational chart, in this case for the U.S. Coast Guard. This is a particularly good example of hierarchical thinking, as the military functions with a high degree of hierarchical authority.
Why Differentiate Management
When looking at different levels of management from a vertical frame, the value of separating management this way essentially allows different amounts of scope. The expression ‘seeing the forest for the trees’ is a particularly useful anecdote for the purpose of the upper managerial teams.
The objective at the top of the hierarchy is to consider mid and long term strategy for the organization at large. Middle managers usually take a more specific aspect of this larger strategy, and ensure a more detailed implementation. Managers on the front line focus almost exclusively on effective execution, and are often much more short-term oriented. This allows each class of management to narrow their focus enough for the work to actually be manageable.
Front Line Management
At the front line, managers are often highly skilled and even functional specialists. A front line manager is best positioned when they focus on controlling and directing specific employees (think in terms of supervisors, team leaders, line managers, and project managers).
Skill Sets
A front line manager needs to have two distinctive skill sets: the interpersonal skills to manage people as well as the technical expertise to be among the front lines actively executing functional tasks. As a result, frontline managers are often highly valuable team members with the versatility to contribute in various ways.
Core skill sets for frontline managers can change depending on what function they are overseeing. However, on the interpersonal side they should be effective at:
- Communicating
- Observing and actively listening
- Giving and receiving feedback
- Prioritizing
- Aligning resources
- Organizing processes and tasks
Responsibilities
Responsibilities of a frontline manager will therefore come in two flavors. The first is the expertise required to do whatever it is they are managing. If we are talking about an accounting manager, they must be able to balance the books and understand enough of everyone’s specific function to fill the gaps. If it is a frontline manager on an automobile manufacturing facility, the manager should be aware of how to run most of the machines and how to assess the productivity of different positions (ideally from experience).
On the managerial side, frontline managers are often tasked with hiring, assessing performance, providing feedback, delegating functional tasks, identifying gaps, maximizing efficiency, scheduling, and aligning teams. As the primary point of contact for most employees, frontline managers must be careful listeners capable of understanding employee needs, removing blockers, and optimizing performance.
1.2.4: Functional vs. General Management
General managers focus on the entire business, while functional managers specialize in a particular unit or department.
Learning Objective
Differentiate between functional management and general management from a business perspective
Key Points
- General management focuses on the entire business as a whole (a top-down organizational view).
- A functional manager is a person who has management authority over an organizational unit—such as a department—within a business, company, or other organization. Under functional management, direct reports reside in the same department.
- A general manager is responsible for all areas and oversees all of the firm’s functions and day-to-day business operations. The general manager has to communicate with all departments to make sure the organization performs well.
- General management and functional management have many similarities; the primary difference is that a functional manager focuses on one facet of an organization, while the general manager must keep everything in view.
Key Terms
- delegating
-
Assigning a task to somebody, usually a subordinate.
- staffing
-
The practice of hiring and firing staff.
Functional management and general management represent two differing responsibility sets with an organization. Functional managers are most common in larger organizations with many moving parts, where different business functions are led by managers within those respective fields (i.e. marketing, finance, etc.). General management is more common in smaller, more versatile, environments where the general manager can actively engage in every facet of the business
Functional Management
Besides the heads of a firm’s product and/or geographic units, the company’s top management team typically consists of several functional heads (such as the chief financial officer, the chief operating officer, and the chief strategy officer). A functional manager is a person who has management authority over an organizational unit—such as a department—within a business, company, or other organization. Functional managers have ongoing responsibilities and are not usually directly affiliated with project teams, other than ensuring that goals and objectives are aligned with the organization’s overall strategy and vision.
Functional vs. general management
This chart shows a particular organizational hierarchy employing both general and functional management. Each functional manager is in control of a particular area of expertise—e.g., operations or policy and planning—and the general manager supervises all the functional managers.
General Management
General management focuses on the entire business as a whole. General management duties and responsibilities include formulating policies, managing daily operations, and planning the use of materials and human resources. However, general managers are too diverse and broad in scope to be classified in any one functional area of management or administration such as personnel, purchasing, or administrative services.
General managers include owners and managers who head small-business establishments with duties that are primarily managerial. Most commonly, the term general manager refers to any executive who has overall responsibility for managing both the revenue and cost elements of a company’s income statement. This means that a general manager usually oversees most or all of the firm’s marketing and sales functions, as well as the day-to-day operations of the business. Frequently, the general manager is responsible for effective planning, delegating, coordinating, staffing, organizing, and decision making to attain profitable results for an organization.
While both general and functional management involve similar skills (interpersonal skills, communication, multitasking, etc.), the critical difference is that a functional manager often “zooms in” to one particular aspect of a broader operational paradigm. The general manager must be more of a jack-of-all-trades, understanding enough about various different gears in the machine to ensure it is running properly.
McDonald’s offers an example of ways to understand both types of management. McDonald’s has functional managers at the corporate level who discuss advertising strategies, assess financials, discuss expansion, and so forth. Meanwhile, general managers run individual stores, focusing on the quality of service, operational efficiency, local tastes, etc. at their store.
1.2.5: Management in Different Types of Business: For-Profit, Non-Profit, and Mutual-Benefit
Managers must adjust their management style to fit the type of organization.
Learning Objective
Apply managerial styles within different business types and to accomplish different objectives
Key Points
- For-profit corporations are administered to earn profit to increase the wealth of their owners. Managers in for-profit organizations focus on the system and production.
- A non-profit organization must dedicate its operations to achieve a charitable or educational goal. A manager must ensure that the organization’s operations are solely dedicated to achieving that goal. A manager of such an organization is not focused on generating profit.
- Mutual-benefit corporations are usually formed for non-profit purposes, such as managing a condo association. The managers of such an organization are concerned about improvements in human and environmental well-being rather than maximizing profits for external shareholders.
- While all types of organizations are tasked with managing resources efficiently, for-profits and non-profits have differentiated management styles, in many instances, because of differences in motivation (e.g., non-profits must rely on fewer monetary rewards).
Key Terms
- mutual-benefit non-profit corporation
-
A type of nonprofit corporation chartered by a state government that exists to serve its members.
- non-profit
-
An organization that exists for reasons other than to make a profit, such as a charitable, educational, or service organization.
- for-profit
-
An organization engaged in the trade of goods, services, or both to customers with the goal of earning profit to increase the wealth of the business’s owners.
Management style is influenced by the goals and purpose of the organization, which are in large part established by the type of business being managed.
Management in For-Profit Organizations
A for-profit business is an organization engaged in the trade of goods, services, or both to customers with the goal of earning profit to increase the wealth of the business’s owners. Managers have to direct their efforts towards achieving that goal.
Management in Non-Profit Organizations
In contrast, a non-profit organization is legally prohibited from making a profit for owners. All income generated by a non-profit’s activities must be used to achieve the charitable or educational purpose defined in the organization’s bylaws. The managers of non-profits must always be aware of that charitable purpose and ensure that the organization’s operations conform to those purposes.
One component of nonprofit management that contrasts with the for-profit model is the existence of volunteer workers. Non-profits’ lack of free-flowing capital means they rarely have the resources to staff the organization sufficiently. In this scenario, managers often reach out to individuals passionate about the organization’s mission to contribute through monetary donations or volunteer hours. Managing volunteers is different than managing employees, as there is essentially no contract or agreement governing the relationship. This means managers must motivate by community-building and a sense of shared accomplishment.
Management in Mutual-Benefit Organizations
A mutual-benefit non-profit corporation can be non-profit or for profit. However, mutual benefit corporations are usually formed for nonprofit purposes like managing a condo association, a downtown business district, or a homeowners association. A mutual is therefore owned by its members and run for their benefit; it has no external shareholders to pay in the form of dividends, and as such does not usually seek to generate large profits or capital gains. Managers in mutual benefit organizations are, therefore, more concerned about improvements in human and environmental well-being than maximizing profits for external shareholders.
Comparing Management in For-Profit, Non-Profit, and Mutual-Benefit Organizations
The management of all three types of organizations (for-profit, non-profit, and mutual-benefit) may have similar responsibilities, such as drafting a budget and ensuring that the organization generates enough revenue to fulfill its operational needs. Management will need to plan, organize, direct and control the business’s activities. All three types require that management motivate employees.
Management processes
Management styles vary among types of organizations, but they still follow the main steps of planning, organizing, directing, and controlling.
However, the approach managers take will vary based on the type of organization. For example, a manager of a for-profit company may be able to motivate employees through bonuses for sales targets or profit sharing. This strategy cannot work for a non-profit or mutual-benefit corporation. In those cases, management must either appeal to the employees’ sense of duty to the mission of the non-profit or to the benefit they would receive from a well-run mutual-benefit corporation. While every organization poses different challenges, effective managers consider the type of organization and adjust their style to fit those circumstances.
1.3: Core Requirements of Successful Managers
1.3.1: The Importance of Accountability
Being accountable simply means being responsible for decisions made, actions taken, and assignments completed.
Learning Objective
Discuss the role accountability plays in driving managerial performance.
Key Points
- Accountability in business is critical, as the concept enhances the ethics of managers.
- Being accountable means standing by decisions, actions, and the overall well-being of projects.
- Accountability is also a management process that ensures employees answer to their superior for their actions and that supervisors behave responsibly as well.
- Accountability addresses both the organization’s expectation of the employee and the employee’s expectation of the organization.
- Accountable employees help to increase performance of business as a whole and to maintain a positive company culture, vision, and ethics.
- Accountability on a global scale, particularly in the case of NGOs, is complicated by the fact that different countries have varying legislative perspectives when it comes to accountability.
Key Terms
- accountability
-
Being responsible for one’s own work and answering for the repercussions of one’s own actions.
- paradigmatic
-
Pertaining to a given template, context or model.
Example
- The United States Department of Organization provides specific guidelines for managerial accountability. Managers are responsible for the quality and timeliness of program performance, for increasing productivity, for controlling costs and mitigating adverse aspects of agency operations, and for assuring that programs are managed with integrity and in compliance with applicable law.
Introduction
In organizations, accountability is a management control process in which responses are given for a person’s actions. These responses can be positive or negative. Depending on the response, the person might need to correct his or her error. In other words, accountability refers to individual responsibility for the work performed and answering to peers and superiors for performance.
Accountability is often used synonymously with responsibility, blameworthiness, and liability. As an aspect of governance, accountability has been central to discussions related to problems in the public, non-profit, and corporate sectors.
In leadership roles, accountability is the acknowledgment and assumption of responsibility for actions, products, decisions, and policies including the administration, governance, and implementation within the scope of the role or employee position. Accountability also encompasses the obligation to report, explain, and answer for resulting consequences. As leaders often make decisions with far-reaching consequences, accountability has a substantial ethical component.
Government accountability
Governing authorities have the obligation to report, explain, and answer for resulting consequences of their actions.
Accountability in Companies
Accountability also has a strong connection to expectations. Employees who do not meet the expectations of their supervisor are held accountable for their actions and must answer for their inability to do so.
Accountability is crucial to ensuring high performance within an organization. However, managers must clearly communicate their expectations to the person who is responsible for the specified action or task. Clear communication of expectations and well defined goals is a very effective tool to enhancing performance at every level of organization.
Without defined goals, employees lack a frame of reference for how they are performing in the workplace. They are unable to rely on guidelines or a structure that helps them achieve their performance goals. In many organizations, the management team and board of directors create goals for themselves and the general manager, while the general manager creates goals for department managers. This process is replicated throughout the organization, down to the department managers who create goals for entry-level employees.
Both subordinates and supervisors should have a clear idea of how their projects should be handled and delivered. A clear expectation level and the understanding that all employees are accountable for their performance boosts employee morale and productivity in the workplace. However, because different individuals in large organizations contribute in various ways to a company’s decisions and policies, it is often difficult to identify who should be accountable for the results.
Global Accountability
Recently, accountability has become an important topic in the discussion about the legitimacy of international institutions. Because there is no global, democratically elected body to which organizations must account, global organizations from all sectors’ bodies are often criticized as having large accountability gaps.
One emblematic problem in the global context is that of institutions such as the World Bank and the International Monetary Fund, which are founded and supported by wealthy nations and provide aid in the form of grants and loans to developing nations. The question persists as to whether these institutions should be accountable to their founders and investors or to the persons and nations they help.
In the debate over global justice and its distributional consequences, those in highly developed, heavily populated areas tend to advocate greater accountability to traditionally marginalized populations and developing nations. On the other hand, those who adopt a more nationalistic or provincial view deny the tenets of moral universalism; they argue that beneficiaries of global development initiatives have no substantive entitlement to call international institutions to account. The One World Trust Global Accountability Report, published in a first full cycle from 2006 to 2008, is one attempt to measure the capability of global organizations to be accountable to their stakeholders.
Examples
Example 1
The United States Department of Organization provides specific guidelines about accountability of managers. Managers are responsible for the quality and timeliness of program performance, increasing productivity, controlling costs and mitigating adverse aspects of agency operations, and assuring that programs are managed with integrity and in compliance with applicable law.
Example 2
The situation at Enron is another strong example of accountability – where the actions of a few unethical individuals caused great harm to the broader corporation and all stakeholders. In the case of Enron, the individuals involved in the negative actions are held accountable for the subsequent consequences, which reduces the likelihood similar things will happen again in the future.
1.3.2: The Importance of Leverage
Management roles are defined by the capacity to motivate and leverage human capital in the organization to achieve efficiency in operations.
Learning Objective
Describe how general managerial functions gain leverage in the workplace and how this relates to motivation
Key Points
- While there are different ways to view the concept of gaining leverage as a manager, the underlying principle should be one of synergy.
- Managers are responsible for planning, organizing, staffing, directing, monitoring, and motivating employees to create leverage in an operational system. Leverage primarily revolves around effective delegation and motivation.
- Effective managers must have a thorough understanding of each employee’s strengths and weaknesses, as well as their aspirations and motivators, to appropriately carry out essential tasks.
- Through combining delegation and motivation skills, managers effectively leverage human capital to achieve high levels of efficiency and employee satisfaction.
Key Terms
- Synergy
-
Benefits resulting from combining two different groups, people, objects, or processes.
- incentives
-
Ways to promote a desired action.
- leverage
-
A technique used to multiply gain or loss.
Why Leverage Matters
Management roles are defined by the capacity of the manager to motivate and leverage the human resources in the organization to achieve efficiency in operations. As a result, effective managers are capable of optimizing the time and effort of employees to attain the highest possible value. This optimization requires a thorough understanding of basic managerial functions and the way in which incentives can be applied according to motivational theories in the workplace.
Although there are different ways of understanding the concept of gaining leverage as a manager, the underlying principle should be one of synergy. The concept of synergy emphasizes that one additional employee’s output is greater than an arithmetic expectation. More simply put, synergy means that 1 + 1 > 2 (a common adage in business for synergy is 1 + 1 = 3). Leverage, therefore, is about getting more out of a system than is put in, resulting in a value-added proposition.
Design management
Teams can create solutions through integration, giving the manager the ability to solve problems more complex than one individual can handle.
Managerial Functions and Leverage
Managers are responsible for planning, organizing, staffing, directing, monitoring, and motivating employees through the use of highly developed decision-making and interpersonal skills.
Delegation
Planning, organizing, and staffing are the preliminary steps to carrying out a project, setting schedules and constructing a team with the appropriate skills to execute the project effectively. This half of the managerial responsibilities falls largely within the decision-making realm, which correlates to a manager’s ability to organize tasks and delegate these tasks effectively to gain leverage.
The concept of delegation enables managers to minimize their own time commitment to specific elements of a process, as well as improve quality and efficiency through the use of specialists (managers are typically generalists). Delegation therefore allows managers to optimize team structures and skill-set distributions to allow for synergy in operations. Effective managers are able to juggle a number of teams of specialists, empowering their autonomy and controlling the workflow in a way that aligns with organizational objectives. Delegation sounds easy on paper, but it requires a number of intrinsic skills such as communication, organization, multitasking, and the ability to “zoom out” and observe the bigger picture (and identify the critical components that enable it).
Motivation
Planning, organizing, and staffing are followed by the more interpersonal elements of management: directing, monitoring, and motivating the staff. At this point, managers face the challenging task of assessing the skills of employees, assigning relevant tasks, monitoring progress, and providing incentives to drive productivity. Managers must have a thorough understanding of each employee’s strengths and weaknesses, as well as aspirations and motivators, to appropriately carry out these tasks. As a result, understanding motivational theories is at the heart of effectively managing employees.
Motivating employees to leverage the human resources within an organization is central to a manager’s responsibilities; it is achieved by understanding what drives productivity. Generally, positive incentives far outweigh negative ones in leveraging employees. To gain leverage, managers must ascertain what opportunities will drive the highest level of productivity in their work groups.
By effectively combining this motivational understanding with the expectations and responsibilities of managing employees, managers effectively leverage human capital to achieve high levels of efficiency and employee satisfaction.
Example
A business with high liquid capital may invest in information structure to reduce the cost of production and increase automation. These changes will ultimately achieve a higher productivity.
1.3.3: The Importance of Performance Targets
Performance standards motivate employees and management to use their time efficiently by setting achievable objectives.
Learning Objective
Explain the importance of performance targets in the business framework and the approaches to communicating and achieving them
Key Points
- A key performance indicator (KPI) sets a performance standard for an organization, a business unit, or an employee.
- Goal setting means establishing what a person or an organization wants to achieve. Goals should be specific, measurable, achievable, realistic, and time-targeted (SMART).
- Motivation is the key component to effective goal setting. Organizations must consider performance targets within the context of creating motivated employees, who will in turn perform more effectively.
- Performance targets are particularly useful due to their quantitative nature, which allows the measurement of outcomes and assessment of operations.
Key Terms
- KPI
-
Key Performance Indicator; a tool to measure performance.
- motivation
-
Willingness to perform an action, especially a behavior; an incentive or reason for doing something.
Managerial effectiveness is often assessed on the ability to achieve performance targets. Three basic concepts are involved in communicating and achieving targets: key performance indicators, goal setting, and motivation.
Performance Indicators
A key performance indicator is a tool for performance measurement used by organizations. It is used to set a performance standard for an organization, a business unit, or an employee. It is also used to evaluate the overall success of the organization and the success of a specific activity in the organization.
Success can be defined as progress towards strategic or operational goals such as zero defects, percentage of customer satisfaction (or retention), profitability margins, etc. KPIs are usually understandable, meaningful, and measurable. For the employee to achieve them, objectives should be clear and simple to understand.
Goal Setting
Goal setting is an effective tool for progressive organizations, because it provides a sense of direction and purpose. Employees benefit greatly from understanding what is expected of them and how they can measure this success (or lack thereof). A clear concept of achievement leads to independent personal development, and goal setting can improve the organization’s performance. Challenging goals tend to result in higher performance than easy or no goals.
Goal setting means establishing what a person or an organization wants to achieve. In setting these objectives, managers must ensure the goals are both understandable and achievable to meet performance targets. The SMART model is a good framework to keep in mind when generating goals and objectives. It aims to design goals that are specific, measurable, achievable, realistic, and time-targeted (SMART).
SMART criteria
Each component of the SMART model describes an effective attribute of a performance objective. Objectives should be Specific, Measurable, Achievable, Relevant, and Time-bound.
The SMARTER framework expands upon this model by noting that objectives should be evaluated and reviewed consistently as well.
Motivation
Motivation elicits, controls, and sustains certain goal-directed behaviors. There are a number of approaches to motivation: physiological, behavioral, cognitive, and social. Motivated employees are also more quality oriented and more productive.
1.3.4: Financial Rewards for Managers
Career success and fulfillment hinge on effective human-resource management and empowering employees with the necessary tools and skills.
Learning Objective
Describe how managers and human resource professionals can effectively empower employees to achieve success and fulfillment
Key Points
- Understanding an employee’s needs and future objectives is critical in assigning them the responsibilities that align with their goals and that will serve to develop their skill set in a desired direction.
- When assigning tasks, managers must keep career success and development in mind. It is beneficial to plan and implement employee objectives based upon career aspirations and skills.
- Managers are also tasked with monitoring and reviewing employee outcomes with an eye for improvement opportunities. Performance monitoring allows for active skill development through constructive feedback.
- Managers may employ numerous tools in developing employees in a meaningful and fulfilling way to ensure their future success. These tools include case studies, consultation, mentoring, and technical assistance.
Key Terms
- empower
-
To give someone the strength and/or the means to accomplish something.
- Consultation
-
A conference for the exchange of information and advice.
From a human-resources framework, managers are largely responsible for the well-being of their employees in regards to providing opportunities for career development and personal fulfillment.
Understanding an employee’s needs and future objectives is critical in assigning them responsibilities that align with their goals and that will serve to develop their skill set in a desired direction. A manager is also a leader, and leadership is a complex facet of the managerial process. Leading employees in an empowering way and enabling career success and fulfillment are central tasks in improving employee outcomes and creating more value for the organization.
When assigning tasks, managers must keep career success and development in mind. A reasonable rule of thumb is the plan-implement-monitor-review model illustrated in the figure below. Planning (based on employee objectives) and implementing (based upon shared expertise) provide a framework to move the employee in the direction of success. Monitoring progress and reviewing it will allow the employee to remain meaningfully engaged, working towards the common goal of success while gaining experience and skills from managerial expertise.
Facilitating employee success
By employing these steps, a manager can help their employees be successful.
Combining this model for success with a working understanding of a given employee’s objectives and fulfillment needs helps to ensure that employees remain motivated and satisfied with their current roles. Empowering employees in a developmental direction and providing them with challenges that stretch their abilities are substantial motivators. These are important developmental tools companies can use to obtain the highest possible value from their human resource investments.
Strategies for Promoting Employee Success
Promoting career success for employees and managers involves the creation of developmental goals that build stronger skills and aim toward fulfillment. Goal creation is generally achieved using varying approaches and experiences. These may include coaching, higher education, mentoring, reflective supervision, technical training, and consultation. When to apply which particular approach is the primary responsibility of a manager, as is assessing employees’ progress and trajectory towards the completion of their personal career objectives. Following are a few tools managers may use to optimize returns on career development:
- Case Study Method – Case studies are an excellent way to drive employee experience in a realistic and meaningful way. These incorporate real-life situations that have happened in the past as a method for practicing decision making and assessing performance. Conclusions can then be applied by the employee or manager by assuming the role of the decision makers.
- Consultation – Consulting assesses employee abilities through observing performance, reflecting upon these observations, and suggesting methods for improvement. This process is an important responsibility of any manager.
- Mentoring – Mentoring is an excellent approach to enhance career success in which a manager matches two employees of different experience levels to learn from one another. Mentoring is usually accomplished by allowing an outside observer to evaluate and suggest improvements for newer employees who have had less time to develop in a particular role.
- Technical Assistance – Helping employees implement new technologies and acquire modern skill sets is a growing field in career development. Technical training is provided to enable employees to be more effective with newer methodologies, tools, and equipment. This approach can be of particularly high importance to career development for older demographics, who may have extensive experience in more traditional methods.
1.4: Additional Roles and Skills of Managers
1.4.1: Mintzberg’s Management Roles
Mintzberg defined ten management roles within three categories: interpersonal, informational, and decisional.
Learning Objective
Outline the ten management roles under their three categorical headings, as devised by McGill University professor Henry Mintzberg
Key Points
- Mintzberg characterizes management using three categories and ten roles, each of which exhibits critical managerial skill sets useful for business leaders in a variety of contexts.
- Interpersonal roles include: figurehead, leader, and liason.
- Informational roles include: mentor, disseminator, and spokesman.
- Decisional roles include: entrepreneur, disturbance handler, resource allocator, and negotiator.
- It is important to recognize that no single manager can be all things to all people at once. Good management requires assessing which role is appropriate when and determining if new talent is required to complement a skill set.
Key Terms
- Informational
-
Designed or able to impart information.
- decisional
-
Having the power or authority to make decisions.
Management is incorporated into every aspect of an organization and involves different roles and responsibilities. Henry Mintzberg (1973), the Cleghorn Professor of Management Studies at McGill University, defined ten management roles within three categories: interpersonal, informational, and decisional.
Each of the three categories embraces the different roles.
Interpersonal
- Figurehead: symbolic head; performs a number of routine duties of a legal or social nature.
- Leader: motivates and activates subordinates; performs staffing, training, and associated duties.
- Liaison: maintains a self-developed network of outside contacts and informers who provide favors and information.
Informational
- Mentor: seeks and receives a wide variety of special information (much of it current) to develop a thorough understanding of the organization and environment; emerges as the nerve center of internal and external information for the organization.
- Disseminator: transmits information received from outsiders or from other subordinates to members of the organization. Some information is factual; some involves interpretation and integration of diverse value positions of organizational influences. Disseminating what is of value, and how, is a critical informational role.
- Spokesman: transmits information (plans, policies, results, etc.) within and outside of the organization; serves as an expert on the organization’s industry.
Decisional
- Entrepreneur: searches the organization and its environment and initiates improvement projects to bring about change; supervises design of certain projects as well.
- Disturbance Handler: takes corrective action when the organization faces important, unexpected disturbances.
- Resource Allocator: allocates the organization’s resources; makes or approves of all significant organizational decisions.
- Negotiator: represents the organization at major negotiations.
A manager’s job is never static; it is always dynamic. At any given time, a manager may carry out some combination of these roles to varying degrees, from none of the time to 100 percent of the time. Throughout an individual’s working life, a person may hold various management positions that call upon different roles.
No one person can be all things to all people. While these ten roles are highly useful in framing organizational leadership, to expect one person to fill each role in a large organization is impractical. Instead, astute hiring managers will hire people with one or two specific roles in mind, thereby creating a team of managers capable of handling the wide variety of challenges in the business world today.
1.4.2: Managing Organizational Priorities
Agendas help to organize, prioritize, and facilitate discussion about a given set of points in an organizational pursuit.
Learning Objective
Explain the process of pursuing agendas, particularly from the perspective of change management, through the implementation of strategies and policies
Key Points
- An agenda, particularly within an organization or business, is loosely defined as an organized approach toward accomplishing a series of objectives or discussing a series of points.
- In business, an agenda is commonly brought to a meeting to ensure everyone understands what will be discussed.
- Public companies have an important relationship with agendas, as they are often tasked with keeping meeting minutes, a verbatim overview of what was discussed for public viewing and consideration.
- Skilled managers may both construct and implement an agenda in an organizational setting.
- Good managers can balance the various interests, operations, and technical skills of a given team to ensure the objectives and timelines set forward by the agenda are carried out.
Key Terms
- agenda
-
A temporally organized plan for matters for discussion or tasks to be carried out.
- project management
-
The discipline of organizing and handling resources (e.g., people) in such a way that an endeavor is completed within defined scope, quality, time, and cost constraints.
Defining Agendas
An agenda, particularly from the perspective of an organization or business, is loosely defined as a organized approach toward accomplishing a series of objectives or discussing a series of points. Agendas are most commonly used in a short-term setting, such as a meeting or a given week’s work plan; however, they can also be used as a longer-term strategic planning component.
Example of an agenda
An agenda sometimes combines a process flow and a checklist, where employees and management involved in a given operational process track progress and provide updates. The image above illustrates a Gantt chart, which uses a bar graph to show progress toward completion.
Business Application
In business, an agenda is commonly brought to a meeting to ensure everyone understands what will be discussed. Agendas should be distributed well before the meeting or discussion to ensure individuals attending have time to prepare their discussion points and to familiarize themselves with what others will be discussing. Reading the agenda in advance ensures that the overarching goals of a given meeting are clear and understood by all participants prior to the discussion.
Agendas may also be used as a means of highlighting current progress and projecting future progress. This type of agenda provides a timeline and tracking mechanisms for participants involved in a given project and may or may not require onsite meetings. Agendas showing project progress are often used by contractors and those in the field of project management.
Keeping Minutes
Agendas are also used broadly in the political and public domain, where meetings held by public institutions, NGOs, or political groups are approached and organized via a given agenda. Public companies have a more important relationship with agendas than private companies, as they are usually required to record meeting minutes. These minutes are essentially a verbatim record of what was discussed and are made available for public viewing and consideration. As these discussions are accessible by any and all stakeholders, the outline and preparation of a valid and relevant agenda is of particularly high importance.
Relevance to Management
Skilled managers may construct and implement an agenda in an organizational setting. Building an agenda requires broad familiarity with all critical components of a given department, project, or organizational objective. Creating a relevant agenda and distributing it to concerned parties in a timely fashion requires organizational ability, communication skills (including the ability to write clearly and concisely), and strategic know-how (knowing what to discuss and in what order). Managers must be skilled in controlling the pace, tone, and trajectory of discussions at meetings. Agendas are an excellent tool for organizing thoughts and leading discussion.
The pursuit of agendas requires a similar set of managerial skills. Ensuring follow-through and keeping employees on task and on schedule requires an ability to multitask—to oversee various aspects of a given operational area simultaneously. Good managers can balance the various interests, operations, and technical skills of a given team to ensure the objectives and timelines set forth in the agenda are carried out.
1.4.3: Technical Skills of Successful Managers
Successful managers must possess certain technical skills that assist them in optimizing managerial performance.
Learning Objective
Outline the four critical technical skills commonly utilized by successful managers and supervisors in optimizing organizational performance
Key Points
- Robert Katz identifies three critical skill sets for successful management professionals: technical skills, human skills, and conceptual skills.
- Of the three skill sets identified by Katz, technical skills are the broadest category and the most easily defined. A technical skill is defined as a learned capacity in just about any given field of work, study, or even play.
- Front-line managers represent a substantial portion of management; they rely on their technical skills daily.
- Office environments require a complex set of communicative, technological, and data-organization skills to optimize managerial performance.
Key Terms
- technical skill
-
The learned capacity or ability to carry out predetermined results using tools, machines, techniques, crafts, systems, and methods of organization.
- delegation
-
The act of committing a task to someone, especially a subordinate.
Defining Technical Skills
Robert Katz identifies three critical skill sets for successful management professionals: technical skills, human skills, and conceptual skills. While these three broad skill categories encompass a wide spectrum of capabilities, each category represents a useful bucket for these skills to fall into and describes the way in which these skills interact with management at various levels.
Of the three skill sets identified by Katz, technical skills are the broadest, most easily defined category. A technical skill is defined as a learned capacity in just about any given field of work, study, or even play. For example, the quarterback of a football team must know how to plant his feet and how to position his arm for accuracy and distance—both technical skills. A mechanic, meanwhile, needs to be able to deconstruct and reconstruct an engine, to employ various machinery (lifts, computer scanning equipment, etc.), and to install a muffler.
Front-Line Managers’ Technical Skills
Managers also need a broad range of technical know-how. All industries need management, and management must exist at various organizational levels. Front-line managers represent a substantial part of management who must use their technical skills daily. Front-line managers must communicate up the chain of command while still speaking the language of the workers who are executing the hands-on components of the industry. A technical skill for a front-line manager might include a working understanding of a piece of equipment: the manager must be able to coach the employee on its operation, as well as communicate to upper managers the basic functions of the machinery.
Technical Skills in Upper Management
In addition to front-line managers, managers in other corporate roles and at higher levels require critical technical skills. These can include office-based competencies such as typing, programming, website maintenance, writing, giving presentations, and using software such as Microsoft Office or Adobe. Office environments require a complex set of communicative, technological, and data-organization skills in order to optimize managerial performance.
Successful managers in an organization must therefore learn to use the technological assets at their disposal, collecting critical information and data to communicate upward for strategic planning. An example of information management is a mid-level manager in the automotive industry who is responsible for recognizing global marketing potential. This individual must be capable of realizing the legal, demographic, social, technological, and economic considerations of entering a market; the manager will use effective research and delegation skills and also consolidate the information into a useful presentation using technological and communicative skills.
Katz postulates that the higher up in the organization an individual rises, the more conceptual skills (and fewer technical skills) are necessary. Senior managers need fewer technical skills because strategic decision-making is inherently more conceptual; mid- and lower-level skills such as data collection, assessment, and discussion are all more technical. Even so, all disciplines of management require a broad range of skill sets for effective business processes to occur.
Example
A technical skill for a front-line manager might include a working understanding of a piece of equipment: the manager must be able to coach the employee on its operation, as well as communicate to upper managers the basic functions of the machinery.
1.4.4: Intellectual Skills of Successful Managers
Conceptual skills revolve around generating ideas through creative intuitions and a comprehensive understanding of a given context.
Learning Objective
Recognize the inherent value of encouraging cooperation among teams as a management professional
Key Points
- Conceptual skills of management represent one of the three skill sets identified by Robert Katz as critical to managerial success in an organization; the other two include technical skills and human skills.
- Conceptual thinking is difficult to define but could generally be considered as the ability to formulate ideas or mental abstractions in the mind.
- While all levels of management benefit from conceptual thinking, upper management spends the most time within this frame of mind.
- Conceptual skills include the ability to forecast, think innovatively, and combine seemingly disparate information; they also include the communicative capacity to discuss and debate in pursuit of a good strategy.
- Conceptual skills are important in empowering managers in all levels of an organization to observe the operations of an organization and frame them conceptually as an aspect of that organization’s strategy, objectives, or policies.
Key Term
- conceptual
-
Pertaining to the ability to apprehend or form an idea in the mind; the ability to create a mental abstraction.
Defining Conceptual Thinking
Conceptual skills represent one of the three skill sets identified by Robert Katz as critical to managerial success in an organization; the other two include technical skills and human skills. While each skill set is useful in different circumstances, conceptual skills tend to be most relevant in upper-level thinking and broad strategic situations (as opposed to lower-level and line management). As a result, conceptual skills are often viewed as critical success factors for upper managerial functions.
Conceptual thinking is difficult to define but could generally be considered as the ability to formulate ideas or mental abstractions in the mind. Conceptual skills primarily revolve around generating ideas, utilizing a combination of creative intuitions and a comprehensive understanding of a given context (i.e., incumbent’s industry, organizational mission and objectives, competitive dynamics, etc.). When combined with a variety of information, as well as a degree of creativity, conceptual thinking can result in new ideas, unique strategies, and differentiation.
Conceptual Skills in Upper Management
While all levels of management benefit from conceptual thinking, upper management spends the most time within this frame of mind (as opposed to thinking more technically—looking at and working with the detailed elements of a given operation or business process). Upper management is largely tasked with identifying and drafting a strategy for the broader operational and competitive approach of an organization.
This strategic planning includes generating organizational values, policies, mission statements, ethics, procedures, and objectives. Creating this complex mix of concepts to use as an organizational foundation requires a great number of conceptual skills—formulating concepts and predicting their effects in an organizational setting.
Conceptual Skills in Lower and Middle Management
While upper management may use the conceptual skill set most, middle managers and lower managers must also both understand and participate in the generation of company objectives and values. Of particular importance are the ability to communicate these critical concepts to subordinates and the ability to gather useful information to convey to upper management so that the concepts can evolve.
Collecting the results of conceptual thinking represent a feedback loop. Conceptual skills are important in empowering managers in all levels of an organization to observe the operations of an organization and frame them conceptually as an aspect of that organization’s strategy, objectives, and policies. Conceptual thinking allows for accurate and timely feedback and organizational adaptability.
1.4.5: Interpersonal Skills of Successful Managers
A manager must be both analytical and personable when it comes to managing time, resources, and personnel.
Learning Objective
Demonstrate the integral human skills that enable effective management and leadership capacity in the organizational frame
Key Points
- According to management theorist Robert Katz, management comprises three critical skill sets: technical skills, human skills, and conceptual skills.
- Human skills are broadly perceived as a combination of social, interpersonal, and leadership skills. These skills are increasingly important in business and relevant to all levels of management (lower, middle, and upper).
- Human skills differentiate a manager from a leader. A manager is simply manipulating resources to achieve a given objective, while a leader appeals to the human side of employees to generate creativity and motivation.
- Interpersonal skills and communication skills lie at the center of human-based managerial considerations. Good managers understand not only what they are trying to say but also the broader context and implications of saying it.
Key Terms
- empathy
-
The intellectual identification of the thoughts, feelings, or state of another person.
- interpersonal
-
Between two or more people.
According to management theorist Robert Katz, management comprises three critical skill sets: technical, human, and conceptual. The development of human skills—which could be perceived as a combination of social, interpersonal, and leadership skills—is central to the success of a manager.
Leadership
Over the years, the common definition of management has become less specific, as managerial functions can include staffing, directing, and reporting. Modern companies have fewer layers of management, as these companies instead rely on the delegation of responsibilities and authority to achieve goals. As a result, businesses often speak of “leading,” or guiding, people rather than giving instructions for every action. Leading people represents a central component of human skills.
Under this definition of management, leadership is actually a subcategory of management. Management characterizes the process of leading and directing all or part of an organization, often a business, through the deployment and manipulation of resources (human, financial, material, intellectual or intangible).
Human skills differentiate a manager from a leader. A manager is simply manipulating resources to achieve a given objective, while a leader appeals to the human side of employees to generate creativity and motivation.
These concepts of “manager” and “leader” can be distinguished within a team setting. A team leader who is unconcerned with team members’ needs or who has a personal agenda that is perceived to be more important than the team’s goals may be considered more of a manager than a leader, with the possible outcome of being estranged from team members. Conversely, team leaders who are admired and loyally followed are those who show concern for the team members as individuals with real needs and who place their team above their own personal agendas.
Communication
Realistically, most organizations need leaders who can view their teams analytically and objectively, evaluating inefficiencies and making unpopular choices. However, it is misleading to think that a manager has to be distant from or disliked by subordinates to execute these responsibilities. Creating a healthy environment conducive to development, criticism, and higher degrees of achievement simply requires strong human skills, particularly in the realm of communication.
The “four sides” communication model
This model provides a theoretical framework for the act of communicating, which lies at the heart of effective management. A sender communicating a message to a receiver is not simply transmitting factual information; self-image, context, charisma, and the relationship between the two people also impact the reception of the message.
Interpersonal skills and communication skills lie at the center of human-based managerial considerations. Good managers understand not only what they are trying to say but also the broader context and implications of saying it. Empathy, self-reflection, situational awareness, and charisma all play integral roles in communicating effectively and positively.
1.4.6: Experiential Learning for Managers
Experiential learning is the process of making meaning from direct experience.
Learning Objective
Define the process, role and implementation of experiential learning as it pertains to managerial skill set development
Key Points
- Experiential learning involves learning through reflection on direct actions and experiences; it is often contrasted with rote or didactic learning.
- Experiential learning does not require a teacher; instead, it relates to the process of making meaning based on individual experience.
- In this learning technique, a cycle of concrete experience, reflective observation, abstract conceptualization, and active experimentation generates realistic learning outcomes.
- Management requires a wide variety of skills that are largely intangible and not easily learned via textbooks, so experiential learning serves as a useful focal point for study.
Key Terms
- genuine
-
Belonging to, or proceeding from the original stock; native; hence, not counterfeit, spurious, false, or adulterated; authentic; real; natural; true; pure.
- Experiential
-
Of, related to, encountered in, or derived from an activity or event.
Defining Experiential Learning
Aristotle once said, “For the things we have to learn before we can do them, we learn by doing them.” Experiential learning is the process of making meaning from direct experience. The experience can be staged or left unstructured. David A. Kolb, an American educational theorist, helped to popularize the idea of experiential learning, drawing heavily on the work of John Dewey, Kurt Lewin, and Jean Piaget. Kolb’s work on experiential learning has contributed greatly to expanding the philosophy of experiential education.
The Process
Experiential learning involves learning through reflection on doing; it is often contrasted with rote or didactic learning. Experiential learning is related to—though not fully synonymous with—experiential education, action learning, adventure learning, free-choice learning, cooperative learning, and service learning.
Experiential learning focuses on the learning process for the individual (unlike experiential education, which focuses on the transaction between teachers and students). An example of experiential learning is going to the zoo and observing and interacting with the zoo environment, as opposed to reading about animals in a book. It is the difference between firsthand knowledge and hearing or reading about other people’s experiences.
Experiential learning does not require a teacher; instead, it draws solely upon the process of making meaning based on direct individual experience. According to Kolb, knowledge is continuously gained through both personal and environmental experiences. While gaining knowledge is an inherent process that occurs naturally, certain elements must be present for a genuine learning experience to occur. Kolb states that to gain genuine knowledge from an experience requires the following abilities:
- the learner must be willing to be actively involved in the experience
- the learner must be able to reflect on the experience
- the learner must possess and use analytic skills to conceptualize the experience
- the learner must possess decision-making and problem-solving skills in order to use the new ideas gained from the experience
Experiential learning
The process of experiential learning is cyclical, with no required starting or end point. Learning through experiences requires observation, conceptualization, and experimentation to engage the mind.
Experiential learning can be a highly effective way to learn new skills, new attitudes, or even entirely new ways of thinking. It engages the learner on a more personal level by addressing the needs and wants of the individual. It requires initiative and the ability to self-evaluate. To be truly effective, it should span goal-setting, experimenting and observing, reviewing, and planning future action.
Role in Business
Experiential learning plays an important role in business learning and managerial training. It is an integral component to many training programs, as it engages both the intellect and the senses much more comprehensively than lectures, books, or videos. For example, a computer simulation of change management can be a useful application of experiential learning, as can a board game simulating operational efficiency in a factory.
Business skills are inherently intangible, evading the capture of most textbooks without external materials to create context. Management spans a wide variety of personal capabilities and requires different skills based upon the specific role and context, making it a challenging subject to teach. Motivating others and navigating a complex organizational structure are not skills individuals can learn via textbooks; experiential learning in business may therefore serve a useful focal point for study.
This principle is particularly noticeable in business programs that utilize a cohort or group-based educational structure for students. These programs enable students to select leaders and actively practice delegation, communication, and multitasking as they work on projects. Case studies offer another effective method of capturing these complex managerial skill sets in a real-life setting. Cases place students in the shoes of managers and allow them to experience and apply the variety of skills and considerations necessary for success in a specific situation and industry.
Example
A computer simulation of change management can be a useful application of experiential learning, as can a board game simulating operational efficiency in a factory.
1.5: Current Challenges in Management
1.5.1: PESTEL: A Framework for Considering Challenges
The PESTEL framework highlights six critical factors for management to consider when approaching the general business environment.
Learning Objective
Assess opportunities and threats within the context of external factors using the PESTEL framework
Key Points
- Politics play a role in business, as there is a balance between free markets and systems of control.
- Economic factors are metrics which measure and assess the health of a given economic region or environment.
- Social factors, or demographic factors, assess the mentality of the individuals/consumers within a given market.
- Recognizing the potential technologies available to optimize internal efficiency, or to avoid letting a product or service become technologically obsolete, is a large challenge for management.
- Consumers and governments both penalize companies who have a large adverse affect on the environment (or reward those who have a positive impact).
- Understanding the varying laws and regulations in a given region of operation is critical to avoiding unnecessary legal costs.
Key Terms
- gross domestic product
-
A fiscal measure of an entire region’s economic production over a specific time frame.
- anti-trust
-
A set of laws that ensures no company dominates an industry (i.e. creates a monopoly).
- macro environment
-
As pertaining to the macro-environment, these factors are indicative of the entire business environment as a whole.
Organizations are faced with a variety of external factors that provide potential opportunities and threats for short-term and long-term success in any given environment. Encompassing a macro-environmental perspective, these factors can be effectively summarized with the acronym PESTEL.
PESTEL Analysis Diagram
This chart illustrates the PESTEL factors an organization faces.
PESTEL stands for the political, economic, social, technological, environmental, and legal influences a businesses encounters as it pursues its objectives. Analyzing the entirety of the macro-environment is an extensive and complex task, but understanding the framework of basic influences allows for an organized and strategic approach to isolating each opportunity or threat. It is common to conduct a PESTEL assessment before any serious decisions are made or any large projects undertaken. Understanding each of these influencing factors is the first step to addressing them properly.
Political
Politics play a role in business, as there is a balance between free markets and systems of control. Political factors affecting business specifically revolve around taxes, import and export tariffs, environmental and labor laws, potential subsidies, and the stability of a given operational region. As global economics now supersede domestic economics for many businesses, companies must consider a number of opportunities and threats when expanding into new regions or identifying optimal areas for production, sales, or corporate headquarters.
Economic
Economic factors are metrics that measure and assess the health of a given economic microcosm within the entire global economy. These factors incorporate exchange rates, gross domestic product (GDP), consumer purchasing indices, interest rates, inflation, and a number of other indicators of economic health or direction. These indicators are critical to management, as they can reveal a good time to borrow, as well as whether an economy will be friendly to an industry where businesses fluctuate substantially with GDP or spending power, etc.
Social
Social factors could loosely be defined as a demographic analysis, where specific groups display preferences or tendencies that can be leveraged or that can threaten a given incumbent. For example, in the United States, consumers are becoming more health-conscious. This trend affords the food industry opportunities to create products that meet this social desire; as a result, candy manufacturers may want want to consider diversification. The social movement of living “green” is another example of this kind of macro-environmental opportunity or potential threat.
Technological
Technology plays a larger and larger role each year in business and will continue to do so as research and development drive new innovations. Recognizing the potential technologies available to optimize internal efficiency is a powerful asset in management. Technology also presents a number of threats, as CD-player manufacturers and Blockbuster Video can attest. These companies were hurt by “disruptive innovations” such as the MP3 player and Netflix. Keeping pace with technology and adapting accordingly are important strategies to sidestep threats and embrace opportunities.
Environmental
The impact of business upon the environment is a growing concern, and companies must consider both the social and political segments of PESTEL in conjunction with environmental factors. Consumers and governments both penalize companies that adversely affect the environment. Governments levy enormous fines upon companies that pollute beyond given specifications, and consumers are more than willing to switch brands if they perceive that a business is ignoring its environmental responsibilities. The environment can also be a source of benefit to a company, such as running water for a hydro-power plant.
Legal
The last factor in PESTEL concerns legal elements, which can also be tied to the political framework. Legal issues such as affirmative action, patent infringements (a recent example being Apple vs. Samsung), antitrust laws (see Microsoft), health regulations, and safety regulations can all significantly affect a company that does not act responsibly. Understanding this legal landscape is important for businesses that want to avoid legal pitfalls and remain within the confines of established regulations.
1.5.2: The Challenge of Globalization
Globalization is the international integration of intercultural ideas, perspectives, products/services, culture, and technology.
Learning Objective
Assess the evolution of globalization in the business world and the challenges this has created
Key Points
- Globalization is an influential modern topic that highlights the growing interdependence between different countries worldwide, necessitating managers to appropriately incorporate this trend within their strategies.
- The speed of modern globalization is often attributed to technological developments in communication and transportation, tasking managers with appropriately leveraging these technologies internally.
- Multinational companies cumulatively employ nearly half of the world’s population, creating a need for managers with a strong international awareness.
- Managers must understand that some processes can be performed universally and internationally, while others must be done in a localized fashion to adhere to each specific region’s tastes and customs.
- Critics of globalization cite the way in which it motivates an international culture over established domestic ones, as well as the negative environmental effects that result from business expansion.
- Being mindful of the potential opportunities in a global economy, along with knowledge of how to localize and sidestep the negatives in an international marketplace, can capture large value for effective managers.
Key Terms
- Localizing
-
The act of altering a product or service to better acclimate to a local environment.
- Multinational Enterprises
-
Businesses that operate in more than one country.
- Intercultural
-
Representative of many different cultures simultaneously.
Example
- The 2008 financial collapse is a wonderful yet terrifying example of exactly what can go wrong and why corporate governance and ethics is of such importance to both a business and the society in which it operates. Leading up to the mortgage-backed security fallout of 2008, banks and investors began to move down the path of profitability over ethical concern. Banks eliminated certain rules and regulations (though the government did as well), allowing employees to sell mortgages that were unlikely to be repaid. Following this, upper management deemed it fit to package these risky securities into bundles and sell them as safe investments, in order to capture yet more value. Though only a simplified and small analysis of a complicated issue, this oversight in corporate management saw each echelon of leadership ignore the core responsibility of ensuring ethical standards in lieu of capital gains. Management is at fault for this oversight; it was a failure in corporate governance.
Globalization is a hot topic in the business world today, garnering enormous attention as imports and exports continue to rise with companies expanding across the global marketplace. Understanding the basic overview of the global economy underlines highly relevant managerial and business level applications that provide useful insights to modern-day managers.
In general terms, globalization is the international integration of intercultural ideas, perspectives, products/services, culture, and technology. This has resulted in large scale interdependence between countries, as specialization (arguably the root cause of globalization) allows for specific regions to leverage their natural resources and abilities to efficiently produce specific products/services with which to trade for another country’s specialization. This allows for a higher standard of living across the globe through higher efficiency, lower costs, better quality, and a more innovative and dynamic workforce.
Growth of Globalization
The ease of modern globalization is often attributed to rapid technological developments in transportation and communication. These form the central system of international exchange, allowing businesses to create meaningful relationships worldwide with minimal time investment and costs. Management is tasked with ensuring these resources are available to employees and properly leveraged to optimize the geographic reach of a business’s operations. This has led to the existence of many multinational enterprises (MNEs), who argue that survival in the newly globalized economy requires sourcing of raw materials, services, production, and labor.
From a managerial perspective, the global workplace implies an enormous amount of diversity management. Estimates of the world labor pool in 2005 noted that multinational companies employed a stunning 3 billion workers cumulatively, which is nearly half of the entire world population. As a manager, this means developing a globally aware perspective that lends itself well to the specific geographic needs, values, and customs in which the business operates. Developing this global skill set is a powerful managerial skill.
Challenges of Globalization
Managers should also be aware of the best way to approach global demographics from a business to consumer perspective, taking an international product or service and localizing it successfully. This is a significant challenge, necessitating consideration for different tastes and branding strategies during the implementation process. This chart illustrates the process of moving from an international product to a localized product step by step, making note of the element of production that can be universally applied compared to those that need a localized touch.
Globalization Process
This chart illustrates the complementary localizing and internationalizing responsibilities of a globalizing organization. The organization must place an international focus on product design, development, and QA to ensure its broad relevance while also localizing marketing to tailor its appeal to individual markets.
Managers must also be particularly aware of the current criticisms of a highly global society, particularly as it pertains to ethical and environmental considerations. A global economy is, in many ways, enforcing a global culture. This global culture is often criticized for taking the place of previously established domestic cultures (and motivating consumerism).
As a result, managers should carefully consider how to best localize products to retain cultural identity in the regions they operate. Environmental concerns are of large importance as well, as the constant energy utilization required for this interchange pollutes the environment and uses high quantities of valuable energy-creating resources. Minimizing the damage done to the environment, and offsetting it as best as possible through philanthropic giving, is not only a wise marketing move but also a critical ethical consideration.
Conclusion
Combining these points, the globalized society presents enormous opportunity for businesses. Intercultural marketplaces allow for differing demographics, larger market potential, a more diverse customer base (and therefore more diverse product offering) and a highly valuable human resource potential. On the other end of the bargain, managers are tasked with localizing products and services effectively in a way that minimizes the adverse cultural and environmental effects caused by this rapid global expansion to maintain an ethical operation.
1.5.3: The Challenge of Ethics and Governance
Ethics is at the core of corporate governance, and management must reflect accountability for their actions on a global community scale.
Learning Objective
Explain the role of management in setting strategic governance policies that conform to ethical and legal standards
Key Points
- Business itself cannot be ethical: only the managers and corporate strategists can implement ethics within the framework of the business strategy.
- Corporate ethics and shareholder desires for profitability are not always aligned, and it is the responsibility of executive management to ensure ethics supersede profitability.
- In its simplest form, corporate ethics is a legal matter. Abiding by laws protecting workers’ rights and appropriate compensation is a top priority for management.
- Corporate governance and ethics become more difficult with the indirect implications of particular practices, making it important to assess the way in which certain operations may adversely affect the community at large.
- Managers are the primary decision makers, and therefore must hold themselves accountable for the way in which a business operates and affects stakeholders, shareholders, employees, and the community at large.
Key Terms
- profitability
-
The capacity to generate capital.
- accountability
-
Individuals’ responsibility for their own work and acceptance of the repercussions of their actions.
Accountability
First and foremost in corporate governance is the strict adherence to business ethics on a professional level. The figure highlights the primary responsibilities of corporate managers; the upper left corner—accountability—is of particular significance. Understanding the rules and regulations in place, along with societal and personal expectations of ethical actions, is an absolutely critical and fundamental concern for all managers. The complexities and responsibilities of running a business and managing employees is the first priority for managers, as it holds the highest repercussions, both personal and fiscal, for all parties involved.
Economist Milton Friedman makes an insightful observation when he states “…the only entities who can have responsibilities are individuals…A business cannot have responsibilities.” Though this sounds like common sense, it is a fact often overlooked that the only parties capable of acting ethically are those in charge. Furthermore, ethics often contrasts with the basic premise of capitalism and the demands of shareholders: profitability. Therefore, the most difficult decisions in corporate governance—those at the ethical level—must be made through the more complex assessment of societal, corporate, and personal values.
Legal Foundations
At its most basic, ethical behavior can first be derived via the laws, rules, and regulations of the country in which a business operates. In the United States, workers are imbued with very specific rights regarding the risks they take, the hours they work, the breaks they deserve, and the benefits they are provided. Managers are the responsible parties in ensuring these are delivered to the employees in an equitable and legal way. When working over 40 hours a week, hourly employees are entitled to overtime pay. When working long shifts, employees are entitled to breaks. When working in dangerous conditions, employees are entitled to protective gear and training.
At their core, these regulations approach the fundamental dissonance alluded to above: profit-maximizing behavior as it contrasts with non-economic concerns. This dissonance is exacerbated by the global economy, which sees businesses operating within communities towards which they have no dependence or direct sensitivity. As a result, to ask the question, “What does this practice mean for the people in the area in which we operate?” is crucial in ensuring adherence to a community-first action plan.
The 2008 Financial Collapse
Complexities begin to arise as the the ethical implications within an economic system become more subtle. The 2008 financial collapse is a wonderful yet terrifying example of exactly what can go wrong and why corporate governance and ethics is of such importance to both a business and the society in which it operates. Leading up to the mortgage-backed security fallout of 2008, banks and investors began to prioritize profitability over ethics. Banks eliminated certain rules and regulations (though the government did as well), allowing employees to sell mortgages that were unlikely to be repaid. Following this, upper management deemed it fit to package these risky securities into bundles and sell them as safe investments (though they were in fact risky derivatives), in order to capture yet more value. Though this is only a simplified and small analysis of a complicated issue, it succinctly describes how corporate management saw each echelon of leadership ignore the core responsibility of ensuring ethical standards in lieu of capital gains. Management is at fault for this oversight; it was a failure in corporate governance.
The 2008 collapse is a powerful reminder that managers must keep in mind that their primary goal for shareholders is to maximize profits, while their primary goal to the community at large is to provide products without adverse effects on that community. Managing employees responsibly and putting their well-being first is an important step in this process, as is considering the wider implications of opening a new factory that pollutes or selling a highly unhealthy food product. Managers must be responsible because businesses as a whole cannot, and this responsibility towards integrity lies at the heart of management.
1.5.4: The Challenge of Diversity
Globalization demands a diverse workforce, and assimilating varying cultures, genders, ages, and dispositions is of high value.
Learning Objective
Explain the inherent value diversity generates in the competitive landscape and the challenges globalization presents
Key Points
- In the 1960s, the U.S. begin identifying trends in workplace diversity and addressed them with legislation. This evolved into a societal change that embraces diversity as both valuable and ethical.
- Diversity poses various challenges in communication, from differences in language to differences in culture. Understanding these cultural differences and what they may accidentally communicate is critical to effective communication.
- Majority cultures have a tendency to create a homogeneous environment, possibly limiting the potential diverse opinions can provide.
- Groupthink is a threat of which managers must be aware, particularly in meetings where dominant opinions steal most of the spotlight. Different perspectives are where the highest value can be captured in diverse environments.
- The ability to manage diversity, as well as refine actions to communicate accurately and intentionally, are valuable and necessary aspects of effective management.
Key Terms
- groupthink
-
Decision making that is often characterized by a high degree of conformity.
- Hegemony
-
The dominance of one social group over another.
The Value of Diversity
Globalization has resulted in enormous cross-cultural relationships, along with high percentages of domestic diversity. As globalization creates higher potential value in approaching diverse markets and demographics, understanding how to manage a diverse community internally is a priority for management.
Through creating a more international community and increasing variety among workforces, companies stand to benefit enormously from meaningful diversity in opinions and perspectives. This opportunity, if not properly utilized, becomes a threat as the competition grows more effective at leveraging diversity to create synergy. Therefore, staying competitive requires the creation of an effectively diverse workplace.
Ethnic diversity map
This map illustrates the level of diversity worldwide. Areas like sub-Saharan Africa tend to be more heterogenous than, for instance, states in Europe.
Stemming from various legislative initiatives in the 1960s, the concept of equality and a fair distribution of opportunity became a domestic focus in the United States. As the decades passed, this focus shifted from a legal requirement to a social expectation. Finally the idea of equality became a societal norm that recognizes both the importance and the value of diversity. This evolving outlook on a diverse workplace has ultimately resulted in the recognition and implementation of diversity management and intercultural understandings within organizations, creating stronger and more ethical business practices.
Challenges of Diversity
Despite this successful trajectory, challenges to diversity naturally occur as a result of communication (languages and values), majority hegemony, and groupthink.
Communication
Communication is at the heart of diversity management, but not necessarily for obvious reasons. Linguistic differences, while certainly a challenge, are tangible and straightforward. Learning new languages or translating materials is a reasonably effective approach to addressing these difficulties.
The more difficult challenge is the intangibles in communication that arise not from literal words but from cultural expectations. Different cultures not only speak different languages but adhere to different values, draw different assumptions, and define different actions as appropriate or inappropriate. Overlooking these cultural differences can result in miscommunication that may go unrecognized. For example, in China it is quite important to understand the concept of guanxi (face), particularly as it pertains to paying respect to guests or superiors. Overlooking these customs sends unintentional messages that can do irreversible damage.
Majority Hegemony
Majorities in businesses creating a homogeneous culture is also a substantial threat, as company culture is a direct product of the participants (employees). This can result in a business that creates and promotes a particular culture over other minority cultures, usually unintentionally as a result of numbers. This hegemony can create tension between different groups, ultimately resulting in the smaller groups moving towards the culture of the larger ones to close the dissonance, a practice called assimilation. Assimilation should be a shared responsibility, not simply assumed by those in the minority group.
Groupthink
The most substantial threat these communicative barriers and homogeneous tendencies create could loosely be defined as groupthink. Groupthink is when many people within the same organization begin to adopt similar perspectives, usually to simplify meetings and minimize discord. On the surface, this consensus sounds like a good thing. However, as the global economy requires businesses to understand varying perspectives, it also necessitates the cultivation of these diverse perspectives internally. Groupthink will often result in the assimilation of dissenting perspectives. The opportunity cost is precisely these different viewpoints. Without differences in perspective, companies have little room to expand into new demographics or innovate new solutions.
The Role of Management
Different cultural norms offer an interesting study in diversity management. Etiquette for receiving a business card in China requires accepting it with both hands and taking a full moment to read it. Following this, recipients place the card face up on the table in front of them during the meeting, referring to it when necessary. In the U.S., a strong handshake and self-introduction is a polite start to a meeting. Conversely, in Japan, it is appropriate to wait to be introduced and then bow following the greeting.
Managers must be not only aware of diversity in the workplace but also open-minded and empathetic to perspectives other than their own. Effective managers in diverse situations have a highly developed degree of cultural competence that empowers them to use careful observation skills to determine what gestures, phrases, customs and values would be most appropriate in a given circumstance. Adroit management must also work actively against groupthink, empowering everyone not only to speak but to be brave enough to go against the majority opinion. The goal for management is to ensure everyone is working to assimilate to everyone else in a balanced and effective manner that harvests differences rather than smoothing them over.t
Example
Different cultural norms offer an interesting study in diversity management. Etiquette for receiving a business card in China requires accepting it with both hands and taking a full moment to read it. Following this, recipients place the card face up on the table in front of them during the meeting, referring to it when necessary. In the U.S., a strong handshake and self-introduction is a polite start to a meeting. Conversely, in Japan, it is appropriate to wait to be introduced and then bow following the greeting.
1.5.5: The Challenge of Technology
Technology management is crucial in offsetting the risks of new technology while acquiring the operational benefits it provides.
Learning Objective
Recognize the opportunities and threats inherent in the technological landscape from a business perspective, and how to manage these
Key Points
- Managing new technology requires a thorough understanding of business technology management, which consists of four general parts.
- Managers must understand how to achieve internal efficiency by applying new technology to operational processes.
- Businesses should create strategic business units focused solely upon managing a company’s technological strategy.
- Keeping pace technologically requires extensive research and strategic analysis of the potential value of acquiring innovations.
- Implementing new technology requires retraining staff and eliminating the natural friction that results from making operational changes.
- Managers should be aware of the value in research, development, and forecasting future technological innovations to keep ahead of the competition.
Key Terms
- competitive advantage
-
Something that places a company or a person ahead of a competing business.
- evolves
-
Constantly changes and develops.
- Synergy
-
The concept that a whole can derive more value than the combination of the individual parts.
Technology and Management
Managing technology is an intrinsic part of managing a business, and effectively balancing resources to optimize efficiency is an important operational objective for all managers. Varying perspectives and strategies in technology management abound, all revolving around a few simple needs being filled to move the business towards a competitive advantage. The reason behind the prioritization of technology management is that new, disruptive technology constantly threatens to result in higher efficiency of competitors. On the other hand, effectively managed technology affords businesses the opportunity to outpace the competition (see figure below).
Disruptive technology
This graph underscores the concept that technology advancement is both a constant opportunity and a constant threat.
Business Technology Management (BTM)
From a general standpoint, business technology management focuses on understanding how technology fits into an organization’s processes and structure. It provides the opportunity to streamline operations and produce higher quantities of quality information. BTM can therefore be divided into four elements:
- Process: Businesses, whether they provide products or services, always have a set of processes that define how deliverables are generated. These processes need to be assessed for efficiency and effectiveness, particularly as they allow for optimal potential modern technology.
- Organization: Businesses are constructed under the assumption of synergy. Each of the strategic business units (SBUs), or facets of the organization, complements one another to create an ability greater than the sum of its parts. Establishing an information technology (IT) department within a business that will function with upper management and throughout the ranks allows for proper implementation of BTM.
- Information:Technology evolves exponentially, often changing faster than businesses can easily monitor. Performing appropriate research and analysis of the current technological environment generates the highest return on the (often expensive) investments demanded by keeping pace technologically.
- Implementation: After a business organization has a mature IT department that understands the company processes, the department can work with an understanding of the available technologies to upgrade and implement these innovations. Implementation includes training employees, monitoring the return on investment, maintaining new technology, and eliminating friction from the necessary operational changes. Change is always complicated, and businesses benefit greatly by adopting change-management techniques when integrating new technology.
Keeping up with Technological Progress
While managers are focused upon these four aspects of BTM, they must also keep future growth and technology scaling in mind. As innovation continues to demand a central role in businesses, research and development will continue to be critical to a healthy organization. Appropriately funding research initiatives that not only keep track of new innovation but actively seek out strategic solutions creatively offers companies the best chance of survival in the global marketplace.
Managers must also realize the importance of acquiring technology talent that can keep pace with the environment. This is important for two reasons:
- The potential to uncover new competitive advantages through internal development
- The capacity to forecast up-and-coming technologies to construct an investment road map that always keeps the competition a technological step behind
Developing new technologies in-house is particularly relevant to industries on the cutting edge (e.g., semiconductors, green energy initiatives, TVs, etc.), while forecasting is more critical for the users/consumers of these industries on the business level.
Combining BTM with research and development will ensure managers are properly equipped to tackle the challenges of modern-day innovations, leveraging these capabilities to differentiate from the competition and derive stronger margins. Managers across the board must be aware of the importance of these technological developments, as well as the operational challenges in researching and implementing them.
1.5.6: The Challenge of Competition
Managers must understand a company’s competitive advantage and build a strategy that takes into account the competitive landscape.
Learning Objective
Describe competitive strategies such as low cost, differentiation, and internal competition and the role of the external competitive landscape in developing them
Key Points
- Managers must know their business’s strengths and integrate them into the appropriate strategy to remain competitive.
- Low-cost strategies are when companies sell a product or service at the lowest possible price point to stay competitive.
- Differentiation is an alternative strategy to low cost in which companies fill a specific need that is not being filled or generate a brand image that increases their value-added proposition.
- High quality is the antithesis of low cost; instead of efficiency, the strategy focuses on effectiveness, creating the best possible product to capture market share.
- Companies also compete internally, either developing naturally competitive products or battling for funding based upon unit success.
- Managers must understand all of these competitive strategies and align them with their perceived strategic advantage to stay competitive.
Key Terms
- competitive advantage
-
Something that places a company or a person ahead of competing businesses.
- differentiation
-
A strategy focused on creating a distinct product for a specific population.
- Branding
-
A business’s ability to communicate a specific image, generally one that will entice consumers or add value.
Competitive Strategies
From a managerial perspective, competition generally falls into the external environment, though it can also take shape in the internal environment through rivalry between strategic business units (SBUs). For managers, understanding the external competitive landscape is a critical factor in assessing company strategies and benchmarking appropriately to ensure the competitiveness of the firm. Businesses that fail to keep pace with their rivals will eventually be overpowered and often forced to develop an exit strategy.
Avoiding the risks of competitive factors demands a strong understanding of operational efficiency (low cost), quality production, differentiation, and competitive advantage—or who you target and whether or not you have a cost or quality advantage (see figure below).
Cost vs. quality
Companies generally achieve either a cost or a quality advantage (very rarely, both). In panel A, both companies’ products have the same cost, but Company I’s product has higher value. In panel B, both companies’ products have the same value, but Company I’s product has lower cost. In panel C, Company I’s product has both higher value and lower cost (this is the rarest situation).
Low-Cost and Branding
The simplest perspective on competition is in industries where products are homogeneous (or very alike). In such a situation, companies compete directly. For example, bottled-water producers are directly involved in such a framework and thus adopt two basic competitive strategies: low-cost and branding.
Low-cost suppliers find ways to optimize their production and distribution to offer consumers the lowest possible price on one bottle of water. Low-cost suppliers often benefit largely from economies of scale. Branding, on the other hand, aims to convince the consumer that a higher price point is worth paying based upon the company’s name, reputation, or other distinguishing characteristic. For example, Dasani brand water costs more than generic store brand water, despite being essentially the same product. Commercials, aesthetic presentation, goodwill, and factors other than price may then influence a consumer’s purchasing decision.
Differentiation
Most products and services are not homogeneous, however, allowing incumbents in an industry to compete with one another by means of various competitive strategies. Differentiation is a competitive tactic wherein companies approach certain niche needs within an industry to capture a segment of the market share.
An example of differentiation might be cereal. There are hundreds of different kinds of cereals. The need being filled is sustenance: people need to eat. The producers of these cereals use differentiation to capture a share of the cereal market: some brands focus on their organic nature, others their sugary appeal, and still others on being “cool.” Branding plays an important role here as well, though assessing niche consumer needs and filling them is the principal focus.
Quality
Finally, there is the potential to compete externally based upon quality. Toyota makes both the Corolla and the Lexus, thereby targeting both ordinary automobile drivers and those in the luxury-car consumer bracket. Quality competitive strategies, while related to branding, provide a particular level of quality to capture a specific income or interest demographic. The opportunity cost of efficiency is associated with quality, which generally sees higher price points. Quality is therefore a strong antithesis to the low-cost strategy.
Internal Competition
Businesses also compete internally, an intrinsically complex issue. On the surface, internal competition involves either direct product substitutes or funding competition (among different business units). An example of internal competition is PepsiCo. Pepsi makes both colas and sports drinks, all of which sit on the shelf next to one another. When a customer sees the sports drink and chooses it over the cola, the cola has lost a sale to an internal competitor. Pepsi, however, did not lose a sale; it merely lost one segment of the business while gaining another.
With these points in mind, managers must thoroughly understand the products they are pitching and which strategy will help them avoid going toe-to-toe with other businesses with whom they cannot compete. Starting up a car manufacturing business to compete with Hyundai in the low-cost market is extremely difficult, as Hyundai has economies of scale in place that will almost always beat smaller competition on a low-cost strategy. This example illustrates an extremely important point in business: rely on strengths. Managers must understand their own competitive advantage (what they do better than the competition) to adopt the appropriate competitive strategy to gain market share and remain profitable.
1.6: Entrepreneurship
1.6.1: Introduction to Entrepreneurship
Entrepreneurship relates to the pursuit of risky and innovative business ventures to capture new opportunities.
Learning Objective
Define entrepreneurship within the context of standard activities and organizational support
Key Points
- Entrepreneurs are innovators, willing to take risks and generate new ideas to create unique and potentially profitable solutions to modern-day problems. Entrepreneurship is not so much a skill as a habitual state of mind.
- When entrepreneurship describes activities within a firm or large organization, it is referred to as intrapreneurship and may include corporate venturing, when large entities spin off organizations.
- Entrepreneurship employs what Schumpeter called the gale of creative destruction to replace wholly or partly inferior innovations across markets and industries. This destruction simultaneously creates new products and new business models.
- Entrepreneurship ranges in scale from solo projects (even involving the part-time entrepreneur) to major undertakings that create many job opportunities.
- Entrepreneurial activities can be incremental or disruptive. Incremental innovations are a number of small changes that transform process flows while disruptive innovations are entirely new approaches.
Key Terms
- entrepreneurship
-
The art or science of innovation and risk-taking for profit in business.
- entrepreneur
-
A person who organizes and operates a business venture and assumes much of the associated risk.
Entrepreneurs
Entrepreneurs are innovators, willing to take risks and generate new ideas to create unique and potentially profitable solutions to modern-day problems. This innovation may result in new organizations or revitalize mature organizations in response to a perceived opportunity. The most obvious form of entrepreneurship is starting a new business (referred as a startup company). In recent years, the term has been extended to include social and political forms of entrepreneurial activity, which are often referred to as social entrepreneurship.
Entrepreneurial activities differ substantially depending on the type of organization and creativity involved. Entrepreneurship ranges in scale from solo projects (that can even involve the entrepreneur working only part-time) to major undertakings that create many job opportunities. Many high-value entrepreneurial ventures seek venture capital or angel funding (seed money) to raise capital for building the business.
Fostering Entrepreneurship
When entrepreneurship describes activities within a firm or large organization, it is referred to as intrapreneurship and may include corporate venturing, in which large entities create spin-off organizations. Corporations have become aware of the potential advantages of internal entrepreneurial activity and often have innovation specialists in their organizations to develop creative solutions for complex problems. Google has become well known for allowing all employees to dedicate 20 percent of their time to any new project of their choosing. Entrepreneurs have become an integral part of business.
Many kinds of organizations now exist to support would-be entrepreneurs, including specialized government agencies, business incubators, science parks, and some non-governmental organizations. More recently, the term entrepreneurship has been extended to include elements unrelated to business formation activity. Concepts of entrepreneurship as a specific mindset have emerged, resulting in initiatives like social entrepreneurship, political entrepreneurship, and knowledge entrepreneurship.
Disruptive and Incremental
Joseph Schumpeter describes an entrepreneur as “a person who is willing and able to convert a new idea or invention into a successful innovation.” Entrepreneurship employs what Schumpeter called the gale of creative destruction. Schumpeter’s idea encompasses more than single innovations, as he further explains how innovative thinking allows for a sustainable and long-term economic growth for societies that enable it. Creating new goods and new ways of doing things allows for consistent job growth, more consumption, and more economic dynamism. Innovative thinking allows for so-called disruptive innovations—innovations which make leaps and bounds over existing products. One classic example is the iPhone.
Schumpeter’s view is not the only one, however. Incremental innovation is also largely recognized as a vital entrepreneurial pursuit. The idea of incremental innovation is simple: large change is a byproduct of small innovations compounded with others. Incremental innovators find ways to improve the efficiency of established processes to drive efficiency. An example of this kind of innovation is Toyota’s just-in-time inventory management. Incremental innovations are often process-based, while disruptive innovations are usually new goods or processes themselves.